Leeeacst wat yan B® ee Fea te : cn) . . tora)5t% Sma te ‘ 48 : Bite ad yeh Gaae i t ‘ 1” ae ese PCy tae TF rete, ranged Peay eee rder te : : Raita ot) Te Tosa see Geiss narnaicts SRN a ft fee Aedes te . Les RESTATED bE ive vas Sate WEA LCRA Ga) Se seLby Cla ; ne: . . boon eee wee ‘3.0, ‘ c ; ie . wear Joe k so gree pee pare : ta } ‘ re ore Gey Pe ae) Poles Te a ‘4 Me ee oo ’ ‘ Tego S a tt yd , : i Fi Fated vRA TAT MERE PE caethhe dese : é Lio aL, . iS vain Pee Fe ian Os CH ates oO Pas Me oe Nn a a tak u if ‘Ve ¥ a “I fw ty 110 ie oy 14 Proceedings of the Se ket oo) Linnean Society of New South Wales ssued 17th June, 1971 | Marine Biological Laboratory LIBRARY SEP { 71971 WOODS HOLE, MASS. | VOLUME 96 PART | No. 425 Registered for posting as a periodical—Category A. The Linnean Society of New South Wales Founded 1874. Incorporated 1884 ‘‘ For the cultivation and study of the science of Natural History — in all its branches ”’ OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1971-72 President L. A. 8S. Johnson, B.Sc. Vice-Presidents N. G. Stephenson, M.Se., Ph.D.; T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. ; and Miss Elizabeth C. Pope, M.Sc., C.M.Z.8., D. T. Anderson, D.Sc. Honorary Treasurer Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Se., F.L.S. Secretary Mrs. Ruth J. Inall Couneil D. T. Anderson, D.Sc. E. Shipp, Ph.D. R. K. Bamber N. G. Stephenson, M.Sc., Ph.D. Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. F. H. Talbot, M.Se., Ph.D., F.L.S. W. R. Browne, D.Sc., F.A.A. EK. LeG. Troughton, C.M.Z.S., F.R.Z.S8. Rk. C. Carolin, Ph.D., B.Sc., A.R.C.S. P. G. Valder, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D. H. G. Cogger, M.Sc., Ph.D. T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D. Mary M. Hindmarsh, B.Sc., Ph.D. Joyce W. Vickery, M.B.E., D.Sc., F.L.8. L. A. 8. Johnson, B.Sc. A. B. Walkom, D.Se. Elizabeth C. Pope, M.Sc., C.M.Z.S. G. P. Whitley, F.R.Z.S. Auditors W. Sinclair and Company, Chartered Accountants Iinnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology, University of Sydney K. Y. Cho, Ph.D. Innnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Vertebrate Palaeontology as from Ist June, 1970 Dr. A. Anne Warren (née Howie), B.Sc., Ph.D. (Cantab.) The Society’s Headquarters are in Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000, Australia ae Proceedings of the //.,.-\) Linnean Society uc” of New South Wales VOLUME 96 No. 425-428 CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, VOLUME 96 PART 1 (No. 425) (Issued 17th June 1971) CONTENTS Annual General Meeting : Report on the Affairs of the Society for the Year .. eh ne i Elections .. ee ae he ae te ge aie ae a Balance Sheets 5 CAROLIN, R. C. The Trichomes of the Goodeniaceae .. Si We 8 CoGGER, H. G. The Reptiles of Lord Howe Island. (Plates I-l1) .. 23 DARTNALL, A. J. Australian Sea Stars of the Genus Patiriella (Asteroidea, Asterinidae). (Plates t1-Iv) 1G Ae be i a barat oo) DARTNALL, A. J. A Sea Star of Genus Ctenodiscus from Tasmania deen a0) Hunt, G. 8S. The Genus Nunciella Roewer (Opiliones, Laniatores) with Description of a New Species from Kangaroo Island, South Australia 53 PHiuip, G. M., and JAcKson, J. H. Late Devonian Conodonts from the Luton Formation, Northern New South Wales. (Plates yv-v1) i 66 Erratum .. oe 2a ae ae aps Ai oe is ee 10 Notes and instructions for authors .. ne ie ane a Ae 78 PART 2 (No. 426) (Issued 15th September 1971) CONTENTS Bertus, A. L., and HAywarp, A. C. A Bacterial Leaf Spot of Zinnia in New South Wales. (Plates vul-vm1) ByRNES, N. A New Species of Lophopetalum (Celastraceae), a Genus New for Australia. (Plate Ix) MACLEAN, JOHN L. The Food and Feeding of Winter Whiting (Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard) in Moreton Bay TROUGHTON, ELLIs. The Early History and Relationships of the New Guinea Highland Dog (Canis hallstromt) WALKER, J. An Undescribed Species of Usiilago on Cyperus lucidus R.Br. in Australia. With comments on Robert Brown’s type collection of C. lucidus. (Plates X-xt1) WALKER, J., and Brertus, A. L. Shoot Blight of Hucalyptus spp. Caused by an Undescribed Species of Ramularia. (Plates x1-xm1) . Notes and instructions for authors Page 81 93 99 108 AG, PART 3 (No. 427) (Issued 10th December 1971) CONTENTS BROADBENT, P., FRASER, L. R., and WATERWORTH, Y. The Reaction of Seedlings of Citrus spp. and Related Genera to Phytophthora citrophthora DEBENHAM, MARGARET L. Australasian Ceratopogonidae (Diptera, Nematocera). Part XV: The Genus Alluaudomyia Kieffer in Australia and New Guinea JACOBS, S. Systematic Position of the Genera Triodia R.Br. and Plectrachne Henr. (Gramineae) Lams, K. P. Aphids of Papua and New Guinea: An Annotated Check List WILLIAMS, O. B. Phenology of Species Common to Three Semi-arid Grasslands Page 119 128 175 186 193 PART 4 (No. 428) (Issued 17th April, 1972) CONTENTS CHIPPENDALE, G. M. Check List of Northern Territory Plants Howikz, ANNE. A Brachyopid Labyrinthodont from the Lower Trias of Queensland. (Plates XIV-XV) Martin, A. R.H. The Depositional Environment of the Organic Deposits on the Foreshore at North Deewhy, New South Wales O'REILLY, SUZANNE Y. Petrology and Stratigraphy of the Brayton District, New South Wales. (Communicated by Dr. R. E. Wass) (Plate XVI) TAYLOR, G. Sedimentation in Jervis Bay. (Communicated by Dr. K. A. W. Crook) Abstract of Proceedings List of Members List of Plates List of New Species Index Notes and instructions for authors Page 207 268 278 282 297 307 313 321 321 322 331 = © ee A: a (a mae, res | ; ‘a a fi as ue wig ie %, andl) ' hy hee an Aa \ ‘ tah ~~ ~~ x = ~ * - \e taveait’ a? inet : re vbw dorha’ rts ro . ‘a " Atay aed ea rie a at ga WE ye | in va at wet pus, - : Te ov ate aii Peet, ee Ee : aie A {S- PF i a ee pa sats saint het na a, 4 aa i A ae ‘alee all : . a ihe AL j cps NG. ae sf) ats een 4 sie) want Yo as ar, i eee eh bei a é shh tii fsa is wi oniat te: Le ee Sie, ao, Shes t¢ Cogan Tey ey 7 OI ai ‘ : ew oan a eo: 2) ne ot ey ae fh * ‘ pe) f ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 3lst MARCH 1971 The Ninety-sixth Annual General Meeting was held in the Society’s Rooms, Science House, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, on Wednesday, 31st March 1971, at 7.30 p.m. Professor N. G. Stephenson, President, occupied the chair. The minutes of the Ninety-fourth Annual General Meeting (25th March 1970) were read and confirmed. REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR 1970 has seen a considerable number of changes and new developments in the Society’s affairs. So that members may be fully informed, this report will be more comprehensive than usual. Publication The Society’s Proceedings for 1969, Parts 2 and 3 were published on Ist June and 28th September, and for 1970, Parts 1 and 2 on 30th November and 23rd December 1970. In order to retain registration with bulk postage facilities, the Proceedings will be published four times a year from 1971 onwards; during March, June, September and December. Donations totalling $1,000 were made during the year towards the cost of publication of three papers; net cost involved in publishing the Proceedings was $4,873.60. Membership During the year 11 new members were admitted to the Society, 1 died, 10 resigned and 2 were removed from the list of members. The numerical strength of the Society at 1st March 1971 was: Ordinary Members, 272; Life Members, 30; Corresponding Member, 1; total, 303. The death of Dr. H. 8S. Halero Wardlaw in Singapore on 6th June 1970 is recorded with great regret. Dr. Wardlaw had been a member of the Society since 1911, a member of Council from December 1924 until March 1970, and President during 1929/30. Administrative Changes At the beginning of the year Council decided to appoint a full-time Secretary to the Society. Mrs. Ruth J. Inall took up her appointment on 18th May 1970, combining the duties of administrator and editor of the Proceedings. Papers Read Papers read at Ordinary General Meetings totalled 18. Addresses were given at the following meetings: March, Early History of Australian Zoology PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF NEw Sours Watezs, Vot. 96, Part 1 2 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR from earliest times up to and including Cook’s Voyages, by Mr. G. P. Whitley ; April, Carl Linnaeus, his personality, his relationships with contemporary botanists and students, his published works, his discovery of the sexual system of plant reproduction, and his introduction of the binomial system to scientific nomenclature by adapting the colloquial method of defining each material article by a general (generic) and a descriptive or qualifying (specific) word, by Dr. William T. Stearn; June, The biology of Nectaries, by Professor F. V. Mercer; September, The search for Australian fossil vertebrates, by Dr. A. Ritchie and Dr. Anne Howie; October, Cattle grazing and butterfly conservation—an exercise in conservation research in England, by Mr. O. B. Williams. Notes and exhibits were a feature of the November meeting. The Seventh Sir William Macleay Memorial Lecture was delivered by Sir Otto Frankel, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.A.A., on 27th July 1970, and was entitled “ Variation—the Essence of Life ”’. Archives The Society’s records have been sorted with the help of the Senior Archivist of the Archives Authority of New South Wales and a trained archivist from the Mitchell Library. The material is now housed, on permanent loan, at the Mitchell Library, where it will be catalogued, repaired and prepared for binding, and eventually available for reference to interested research workers. Science House and Future Developments Concerning the Society’s Activities The Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority first informed this Society in June 1970 that it was intended to resume the property known as Science House at an early date; subsequently notice of resumption was received in November allowing 21 days for appeal against this action. During a cordial two-hour discussion at the North Sydney offices of the Redevelopment Authority, a number of matters relating to the possible future of the Society were discussed. It was necessary to ascertain whether the Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority would give any encouragement to the Linnean Society or any other Learned Societies to remain in the eastern Rocks Area. In other words, we wished to determine whether or not the Authority, having threatened to destroy a Science Centre by resumption, would facilitate the redevelopment of a Science Centre in the area, either on the present or another site. In the meantime the Linnean Society had indeed been fortunate in that the Director of the Australian Museum, Dr. F. H. Talbot, had generously offered to provide, through the Australian Museum, accommodation for the Linnean Society and its Library in a new multi-storied block which is currently being planned as part of the Australian Museum complex of buildings. It is necessary for the Linnean Society to make a decision, without undue delay, as to whether it wishes to take advantage of this offer. Panbslitaais important to clarify the relationship between the Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority and the Government, as well as the nature of the assistance which might be sought from either of these bodies. The Authority is an independent body, set up by the Government to develop a particular area. It hopes to do so under financially advantageous terms, but any profits made from the redevelopment are apparently to be returned to the Government by being paid into Consolidated Revenue. Thus, the Linnean Society could approach the Authority on matters concerning the resumption, or the provision of an alternative site, or for concessions of one type or another, but it would need to approach the Government directly for financial support if the changing circumstances necessitated grants or loans to maintain or develop the established activities of the Society. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR 3 The Chairman of the Authority was extremely sympathetic to the Linnean Society’s needs, and to the problems posed by the resumption order. These needs were elaborated by the Secretary and Honorary Treasurer of the Linnean Society, who were fully conversant with the details and were able to provide a solid factual backing to our case. The primary question raised was, whether or not the Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority would provide, in the east Rocks Area under its control, a site for a scientific centre. The answer was that this question could be safely answered in the affirmative even now. ‘The project, of course, would be dependent on Government approval and support, but it could be phased so as to cause the Minimum inconvenience during change-over operations to the societies primarily concerned. One important point emerging from the discussion was that no land would be sold by the Authority after its resumption, but would be made available by the Authority under lease. No doubt the terms could be favourable if the cause for which the site would be developed was a worthy one and of public interest. On the assumption that a suitable site could be provided for a Science Centre, the question then arose as to the conditions under which it could be developed. The resumed land of the area is to be made available under lease from the Authority. Once a site is allocated, it seems that the occupant or occupants may make proposals for its development and execute an approved plan. Presumably there would be no objection to the provision in a multi-storied block of office space for sub-letting, comparable to the present tenancy arrangements in Science House. The next step in the proceedings is likely to be a direct discussion with the State Government. The Linnean Society, with the goodwill of the Sydney Cove Redevelopment Authority and the enthusiastic interest and support of other societies, may approach this period of negotiation with confidence. A survey was taken by a market research consultant to ascertain the support of other professional and scientific organizations. In view of the response, it was decided to hold a meeting of possible co-owners as soon as possible, with a view to establishing an organization to proceed with the planning for a Science Centre. The Secretary will also press for an early meeting with the Deputy Premier, Mr. Cutler. Inbrary Council, at its last meeting, discussed the implications of the last month’s developments, with particular reference to the Library. After considerable discussion, it was decided to retain the Library if at all possible, and that work on the Library proceed accordingly. It was agreed that a librarian would have to continue to be employed from now on (on a part-time basis). Library accessions from scientific institutions and societies on the exchange list from 1st March 1970 to 28th February 1971 amounted to 1,802. The total number of borrowings from the Library of books and periodicals by members and institutions for the year was 290. es Linnean Macleay Fellowship Dr. A. Anne Howie was appointed Linnean Macleay Fellow in Vertebrate Palaeontology for one year as from 1st June 1970. During the year Dr. Howie has been undertaking field trips to Rewan Station in Queensland which, among other material, yielded a skull of the first labyrinthodont found in that State. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctmety or New SoutH Wates, Vot. 96, Part 1 4 REPORT ON THE AFFAIRS OF THE SOCIETY FOR THE YEAR Linnean Macleay Lectureship in Microbiology Dr. K. Y. Cho, Linnean Macleay Lecturer in Microbiology, University of Sydney, as from 1st January 1969, reported as follows on his work for the year to December 1970. Previous work on the extremely halophilic bacteria was accepted for publication in the Journal of General Microbiology (62: 267-270, 1970). Purification and characterization of the exoprotease in these extreme halophiles are still in progress. The information obtained may be helpful in understanding the evolution of enzymes. Other projects under investigation are the use of spermine for preserving fine structure in bacteria and the effect. of vinea alkaloids on Azotobacter vinelandit. Annual Elections No nominations of other candidates having been received, the Chairman declared the following elections for the ensuing year to be duly made: President: L. A. 8S. Johnson, B.Se.- Members of Council: Barbara G. Briggs, Ph.D. ; H. G. Cogger, M.Sc., Ph.D. ; Elizabeth C. Pope, M.Sec., C.M.Z.S.; P. G. Valder, B.Se.Agr., Ph.D. (Camb.) ; T. G. Vallance, B.Sc., Ph.D.; G. P. Whitley, F.R.Z.A. Auditor: W. Sinclair & Co. The Chairman then installed Mr. L. A. 8. Johnson as President. A vote of thanks to the retiring President, Professor N. G. Stephenson, was moved from the Chair and carried by acclamation. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 5) SHEETS BALANCE popuowe SB “GPEL OV WOL|RIySTBoyy ‘LLG ‘YOre. UIST SPUBJUNODY [GN oy} Jepun posoys|soy “IOMSvoOL], “UOT, “WAVE “ “ ‘sjuRjUNOODW paloyIvyO ‘TL6T “Youn jo ABp YyyuooyiT siyy AoupAg ye poyed “OO Y WIVIONIS “AM (pss) “syooq oy} Aq poaso[astp se pue sn 0} UoArs SUOTPVUL|AXE OY} 0} Buyps000v “TA GT “Arent WSs 7v sv suepe [erouBUy af} JO WOL}LSOd a} YALOJ Sos A[JOOL100 JUNODY ong pusdxGp puw ourooUy SurAuvdutooor pur yeayg souvled dAOGR of} YU) Wopurdo aq) JO ote pue “TAGE ‘AtenrGaT WIVZ popue Tead oy} IOJ SHTVAA HEAOY MAN LO ATALIOOY NVANNI'T OY JO Spaoooxy pure Syoog ayy poyrpne savy aA LYOdHaY S wOLrianv OF TIE‘ T2s 969'T2$ OF TTS‘ Tas 9E9'TZS €O'LFL'S y SPUN Pe}e|NUItoo Vy 07 podiossmesy ‘Iwod OY} LOJSHOTdUnS gEg‘g JEFOISRT WUALANTAX TVLOT, 082°9T 99°64 av ‘se = i a hy ie “* guoydeaL 86 COOGEE S fates eae Verlaan Ge hie Lene queY aesnoHy sousiog gga‘e 90°S6'G rs ae oe ae ph UMTIVIOUOF, pue solIveg GEL‘¢g OF LTS‘Tz 4 ag ia 3 AWOONT TVLOL 969'1Z 09°GEG 1”. si = a * 9anyoorT AvarTovyL UIVIIIM Ig — ——— a STFS pee pee ea ae * sjurdey 099 Ow OTZL eas cap "+ snjding jo ervyg—esnoyy aouerog F042 00°S¢ ia aR ie oe chs a pa soo. S,aolajoy =— 8T026'T ur nak nore "Sole 8F0'S 10828 st AToUOTVAG pur BUM EZE G)TS ~ sydjaday TOUUL eryoaT AvopoVI WNT IS — PE 'SS1 B29 oP = oe ia = re SUOlZejMeselg — 9F'S8S a “* soyeg sjulidery 223°'T 00°LS a ee - as a zs 4 Sulpeay JOo1g 09°62 es ss ry % : “peatoooy SUSY SP GSO GS Si %: sa "6 a S}SO0) BULFUIIG—sbuipao001g 181° ¢ 00°008 2 is - FUSUTIOAOK) “MS N—Juvry 008 66° 186 is ¥ 2 “a re i sesvjsod bP 6G°ZSL'E At me he L461 “Aveniqoy, 98s Pepus LOVE LL96T ie ra a: ce a 5 SUOlVAOUSY 89O Gg vad oy} Loy eurooUL snfding—yunoooy sdrysaojrod — ee: a nhs big me uopuoT jo Ajafoog Weouury STZ LE PLS F podlooy 4Solojuy 6PE'F 16°66 a a = ca a "* damod pue 4yusrT F1 00°000°T se SUOIINGTUOD —00Z 12 '6F% nee " ArerqrT = 12 TORO Ts = LUV sp midis cinema) coal ia cai scene COLEUS ee 00°8z zy a i acs ce /- gOURAPY GP GO'TSL i ae e my: eg ie: 4 SUOTVIISNTTT O86 T9211 oe . 24 f fo ie SIVOLIV LPL G6 PIE iy: = cig of 5 9 “ sosuedxy [viouey LP OT 2 Ph 88 ISTE OVABIL 6L9'T OF TST ie Senn aes wah Py LING). GONE SMOT}ATIOSqnyg 00°S0T ve it a + ~ * a Sood JIPNY OT HWOONT WUNLIGNad Xe OLGT . OL6L IZ6l ‘AUVONUAAA W8Z GHANA UVAA AHL YOU LNNOOOV AYNLIGNAdXA GNV ANOONI 1¢°SLS‘e2rs 99T0ZT$ TG°S1E‘Es1$ 991 0ZIS €¢°L08‘TL 38 ae SLASSV ENGWAAD TVLOL O16‘OL €8°L9Z TL “e 4 - poprurry 0480 soupsg ‘Jo Auedwo), SulyUuRg [eLo1ouUl0D 00°0F puvA UO Ysei) OF SLUSSY GNGWHAD MZ) — —<—<$—$—<— : acts 99°ZST‘T . . D2 a “* BULpUTgyoog, eS TL 81'900°IT se = — SLassy GaxXIY TVLOL 946601 EL PPE 89 ny 16 os) "+ SeTouesUI4U0/) TPE 89 ———_ See STAUASHY, 00°0S2'°F - ‘¢ a me, a5v5}10], WO WeoT = GL 918'E¢ - * TLZ61 ‘Arenigey Uyge “eourled 699°0S SP OLP'IE - _ tA f- (qsorequy SSS, pITyy-0u0) 4800 = ¥—esnoH susTOS OLFTE GO'LFL'S 4 ve rea oy} Io sniding ppy 00°000‘9 o a [founoy Aquno) Aoupas 000'9 69°699'0¢ = ———— G1°889'6E oH si ‘ pivog osvuleiq: : 69°699'0L °° VUMOdY suLOU] WO1Z SioysuvLT, pur ermaLoer ‘Tae@M UWvejpILOdoMe\ 689‘LP 00'000‘0F AVIV] 4so9 JV¥—soInyueqed WRITIM IG Ul0ly poAredeI YunouUTy 00°4600E ae et 480/-) J¥—SUvOT YA[VOMUOUIULOS) 4600 OL6T ‘“WoIRN JST ‘oouvped SLOSSVY GaXLA SGNO 7 GalyIoWwaAy $ $ $ $ $ $ OL6T OL6T IZ6T ‘AUVONUAAA W387 LV SV LAGHS AONV IVA LNOAODDV TVaAaNaoD SHIVM HLOAOS MAN JO ALATIOOS NVANNTT__ —_—— ne SS ———— ae 96, Part 1 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society OF New SoutH Wats, VoL. BALANCE SHEETS is) ‘pepusewle SB ‘GEL JOV UOlyVIysIsoy ‘TAG ‘Wore UIGT SyuRJUNODDW oITGNg of} Jopun po19e4s1s0x ‘IeMsvoly, “UOP ‘AOVA ‘N “9M ‘syuejUNoVV peroyeyO ‘TL6L ‘Yore Jo Avp yyUeeyIA sty} AoupAg ye poyeq “OO ® UIVIONIS “M (‘p39) *syOOq 94} AQ PaSOpOSIP sv puv sN OF WOAIB SUOIWVUL[AKS OY} 0} SUIPIODOV ‘TL6T ‘ALeNIGaT UYSzS eV Sv SIIVe [VIOULUY YY JO UOT4ISOd oY} 4410] S}08 AT{D91I0N JUNODDY oINyIpuedxW puv oulOdUT SuLAULdUIODDN pue Jooyg voUYTeg aAOq¥ oY} ey} WoIUTdo oy} Jo ov pur ‘TLE ‘AIeNIgs, Y98Z Pepuse Iv9A oY} IOJ SHTVM HLOOG MAN JO ALAINOS NVANNIT 9} JO splooey puv syoog aq} poyipne savy oA LYOdaUd S WOLIdnAV 00°0S6‘T$ $96'1S 00°0S6‘T$ $96'T$ 9TL 7p Es ot pie Ss “* Teak oj JOJ AOUOIOVOC _ — te oe 5 snjdmg FG F8'oPr6 L ea te Gg ie; an te “* pedtoooy 4SetojU] F96'T DU ae £e - T9IN}O9IT JO kavjeg—Koupag jo AJISIOAIU OT6'T $ $ $ 0261 02461 IZ6l ‘AUVOAUAAA 487 GHANA UVAA AHL YOHX LNNOOOV AANLIGNAdXA GNV ANOONI ZG'F9G LES TL6L8$ GS F9S LES TL2‘LEs LO LBF'T ae peyury AoupAg jo Auvdwop sulyueg [erorourut0) G6 GS PIG LE = i L461 ‘Arveniqed Y48Z “oourleg TLE LE SLOSSY INaWiOaAD —_ Gs'9gs‘ce 988'98 92 ie ie “"IevaK ayy oy AousIoyeq ssayT See SS C248 00°00F‘s le ae ag =; - i esvd}IOF, UO UOT 06'S 00°06 2S pe a “pun Yyorvesey 00'008‘T pe “4809 F¥—p1vOg 008‘T SE 1Sc‘eL Ss JuNodV sWOdUT WoIJ Stajsuery, asuurerq pus oBwI0Mog ‘I9jVM ULjILodorjep[—soinjusqeqd 00'000‘Fz ABIpOVL G3'989'0E a “* 4809 J¥—SUvOT Y}[BVOMMOUIUIO,) 9890S WRITTIM JIG Aq peyzvenbeq yunouy SLOSSy GaxXi OLGL ‘Wore, IST ‘soured $ $ S€NOq GaLvyIaWwaANDY OL6L $ $ OL6L 1461 ‘AUVOUAAA W387 LV SV LAUGHS AONVIVA LNQODOV ADOTOIMALOVEA SGTVM HLONOS MAN AO ALHIDOS NVANNIT PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 tt BALANCE SHEETS ‘pepuemly sv ‘CFET JOY UORIysIDoy ‘TLL “YoIeW UST SJUBIUNOOOV [qn ey} Japun po1oj}stsoy ‘IomMsvely, ‘UOH “WAVE “N ‘9 ‘syuejUNODDW posoyIeyO ‘TL6L ‘YoIV JO Aep yyuseisLA sty} AoupAg ye poyeq “OO ® UIVIONIS “M (‘p3s) *syooq oy} AQ PposOpOSIP sv puv SN 0} TOAIZ SUOIZVULIAXS OY} 09 SULPIODIV ‘TL6T ‘ATCNIGS 98s 7¥ Sv SILVAe [vIouvUy ot[} JO UorzIsod 9yy YAIOJ $408 A[JO9IIOD YUNOODY oIMLIpUusdxXT puv swoouT SurAuvduODOK pur yooYg souLleg eAoqge oY} 4vy} Uolutdo ayy Jo o1v puv ‘TL6T ‘ArvnIqe7 448g pepuse IvoA oY} IOJ SHTVM HLOAOG MAN JO ALBION NVANNI'T OY} JO spiooey puve syoog ey} poyrpne savy oM LYOdaad S.WOLIGHV 69°326'9$ 169‘9$ 69°326'9$ 169'9$ 69°26L‘S EE 4unoooy [erou9 4) 07 poltejsuviy ‘ieoA 949 I0J snjding 26F‘¢ 00°008 a 7 qunoooy [eyidvg 09 JojsuvIy, Eg Caeeoe as 31°35! Et Gower (2835") Gower |. & 159°05' Fig. 1. Map of Lord Howe Island showing topography and principal localities. Contour lines are at 500 ft. intervals. thrown overboard and washed ashore. At least, it was immediately after this event that the islanders first noticed the presence of rats. Within a short time the numbers of these animals had reached plague proportions and were having a disastrous effect on the island’s principal industry, the harvesting and export PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER 25 of the seeds of the endemic palms (Howea spp.). For many years a bounty was offered on rats, but at the time of writing the number of rats is maintained at a relatively low level due to systematic poisoning by the Island Board. Prior to the introduction of the Black Rat, goats and pigs had been released and these were soon running wild (and still do) in the uninhabited parts of the island. Hindwood (1940) records that only three species of land birds were extinct when rats were first introduced in 1918, but by 1935 an additional five species had vanished. The extent to which rats were responsible for eliminating these birds is difficult to assess, but there seems little doubt that on the main island rats exterminated the endemic phasmid mentioned above. One of the aims of the author’s visit to Lord Howe Island was to determine whether the reptile fauna had been influenced significantly by any of those factors which had brought about changes in other animal groups. There was, in fact, some evidence to suggest that changes had occurred in the reptile population, for recent reports from the island suggested that lizards were only infrequently seen and difficult to collect on the main island, despite the fact that they were extremely common on Rabbit Island (Pl. 1, c). The latter is a low island, about 250 yards long and 118 feet high, lying within the lagoon less than half a mile off-shore. ( fo) MEAN TEMPERATURE 4 5 6 7 MEAN PRECIPITATION (inches) Fig. 2. Climatograph for Lord Howe Island based on data supplied by the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology. Months are indicated by numbers. No attempt has been made to treat the marine reptiles of Lord Howe Island. The sea-snake fauna of north-eastern Australia is a rich one, and although many species probably occur in the waters near Lord Howe Island, I can find no reliable records. Indeed, such records would probably bear little relationship to the number of forms occurring in the area. Similarly, all of the marine turtles known from the Great Barrier Reef probably frequent the waters of Lord Howe Island from time to time, but no PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoctmtTy or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 26 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND reliable records are available. However, it is interesting to note that turtles, presumably the Green Turtle (Chelonia mydas), once nested on Lord Howe Island and provided a valuable source of food for the early visitors and colonists. Phillip (1789) notes that turtles were nesting in abundance in March 1788. Turtles no longer breed on the island and they are only infrequently seen in the surrounding seas. The disappearance of the turtle colony is generally attributed to excessive hunting, but this explanation is not entirely satisfactory. Turtles have been hunted intensively at their breeding sites for many years in many places throughout the world, and although serious depletion of breeding populations has often resulted, the total extermination of such populations has not proved to be readily accomplished. However, it may be that the isolation of Lord Howe Island prevented recolonization after its relatively small breeding community was reduced to a level which was no longer viable. Situated some 10 nautical miles to the south of Lord Howe Island is Ball’s Pyramid, a large eroded remnant of volcanic rock (of the same series as the Mt. Lidgbird volcanics of Standard, 1963) which rises to a height of 1,811 feet. This rock is still virtually unexplored biologically and was first scaled in 1965 by a party from Sydney Rock Climbing Club. Two earlier attempts by the same club were unsuccessful, and although no biological collections were made, on the second of these trips photographic records of the ‘‘ extinct ’’ Lord Howe Island phasmid Dryococelus australis (McAlpine, 1966) and the scincid lizard Letolopisma lichenigera (see later discussion) were made. Another climbing party in February 1969 collected specimens of both Letolopisma lichenigera and Phyllodactylus guentheri. Ball’s Pyramid sits on a shallow platform which is separated from that of Lord Howe Island by depths of more than 2,000 feet and was probably never connected to Lord Howe Island (Standard, 1963). Basic climatological data for Lord Howe Island is presented in Fig. 2. THE PRESENT STATUS OF THE RECENT REPTILES RECORDED FROM Lorp Howe ISLAND The only recent terrestrial reptiles recorded from Lord Howe Island are three species of lizards, only one of which—the skink Leiolopisma lichenigera (O’Shaughnessy )—is believed tobeendemic. The other two species are the geckos Phyllodactylus guenthert Boulenger and Gehyra oceanica (Lesson). The former has been recorded only from Lord Howe Island, Norfolk Island and north- western Australia, whereas the latter is widely distributed throughout the south-west Pacific region. Loveridge (1934) considered that Leiolopisma lichenigera (O’Shaughnessy), described originally from Lord Howe Island, was conspecific with Leiolopisma cuprea (Gray). The latter species was described from a specimen without locality data. The validity of Loveridge’s action is discussed below. The first record of the gecko Gehyra oceanica from Lord Howe Island is that of Boulenger (1885), who listed a male specimen in the Vritisu Museum (Natural History) from ‘“‘ Lord Howe’s Island ’’, collected by J. Macgillivray. Subse- quently Etheridge (1889) and Ogilby (1889) included Gehyra oceanica in the fauna of Lord Howe Island, but apparently based their record solely on the Macgillivray specimen listed by Boulenger. The Australian Museum expedition about which Etheridge and Ogilby were writing did not obtain specimens of this species. Paramonov (1960), presumably following Etheridge and Ogilby, included Gehyra oceanica in the Lord Howe Island fauna, while Mitchell (1965) records this species from Lord Howe Island on the basis of Zietz’s (1920) record and ‘“ specimens in the Australian Museum collection”. Zietz appears to have based his record on the British Museum specimen recorded by Boulenger, while PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy or New SoutH WaAtxgsS, VoL. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER Dik there is one specimen (no. 4931) in the Australian Museum which is ostensibly a Gehyra oceanica from Lord Howe Island. However, as this specimen has apparently been lost (it was collected in the late 1800’s) and as its identification and locality are based on a series of ambiguous ditto marks below entries for Gehyra oceanica from Fiji and Phyllodactylus guentheri from Lord Howe Island, I regard the record as suspect. As Gehyra oceanica has been recorded from New Zealand (McCann, 1955) it might seem that excessive pains are being taken to discredit the Lord Howe Island record for this species. However, as it is normally common wherever it occurs, its apparent absence from Lord Howe Island appeared to the author to be sufficient grounds for questioning the validity of the earlier records. Maegillivray, as naturalist on the voyage of the Herald, spent some months on Lord Howe Island (Macgillivray, 1852-55). However, as there were, at the time of the Heraild’s voyage, three other islands known as ‘‘ Lord Howe Island ”’ in the area covered by the ship’s travels (one, now known as Ontong Java in the Solomon Islands; one, now known as Mopeha Island, in the Society Islands ; and one in the Santa Cruz Islands), a request was made to Miss A. G. C. Grandison of the Herpetology Department of the British Museum (Natural History) to examine the original record of Macgillivray’s specimen. Miss Grandison (in litt.) reports: ‘‘ In our collection are four specimens given as coming from (a) Fiji, (b) Lord Howe Island, (c) two specimens from Fiji; but reference to the original register indicates that the specimen (a) has no locality, was part of the Macgil- livray collection but was purchased from Cuming. The specimen (b) is given as having been collected on the Isle of Pines (New Caledonia) and not Lord Howe Island and only the two specimens (c) seem to be correct in their locality.” Hence the Macgillivray specimen, on which is based virtually all Lord Howe Island records of this species, did not in fact come from that island. For this reason it seems advisable to remove Gehyra oceanica from the list of the island’s fauna until such time as it is clearly shown to occur there. The remaining two Species are redescribed below; S.D. represents the standard deviation of the sample. Leiolopisma lichenigera (O’Shaughnessy) (Plate Om, c) Mocoa lichenigera O’Shaughnessy, 1874. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Series 4,13: 298. he : 55.8.16.12 Holotype—British Museum (Natural History) No. 1946.8.16.27 from Lord Howe Island, N.S.W. Description: Habitus moderate; mean adult snout-vent length 78 mm., maximum recorded snout-vent length 96 mm. (2, R26037) ; the snout-vent/axilla groin ratio averages 1-93 (range 1 - 74-2 -33, S.D.=0-079) ; limbs well-developed, the snout-vent/forelimb length ratio averages 3-90 (range 3 -50—4 -35,S.D.=0-192) while the snout-vent/hindlimb length ratio averages 2-99 (range 2-51-3-48, S.D.=0-167); the adpressed limbs fail to meet; snout moderately angular ; the head is distinctly swollen posteriorly due to the well-developed muscles in the quadrate region ; lower eyelid with an undivided transparent disc ; supra- nasals absent; nostril pierced in a partly divided nasal, a deep groove dividing the scale posterior to the nostril ; frontonasal much broader than long, in contact with the rostral anteriorly and the frontal posteriorly ; prefrontals widely to narrowly separated ; frontal only slightly longer than broad, about as long as frontoparietal and interparietal together, and in contact with the two anterior supraoculars ; 4 supraoculars, although in one specimen the two anterior supra- oculars on one side are partially fused ; 2 loreals; 7 supralabials, the 4th, 5th and 6th below the eye but totally or partially excluded from the granules of the lower eyelid by a series of small suboculars ; 5-6 infralabials ; either a single PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 28 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND pair of nuchals or no discernible nuchals (of 44 specimens examined for this character, 59°% possessed one pair of enlarged nuchal shields, 99% possessed an enlarged nuchal on one side only, and 32° lacked any enlarged nuchals) ; 36-46 scale rows around the middle of the body (mean 42-7, S.D.=1-96) ; 86-109 rows of scales along the mid-dorsal line from the parietals to the base of the tail (mean 99-4, S.D.=3-90) ; 15-21 lamellae under the fourth toe (mean 18-0, S.D.=1-05) ; ear-opening vertically elliptic, its long axis from 14—2 times the diameter of the transparent disc in the lower eyelid. Dorsal surface, including the head and limbs, rich bronzy brown to olive with scattered dark brown and light brown flecks and streaks. The darker flecks tend to disappear in adult animals, so that the lighter ones predominate in large individuals. A narrow (usually less than 1 scale in width) brown band on either side commencing at the nostril and extending below the canthus to the eye. This band continues behind the eye and extends above the ear and along the dorso-lateral surface of the body to the tail, and, where the latter is original, along the length of the tail. This dark dorso-lateral band may continue with equal intensity to the base of the tail, but in some specimens it becomes obscure posterior to a point about midway between snout and vent. The narrow dark dorso-lateral band is bordered below by a dark brown area, about 3—4 scales in width, in which scattered groups of light-coloured scales form irregular blotches or indistinct oblique bars that are directed downwards and backwards. This region fades into the light grey or brown ventro-lateral colour, which in turn merges with the cream ventral surface. The latter, in living specimens, is often brilliant orange or lemon-yellow. The throat, especially in the labial region, is usually flecked with light grey or brown. The upper labials, especially in juveniles, may be alternately barred with brown and light grey. In life, regenerated tails are usually bright orange. Distribution: Leiolopisma lichenigera is known only from Lord Howe Island and the small islands lying off-shore from it (including Ball’s Pyramid). Material Examined: Australian Museum, Sydney: R26033-R26037, R26057, R26074, R26086, Roach Islet, Lord Howe Island; R18919-R18920, R18979-R18983, R26048-R26052, Rabbit Island, Lord Howe Island; R2546, R7923-R7928, R10942-R10946, R26058-R26071, Lord Howe Island ; R29052—R29057, Ball’s Pyramid. Dominion Museum, Wellington: R599, Lord Howe Island ; R768, north end of Lord Howe Island. Museum of Com- parative Zoology, Harvard: 35459-62, 35464-69, 93776-80, Lord Howe Island. Remarks : Loveridge (1934) placed L. lichenigera in the synonymy of Leiolopisma cuprea (Gray), a species whose type locality is unknown. Boulenger (1887), who had the holotypes of both species before him, differentiated the two species on the following characters : lichenigera cuprea 4 supraoculars 3 supraoculars 42 mid-body scale rows 36 mid-body scale rows Loveridge had a series of 18 specimens, all of which possessed 4 supraoculars and with mid-body scale row counts ranging from 36-46 (mean 42). He suggested that the 3 supraoculars in the type of cuwprea were abnormal. As L. lichinigera is known only from Lord Howe Island, Loveridge’s action implied that the type of L. cuprea came from this locality. Of the 69 specimens listed above, only one shows any deviation from the four supraoculars count. This specimen (R18919) has only 3 supraoculars (caused by partial fusion of the first and second) on the right-hand side. The mid-body scale row count varies from 36 to 46, averaging 42-7. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or New SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER 29 In the scineid genus Hmoia, Brown (1953, 1954) made good use of the number of scale rows along the mid-dorsal line, from parietals to tail base, as a taxonomic character. This count was made on all of the above specimens of L. lichenigera and averaged 99-7 (range 85-109, S.D. of sample 3-93). The holotype of L. cuprea has three supraoculars on each side, 36 rows of scales around the middle of the body and about 84 rows of scales from the parietals to the base of the tail (damaged parietal region prevents a precise count). It is in poor condition, being so badly discoloured that the original colour and pattern are not discernible. The nostril is pierced in an otherwise immaculate nasal, whereas the nasal is strongly grooved or divided posteriorly in all specimens of ZL. lichenigera examined. A specimen (M.C.Z. 35460) cited by Loveridge (1934) is the only one found to possess a mid-body scale row count below 40. This specimen has only 36 rows of scales around the middle of the body, and has only 86 rows of scales from parietals to base of tail. Loveridge considered that this exceptional individual bridged the gap between cuprea and lichenigera, but as the latter is known only from the one island locality it seems unlikely that either geographic or individual variation could account for the differences between this species and the type specimen of cuprea. In view of this decision to regard LZ. cuprea and L. lichenigera as distinct Species, an attempt was made to determine with what other known species L. cwprea might be conspecific. In its colour, pattern, the undivided nasal and the shape and disposition of many head scales (notably the labials, loreals and preoculars) it appears to be most closely allied to the Leiolopismas of New Zealand. However, it differs from the described species in enough features (especially its supraocular count) to cast considerable doubt as to its relationships. It is therefore relegated to the status of a nomen dubium. Phyllodactylus guenthert (Boulenger) (Plate I, D) Phyllodactylus guenthert Boulenger, 1885. Cat. Iiz. Brit. Mus., 1: 90, pl. 7, fig. 3. Syntypes: (5), British Museum (Natural History) from Champion Bay, N.W. Australia (67.2.19.18), Lord Howe’s Island (56.7.7.19) and Norfolk Island (62.1.6.29-31). Description: Habitus stout ; mean adult snout-vent length 71-2 mm., maximum recorded snout-vent length 91 mm. (R29193); limbs well developed; the snout-vent/forelimb length ratio averages 3:09 (range 2-66-3-70, S.D.=0-223) while the snout-vent/hindlimb length ratio averages 2-47 (range 2-00-2-75, S.D.=0-155); the adpressed limbs overlap; head relatively deep; canthus rounded ; eye moderate, its diameter equal to about half the distance from eye to tip of snout; rostral rectangular, about twice as wide as deep and lacking a median crease ; nostril directed backwards and upwards and surrounded by the rostral, first labial and four other scales, the upper one or two of which are considerably enlarged ; several small scales between these enlarged ‘‘ supra- nasals ’; scales on top and sides of snout larger than dorsals; but the latter and the scales on the head are subequal; 7-9 supralabials; 7-9 infralabials ; the anterior labials are largest, and all are much larger than the adjacent scales ; mental roughly pentagonal, about the same size as adjacent infralabials ; anterior and lateral gular scales much larger than the remainder ; a distinct gular fold : ear-opening relatively small, its maximum diameter about two-thirds that of the eye; dorsal and lateral surfaces of body covered with small, juxtaposed conical scales which are much smaller than the flat, slightly-imbricate ventrals ; more than 10 scales in the middle of the back in a distance equal to the diameter of the eye; number of scale rows around middle of body averages 138-4 (range PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New Souru Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 30 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND 119-160, S.D.=7-87) ; limbs covered above with conical scales somewhat larger than those on the dorsum ; lower surfaces of hmbs with flat, slightly imbricate scales like those on the venter; digits moderately dilated, the distal expansion of the 4th toe greatest, its width about equal to the maximum diameter of the ear-opening ; each digit with a pair of enlarged pads or lamellae distally, between which is a large claw; the sheath from which each claw projects extends to the edge of the distal lamellae or beyond; there are 9-12 undivided lamellae under the 4th toe (mean 10-23, S.D.=0-815); these are largest basally and are separated from the enlarged distal lamellae by from 3-7 rows of small scales ; tail covered with flat, slightly imbricate scales which are arranged in fairly regular rings and are largest ventrally ; the latter are about twice as large as those on the upper surface of the tail, these latter more or less equaling in size the scales on the venter; preanal and femoral pores absent; males with a swollen post-cloacal region on each side of which is a cluster of 3-4 shghtly enlarged rounded tubercles. Colour and pattern extremely variable. Dorsal surface medium grey or brown (the latter colour predominates in preserved specimens) usually with a dull orange (in life) or light brown vertebral stripe which extends from the nape to the base of the tail. This stripe usually divides a series of irregular, transverse dark grey or dark brown bands which typically number six between the nape and the base of the tail. In many specimens this vertebral stripe may be indistinct or absent, while the irregular transverse bands may break up to such an extent that the dorsal surface is simply variegated with light and dark grey or brown. The head is often darker than the ground colour of the body. Labials mottled with light grey or brown ; sides and upper surfaces of the limbs are usually grey or brown mottled with irregular darker markings, while the ventral surface is grey or off-white, each individual scale peppered with dark grey. The scales of the throat are more richly peppered than those of the body. The tail, where original, is usually alternately banded with irregular dark and light grey or brown, the bands not extending on to the ventral surface ; in some specimens these bands break up to form irregular mottling. Regenerated tails are usually light brown or grey with scattered darker scales. Underside of tail light grey. No major differences in colour and pattern can be observed between the Lord Howe Island and Norfolk Island populations. However, there is a definite tendency for the darker transverse markings to be narrower and less conspicuous in the Norfolk Island specimens, while old adults from the latter locality tend to have the pattern reduced to scattered dark flecks or spots. The colour and pattern of hatchlings from Lord Howe Island appear to be fairly constant. The dorsal ground colour is rich olive-brown, speckled with darker brown; there is a light salmon-coloured patch over each eye and an indistinct, broken vertebral stripe of a rich salmon colour; the tail, especially distally, is rich salmon with dark brown bands ; the venter is white with numerous grey flecks ; the ventral surface of the tail is salmon-coloured. Distribution: Phyllodactylus guenthert is known from Norfolk Island and Lord Howe Island and their small off-shore islands. In his original description Boulenger lists one of the type series from ‘‘ Champion Bay, N.W. coast of Australia’, but this record appears to be in error. Champion Bay lies within the known range of Phyllodactylus marmoratus and is far removed from the other localities in which P. guentheri is known to occur. No specimens of the latter have subsequently been recorded from mainland Australia. However, Miss Grandison has checked the original data associated with this specimen and can find no reason for doubting its validity. Material Examined: Australian Museum, Sydney: 4930, R360, R3350, R4542, R5581, R5583-4, R8043, R26072-3, Lord Howe Island ; R26038-47, R26085, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER aul Roach Island, Lord Howe Island; R18984-6, R19298-9, R26053-6, Rabbit Island, Lord Howe Island; R4270-3, R4275-7, R4919, R5594, R19301, R29192-4, Norfolk Island; R29058-9, Ball’s Pyramid, Lord Howe Island. Dominion Museum, Wellington: R1-8, R780-2, Norfolk Island. Remarks: This species has long been in the synonymy of Phyllodactylus marmoratus, the only other Australian member of this genus (Loveridge, 1934). However, P. guenthert is very distinct from P. marmoratus, and can be readily distinguished from the latter : Phyllodactylus marmoratus : Width of distal expansion of 4th toe at least twice the maximum diameter of the ear-openings ; scales relatively large and regular ; 84-96 mid-body scale rows (mean of 21 specimens 90-4, S.D.=3-7); sheath of claw on each digit does not extend to edge of distal lamellae (Fig. 3). Fig. 3. Lateral and dorsal views of distal portions of the fourth toes of Phyllodactylus guenthert (upper) and P. marmoratus (lower). Phyllodactylus guenthert: Width of distal expansion of 4th toe about equal to the maximum diameter of the ear-opening ; scales on most parts of body small, tubercular ; 119-160 mid-body scale rows (mean 138-4); sheath of claw of each foot extends to edge of distal lamellae or beyond (Fig. 3). Unfortunately the material available for study is inadequate for an effective analysis of intraspecific variation in meristic and other characters. Nevertheless, there are indications that the populations on the different islands do differ from one another at a measurable level. For example, the two specimens from Ball’s Pyramid have much longer limbs than specimens from other localities. The data in Table 1 are presented, therefore, with a view to indicating the potential PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrpty or New SoutH Watzs, Vou. 96, Part 1 32 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND value of using these island populations for micro-evolutionary studies. There seems little doubt that barriers to dispersal and interchange between the various island populations are so effective that gene flow is reduced to a mere trickle, if any, and that each island population is evolving almost entirely independently of the others. TABLE | Mid-body Lamellae Snout-vent/ Snout-vent/ Snout-vent/ Scale under Axilla- Forelimb Hindlimb Rows Fourth Toe groin Ball’s Pyramid 145-147 9-11 2:29-2:47 2-58-2-71 2-00-2-28 (2) (146-0) (10-0) (2-38) (2:64) (2-14) Roach Island 135-160 9-10 2-16—-2-44 2:75-3:04 2:27-2:54 (10) (146-3) (9-9) (2-32) (2-89) (2-39) §8.D.=7:44 §$.D.=0-38 8.D.=0:064 S8.D.=0-102 S.D.=0-058 Rabbit Island 136-153 10-12 2:17-2:43 2-91-3-70 2-41-2-74 (9) (142-2) (11-0) (2:27) (3:27) (2-58) §8.D.=6-97 S.D.=0:059 S.D.=0-261 S.D.=0-233 Lord Howe Island”) 137-147 10 2-18—-2-90 2-66—3-17 2-28-2-58 (8) (139-2) (10-0) (2-40) (2-94) (2-44) 8.D.=4:-38 8.D.=0-225 S.D.=0-154 §.D.=0-088 Lord Howe Island‘) 135-160 9-12 2-16-2-90 2:58-3:70 2-00-2-74 (28) (143-7) (10-14) (2-33) (3-01) (2-45) §8.D.=6:79 S.D.=0-77 S.D.=0-:132 S.D.=0:255 §.D.=0-294 Norfolk Island 119-140 9-12 2:00-2:51 2-84-3-59 2-14-2-75 (24) (133-7) (10-24) (2-19) (3-13) (2-50) §8.D.=4:82 S8.D.=0:90 S.D.=0-111 S8.D.=0-181 S.D.=0-163 @) Main island only. ) Lord Howe Island and off-shore island specimens pooled. The relationship between P. guentheri and P. affinis (the latter known only from the New Hebrides) is obscure. Miss Grandison kindly examined the holotype of P. affinits and found numerous differences in scalation between the two species. It would therefore seem advisable to leave any assessment of these differences until additional specimens of P. affinis are available. LOCAL DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY The first report on the habits of the lizards of Lord Howe Island was that of Etheridge (1889), who stated of Phyllodactylus guentheri and Lygosoma lichenigera that they “‘...may be sought for on dry stony ground, under stones, amongst dry leaves, and at the feet of low scrubby trees.” Ogilby (1889) states simply that both species are “‘. . . much more abundant in the vicinity of the coast than on the more elevated districts inland.’? Etheridge (1889) goes on to say that ‘““...80 far as our researches enabled us to judge, Phyllodactylus guentheri is the commonest, the distribution of this and the other species (ZL. lichenigeruwm) being very general, not only on the main island, but also on Goat (=Rabbit) Island and the Admiralty Islets.” No further general account of the reptiles was given until that of Paramonov (1960), who, although he did not mention Etheridge’s paper, nevertheless quoted the latter precisely. However, in doing so he. made the error of applying Etheridge’s comments on habitat to all three species, instead of the two species to which Etheridge originally and correctly referred. For reasons outlined above the inclusion of Gehyra oceanica was probably in error. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER 33 It is significant that despite the fact that no zoologist had previously visited Lord Howe Island for the express purpose of collecting reptiles, small collections have nevertheless been obtained apparently with little difficulty. The Australian Museum possesses several small series of specimens collected at various times between 1888 and 1963. Except for the series collected in 1962-63 from Rabbit Island, all earlier specimens have the locality of ‘‘ Lord Howe Island’. As the prime reason for the visit of an Australian Museum party in 1909 was to obtain bird specimens from the Admiralty Islets for a Museum exhibit, it seems likely that at least some of our lizards were taken from those islets and not from the main island. Loveridge (1934) states that aseries of specimens of L. cuprea (=L. lichenigera) in the Museum of Comparative Zoology was collected by Mr. R. Baxter in 1932. These specimens were taken when they fell into a drum set into the ground and baited with fish oil, and K. R. Hindwood (in litt.) reports that Baxter informed him that these specimens were taken on Rabbit Island after unsuccessful attempts to collect lizards on the main island. A specimen (R768) of L. lichenigera in the Dominion Museum, Wellington, collected by W. R. B. Oliver in 1913, has the notation ‘‘ north end Lord Howe Island ”’. From this scant evidence there seems little doubt that both species— Phyllodactylus guenthert and Letolopisma lichenigera—were once common and easily procured on the main island, as well as on the off-shore islands, and it was with this background information that the writer set out to assess the present distribution of reptiles on Lord Howe Island. The results were disappointing. Despite a search of all major available habitats, especially those in which earlier workers had reported finding lizards, not a single specimen was obtained. Although some habitats, such as the leafy heads of the Howea palms, were virtually inaccessible, all terrestrial habitats were examined. Three major saxicoline environments are present on the main island : (1) Covering the greater portion of the island are outcrops of basaltic volcanic rocks, in the form of either solid rock faces or boulder slopes. All of the major topographic features are made up of this rock, as are all of the off-shore islands. (2) Recent sediments, which form a stratified ‘“‘ sandstone’, outcrop in several places, the most prominent being above Ned’s Beach on the eastern side of the island. (3) The only other rock consists of large clumps of old ‘ beach rock ”’, which may be loosely or firmly embedded in soil, and which outcrop in several places on the lower parts of the island. The first of these three rocky environments corresponds with the ‘“‘ North Ridge Voleanics ’’ and ‘‘ Mt. Lidgbird Voleanics ”’ of Standard’s (1963) geological map of the island. The second corresponds with his ‘‘ Ned’s Beach Calcarenite ” and the third with his ‘“‘ Alluvium, including beach and talus deposits’’. The age and distribution of each of these are shown on Standard’s map. On the main island a search of the basalt rock faces and slopes failed to reveal a single lizard. Collecting efforts were concentrated at four points : (1) The boulder slopes below Mt. Lidgbird, immediately behind Salmon Beach. (2) The slopes of Dawson Ridge, between Old Settlement Bay and North Bay. (3) The lower, eastern slopes of Malabar. (4) The northern slopes of Intermediate Hill. Also, although the search was far from exhaustive, a search was nonetheless carried out along the track from Salmon Beach to the summit of Mount Gower PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WaAtLEs, Vou. Part 96, 1 34 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND and in the ‘‘ moss forest ’? which occupies several hundred acres on the summit of that mountain. All of these searches failed to find any trace of lizards, either among rocks or in or under fallen logs. No sloughs were found ; nor eggs or egg shells. Following reported sightings of lizards, the area behind Ned’s Beach was also searched carefully, especially in the stratified ‘‘ sandstone ’’ which makes up much of the headland (Stevens Point) between Ned’s Beach and Middle Beach. No lizards were found. During the time that this work was being carried out, a cyclone prevented the author from reaching any of the off-shore islands. As soon as the weather cleared a visit was made to Rabbit Island, where both Phyllodactylus guentheri and Leiolopisma lichenigera were found commonly under loose basalt boulders. Small slopes of these loose boulders occurred mainly on the leeward (northern) side of the island, especially around the bases of low, windswept trees. On the windward side of the island few loose boulders occurred but an examination of large crevices in outcrops of rock revealed traces (a mummified body and sloughed skins) of both species. As the island is so small, and as the Australian Museum already possessed samples from Rabbit Island, only a small number of specimens were actually taken. Although unlikely, it is nevertheless quite possible that the removal of large numbers of lizards could have a decimating effect on the total population. Of the lizards found, the ratio of L. lichenigera to P. guentheri was 4:1. Subsequently, attempts were made to land on two of the other off-shore islands—Mutton Bird Island, off the eastern shore, and Roach Island, the largest of the Admiralty group of islands off the southern point of the main island. Both of these islands are surrounded by rocky shores, and although heavy seas prevented a landing on Mutton Bird Island, the author was put ashore on Admiralty Islet, where collecting was carried out for about an hour before rising seas forced a hurried and wet return to the boat. During this hour 19 specimens were collected among large basalt boulders, in the ratio of 11 P. guentheri to 8 L. lichenigera. Both species were evidently extremely abundant. It should be stressed that the lizards taken on Rabbit Island and on Admiralty Islet were found in a habitat which had proved completely barren of lizards on the main island. About half-way through the author’s visit to Lord Howe Island he was presented with a live specimen of L. lichenigera by Mr. R. Payton, whose cat had apparently caught the lizard in the vicinity of the Payton house. The latter is situated behind Lagoon Beach, just below Signal Point. In the following week the cat produced three more specimens of the same species. The area in which these lizards were taken consists of dense Howea palm forest with leaf- litter and scattered clumps of weathered ‘“‘ sandstone ’’ embedded in the soil. The nature and origin of this rock is discussed below. In a similar area, at the base of Malabar, the author searched among similar ‘‘ sandstone ”’ boulders and found a specimen of P. guentheri which entered one of the numerous finger-sized tunnels in a massive clump of the rock. The gecko could not be extricated from the rock but in some of the shallow holes clusters of eggs were found, some of which contained advanced living embryos of P. guenthert. Subsequently, a sledge-hammer and crowbar were used unsuccessfully in an attempt to break up some of these sandstone clumps in the areas below Malabar and behind Lagoon Beach. Only the thinner surface layers of the stone could be broken up, leaving intact the massive bases, with their network of tunnels. No adult lizards were obtained but some hundreds of old and new gecko eggs were found, some with well-developed living embryos. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 H. G. COGGER 35 This habitat warrants description in greater detail, as it is apparently the only habitat on the main island in which both species of lizards now occur. It consists of large irregularly-shaped boulders of honeycombed ‘‘ rock”? which may be either superficially or deeply embedded in the soil (Pl. 1, D). These boulders almost invariably outcrop in dense Howea palm forest, in which there is a thick mat of humus formed by palm and other leaf-litter. The matrix of the boulders consists of a “‘ sandstone’ or conglomerate sediment, and there seems little doubt that the outcrops are of weathered ‘‘ beach rock ”’, a common formation of many coral reefs and the structure and origin of which is discussed fully by Wiens (1962). According to Standard (1963) these outcrops represent recent beach alluvium. Of special significance in the ecology of the lizards on Lord Howe Island is the mode of weathering of these alluvial boulders. Their surfaces are deeply pitted with small holes, averaging only 1-2 cm. in diameter. These are the entrances to tunnels which enter deeply into the matrix of the rock. Such tunnels may coalesce to form larger chambers, as shown in Pl. U, A, B. The origin of these tunnels is uncertain, but they so closely resemble in structure the ‘“‘ subaerial solution potholes ”’ observed in some limestones (Cotton, 1948, p. 448) that their origin might well be identical, especially as buried portions of these boulders are as strongly weathered as the exposed portions. Lord Howe Island has a relatively high average annual rainfall (68 inches) and the deeply-shaded floor of the Howea forests is normally quite moist. The exposed surfaces of the outcropping beach rock are covered with a layer of algae which imparts a distinctive green colour to the rock. The role of the weathered tunnels or potholes in the ecology of the two lizards on Lord Howe Island seems to be that they provide a niche which is safe from virtually all predators, for the size of the openings precludes the entry of any of the island’s predatory vertebrates. The tunnels offer an ideal site for the safe deposition of eggs (PI. m1, A) while insect food, both in the tunnels and in the surrounding leaf-litter, is abundant. The eggs of Phyllodactylus guentheri may be found in large numbers within the tunnels, recent clutches being deposited upon the hatched, empty shells of earlier seasons (Pl. WH, B). Apart from those eggs broken or immediately preserved, a series of five intact and apparently fertile eggs were brought back to the Australian Museum. There they were placed on paper in a dry glass jar, and left on a laboratory bench, where they were subject to a mean temperature of approximately 70° F. (range 66° F.-84° F.). As none had hatched by the end of December 1966 (the eges having been collected in June 1966), they were no longer examined regularly and were put to one side. When next examined on 18th January 1967 two of the eggs had hatched. Both hatchlings were dead, one freshly so but it was possible to place the date of hatching within the two-week period preceding the 18th. Another egg hatched on 8th February, another on 13th February and another on 14th March. The mean snout-vent length of hatchlings was 30-25 mm. The eggs of P. guentheri have thick, brittle calcareous shells which are apparently quite soft when laid, for they take the shape of the surfaces with which they come into contact when laid. Eggs are often found firmly adhering to one another or to the surface of a rock. The significance of this long incubation time is not known. As it was not possible to know how long the eggs had been laid when collected, the minimum incubation time for those eggs collected varied from 30 to 39 weeks. Although overwintering of eggs is a relatively common phenomenon in lizards, the observa- tions made above are not explicable in normal overwintering terms. The eggs were collected in mid-winter (when no gravid females were collected) and continued to develop throughout the spring and summer. Indeed, the last egg PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy OF NEw SoutH Watss, Von. 96, Part ] 36 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND to hatch did so at the end of summer. The temperature of development in the laboratory was probably not very different from that experienced by eggs in the field during this period. From these meagre observations it would be unwise to draw any general conclusions regarding incubation times or their roles in the biology and ecology of this lizard. These observations do indicate, however, that the reproductive habits of Lord Howe Island reptiles may differ radically from those of related forms on the Australian mainland. On returning to Sydney, the author contacted Mr. David Rootes, a member of several climbing parties which attempted to scale Ball’s Pyramid. Mr. Rootes advised that one species of lizard had been seen, and produced several photographs showing clearly an individual of L. lichenigera. This individual was observed to roll a tern egg down a rock slope until it broke, then fed on the contents. Mr. Rootes’ observations were made in November, whereas no lizards were active in the open during the author’s visit to Lord Howe Island in winter (June). SUMMARY (1) The recent reptile fauna of Lord Howe Island comprises two species of lizards, the gecko Phyllodactylus guenthert and the endemic skink Leiolopisma lichenigera. The latter is resurrected from the synonymy of Leiolopisma cuprea, which is in turn relegated to the status of a nomen dubium. It has been shown that earlier records of the gecko Gehyra oceanica from Lord Howe Island were probably in error. (2) On the small islands lying off-shore from Lord Howe Island the lizards occur commonly in the rocky habitat described by earlier workers. On the main island, however, both species appear to have virtually disappeared from the habitat in which they were once common and are now to be found only in a very restricted and specialized habitat consisting of weathered boulders of ‘ sand- stone ”’ or “‘ beach rock’. It seems likely that this habitat is the only one which offers protection from such introduced predators as rats. (3) Slight differences in the proportions of the two lizards on different islands, differences in size, and the prolonged incubation period of the eggs of Phyllo- dactylus guentheri indicate the potential value of the reptile fauna of Lord Howe Island for future ecological and evolutionary studies. ADDENDUM Since this paper was submitted for publication the types of Phyllodactylus guenthert and P. affinis have been examined in the British Museum (Natural History). The P. guentheri syntype from Champion Bay is indeed conspecific with the other syntypes, and I therefore regard its locality data as incorrect. The holotype of P. affinis (B.M.N.H. 55.8.16.5.) appears to be a typical example of the Australian Phyllodactylus marmoratus, for which reason I suggest that its type locality (New Hebrides) is also incorrect. Further to my comments on the ecology of Leiolopisma lichenigera, Dr. H. Recher reports (pers. comm.) that in summer this species is abundant and active at night among supralittoral rocks and other ground cover on Rabbit Island. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The author is grateful to the Trustees of the Australian Museum and the Museum’s Director, Dr. F. H. Talbot, for making possible a visit to Lord Howe Island, and to the Lord Howe Island Board for permission to undertake the work here reported upon. Mrs. Kirby (then of ‘‘ Pine Trees’), Mr. R. Payton, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 4 H. G. COGGER 37 Mr. EK. Rhodes, Mr. KR. Schick and Mr. C. Wilson were especially kind and helpful during the author’s stay on the island. Miss A. G. C. Grandison of the British Museum (Natural History), Dr. Ernest Williams of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard University, and Dr. J. Moreland of the Dominion Museum, Wellington, kindly examined and/or lent specimens under their charge. References Brown, W. C., 1953.—Results of the Archbold Expeditions. No. 69. A Review of New Guinea Lizards Allied to Hmoia baudini and E'moia physicae. Amer. Mus. Novit.. No. 1627, pp. 1-25. , 1954.—Notes on several lizards of the genus Hmoia, with descriptions of new species from the Solomon Islands. f&ieldiana: Zoology, 34 (25): 263-276. BouLencer, G. A., 1885.—Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus. (N.H.), 1, British Museum (N.H.), London. , 1887.—Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus. (N.H.), 3, British Museum (N.H.), London. Cotton, C. A., 1948.—Landscape. As developed by the processes of normal erosion. 2nd EKd., Whitcombe and Tombs Ltd., Christchurch, pp. 1-509. ETHERIDGE, R., 1889.—The General Zoology of Lord Howe Island, in Lord Howe Island. Its Zoology, Geology and Physical Characters. Memoirs Aust. Mus., 2 (1): 3-42. GurRNEY, A. B., 1947.—Notes on some remarkable Australian walkingsticks, including a synopsis of the genus Hatatosoma (Orthoptera: Phasmatidae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer., 40: 373-396. Hinpwoop, K. A., 1940.—The birds of Lord Howe Island. Hmu, 40: 1-86. , and CUNNINGHAM, J. M., 1950.—Notes on the birds of Lord Howe Island. Hmu, 50: 23-35. Loverinc#, A., 1934.—Australian Reptiles in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harv., 77 (6): 243-383. MacGintivray, J., 1852—55.—Voyage of H.M.S. Herald, under command of Captain H. Mangles Denham R.N. being Private Journal kept by John MacGillivray, Naturalist. Mss. No. 23, Admiralty Library, London. McAtrint, D. K., 1966.—Rediscovery of Lord Howe Island Phasmid. Aust. ent. Soc. News Bull., 2 (3): 71. McCann, C., 1955.—The Lizards of New Zealand. Gekkonidae and Scincidae. Bull. Dom. Mus., 17: i-vin, 1-127. : McCuttoca, A. R., 1921.—Lord Howe Island—A Naturalist’s Paradise. Aust. Mus. Mazg., 1 (2): 31-47. McKean, J. L., and Hinpwoop, K. A., 1965.—Additional Notes on the Birds of Lord Howe Island. Hmu, 64 (2): 79-97. MircHetyt, F. J., 1965.—Australian geckos assigned to the genus Gehyra Gray (Reptilia : Gekkonidae). Senck. biol., 46 (4): 287-319. Nicuouis, Max, 1938.—Lord Howe Island, 1788-1938. George M. Dash, Sydney, pp. 1-76. OcitBy, J. D., 1889.—The Reptiles and Fishes of Lord Howe Island, 7m Lord Howe Island. Its Zoology. Geology and Physical Characters. Memoirs Aust. Mus., 2 (3): 51-74. OuiveR, W. R. B., 1917.—The Vegetation and Flora of Lord Howe Island. Trans. N. Zeal. Instit., 49: 94-161. Paramonov, S. J., 1958.—Lord Howe Island, a Riddle of the Pacific. Pacific Science, 12 (1): 82-91. , 1960.—Lord Howe Island, a Riddle of the Pacific. Part II. Pacific Science, 14 (1): 75-85. , 1963.—Lord Howe Island, a Riddle of the Pacific. Pacific Science, 17 (3): 361-373. Putte, ARTHUR, 1789.—The Voyage of Governor Phillip to Botany Bay. ..compiled from Authentic Papers...etc. John Stockdale, London. Pops, HE. C., 1949.—A Naturalist on Lord Howe Island, Part I. Wald Infe, 12 (11): 549-554. , 1959.—Lord Howe Island, Ch. 10 in The Great Barrier Reef and Adjacent Isles (by K. Gillett and F. McNeill), Coral Press, Sydney, pp. 141-159. , 1960.—The Natural History of Lord Howe Island. Aust. Mus. Mag., 13 (7): 207-210. Squirss, D. F., 1963.—Carbon-14 Dating of the Fossil Dune Sequence, Lord Howe Island. Aust. J. Science, 25 (9): 412-413. STANDARD, J. C., 1961.—Submarine Geology of the Tasman Sea. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 72: 1777-1788. , 1963.—Geology of Lord Howe Island. Jour. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 96: 107-121. Wiens, H. J., 1962.—Atoll Environment and Ecology. Yale University Press, New Haven, pp. 1-xxil, 1-532. Zierz, F. R., 1920.—Catalogue of Australian Lizards. Rec. S. Austral. Mus., 1: 181-228. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SourH WateEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 38 REPTILES OF LORD HOWE ISLAND EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE I A. Lord Howe Island viewed from Malabar, showing Mt. Lidgbird (left) and Mt. Gower. B. Northern, low-lying parts of Lord Howe Island viewed from the summit of Mt. Gower ; Rabbit Island is seen lying in the lagoon while the Admiralty Islands are in the right upper corner. C. Rabbit Island from Lagoon Beach. D. Clump of “ beach rock” riddled with tunnels in which the eggs of Phyllodactylus guentheri are laid. PLATE II A and B. Sections of “ beach rock’’ showing successive clutches of eggs of Phyllodactylus guenthert laid within tunnels. . Lertolopisma lichenigera. . Phyllodactylus guentheri. va PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 PLATE I Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 1 ‘A: fl | ‘ . E yt noe YY ii Proc: Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 1 PLATE II AUSTRALIAN SEA STARS OF THE GENUS PATIRIELLA (ASTHROIDEA, ASTERINIDAE) A. J. DARTNALL Tasmanian Museum, Hobart, Tasmania (Plates 111, Iv) [Accepted for publication 23rd September 19706] Synopsis Including the two new species described in this paper ten species of Patiriella are known from Australia. The Lamarckian species Patiriella evigua is shown to contain a tropical and temperate species. A neotype is erected to validate the identity of P. exigua sensu stricto. A key to the Australian species of Patiriella is provided. An account of the biogeography of the-genus in relation to known marine zoogeographic boundaries is given. INTRODUCTION The present paper deals with asterinid sea stars of the genus Patiriella from Australia. Patiriella comprises a group of sea stars whose members are a conspicuous feature of the intertidal fauna of temperate and cool temperate shores in the Southern Hemisphere. Although the primary concern here is the fauna of Australia, some reference is also made to the asterinid faunas of South Africa, the Indo-west-Pacific area and New Zealand. Australia and Tasmania possess eight species of Patiriella and two further Species are described in this paper. Patiriella exigua (Lamarck) is common to South Africa and Australia and a New Zealand species (Patiriella regularis (Verrill)) is known as an introduced member of the Tasmanian marine fauna (Dartnall, 1969a). Abbreviations used in the text are as follows: A.M., Australian Museum, Sydney; B.M., British Museum (Natural History), London; M.C.Z., Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard; M.N., Museum fiir Naturkunde, Berlin ; N.M.V., National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne ; Q.M., Queensland Museum, Brisbane ; T.M., Tasmanian Museum, Hobart ; U.S.N.M., United States National Museum, Washington, D.C.; W.A.M., Western Australian Museum, Perth. The material quoted is housed in the institution indicated by the initial preceding the registration numbers given. The number of specimens in each lot is indicated in parentheses after the registration number. & is the greater radius of the specimen measured along the ambulacral groove ; 7 is the lesser, interambulacral radius. Body proportions are expressed as a ratio 2:7 and the height of the body is given as vh. SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT Genus PATIRIELLA Verrill 1913 Type Species: Asterina (Asteriscus) regularis Verrill, 1867. Asterinid sea stars with a plane actinal surface, short rays and a body outline varying from a blunt star to nearly pentagonal. Actinal intermediate spines rarely more than two, most often paired or single. Oral plates may carry one, two or no suboral spines. The inferomarginal plates and their spines form a fringing edge to the body and the superomarginal plates are not distinct. Abactinal spines are short, granular and bluntly capitate. The carinal row of PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SoutrH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 40 SEA STARS GENUS PATIRIELLA abactinal plates is doubly notched to accommodate two rows of papulae. Papuael are confined to the abactinal surface, along the rays, on the centre of the disc and the interradial, abactinal areas near the disc centre. The plates of the sides of the rays and the outermost interradial areas are apapulate. Pedicellariae are absent. Species of this genus are found on rocky shores in the intertidal zone of southern and eastern Australia. Populations of some species may be found on mud, sand or gravel and can be taken below tidemarks to about 15 metres and occasionally at greater depths. The genus Patiriella is most closely related to the predominantly northern hemisphere genus Patiria; to Paranepanthia which contains three nominal species in Australia, and to part of the heterogeneous genus Asterina from which Patiriella was originally removed. In a previous account (Dartnall, 1970b) the genus was subdivided into ‘“ exigua”’, ‘ regularis””’ and “ gunni”’ groups. ‘There are distinct morphological differences between these groups; within them are species of very similar morphology whose isolation is geographic, ecological or reproductive. In the following account the groups concerned are defined first, and thus the descriptions of species offered are concise, depending more on evidence of species isolation than indefinite morphological differences. (a) “* exigua’’ group Small species of Patiriella in which F rarely exceeds 15mm. The number of rays is usually five and actinal intermediate spines are usually single. Abactinal spines from the centre of the disc are from 0-2 to 0:3 mm. in length. Patiriella exigua (Lamarck, 1816) (Plate Iv (c)) Restricted synonymy: Asterias exigua Lamarck, 1816; Asterina krausw Gray; 1840; Asteriscus pentagonus Miller and Troschel, 1842 (in part); Asterina exigua Perrier, 1876; Patiriella exigua Verrill, 1913 (in part); Asterina exigua Mortensen, 1921; Patiriella eaigua H. L. Clark, 1938, 1946 (in part) ; HEndean, 1956 (in part); Shepherd, 1968; Dartnall, 1970b. Non: Asteriscus pentagonus Miller and Troschel, 1842 (in part); Asterina exigua H. L. Clark, 1908; Koehler, 1910; Fisher, 1919; H. L. Clark, 1921 ; Patiriella exigua Livingstone, 1932; Asterina (Patiriella) exigua Mortensen, 1933a; Domantay and Roxas, 1938; Engel, 1938. Asterina minuta of various authors has not been included in the synonymy because of lack of precise information about localities. However, Gray (1840) was clear that the specimens he attributed to A. minuta were from the ‘ West Indies, St. Vincents”’. If those details are correct then those specimens are probably Liitken’s Asterina foliwm or a related form. Information about A. folium with which to compare Gray’s A. minuta is available in a paper by de Roa (1967). As far as synonymy is concerned the complex of asterinids from South Africa has also been ignored in this paper as it is commented upon by both H. L. Clark (1923) and Mortensen (1933a). Asterias exigua Lamarck was described from material whose provenance was suggested to be the Americas (Perrier, 1876). Perrier examined Lamarck’s seven type specimens and also noted that a further series of nine specimens, collected from the Cape of Good Hope in 1829 by M. Raynaud, were labelled Asterias exigua by Lamarck. Perrier (loc. cit.) and Koehler (1910) both recognized Asterias exigua as a valid species containing the synonyms Asterias minuta de Blainville, 1834; Agassiz, 1834 (in Agassiz, 1838) and Gray, 1840 ; Asteriscus pentagonus Miiller and Troschel, 1842 and Asterina pentagona von Martens, 1866. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socipty or New SoutH WaAtgEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 A. J. DARTNALL 41 Patiriella exigua is recorded in the literature from throughout the Australo- Indo-west-Pacific from South Africa to the Philippines, the New Hebrides and the eastern and southern coasts of Australia including Tasmania. Whitelegge (1889) was the first to note the orally directed gonoducts of the adult and the shortened development of the larvae. Mortensen (1921) confirmed Whitelegge’s observations and suggested that P. erigua might contain more than one species, quoting Ludwig that Asterina pentagona, an accepted synonym, possessed genital pores opening on the abactinal surface. Since that time abbreviated development has been accepted as characteristic of the species and an account is incorporated in at least one standard textbook of zoology (Parker and Haswell, 1962). In September, 1967, Dr. J. R. Grindley obtained for me material attributed to Patiriella exigua from Port Elizabeth, South Africa. This material can be divided into two groups: (1) Asterinid sea stars with abactinally directed gonoducts, attaining 18 mm. R in these samples and whose actinal surface is not consistently blue-green in colour. Miss A. M. Clark of the British Museum (Natural History) was kind enough to compare some of these specimens with material in her care and informs me that they agree best with Asterina dyscrita H. L. Clark, 1923. (2) Asterinids with actinally directed gonoducts, attaining a maximum R of approximately 12mm. and whose actinal surface is always blue-green in colour. The latter group is identical to that species of sea star from south-eastern Australia commonly determined as Patiriella exigua and it was decided to investigate that species throughout its known range. Through the co-operation of many individuals and institutions, material was obtained from areas throughout most of the recorded distribution of the species and all the specimens were examined to determine the position of the gonopores and the orientation of the gonoducts. Morphological differences between the samples were slight and gonopore position remained the one constant character for investigation in preserved material. The map (Fig. 1) shows the localities from which material was obtained. Orientation of gonoducts in the samples is indicated by the arrowheads and the following distribution is clear. North of about 28°S. in Australia all the samples attributed to Patiriella exigua possessed abactinally orientated gonopores. In Australia the form with actinally directed gonopores is found along the east coast, south of approximately 28°S., to Port Lincoln on the south coast at approximately 136° E. The range of this form extends southwards to encompass the coasts of Tasmania and eastward of the continent to Lord Howe Island at about 159° EK. This form is also found in South Africa and the isolated islands of St. Paul and New Amsterdam. Application to Dr. G. Cherbonnier revealed that Lamarck’s types of Asterias exigua are no longer in Paris. Dr. E. Binder of Geneva and Dr. W. Vervoort of Leiden inform me that neither of their institutions hold Lamarckian echinoderm types. Further enquiries suggest that Lamarck’s specimens no longer exist and in order to preserve the name “‘ exigua”’ for this well-documented animal it appears necessary to erect a neotype for the species. The Cape of Good Hope has been accepted as the type locality by various authors, but without a locality for Lamarck’s specimens this is very uncertain. Among those specimens available to me the two from the Cape do not demonstrate adequately the key character to the species, namely the gonopores, so I have chosen a recent specimen from False Bay, South Africa, which lies to the east of the Cape of Good Hope and is now designated the type locality. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SourH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 42 SEA STARS GENUS PATIRIELLA Details of neotype: T.M. H508. R=11-5mm., from the type locality, False Bay, South Africa (34°8./18° E.); 10.x.1969; don. J. G. Field. Other material examined : A.M. J7762 (6), City of Melbourne Bay, King Is., Tasmania, June 1968, S. Kerrison. B.M. 1840.11.25.1 and 1840.11.25.5, Cape of Good Hope. Both specimens © are syntypes of Asterina kraussu Gray. M.N. 6682 (35), St. Paul Island, 26.iv.1903, Deutche Stdpolar-Expedition 1901-1903 ; 6683 (6), Amsterdam Is., 27.iv.1903, Deutche Stidpolar-Expedition. N.M.V. H151 (6), Flinders, Victoria, 6.vi.1969, A. J. and P. J. Dartnall. Q.M. G3765 (4), Currumbin, Queensland, 8.vili.1953, R. Endean. obscura seudoexigua iy p Gg _exigua brevispina regularis ‘\ Fig. 1. Contemporary distribution of the species of Patiriella found in Australia. P. nornata from Western Australia is omitted. Inset: Map showing the localities from which material of the “ exigua’’ group has been obtained. Orientation of gonopores is shown by the solid triangles— 4 abactinal; © actinal. “ T.M. H212 (2), Roaring Beach, Port Davey, Tas., Feb. 1937, C. Davies ; H222 (12), Stanley, Tas., Oct. 1937, A. W. G. Powell; H332 (31), Nubeena, Tas., 14.v.1967, L. Jenkins ; H345 (2), Murdunna, Tas., 12.1.1967, A. J. Dartnall ; H349 (8), Port Arthur, Tas., 20.iv.1967, A. P. Andrews and EH. Aves ; H365 (12), Granville Harbour, Tas., 6.xi.1967, A. J. Dartnall ; H392 (6), Dennes Pt., Bruny Is., Tas., 24.1.1968, A. J. Dartnall; H409 (13), South Australia, 1967, S. A. Shepherd ; H452 (4), Maria Is., Tas., 15.iv.1968, A. J. Dartnall; H456 (4), Swan Is., Tas., Sept. 1968, F. L. Sutherland ; H458 (9), Cape Portland, Tas., 2.11.1969, A. J. Dartnall; H479 (18), Salmon Reef, Lord Howe Is., 6.xi.1968, W. G. Thornton ; H480 (6), Trouser’s Point, Flinders Is., Tas., 7.1.1969, T. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 A. J. DARTNALL 43 Goede ; H483 (7), Marrawah, Tas., 1.xii.1968, B. J. Smith; H484 (5), Greens Beach, north Tas., 13.viii.1969, RK. H. Green; H485 (10), Stevens Bay, Port Davey, Tas., 8.1.1969, D. Milledge ; H486 (10), Long Reef, near Sydney, N.S.W., 1.vii.1969, E. C. Pope; H496 (5), Salt Creek, Port Lincoln, S. Australia, 10.xi1.1969, J. Veitch; H494 (6), Port Elizabeth, South Africa, Sept. 1967, J. R. Grindley ; H498 (8), False Bay, South Africa, 34°S./18° E., 10.x.1969, ay Gap ield. UNIVERSITY OF CAPE TOWN: ECOLOGICAL SURVEY COLLECTIONS. All from South Africa. L10 (8), East London, 32°8./28° E., 6.vii.1937; LB112 (4), Langebaan Lagoon, 33°8./18° H., 15.vii.1946; N35 (6), Port Nolloth, 29°S./16° H., 27.x.1935; LU3A (13), Luderitz, 26°S./15° E., 15.vii.1946; D24 (8), Durban, 29°8./15° E., 27.vi.1935 ; AT (10), Oudekraal, 34°8./18° E., 2.11934; E3 (9), Port Elizabeth, 33°8./28° H., 3.vii.1936 ; S9 (10), Still Bay, 34°S./21° K:, 41,1932. w.A.M. 37-69 (1), Sydney, N.S.W., late 1963, C.S.I.R.O. Fisheries ; 39-69 (3), Gunnamatta Bay, Port Hacking, N.S.W., 31.x.1963, C.S.I.R.O. Fisheries. Description: As above, in the description of “ exigua” group. Oral spines 5-6 ; suboral spines 1; furrow spines 2 to each adambulacral ossicle and basally webbed ; subambulacral spines 1. Actinal intermediate spines 1, 2 towards the dise margin, absent proximal to the mouth plates. In preserved specimens the plate at the apex of the chevron which defines the actinal intermediate area may “‘ float ”’ clear of its fellows on a sheet of membrane. A pair of gonopores are present in each actinal intermediate area about level with the third ambulacral ossicle and between the second and third chevrons of actinal intermediate plates (Plate IV, c). R:r about 1:2-1-3:1. Diagnosis: A small species of Patiriella with actinally directed gonoducts and abbreviated larval development. Colour in life: The actinal surface is consistently blue-green. The ground colour of the abactinal surface is dull green or brown. Red, orange, purple, brown or pastel greens or browns on the spines grouped at the inferomarginal fringe, along the top of the rays and at the disc centre, often produce an attractive geometric pattern against the ground colour. The tissues of the circum-oral ring are blue-green. The tube feet are blue-green and the suckers off-white. The papulae are transparent, showing blue-green coloration at their exit from the papular pores. Distribution: South Africa, St. Paul group, Australia south of 28°S. and E. of 136° E., Tasmania, Lord Howe Island. Habitat : Mid-tide level on rocky shores. In areas where wave splash is consistent the species may be found high on the shore. Specimens from South Australia were taken under rocks on a muddy substrate and the species has been collected on sand at Anson’s Bay, N.E. Tasmania. In Australia Patiriella exigua is often associated with the alga Hormosira banksi. Patiriella pseudoexigua sp. nov. (Plate Iv (a)) Synonymy: % Asteriscus pentagonus Miller and Troschel, 1842 (in part), 2? Asterina pentagona von Martens, 1866; Asterina exigua H. L. Clark, 1908 ; ? Koehler, 1910; Patiriella exigua Verrill, 1913 (in part); Asterina exigua Fisher, 1919; Asterina exigua H. L. Clark, 1921 ; Patiriella exiqua H. L. Clark, 1938 (in part); 2? Asterina (Patiriella) exigua Domantay and Roxas, 1938 ; Engel, 1938; Patiriella exigua H. L. Clark, 1946 (in part); Endean, 1956 (in part). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vor. 96, Part 1 44 SEA STARS GENUS PATIRIELLA Ludwig (in Mortensen, 1921) observed that Asterina pentagona von Martens possessed genital pores opening on the abactinal surface of the animal in contrast to Patiriella exigua. Thus it would appear that the name pentagonus of Miller and Troschel is available to accommodate the species of Patiriella found north of 28°S. in Australia. However, two species of Patiriella are present in north- eastern Australia and I find it impossible to decide which is actually pentagonus of past authors. Accordingly both this species and one belonging to the ‘“‘ regularis > group are described as new. Future workers in the Indo-west- Pacific may need to place one of these species in synonymy if further information validates the status of Miller and Troschel’s species name. The alternative is to declare formally that pentagonus is invalid, but this must await further studies on the species of Patiriella in the waters north of Australia. Holotype: T.M. H499. A dried specimen, K=12-5mm., Airlies Beach, Proserpine, Queensland (type locality), 12.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall. Paratypes: T.M. H500 (6), Airlies Beach, Proserpine, Queensland, 12.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall; A.M. J7761 (2), Airlies Beach, Queensland, September/October 1968, K. Deacon. Other material examined : B.M. 1890.5.7.581-584 (4), Zamboanga, Philippines; 1968.6.14.156-160 (5), Solomon Islands. M.C.Z. 2297 (1), Murray Is., Mer., Oct. 1913, H. L. Clark, Carnegie Expedition ; 2083 (15), Espiritu Santo, Malo, New Hebrides, January 1911, Rev. J. Annand; 2296 (23), Erub, Torres Strait, 19.ix.1913, H. L. Clark ; 2298 (1), Hrub, Torres Strait, 19.ix.1913, H. L. Clark. N.M.vV. H116 (1), Aola, Guadaleanal, 1901, G. Officer; G114 (1), Bora Bada, New Guinea, March 1891, J. Exton; H110 (1), Bingal Bay, Queensland, July 1964, J. Kerslake. Q.M. G38767 (2), Port Curtis, Queensland, 16.vili.1961, R. Endean ; G3762 (26), South Yeppoon, Queensland, 15.1.1953, R. Endean ; G3764 (22), Airlies Landing, Proserpine, Queensland, 21.iv.1953, R. Endean. T.M. H501 (32), Airlies Beach, Proserpine, Queensland, 12.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall; H502 (4), one mile N.E. Airlies Beach, Proserpine, Queensland, 12.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall; H503 (6), south end of King’s Beach, Bowen, Queensland, 13.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall. U.S.N.M. 38088 (12), Philippine Islands, E. A. Mearns; 40261 (7), Port Binang, Subie Bay, Philippines, 8.i1.1908, Albatross Philippines Expedition 1907-1910 ; 40254 (4), Borneo, 2.i11.1908, Albatross Expedition. W.A.M. 43-69 (3), Real Point, Villa Carmen, Cabcaben, Bataan, Philippines, 24.vii.1965, Western Australian Museum Luzon Expedition 1965. Description of holotype: A small asterinid sea star very similar in morphology to Patiriella exigua. R:r about 1-3:1. Rays five. Each oral plate with five oral spines and one suboral spine. Most furrow spines are paired except near the mouth plates, where two or three adambulacral plates carry three furrow spines. The subambulacral and actinal intermediate spines are each placed singly to an actinal plate. There are no pairs of spines towards the edge of the dise and spines are absent near to the mouth plates. The inferomarginal plates carry seven to nine spines ; the abactinal plates four to 20 spinelets. The gonoducts are orientated abactinally and the gonopores open on the abactinal surface. Diagnosis: A small species of Patiriella with abactinally directed gonoducts. Colour in life: The actinal surface is a dull brownish-green; the abactinal surface dull brown and green. Most specimens are darker on the centre of the dise and along the crest of the rays, forming a five-rayed star pattern on the PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 A. J. DARTNALL A5 abactinal surface. Variants show some russet and orange patches in the inter- radial areas. The circum-oral ring is bluish, the tube feet pale straw coloured, and the suckers off-white. Distribution: The east coast of Australia north of about 28°S., Torres Strait, New Guinea, the New Hebrides, the Philippines and Borneo. Habitat: Under rocks at mid-tide level. Patiriella vivipara Dartnall, 1969 Diagnosis: A small species of Patiriella with no gonoducts ; coelomic incubation of young; viviparous. Distribution: Restricted to S.E. Tasmania. (b) “‘ regularis”’ growp Species of Patiriella resembling the ‘ exigua”’? group morphologically, in which F& exceeds 15mm. and the abactinal spinelets are longer than in the ““ exigua’’ group (between 0-4 and 0-9 mm. in length). Patiriella regularis (Verrill, 1867) Restricted synonomy: Asterina (Asteriscus) regularis Verrill, 1867; Patiriella regularis Verrill, 1913 ; Patiriella mimica Livingstone, 1933 ; Patiriella regularis Dartnall, 1970. Diagnosis: A species of Patiriella with five rays. RK: r=1-5-1-8:1. Distribution: New Zealand and 8.K. Tasmania. Patiriella inornata Livingstone, 1933 Diagnosis: A species of Patiriella with five rays, short furrow spines and the innermost oral spine notched at the tip. Distribution: Western Australia. Remarks: This species is known only from the holotype. Patiriella nigra H. LL. Clark, 1938 Diagnosis: Five rays. Actinal intermediate area with dense spinulation ; many plates towards the inferomarginal fringe carrying two or three spines. On the abactinal surface the spinulation of the papulate areas is distinct, approaching the condition described for species of Paranepanthia. Colour in life black. The gonopores open on the abactinal surface. Distribution: Lord Howe Island. Patiriella obscura sp. nov. (Plate Iv (b)) Synonymy: 7 Patiriella exgua Livingstone, 1932; Patiriella exigua Endean, 1956 (in part). Museum samples showed that a large species of Patiriella was present in north-eastern Australia and probably extended to the Philippines. When I first collected this animal alive I considered it to be the adult of Patiriella pseudo- exigua sp. nov. However, examination showed that the gonads of P. obscura were not mature until 13mm. Rk was attained and P. pseudoexigua possesses mature gonads at 11 mm. R. Holotype: T.M. H504. A dried specimen, R=18mm., Rose Bay, Bowen, Queensland (type locality), 13.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall. Paratypes: T.M. H505 (6) and A.M. J7791 (6), Rose Bay, Bowen, Queensland, 13.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall. Other material examined : PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 46 SEA STARS GENUS PATIRIELLA Q.M. G5330 (2), Rowe’s Bay, Townsville, Queensland, August 1967, R. Monroe; G3763 (5), Low Island, Queensland, 13.viii.1954, R. Endean. T.M. H506 (15), Rose Bay, Bowen, Queensland, 13.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnall ; H507 (23), Rowe’s Bay, Townsville, Queensland, 14.iv.1970, A. J. Dartnaill. COLL. ZOO. DEPT., UNIVERSITY OF THE PHILIPPINES. Two dried specimens from the vicinity of Port Galera Bay. Description of holotype: A species of Patiriella with five rays. R:r=1-2:1. Each oral plate carries five or six oral spines and one or two suboral spines. Most furrow spines are arranged in pairs, but two adambulacral plates near the mouth carry three spines. Subambulacral spines are single with occasional pairs. Actinal intermediate spines are mainly single with occasional pairs near the edge of the disc. Fringing spinelets are in groups of seven to 13. The abactinal spinelets range from four to 20 to an abactinal plate. The gonopores open on the abactinal surface. Diagnosis: A species of Patiriella of R >15mm. with abactinally directed gonoducts. Suboral spines often paired. Colour in life: The actinal surface is dull brownish-green ; the abactinal surface dull brown, reddish and purple. Dull, pale colours show indistinct geometric patterns against the ground colour. Tube feet greenish-blue ; suckers off-white. Circum-oral ring bluish. Distribution: N.E. Australia to the Philippines. Habitat: Under rocks at mid-tide level. This species will feed over the surface of mud surrounding rocks at low tide and the body colour provides very effective camouflage at this time. Patiriella calear (Lamarck, 1816) Restricted synonymy: Asterias calear Lamarck, 1816; Asterina calear McCoy, 1890; Patiriella calear Verrill, 1913; H. L. Clark, 1946; Endean, 1953 ; Shepherd, 1968; Dartnall, 1970b. Diagnosis: A species of Patiriella with seven to 11 rays, usually eight. Apart from the number of rays this species falls most naturally into the “ regularis ” group. Distribution : From the south coast of Western Australia to southern Queensland and the coasts of Tasmania. Remarks: It appears that Lamarck’s types of Asterias calcar no longer exist. I have not erected a neotype for this species because I am not aware that the identity of this well marked species has been questioned. (c) “ gunni”’ group Species of Patiriella with six rays and the spines of the actinal intermediate area arranged in pairs. Abactinal spines near centre of the disc between 0-2 and 0-4 mm. in length. Patiriella gunnu (Gray, 1840) Restricted synonymy: Asterina gunnii Gray, 1840; Patiriella gunnii Verrill, 1913; H. L. Clark, 1946; A. M. Clark, 1966; Shepherd, 1968; Dartnall, 1970b. Diagnosis: A flattened form with paired subambulacral spines. Maximum R about 39 mm. Distribution: Known from Tasmania, Western Australia to New South Wales, Lord Howe Island. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrtEty or NEw SoutH Watss, Von. 96, Part 1 A. J. DARTNALL ATT Patiriella brevispina H. L. Clark, 1938 Diagnosis: An arched form with single subambulacral spines attaining about 52mm. R. Distribution: Western Australia to New South Wales, the north coast of Tasmania. Key to the Australian Species of Patiriella I Actmal intermediate spmes paired; rays six......................-- ~“ gunnit”’ group (2) Actinal intermediate spines single ; rays usually five or more than six.................- (3) 2. (1) Flattened ; subambulacral spines usually paired ; Colour in life varied... .Patiriella gunnii Arched; subambulacral spines usually single; colour consistently and uniformly DULL Ops tse oito cs sepew nue) sens crisis, oc ua eat oon aU ley ANE cage Mrs Ceaaeel sae Patiriella brevispina* 3. (1) Small; R<15mm., actinal spines <0-4mm. in length “ exigua’’ group (4). Large; R>15mm., actual spines >9-4 mm. in length “ regularis ” group (6). 4. (3) Gonoduct absent ; coelomic incubation of young.................. Patiriella vivipara Conoductiypreseiibry suteel else sts, caine Areas ee eee teean ores iovace MERRIE: ba scee AA APRS (5) 5. (4) Gonoducts directed actinally. Actinal surface blue-green.............. Patiriella exigua Gonoducts directed abactinally. Actinal surface dull brownish green Patiriella pseudoexigua G3). ERS TS cia vetics fs o:8 sta Dra cnet Si ars eee nen Grail nicl Ue a AT Ie, Goa kh o eae Patiriella calcar TRONS. Wick date ane per eae ee ELS CEM Mee ig ofa ret ten teen ee Om Ses 4. ol ca he aera eee (7) 7 (6) Spinulation of apapulate and papulate abactinal areas distinct; colour black (Lord HEVOWOpUSH) teeter ee Cee ee ee els ences ea RO Ee ne EO oie Patiriella nigra Spinulation of abactinal interradial areas not as dense as above ; colour not black.. . .(8) 8. (7) Innermost oral spine flat, very wide notched at tip.................... Patiriella inornata ianermosthoralespine NOt sasealboOven- eee soe Don ae eo ee aera a acre: (9 9. (8) Suboral spines single; colour of actinal surface off-white............ Patiriella regularis Suboral spines often paired ; colour of actinal surface dull brownish-green Patiriella obscura * In a previous key to the Asterinidae of Tasmania (Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1970) this section runs down to P. calcar. The opportunity is taken to rectify this mistake here. DISCUSSION The distribution of species within the “‘ exigua’”’ group shows a sequence in which each species is separated from the next by a reproductive mechanism. These observations reinforce the concept of sibling pairs of species mooted in a previous paper (Dartnall, 1970b) except that a triple sequence is now discernible. Patiriella pseudoexigua, with upwardly directed gonoducts and presumably free- swimming larvae, is found north of 28°S. in eastern Australia. South of 28°S. and isolated from P. pseudoexigua by a reproductive ‘‘ inversion ”’ is Patiriella exigua. The third species in the sequence is the hermaphrodite, viviparous form, Patiriella vivipara, which is restricted to the cool coasts of S.E. Tasmania. The discovery of a “ regularis’ form (Patiriella obscura) in N.K. Australia adds weight to the concept that the precursors of Patiriella came from the Indo- west-Pacific area. It is suggested that the ‘‘ regularis ’’ forms have contributed to the New Zealand fauna (Patiriella regularis) by way of the Lord Howe Rise (Patiriella nigra) and to south-eastern Australia through evolution of Patiriella calear. It is possible that the “ exigua’”’ forms represent an older invasion as the contemporary distribution of P. exigua encompasses the temperate and cool temperate waters of both Australia and South Africa and the intervening St. Paul group of islands (see Fig. 1). Figure 1 shows the present distribution of the Australian species of Patiriella. The limits of distribution of P. exigua and P. pseudoexigua at about 28° S. roughly correspond with the biogeographic boundary defined amongst others by Endean (1957) when he considered the biogeography of the shallow water echinoderm fauna of Queensland. When the distribution of the species belonging to the “ gunnit” group is also considered it can be seen that the agreement with the marine zoogeographic provinces of Bennett and Pope (1953, 1956) is marked and that the distributional limits accord well with those postulated by George (1969) for the tropical and subtropical Palinuridae. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 90, Part 1 48 SEA STARS GENUS PATIRIELLA In an earlier paper (Dartnall, 1970a) the distributions of the hermaphrodite forms known within the Asterinidae were shown to lie in widely separate areas around 40° of latitude, both north and south. This evidence must now be restricted to the non-fissiparous asterinids because Dr. R. Kenny has sent me samples of hermaphrodite individuals of Nepanthia belcheri (Perrier) from Moreton Bay, Queensland. When the distribution of the species belonging to the ‘*‘ exigua ”’ sequence is considered, the speculations which follow are of interest. (a) The distributions of the ‘‘ exigua”’ species are defined by thermal tolerance alone, the observed sequence of reproductive mechanisms being fortuitous. (b) Each kind of reproductive mechanism is limited by temperature, higher latitudes and lower temperatures directing the success of hermaphrodite forms, species with abbreviated development, or a combination of both. It is probably not possible to test these speculations. However, it may be possible to find out whether similar reproductive sequences occur in other groups of Asteroidea along the long eastern seaboard of Australia. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I would thank the following persons and the institutions that they represent for help with material and literature: Dr. B. Z. Anicete, University of the Philippines ; Dr. B. Campbell, Queensland Museum; Miss A. M. Clark, British Museum (Natural History); Miss M. E. Downey, United States National Museum; Professor H. B. Fell, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard ; Mr. J. G. Field, University of Cape Town; Dr. J. R. Grindley, Museum, Snake Park and Oceanarium, Port Elizabeth, South Africa ; Dr. R. Kenny, James Cook University of North Queensland; Dr. and Frau D. Kithlman, Humboldt University of Berlin; Miss E. C. Pope, Australian Museum ; Mrs. 8. Slack-Smith, Western Australian Museum ; and Dr. B. J. Smith, National Museum of Victoria, I am grateful to the Trustees of the Tasmanian Museum and Art Gallery, who granted leave of absence to study species of Patiriella in Queensland, and the Trustees of the Science and Industry Endowment Fund, ©.S.I.R.0O., who made a grant-in-aid of this study. Finally, grateful acknowledgement is made to Dr. W. Bryden, Dr. E. R. Guiler, Dr. D. Martin and Sir Henry Somerset, who have freely offered advice and encouragement at various stages of this work. References Acassiz, L., 1838.—Prodromus of a Monograph of the Radiata and Echinodermata III. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1: 440-449. BENNETT, I., and Popr, EH. C., 1953.—Intertidal Zonation on the Exposed Rocky Shores of Victoria, together with a rearrangement of the biogeographical provinces of temperate shores. Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 4: 105. , 1960.— Intertidal Zonation of the Exposed Rocky Shores of Tasmania and its Relation- ship with the Rest of Australia. Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 11: 182. Buainvitte, H. M. D. de, 1834.—Manuel d’actinologie. ou de zoophytologie, 688 pp. Brine A. M., 1966.—The Port Philip Survey 1957-63. Echinodermata. Mem. Nat. Mus. Vic., 7: 289-384. CrarKk, H. L., 1908.—Echinodermata. Sci. Res. ‘“‘ Thetis’. Mem. Aust. Mus., 4: 519-564. , 1921.—The Echinoderm Fauna of Torres Strait. Pap. Tortugas Lab., 10: 1-244. , 1923.—The Echinoderm fauna of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 13: 221-428. , 1938.—Kchinoderms from Australia. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, 55: 1-596. , 1946.—The Echinoderm fauna of Australia. Publ. Carneg. Instn., 566: 1-567. Darrnat., A. J., 1969a.— New Zealand Sea Stars in Tasmania. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 103: 53-55. , 1969b.—A viviparous species of Patiriella (Asteroidea, Asterinidae) from Tasmania. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 93 (2): 294-296. , 1970a.—Some species of Asterina from Flinders, Victoria. Vict. Nat., 87 (1): 1-4. , 1970b.—The Asterinid Sea Stars of Tasmania. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 104: 73-77. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 PLATE It Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 1 ‘wu Q| 1 i j 1 le) Ok | eae OPM Oe ke re) eh ha, Py } ; ‘i , oN ie Co wsTih (wl ; pena 2 AL ee : re ] el We Re 4 oy a ee, 9 als ry oy ‘ ak , ; aN hee ya Vi iu , : : fale si ate EM " Lie + i - : ¥ _* , Mf pin aia Nay Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S8.W., Vol. 96, Part 1 PLATE IV A. J. DARTNALL 49 Domantay, J. 8., and Roxas, H. A., 1938.—The littoral Asteroidea of Port Galera Bay. Philip- pine Jour. Scv., 65: 203-237. ENDEAN, R., 1952.—Queensland faunistic records. Part III. Echinodermata (excluding Crinoidae). Pap. Dep. Zool. Univ. Qid., 1 (3): 53-60. , 1956.—Queensland faunistic records. IV. Further records of Echinodermata (excluding Crinoidea). Pap. Dep. Zool. Univ. Qid., 1 (5): 121-140. , 1957.—The biogeography of Queensland’s shallow-water echinoderm fauna (excluding Crinoidea), with a rearrangement of the faunistic provinces of tropical Australia. Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 8 (3): 233-273. ENGEL, H., 1938.—Resultats Scientifiques du Voyage aua Indies Orientales Neerlandaises, III (1)8. FisHer, W. K., 1919.—Starfishes of the Philippine Seas and adjacent waters. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 100 (3): 1-711. GrorcE, R. W., 1969.—Natural distribution and speciation of marine animals. J. Proc. Roy. Soc. West. Aust., 52 (2): 33-40. Gray, J. E., 1840.—A synopsis of the genera and species of the class Hypostoma (Asterias Linneus). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 6 (1): 175-184, 275-290. KoEHLER, R., 1910.—The Shallow Water Asteroidea. Hchinoderma of the Indian Museum, 6: 1-191. LAMARCK, J. B. P., 18146. — Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertebres, 2: 522-568. Livinestonge, A. A., 1932.— Sci. rept. Great Barrier Reef Exped. 1928-29, 1V (8): 241-265. , 1933.—Some genera and species of the Asterinidae. Rec. Aust. Mus. Sydney, 19: 1 -20. Martens, E. von, 1866.—Uber ostasiatische Echinodermen. Arch. f. Naturgesch, 32: 57-88, 133-189. McCoy, F., 1890.—Prodromus of the Zoclogy of Victoria, 2 (20): 371-375. Mortensen, T., 1921.—Studies of the development and larval forms of echinoderms, Copenhagen C.E.G.: 183-190. , 1921.—Echinoderms of South Africa (Asteroidea and Ophiuroidea). Vidensk. Medd. naturh. Foren. Kbh., 93: 215-400. MUuer, J., and TrRoscHEt, F. H., 1842.—System der Asteriden, xx +135. Parker, T. J., and HASweELi, W. A., 1962.—Textbook of Zoology, 1: 1-700. McMillan, London (6th ed.). PERRIER, E., 1876.—Revision de la collection de stellérides du Muséum. Arch. zool. exp., 5: 1-104, 209-304. Roa, E. Z. de, 1967.—Contribuction al estudio de los equinodermos de Venezuela. Acta Biologica Venezuelica, 5 (17): 267-333. SHEPHERD, S. A., 1968.—The Shallow Water Echinoderm Fauna of South Australia. I. The Asteroids. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 15 (4): 729-756. VERRILL, A. E., 1867.—Notes on the Radiata in the Museum of Yale College. Trans. Conn. Acad. Art. Sci., 35 (4): 247-351. , 1913.—Revision of the genera of starfishes of the subfamily Asterinidae. Amer. Jour. Sci., 35 (4): 477-485. WHITELEGGE, T., 1889.—Invertebrate fauna of Port Jackson. Subkingdom Echinodermata. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 23: 197-206. EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE IIt (a) Patiriella pseudoexigua sp. nov. Actinal surface of holotype (T.M. H499). (6) Patiriella obscura sp. nov. Actinal surface of holotype (T.M. H 504). PLATE IV (a) Airlie’s Beach, Proserpine, Queensland. Type locality of P. pseudoexigua sp. nov. (b) Rose Bay, Bowen, Queensland. Type locality of P. obscura sp. nov. ( c) Patiriella exigua (Lamarck). Actinal surface of neotype (T.M. H499). The positions of the gonopores in two interradii are indicated by the arrowheads. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SourH WaAtgEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 A SEA STAR OF GENUS CTENODISCUS FROM TASMANTA A. J. DARTNALL The Tasmanian Museum, Hobart, Tasmania [Accepted for publication 23rd September 1970] Synopsis A single specimen from deep water off northern Tasmania constitutes the first record of the sea star family Goniopectinidae from Australian waters. INTRODUCTION The sea star genus Ctenodiscus of the family Goniopectinidae is represented by two species in the Southern Hemisphere. Ctenodiscus australis Liitken is known from waters off the east coast of South America and C. procurator Hh NOB BB CUT pt uy 11))) 1) 2 ) WT) 1 5 YS vi 1 UN PM TUN LN)! VN) Fig. 1. Ctenodiscus sp. Side view from tip of ray to midline of the interradius. Sladen from the west (Bernasconi, 1964). Ctenodiscus orientalis Fisher is tropical Indo-Malay in distribution and C. crispatus (Retzius) is an arctic-boreal form with a circumpolar distribution (D’yakonov, 1950). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wass, Vou. 96, Part 1 A. J. DARTNALL 51 The single specimen discussed here was taken on the 24th September, 1953, from the F.R.V. Derwent Hunter 45 miles H.N.E. of Stokes Point, King Island, in 300-240 fathoms (546-436 metres). I am grateful to Mr. A. M. Olsen, who collected the specimen, which is now housed in the collections of the Tasmanian Museum. Ctenodiscus sp. (ef. C. orientalis Fisher) One dried specimen. Tasmanian Museum Reg. No. H497. R=19-5mm., ry=8-0 mm., br at base of ray=7-:0 mm., &: 7 2-43:1. Description: A sea star with five pointed rays and deep interbrachial arcs. The aboral surface is flattened and the oral surface is inclined at a steep angle, the mouthplates being the lowest point (Fig. 1). The actinal surface is covered with small paxillae that have no central spinelets and four to eight peripheral spinelets. Near the dise centre a small area (about 2-5 mm. across) is more closely covered with paxillae. This may be a retracted epiproctal cone. The madreporite is some 2 mm. across and placed close to the margin. The furrows of the madreporite are roughly parallel and aligned along the radial axis of the body in which the madreporite lies. The body is bordered by two rows of marginal plates forming an upright wall. Opposite inferomarginal and superomarginal plates are approximately equal in height, there being 16 marginals along the side of each ray. ‘The largest pairs of inferomarginal and superomarginal plates are the third, fourth and fifth from the interradial line, the height of the marginal wall being reduced from those plates both to the tip of the ray and the mid-line of the interradius. Fascioles are present between all the marginal plates. The fasciolar spines are longer on the superomarginals and become progressively narrower along the borders of the inferomarginal plates. Each superomarginal plate carries a single pointed spine at its apex and 10 to 12 fasciole spinelets on each side. A single spine is present on most inferomarginal plates near to the upper edge. The terminal plates of this specimen are much abraded, but probably carry a single large spine either side of the terminal groove with a smaller spine set below and outside the former. a Fig. 2. Ctenodiscus sp. Mouth plate, proximal fascioles and adambulacral spinulation. The fascioles run across the actinal surface to the ambulacrum. The fasciole in the mid-line of the interradius divides behind the mouth plates (Fig. 2). The actinal plates between the first fascioles from the mid-line are made up of two rows of overlapping, sub-rounded plates. The other actinal PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 52 SEA STAR GENUS CTENODISCUS plates are obscured by membrane. The adambulacral plates carry four to five furrow spines. Up to four spines may be present on the actinal surface of the adambulacral plates, amongst which a pair of spines may be distinct, especially near to the mouth. Occasional single spines are present on the actinal plates. The mouth plates are prominent, carry three or four oral spines and between 10 and 12 suboral spines (Fig. 2). The innermost oral spines are the largest of that series. The second suboral spine is the largest of the suboral series. The tube feet are in two rows, pointed and without sucking discs. DISCUSSION The single specimen available is not adequate to confirm the existence of a further species of Ctenodiscus. However, some comparisons may be drawn with the species already ascribed to the genus. Sources of comparative information are given throughout the discussion. The paxillae of the specimen described are similar to those described as characteristic of C. procurator, being less than 0-5 mm. in height and without central spinelets (A. M. Clark, 1962). Fisher (1911) demonstrated the morpho- logical variability of C. crispatus and noted that the extremes of the paxillae and of body form of that species came within the variation shown by both C. procurator and C. australis. Fisher’s table of measurements showed that 16 marginal plates were present in C. crispatus at R of approximately 36 mm. The specimen under discussion has 16 marginal plates at about half that size. The number of furrow spines observed here comes well within the range given by Fisher for C. crispatus, i.e. three to five. C. orientalis is the only other form known with a large number of marginal plates (26-27 when R=52 mm.) and the number of fasciole spinelets are similar to the Tasmanian specimen. Comparison with Fisher’s (1919) figures of C. orientalis shows that the oral spinulation of the Tasmanian specimen differs from that species in that the second suboral spine is larger and there are more suboral spines (10-12 against 5-8). Fisher’s figures also show that central spinelets are present on the paxillae of C. ortentalis. On the basis of size and numbers of marginal plates, this specimen has been referred to Ctenodiscus orientalis Fisher. A similar Indo-Malay relationship has already been inferred by A. M. Clark (1962) for a species of Marginaster from deep water off eastern Tasmania. A number of hypotheses are available to fit the distribution observed. (1) All the attributed species of Ctenodiscus are but one species showing a wide range of morphological variation and bipolar distribution. (2) Two species of Ctenodiscus exist with north and south polar distributions. (3) The Tasmanian form shares its relationships with the tropical Indo-Malay fauna and is most closely related to Ctenodiscus orientalis. Without further material available, I have chosen the latter hypothesis. The specimen is also of interest as it adds another family to the known Australian asteroid fauna. References BERNASCONI, I., 1964.—Asteroideos argentinosos. Physis, 24 (68). D’yaxonovy, A. M., 1950.—Sea Stars (Asteroids) of the U.S.S.R. Seas, 1.P.8.T. edition. Jerusalem (1968). Cuark, A. M., 1962.—Asteroidea. B.A.N.Z. Antarctic Research Eaupedition Reports, B, ix. Fisuer, W. K., 1911.—Asteroidea of the North Pacific and adjacent waters. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bulletin, 76: 1. , 1919.—Starfishes of the Philippine Seas and adjacent waters. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bulletin, 100: 3. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF NEw SoutH WaAtzs, Vou. 96, Part 1 THE GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER (OPILIONES, LANIATORES) WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES FROM KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA Gao. ELuNT School of Zoology, University of New South Wales, Sydney [Accepted for publication 23rd September 1970] Synopsis The genus Nwnciella Roewer is redefined and the genus Cinuna Hickman is synonymized with it. A new species, N. kangarocensis n. sp., is described from Kangaroo Island, South Australia. A new key is given for the twelve species of Nunciella. The male genitalia of NV. aspera (Pocock), N. badia (Hickman), N. dentata (Hickman), N. tasmaniensis Hickman and N. tuberculata Forster are described. INTRODUCTION The genus Nunciella Roewer is one of the largest groups of triaenonychid harvestmen in Australia. Five species have been described from eastern. Australia south of Canberra, three from Tasmania, and two from the south-west of Western Australia. The new species from Kangaroo Island fills a gap in this distribution. The genus is of considerable interest because of the complex structure of the male genitalia, and sexual dimorphism in the chelicerae, pedipalps and coxae of leg 1. S Family TRIAENONYCHIDAE Soerensen, 1886 Subfamily TRIAENONYCHINAE Pocock, 1903 Tribe TRIAENONYCHINI Pocock, 1903 Genus Nunciella Roewer, 1929 Nunciella Roewer, 1929: 96; Roewer, 1931: 162; Forster, 1952: 26; Hickman, 1958: 35. Cinuna Hickman, 1958: 37, new syn. Although early authors have regarded the number of segments in tarsus 1 a8 a reliable generic character, more recent work has shown that it must be used with caution in some genera (Goodnight and Goodnight, 1953). Forster (1954) allowed a variation of 2—4 tarsal segments in leg 1 for Nuncia and 5-7 for Hendea in his comprehensive revision of the New Zealand Laniatores. Recently, Forster (1965) described a cave species of Hendea with eight segments in tarsus 1, and remarked, ‘“‘ emphasis is placed on the tarsal formula for the separation of genera ...and it is of considerable interest to find that it may be influenced so readily by adaptation to a different environment”. Furthermore, Hickman (1958) has noted that variation (including asymmetry within an individual) ig common in some Australian genera. All the species of Nunciella described by Roewer possessed three tarsal segments in leg 1, a character he used in his description of the genus. Forster (1949), however, noted that the male of NV. tuberculata possessed four segments in tarsus 1, whilst the female had three. In his diagnosis of Nwnciella, Hickman (1958) retained Roewer’s diagnostic character of three segments in tarsus 1 while noting the situation in NV. tuberculata. On the basis of the segment number in tarsus 1 and the position of the eyemound, Hickman erected the closely related genus Cinuwna and placed in it C. badia (type species) and C. dentata from Tasmania. Oinuwna possessed four segments PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part I 54 GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND in both sexes and an eyemound removed from the anterior margin of the carapace. The latter character is not valid because in males of NV. aspera and N. tuberculata the eyemound also rises from behind the anterior margin. It is obvious that the dimorphic variation in tarsus 1 in N. tuberculata (and WN. kangarooensis, n. sp.) causes problems in separating Cinuna from Nuneciella. Because of the similarity in the genitalia of the two genera (Figs. 1-18) and the apparent absence of any clear-cut distinguishing characters, the limits of Nunciella must be extended to include species with four segments in tarsus 1. Thus Cinuna must be synonymized with Nuwneiella and the genus Nuneciella redescribed. Too little emphasis has been placed on the systematic importance of the male genitalia. Descriptions of genitalia have been given in only four of the 11 previously described Nunciella species. Kauri (1955) described those in WV. aspera and WN. karriensis, and Forster (1955) those in N. montana and N. woolcock. Descriptions are given for species which have been examined by the author and whose genitalia had not been described previously. The penis of N. aspera is redescribed, as Kauri’s drawing is partly inaccurate. The genus Nunciella Roewer is now redefined as follows. Anterior margin of carapace unarmed or with row of tubercles or granules above. Eyemound low, generally rounded, rising from or behind anterior margin, unarmed except for small granules in some species. Tergites without spines or large tubercles, but with rows of granules. Chelicera of male with proximal retrodorsal boss on first segment. Pedipalp femur in male with a large modified proximoventral bifid tooth which is laterally flattened and directed backwards. With pedipalp lowered this tooth abuts another modified bifid tooth on coxa of leg 1. Calcaneus of each metatarsus much shorter than astragalus and that of leg 1 in male without notch below. Tarsal formula 3-4, 8-15, 4, 4. Distitarsi 1 and 2 with two and mostly four segments respectively. Claw of both tarsus 3 and 4 three-pronged, middle prong larger than laterals. Apical portion of penis complex and usually compact. One superior and three inferior setae usual number on each ventral plate (N. tasmaniensis with two and five respectively). Type species: Nunciella aspera (Pocock). Nuneiella is closely related to the Tasmanian genus Nwncioides Hickman and the New Zealand genus Neonuncia Roewer. The males of these genera possess a strong proximal boss on the first segment of the chelicera, a highly modified bifid tooth placed proximoventrally on the pedipalp femur, and a calcaneus of leg 1 without notch below. Nunciella differs from Nwuncioides in having 3-4 segments rather than 5-6 in tarsus 1, and 4-5 compared with 6-8 in distitarsus 2. In Neonuncia the scute, including the anterior margin, is smooth, without tubercles or granules, and there are only two inferior setae on each ventral plate of the penis. The structure of the genitalia and other characters suggest Nunciella is also related to Calliuncus Roewer. The 12 species in the genus Nwunciella may be distinguished by the following key. Females are not known for all species, so the key is based on male characters with the possible exception of NV. parvula Roewer, which Forster (1952) believes is a female, not a male as stated by Roewer (1931). NV. frontalis Roewer is omitted as it is probably a synonym of NW. aspera (Forster, 1952). Key to Species or NuNcIELLA (MALES) IeeTarsusnot lege with four sepmentsi> 4 a2 1aoote thie meee ne eased ei eh eee (2) Tarsusof ler swith) three segments:y. 4) hea 4 ae ie eee ae ee oe ae (5 2. Distal portion of first segment of chelicera unarmed.................- N. tuberculata Forster Distal portion of cheliceral first segment with spine or prominent tubercle.......... (3) 3. Pedipalp tibia with four strong retrolateral teeth........ NV. deniata (Hickman), new comb. Pedipalp tibia with three strong retrolateral teeth.................-...0 2.2 e eee 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocteTy oF New SoutH WatEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. S. HUNT 55 4. Pedipalp femur with five mediodorsal teeth...................... N. kangarooensis, n. sp. Pedipalp femur with four mediodorsal teeth.............. N. badia (Hickman), new comb. 5. Prolateral surface of pedipalp femur with two distal teeth........................ (6) Prolateral surface of pedipalp femur without two distal teeth...................... (9) 6. Prolateral surface of pedipalp patella armed sub-distally with strong tooth.......... (7) Prolateral surface of pedipalp patella armed sub-distally with small tubercle........ (8) 7. Mediodorsal surface of pedipalp femur with four strong teeth.......... N. cheliplus Roewer Mediodorsal surface of pedipalp femur with four teeth, 1 and 3 very small, 2 and 4 strong.... Pee ye eMe reise toy siesiorte) ois cia) ohio (aliove: Ouetematey obs aeaye che su onencyt lays uckele, arsstelaterale N. granulata Roewer 8. Penis with a rounded distally oriented swelling ventral to the inferior setae............ ee re aoe eee ale eee als ieuelinliesle, ovate Date. See ra cuicie, oye a elie ssley oie ela) Svenshualiey GeoRe N. karriensis Kauri Penis without a prominent swelling ventral to the inferior setae.......... N. aspera (Pocock) 9. Femur of leg 3 with strong spine near proventral surface.............. N. woolcockt Forster Hemunsoimleresmwibhout suchiarspinek ieee er eee cee ae eicinicicie mele eiciciele eieie (10) 10. Mediodorsal surface of pedipalp femur with five teeth................ N. parvula Roewer Mediodorsal surface of pedipalp femur with three teeth in proximal half.......... (11) 11. Ventral surface of pedipalp femur with strong tooth in distal half and the prolateral surface RAIA ULTVAC Crate eee eke ara) e ahs) stay cus apes “sun cenalaia.cevsney eos austen ove ai save: sve eee N. tasmaniensis Hickman Ventral surface of pedipalp femur with tubercle in distal half and spinous tubercle at two- thirdssonyprolateralisurtaces....-- 5-142 ose cic ace le aid oi eile N. montana Forster Of the species in Nunciella, N. aspera and N. karriensis are from Western Australia, N. tasmaniensis, N. badia and N. dentata are from Tasmania, JN. cheliplus and N. parvula from Victoria, N. montana from New South Wales, N. woolcocki from the Australian Capital Territory, and N. kangarooensis, n. sp., from Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Roewer (1931) recorded N. granulata from New Zealand, but according to Forster (1954) it is probably an Australian species. Nuneciella aspera (Pocock) Triaenonyx aspera Pocock, 1903: 404; Loman, 1910: 133. Nuncia aspersa (Pocock): Roewer, 1915: 80; Roewer, 1923: 592. Nunciella aspera (Pocock): Roewer, 1929: 96; Forster, 1952: 27-29; Kauri, 1955: 3-4. Nunciella frontalis Roewer, 1931: 163. Structure of Penis (Figs. 1-3): Penis complex and compact. Glans arising dorsally but curving ventrad, with terminal portion ventral (Fig. 2). Arising from glans, and flanking it on either side, two large curved plates. These plates present in all species, but relationship with glans not as evident in the eastern Australian forms. In these, the curved flanking plates meet dorsally and presumably obscure the line of fusion with the glans. The glans and flanking plates constitute the aedeagus. Ventral plates fused and enlarged basally, but not with a pronounced distally-oriented swelling ventral to inferior setae. Plates tapering rapidly distal to inferior setae, separated by deep notch. Hach ventral plate with one superior and three inferior setae. Material Examined: Ten males, three females (type material not examined). Locality: Strong’s Cave, near Margaret River, Western Australia: under loose rocks and debris in entrance doline. Coll. G. S. Hunt 5.1.65. Nunciella badia (Hickman), new comb. Cinuna badia Hickman, 1958: 38-40. Structure of Penis (Figs. 4-6): Apical portion complex and compact. Glans rugose and swollen sub-apically (Fig. 4), protected dorsally by curved hood-like process. Two curved plates dorsal to hood, fused along mid-dorsal line except for narrow cleft. Each ventral plate with one superior and three minute inferior setae. Distal edge of plate serrated and distodorsal region rugose (Fig. 5). Plates fused except for shallow indentation. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sourn Wates, Vow. 96, Part 1 56 GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND —— O.1 MM Text-fig. 1 Figs. 1-3. Nunciella aspera (Pocock). 1, Apical portion of penis, ventral view ; 2, lateral view; 3, dorsal view. Figs. 4-6. Nunciella badia (Hickman), new comb. 4, Apical portion of penis, ventral view ; 5, lateral view; 6, extreme apical portion, dorsal view. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. 8S. HUNT 57 IO Text-fig. 2 Figs. 7-9. Nunciella dentata (Hickman), new comb. 7, Apical portion of penis, dorsal view; 8, lateral view; 9, ventral view. Figs. 10-12. Nuwnciella tasmaniensis Hickman. 10, Apical portion of penis, dorsal view ; 11, lateral view; 12, ventral view. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF New Sours WaALEs, Vow. 96, Part 1 58 GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND Material Examined: Holotype male and allotype female. Localities : Holotype male from near Lake St. Clair, Tasmania: under rotting log. Coll. V. V. Hickman 7.11.45. Australian Museum, Sydney, Cat. No. K68133. Allotype from side of Lyell Highway, 23 miles from Queenstown, Tasmania: under rotting log. Coll. V. V. Hickman 23.v.54. Australian Museum, Sydney, Cat. No. K68134. Nunciella dentata (Hickman), new comb. Cinuna dentata Hickman, 1958: 40-42. Structure of Penis (Figs. 7-9): Apical portion complex and compact. Glans apparently lying between two curved plates, appearing narrow and tubular with an apical expansion. Curved plates flared out laterally, fused along mid-dorsal line except for indentation. Ventral plates fused except for wide smoothly curved shallow indentation, each with one superior and three inferior setae. Material Examined: Holotype male. Locality: Slopes of Mt. Wellington, Tasmania. Coll. C. Oke Sept., 1949. Australian Museum, Sydney, Cat. No. K68135. Nunciella tasmaniensis Hickman N. tasmaniensis Hickman, 1958: 35-38. Structure of Penis (Figs. 10-12): Apical portion complex. Glans laterally flattened, narrowed sub-apically, directed slightly ventrally and striated sub- distally with lateral ridges (Fig. 11). Flanking plates wing-like, joining medio- ventrally and mediodorsally. Ventral plates fused except for wide sharply cornered indentation, each with two strong superior and five strong inferior setae. Material Examined: Holotype male and allotype female. Locality: Weldborough Pass, Tasmania: under rotting logs. Coll. V. V. Hickman 25.viii.53. Australian Museum, Sydney, Cat. No. K68132. Nunciella tuberculata Forster N. tuberculata Forster, 1949: 71, 73-75, 78. Structure of Penis (Figs. 13-15): Glans ventrally placed and narrowed apically. Flanking plates large, flared out laterally and fused along mid-dorsal line except for very deep and narrow notch. Ventral plates fused except for a sharply cornered indentation, each with one superior and three inferior setae. Portion of plates distal to inferior setae relatively enlarged. Material Examined: Holotype male, allotype female and four paratype males. Localities: Holotype, allotype and three paratypes from Diamond Creek, Victoria. Coll. J. A. Kershaw 11.iv.05. Paratype male from Kallista, Victoria : under log. Coll. A. N. Burns 18.ix.46. National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne. Nunciella kangarooensis, ni. sp. Holotype male. Measurements (mm.): Length scute 3-90, width scute 3-62, length carapace 1-64, length genital operculum 0-43, width genital operculum 0-42. Cox. Troch. Fem. Pat. Tib. Met. Tar. Total Leg 1 BS, 1-44 0-68 1-96 0-91 1-52 1-95 1-28 9-74 Leg 2 we 1-99 0-74 2-74 1-15 2-31 2°77 _ 2°70 14-40 Leg 3 ss 1-49 0-78 2-02 0-85 1-54 2-13 1°35 10-16 Leg 4 & 1-96 0-94 2-77 1-18 2-16 3°34 1-60 13-95 Pedipalp Jn oils 0-61 2-02 1-16 1-42 — 1-42 7-54 Chelicera : First segment 1-55, second segment 1:59, total 2-88. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. S. HUNT > west ort més en l6 7 — O.1 MM Text-fig. 3 Figs. 13-15. Nunciella tuberculata Forster. 13, Apical portion of penis, ventral view : 14, lateral view; 15, dorsal view. Figs. 16-18. Nuncvella kangarooensis, n. sp. 16, Apical portion of penis, dorsal view : 17, lateral view; 18, extreme apical portion, ventral view. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 1 60 GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND Colour: Dorsal body pattern as in Fig. 19. Carapace with background colour orange-brown superimposed with darker red-brown markings, including reticulations lateral to eyemound and distinct markings posterior to eyemound. Tergites generally darker than carapace, overall colour dark brown to black. Lighter markings down sides. Prominent club-shaped stripe posterior to scutal groove. Yellowish circular patch surrounding each of the two mesial granules in areas 2 and 3, less distinct patches in areas 1, 4 and 5. Row of patches along each free tergite. Pedipalps and chelicerae orange-brown with darker reticula- tions. Legs yellow-brown with dark brown and black markings. Body (Figs. 19, 21-23): Eyemound low, less than half as high as long, directed slightly forward, rising abruptly from just behind anterior margin of carapace and sloping back gently posterior to apex (Figs. 21-22). Apex with small setose granule. Six small tubercles directed obliquely forward and some small granules along anterior margin of carapace. Five other processes lower on anterior margin: one mesially placed and curved slightly upwards, one abutting retro- proximal boss of each chelicera, one outside each pedipalp. Each tergal area and free tergite with transverse row of setose granules, mesial ones larger. Most of scute with minute granulations but free tergites more sparsely covered. Scutal groove prominent mesially, groove between areas 4 and 5 distinct, extending towards lateral margins, that between areas 1 and 2 faintly indicated mesially, others indistinct. Free tergites tending to be fused to each other and to scute, a condition approaching that of NV. tasmaniensis. Sternites each with row of tiny setose granules. Margin of spiracle only obscured by one or two tubercles on coxa 4. Genital operculum smooth except for scattered hairs. Pems (Figs. 16-18): Apical portion complex and compact. Glans ventrally placed and dorsoventrally flattened, with pair of curved plates dorsal to it. Plates fused mid-dorsally except for large V-shaped notch. Ventral plates fused except for broad shallow indentation, each with one superior and three inferior setae. Chelicerae (Figs. 19, 27): Strong retroproximal boss on dorsal surface of first segment abutting process on anterior margin of carapace. Dorsal surface with a few small granules and prodistal spine directed obliquely forward. Dorsal surface of second segment with small inner sub-proximal spine, retrodorsal tubercle at two-thirds and small spine at retrodistal corner. Pedipalps (Figs. 24, 25): Moderately large. Trochanter with a few granules: Dorsal surface of femur with row of five prominent teeth, third and fourth largest: On ventral surface median proximal tooth modified into large laterally compressed process directed obliquely backwards (Fig. 25). With pedipalp lowered, posterior edge of this process in contact with modified cup-like process on coxa l. Four other teeth along ventral surface, second and fourth strong, first and third weak. Two large sub-distal teeth low on prolateral surface. Granule at two-thirds high on prolateral surface enlarged into denticle. Patella with large sub-distal tooth low on prolateral surface. Tibia with three teeth down each ventrolateral margin. Tarsus with small denticle followed by three teeth down retroventral margin and three teeth down proventral margin. Claw about 0-25 length of tarsus. Legs: Coxa 1 with large cup-like process in prodistal corner (Figs. 23, 29) and two spines near proventral margin, more distal stronger. Retroventral edge with sub-distal tubercles. Coxa 2 with small sub-distal spine on retrolateral surface and small tubercles more proximally. Maxillary lobe with three setose tubercles. Coxa 4 with pro- and retrolateral tubercles. Trochanter of each leg with small tubercles or granules, femora with rows of small tubercles and/or granules, those on leg 1 ventral surface largest. Each calcaneus much shorter PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF New SourH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 O.5 MM 1.O MM Text-fig. 4 Figs. 19-23. Nunciella kangarooensis, n. sp. 19, Dorsum of male showing colour pattern, with first segment of chelicerae also shown; 20, dorsum of female showing colour pattern, with first segment of chelicerae also shown; 21, male body, lateral view; 22, eyemound of male, lateral view ; 23, sterno-coxal region in male. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WaAtLgEsS, VoL. 96, Part 1 62 SENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND oe! O.2MM Text-fig. 5 Figs. 24-29. Nunciella kangarooensis, n. sp. 24, Male pedipalp, prolateral view > 25, retrolateral view; 26, female pedipalp, retrolateral view; 27, second segment of male chelicera, dorsal view ; 28, process in prodistal corner of coxa 1 in female; 29, same process in male. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaAtzs, Vow. 96, Part 1 G. S. HUNT 63 than astragalus, calcaneus of leg 1 without notch. Distitarsus of leg 1 two- segmented, that of leg 2 four-segmented. Tarsal formula: 4, 9-13, 4, 4. Allotype female. Measurements (mm.): Length scute 3-89, width scute 3-45, length carapace 1-49, length genital operculum 0-51, width genital operculum 0-47. Cox. Troch. Fem. Pat. Tib. Met. Tar. Total Leg 1 ae 1-18 0:57 1-82 0-81 1-35 1:78 1-08 8-59 Leg 2 ae 1:66 0:74 2-44 0-98 2-08 2:53 2-43 12-86 Leg 3 os Io B37 0:59 1:76 0-78 1-35 1-99 1322 9-06 Leg 4 ay 1-72 0-91 2-52 1:02 1:99 3°04 ets y55 12-75 Pedipalp sa 1:01 0:54 1-62 0-88 1-15 — 1-08 6-28 Chelicera: First segment 1-04, second segment 1-66, total 2-7C. 1.8 CARAPACE LENGTH (MM) 0.80 0.85 0.90 O95 1.00 RATIO SCUTE WIDTH TO LENGTH Text-fig. 6 Fig. 30. Nunciella kangarooensis, n. sp. Range of stoutness (ratio scute width to length) and size segregation of large and small males (dots) and females (circles). Female Characteristics: As in other species in the genus, sexual dimorphism is strong. Female differs from male in the following respects. Dorsal pattern without median stripe, tergal areas more clearly defined, yellow patches around granules more prominent (Fig. 20). Retroproximal boss on dorsal surface of cheliceral first segment absent, but small tubercle occupies a near position ; corresponding process on anterior margin reduced. Spine in retrodistal corner PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctery or New SourH WALES, Vow. 96, Part I 64 GENUS NUNCIELLA ROEWER NEW SPECIES KANGAROO ISLAND of second segment absent. Pedipalps (Fig. 26) smaller. Proximoventral tooth on femur not extremely modified, coxa 1 without extreme cup-like modification to bifid process in prodistal corner (Fig. 28). Body less stout than male, though not in all the population (Fig. 30). Female type of similar length to male, though females in general shorter (Fig. 30). Degree of fusion of free tergites less. As with NV. tuberculata, tarsus 1 in the female with three segments. Tarsal formula : 3, 8-11, 4, 4. REMARKS The males can be separated from those of other species in the genus, except some individuals of NV. aspera and N. karriensis, by the presence of five medio- dorsal teeth and two strong prolateral teeth on the pedipalp femur. A less eranulate eyemound distinguishes them from the other two species. N. kangarooensis, n. sp. is similar to N. twberculata in having four segments in tarsus 1 of the male and three in the female. It resembles many other species in having a club-shaped median stripe on the dorsal surface of many males. It resembles NV. tasmaniensis in the tendency for fusion of the free tergites in males. The structure of the genitalia suggests N. kangarooensis is more closely related to the eastern Australian species than those in Western Australia. Types Holotype male, allotype female and two paratype males in the Australian Museum, Sydney, Cat. No.’s K68773, K68774 and K68775. One male and one female paratype in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide. Locality Near Shackle Road crossing of Rocky River, Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Australia: in moist litter amongst the dead drooping blade-like leaves of tall monocots, one to two metres high (Type Locality). The habitat is Shaded by thick vegetation beside the river. Altitude, under 60 metres. Coll. G. 8S. Hunt 7.1.69. Variations The collection contains 25 males, 23 females and one small nymph. As can be seen from Fig. 30, the males fall into two distinct groups based on size, for which carapace length is used as an index. The females show less tendency to fall into groups, the majority lying between the two groups of males in size. The Size variations are summarized in Table 1. TABLE | Size Variation in Nunciella kangarooensis, n. sp. Scute length Seute width Carapace length Number (mm.) (mm.) (mm.) of Specimens Range Mean Range Mean Range Mean Group of larg males .. a6 17 3:69-4:42 3-93 3:24-3:82 3-56 1:50-1:72 1-67 Group of small males .. si 8 2:86-3:21 3-03 2-40-3-11 2-73 1-18-1-35 1-29 Females me 21 3:01-3:89 3-53 2-77-3-45 3-18 1-32-1-57 1-48 Two small females are not treated in the table as they do not fall into the main group. They have a scute length of 2-70 and 2:85 mm., scute width of 2-64 and 2:30 mm., and carapace length of 1-11 and 1-22 mm. The measure- ments of the nymph are 2-53, 2-09 and 1-04 mm. respectively. Both males and females show roughly the same range in stoutness (ratio scute width to length, Fig. 30). Individuals vary in the tendency for fusion of PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy oF New SoutH WAtgEsS, Vot. 96, Part 1 G. 8S. HUNT 65 the free tergites, the group of small males and the females generally showing less tendency. Both sexes vary slightly in body pattern. The density of granules on the scute varies, and the strength of teeth and shape of eyemound is subject to minor variation. The number of segments in tarsus 1, 3 and 4 is constant for each sex, except one male with five, not four, in right tarsus 1. The number of segments in tarsus 2 is subject to asymmetry and wide variation. The mean in females is 9-6 compared with 10-5 in males. The mode, however, is 10 in both sexes. The number of segments in distitarsus 2 is four in both sexes, except for one male with five in the right distitarsus. Male Dimorphism The two distinct groups of males (Fig. 30) are of interest. Individuals in both groups seem to have secondary sexual characteristics developed to the same degree. The two groups may indicate male dimorphism which has been recorded by Forster (1954) in some New Zealand triaenonychids and which also occurs in some Australian genera, notably Hquitius Simon. The presence of two small females in the collection means that no definite conclusions can be made until the life history of the species is known and more specimens studied. Habitat Like most of the Laniatores, NV. kangarooensis, n. sp. lives in humid situations which are provided by the shaded areas beside Rocky River. The species probably occurs beside other streams and around the edges of lagoons on the island. No specimens were found during limited searching on higher ground under the dead drooping leaves of the Xanthorrhoea (yakka) grass-tree, or under rocks in dolines on the limestone. Both situations, however, are potentially favourable habitats for harvestmen. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I wish to thank members of the Australian Speleological Federation, whose expedition to Kangaroo Island provided an opportunity for specimen collection. I am indebted to Mr. J. McNally, Director of the National Museum of Victoria, for the loan of material, and to Dr. C. N. Smithers and Mr. M. R. B. Gray of the Australian Museum for the assistance they have given me. I am especially grateful to Dr. A. M. Richards, University of New South Wales, and Dr. R. R. Forster, Director of the Otago Museum, New Zealand, for reading through the manuscript and offering useful criticisms and advice. _References Forster, R. R., 1949.—Australian Opiliones. Mem. Nat. Mus. Vict., No. 16: 59-89. , 1952.—Western Australian Opiliones. JI R. Soc. West. Aust., 36: 23-29. , 1954.—The New Zealand harvestmen (sub-order Laniatores). Canterbury Mus. Bull., No. 2: 1-329. , 1955.—Further Australian Opiliones. Aust. J. Zool., 3 (3): 354-411. , 1965.—Harvestmen of the suborder Laniatores from New Zealand caves. Rec. Otago Mus., No. 2: 1-18. Goopniecut, C. J., and Goopnicut, M. L., 1953.—Taxonomic recognition of variation in Opiliones. Syst. Zool., 2 (4): 173-180. Hickman, V. V., 1958.—Some Tasmanian harvestmen of the family Triaenonychidae. Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tasm., 91: 1-116. Kauri, H., 1955.—Report from Professor T. Gislen’s expedition to Australia i 1951-1952. 9. Harvest-spiders from §8.W. Australia. Lunds. Uni. Arsskr. N.F., Avd. 2, 50 (11): 1-10. Loman, J. C. C., 1910.—Opiliones. Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens, 3 (4): 127-134. Pocock, R. I., 1903.—On some new harvest-spiders of the order Opiliones from southern continents. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1902, Part 2: 392-413. Rorewer, C. Fr., 1915.—Die Familie der Triaenonychidae der Opiliones Laniatores. Arch. Naturg., Berlin, 1914, 80a (12): 61-168. , 1923.—Die Weberknechte der Hrde. G. Fischer, Jena, 1116 pp. , 1929.—Contribution to the fauna of Rottnest Island. No. V. Opiliones in the Western Australian Museum. J/ R. Soc. West. Aust., 15: 95-98. , 1931.—Uber Triaenonychidae (VI Erganzung der ‘‘ Weberknechte der Erde ”’, 1923). Zetts. f. wiss. Zool., 138 (1): 187-185. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SourH Wates, Vout. 96, Part I LATE DEVONIAN CONODONTS FROM THE LUTON FORMATION, NORTHERN NEW SOUTH WALES G. M. Puimip AND J. H. JACKSON Geology Department, University of New England, Armidale, N.S.W. (Plates v, v1) [Accepted for publication 18th November 1970] Synopsis A small Upper Devonian conodont fauna is described from a limestone lens in the lower part of the Luton Formation, northern New South Wales. The fauna indicates a late Fammenian (to VI) age. INTRODUCTION In this article a small conodont fauna of late Fammenian age from the base of the Luton Formation, northern New South Wales, is described. The occurrence of conodonts in an impure limestone horizon in the Late Devonian rocks of this region promises to provide an accurate correlation of these strata, as well as locating more precisely the Devonian/Carboniferous boundary in northern New South Wales. To date correlation of the thick Late Devonian epiclastic sequences of the ‘‘ Tamworth Trough” has been based on the few isolated occurrences of poorly preserved ammonoids (Pickett, 1960; Jenkins, 1966, 1968). This work is an aspect of a project on eastern Australian Devonian bio- stratigraphy, supported by the Australian Research Grants Committee. We are grateful to Dr. Gilbert Klapper, University of Iowa, for useful discussions of this paper. LOCALITY AND SIGNIFICANCE OF FAUNA The conodonts were recovered from an impure limestone lens in the lower part of the Luton Formation, 74 miles south-south-west of Horton (150° 24-3’ B., 30° 14-8’S.). This falls on the Horton Map Sheet provided by McKelvey and White (1964), who also gave a summary of the stratigraphy. These writers provisionally placed the base of the Carboniferous at the base of the Luton Formation. To date no other horizons in the Luton Formation have yielded conodonts. In all, approximately 50 kg. of sandy limestone was processed, and this yielded some 250 identifiable conodonts. The conodonts are dark brown in colour and have retained their ‘‘ white matter’’. Most of the conodonts are broken. The fauna is dominated by platform elements, in particular Palmatolepis gracilis, Polygnathus vogest, Polygnathus cf. pennatulus and Pseudopolygnathus dentilineatus. Twenty-six different species of disjunct conodont were recognized. Ziegler (1962) has provided the standard conodont zonation of the Upper Devonian, on the basis of sections mainly in the Rhenish Schiefergebirge. This was related by Ziegler to the well-established German ammonoid succession, and has been found to apply not only in Europe, but elsewhere in the world [e.g.. in N. America (Klapper, 1966) and W. Australia (Glenister and Klapper, 1966) ]. The highest Fammenian zone was named the costatus Zone by Ziegler (1962) and divided into three on the basis of the ranges of subspecies of Spathognathus costatus sensu Ziegler and Palmatolepis gonioclymeniae. The Lower costatus PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or New SoutH Watszs, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. M. PHILIP AND J. H. JACKSON 67 Zone falls in the upper part of the Clymenia Stufe (to V), whereas the Middle and Upper costatus Zones are approximately coextensive with the Wocklumeria Stufe (to VI). Although it is clear that the Luton conodont fauna is that of the costatus Zone, in the absence of S. costatus sensu Ziegler and P. gonioclymeniae it is difficult to arrive at a more precise estimate of its position. Palmatolepis gracilis sigmoidalis ranges throughout the costatus Zone. Polygnathus vogesi is said by Ziegler (1962) to range from the Middle costatus Zone into the Gatiendorfia Stufe. Pseudopolygnathus trigonicus was given by Ziegler (1962) as occurring in the Middle and Upper costatus Zones, although Freyer and Zakowa (1967) have extended the range down into the Lower costatus Zone. Spathognathodus aculeatus sensu Ziegler is usually considered to occur in the Lower and Middle costatus Zones, but there are problems in the identi- fication of this form species. Another platformed element in the fauna suggestive of a to VI age is Polygnathus sp. cf. symmetricus. Other elements appear to be longer ranging. The evidence therefore favours reference of the Luton conodont fauna to the Middle costatus Zone, equivalent to the early Wocklumeria Stufe (to V1). This indicates that the Devonian-Carboniferous boundary in New South Wales is to be found in the upper part of the Luton Formation. The to VI age for the lower part of the Luton Formation lends strong support to Pedder’s (1968) conclusion that the Kiah Limestone Member (with Cymaclymenia borahensis Pickett) of the underlying Mandowa Mudstone is of te V age. SYSTEMATICS Genus BRYANTODUS Bassler, 1925 Type species: Bryantodus typicus Bassler, 1925. Bryantodus sp. (Pl. v, Fig. 1) Figured hypotype: ¥F10901/1. Remarks: The most complete fragment of this form lacks the posterior bar. The anterior bar is arched and gently flexed, with fused, laterally compressed denticles. As far as can be ascertained, the species represented is similar to Bryantodus typicus Bassler (Huddle, 1968, p. 11, Pl. 3, figs. 1-15; PI. 4, figs. 12-15). Genus DIPLOPODELLA Bassler, 1925 Type species: Diplopodella bilateralis Bassler, 1925. Diplopodella sp. (Pl. v, Fig. 16) Figured hypotype: ¥10901/16. Remarks: The more complete of the two available specimens lacks one lateral bar. The cusp is laterally compressed and projects posteriorly to form a short posterior bar bearing two compressed denticles. The lateral limbs are deep and bear closed spaced, fused denticles. There is no basal cavity. Genus HIBBARDELLA Bassler, 1927 Type species: Prioniodus angulatus Hinde, 1879. Remarks: Recent discussions of the application of the genera Aibbardella, Roundya Hass, Ellisonia Miller and Diplopodella Bassler have been given by Philip (1966), Miiller and Clark (1967) and Huddle (1968), who are all in substantial agreement. Here Huddle’s interpretation of these genera has been followed. More recently Rhodes ef al. (1969, p. 111) have proposed a new subgenus Hassognathus, based on Trichognathus separatus Branson and Mehl, for similar forms in which the basal cavity is located more beneath the posterior bar. They also maintain Roundya as a subgenus of Hibbardella. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH WatEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 68 LATE DEVONIAN CONODONTS, LUTON FORMATION, N.S.W. Hibbardella sp. (Pl. v, Fig. 3) Figured hypotype: F10901/3. Remarks: The single available specimen of this form has a large subquadrate cusp and a deep basal cavity. It closely resembles Hibbardella barnetiana (Hass, 1953, p. 89, Pl. 16, figs. 8-9), the type species of Roundya Hass, but as all three processes are broken, no positive identification is made. Genus HINDEODELLA Bassler, 1925 Type species: Hindeodella subtilis Bassler, 1925. Hindeodella sp. (Pl. v, Fig. 2) Figured hypotype: F10901/2. Remarks: Specimens of Hindeodella in the collection are all extremely frag- mentary. It is likely that the specimen illustrated in Pl. v, Fig. 2 is referrable to H. subtilis Bassler as interpreted by Huddle (1968, pp. 17-18). The specimen illustrated as Hindeodella ? sp. in Pl. v, Fig. 11 (F10901/11) is apparently a different species, and, in the strong downward deflection of the anterior bar, resembles more closely Hindeodella alternata Ulrich and Bassler (Huddle, 1968, pp. 15-16, Pl. 5, figs. 1,3). As the posterior bar is missing, however, the specimen cannot be positively assigned to Hindeodella. Genus LIGONODINA Bassler, 1925 Type species: Ingonodina pectinata Ulrich and Bassler, 1926. Tigonodina bicurvata Mound (Pl. v, Fig. 10) LTigonodina delicata Branson and Mehl, 1934, p. 199, Pl. 14, figs. 22, 23. Ligonodina bicurvata Mound, 1968, p. 489, Pl. 66, figs. 22, 30 (q.v. for full synonymy). Tigonodina beata Rhodes, Austin and Druce, 1959, p. 135, Pl. 26, figs. 4-6). Not Phragmodus delicatula Branson and Mehl —Ligonodina delicata (Branson and Mehl). Figured hypotype: F10901/10. Description: This is a delicate species of Ligonodina with a long, gently recurved, somewhat flattened cusp continued downwards and inwards as a long anticusp. Up to about five isolated rounded denticles on anticusp; posterior bar with slender, backwardly directed, well separated, rounded denticles. Aboral surface of posterior bar marked with a longitudinal groove, which opens into the large basal cavity and is continued to the extremity of the anticusp. Remarks: Mound’s (loc. cit.) correction of the primary homonym which arose from Bergstrém’s (1964, pp. 28-29) reference of Phragmodus delicatus Branson and Mehl to Ligonodina has priority over that of Rhodes et al. Ethington (1965) has noted that the L. bicurvata ranges from the Middle Devonian through into the Early Carboniferous. Genus LONCHODINA Bassler, 1925 Type species: Lonchodina typicalis Bassler, 1925. Lonchodina spp. (Pl. v, Figs. 9, 14-15) Figured hypotypes : F10901/9, 14, 15. Remarks: A number of asymmetrical, twisted and arched bar elements are present in the collection. Three different species of Lonchodina appear to be represented by the illustrated specimens. Of these, that shown in PI. v, Fig. 15 resembles closely Lonchodina clavata (Hinde). However, more material is necessary before positive identification can be made. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or New SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. M. PHILIP AND J. H. JACKSON 69 Genus NEOPRIONIODUS Rhodes and Miller, 1956 Type species: Prioniodus conjunctus Gunnell, 1931. Neoprioniodus oligus (Cooper) (Pl. vi, Fig. 14) Prioniodus oligus Cooper, 1939, p. 405, Pl. 46, figs. 9-11, 63, 71 ; Pl. 47, figs. 20-21. Prioniodina oliga (Cooper), Bischoff, 1957, pp. 47-48. Neoprioniodus oligus (Cooper), Hass, 1959, p. 384, Pl. 47, fig. 3. Figured hypotype: F10900/14. Description: A form of Neoprioniodus in which the denticles of the posterior bar are strongly compressed and may be completely fused to form a deep ridge which merges with the cusp. Cusp flattened with anterior and posterior keels. Basal cavity large with a flaring inner margin. Remarks: The single specimen recovered from the Luton Formation is identical with the material described by Hass (loc. cit.) from the Chappel Limestone of Texas. Hitherto the species appears to have been recorded only from Early Carboniferous strata. Genus OZARKODINA Branson and Mehl, 1933 Type species: Ozarkodina typica Branson and Mehi. Ozarkodina spp. (Pl. v, Figs. 4, 12, 13) Figured hypotypes: F10901/4, 12, 13. Remarks: Three separate species of Ozarkodina appear to be present in the collection, but all of the specimens are fragmentary. The form illustrated in Pl. v, Fig. 4 resembles closely O. macra Branson and Mehl, whereas that shown in Pl. v, Fig. 12 is a more delicate unit, and so may be compared with O. elegans (Stauffer). The specimen illustrated in Pl. v, Fig. 13 has a tiny basal cavity and a poorly differentiated cusp. These characters appear to distinguish it from previously described species. Genus PALMATOLEPIS Ulrich and Bassler, 1926 Type species: Palmatolepis perlobata Ulrich and Bassler, 1926. Remarks: Attempts to subdivide this widespread Devonian form genus (Miiller, 1956 ; Helms, 1963) have not met with general acceptance. Although the genus is generally considered to be confined to the Late Devonian, Huddle (1968, p. 33) has suggested that his (1934) P. minuta (non Branson and Mehl) is an authentic Early Mississippian species. Palmatolepis graciiis Branson and Mehl Palmatolepis gracilis Branson and Mehl, 1934, p. 238, Pl. 18, figs. 2, 8 (not fig. 5) ; Mehl and Ziegler, 1963, pp. 200-205, PI. 1, figs. 1-2. Palmatolepis (Deflectolepis) deflectens Muller, 1956a, p. 32, Pl. 11, figs. 28-39. Remarks: This species of Palmatolepis usually possesses a narrow platform running parallel with the carina. The platform is widest anteriorly and tapers to the posterior end. The outer margin of platform is regularly convex at the anterior end, and the inner margin forms an anterior subcircular lobe. Ziegler (1962) distinguished two subspecies, both of which occur in the Luton Formation. Palmatolepis gracilis gracilis Branson and Mehl (Pl. v1, Figs. 8-10, 26-29) Palmatolepis gracilis Branson and Mehl, 1934, p. 238, Pl. 18, figs. 2, 8 (not fig. 5) ; Wolska, 1967, p. 395, Pl. 11, figs. 1-3, 5 (not fig. 4 =P. gracilis sigmoidalis). Palmatolepis deflectens deflectens Muller, Ziegler, 1962, p. 56, Pl. 3, figs. 17-22 ; Freyer in Freyer and Zakowa, 1967, pp. 114-115, Pl. 1, fig. 1; Pl. 2, figs. 3-4. Palmatolepis gracilis gracilis Branson and Mehl, Klapper, 1966, p. 31, Pl. 6, fig. 3 ; Klapper and Glenister, 1966, pp. 814-815, Pl. 90, fig. 6 (q.v. for full synonymy); Druce, 1969, pp. 88-89, Pl. 17, figs. 3a—5d. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutsH WALES, Vou. 96, Part |] 70 LATE DEVONIAN CONODONTS, LUTON FORMATION, N.S.W. Figured hypotypes : F10900/8-10, 26-29. Description: This subspecies of P. gracilis has a gently to strongly curved blade and carina. The keel is offset parallel to the margin of the inner platform lobe to form a semicircular ridge (Pl. vi, Fig. 27). Remarks: Klapper (loc. cit.) has pointed out that in some specimens of P. gracilis gracilis the platform may become relatively large so that they resemble P. gonio- clymeniae. In this latter species, however, the posterior end is arched upwards, the carina is more sharply deflected, and this deflection takes place closer to the anterior end. The larger specimens in the Luton fauna have been previously listed as P. gonioclymeniae in Pedder (1968, p. 141). Palmatolepis gracilis sigmoidalis Ziegler (Pl. vi, Figs. 5-7) Palmatolepis deflectens sigmoidalis Ziegler, 1962, pp. 56-57, Pl. 3, figs. 24-28. Palmatolepis gracilis sigmoidalis Ziegler, Klapper, 1966, p. 31, Pl. 6, fig. 8 (q.v. for full synonymy) ; Druce, 1969, p. 89, Pl. 17, figs. 2a-b. Palmatolepis gracilis Branson and Mehl, Wolska, 1967, p. 395, Pl. 11, fig. 4 (not figs. 1-3, 5 =P. gracilis gracilis). Figured hypotypes: ¥10900/5-7. Description: In this subspecies of P. gracilis the carina and platform are strongly sigmoidal. Remarks: The specimens from the Luton Formation bear out Klapper’s (loc. cit.) observation that this subspecies lacks the semicircular offset of the keel which is present in the nominate subspecies. P. gracilis sigmoidalis is confined to the Spathognathodus costatus Zone (sensu Ziegler, 1962) in both Europe and N. America. Genus POLYGNATHUS Hinde, 1879 Type species: Polygnathus dubius Hinde, 1879. Polygnathus cf. pennatulus Ulrich and Bassler (Pl. v, Figs. 23-27) Cf. Polygnathus pennatulus Ulrich and Bassler, 1926, p. 45, Pl. 7, fig. 8, text-fig. i () Polygnathus pennatula Ulrich and Bassler, Huddle, 1968, pp. 40-41, Pl. 15, figs. 11-12 (q.v. for full synonymy). Figured hypotypes: ¥F10901/23-27. Description: The platform is thick and subtriangular with a high carina flanked by short, deep troughs. The unit is somewhat bowed and arched. The margins of the platform are crenulated by sharp transverse ridges. The basal cavity is relatively large, circular to ovate, usually with prominent lips. Remarks : The Luton form is somewhat more laterally bowed than the specimens described by Huddle (loc. cit.). Itis therefore only compared with P. pennatulus. Polygnathus bischoffi Rhodes et al. (1969, pp. 184-185, Pl. 13, figs. 8a—11e) is a species very close to, if not identical with P. pennatulus. Polygnathus cf. symmetricus Branson (Pl. v, Figs. 17-18) Cf. Polygnathus symmetrica Branson, 1934, p. 310, Pl. 25, fig. 11; Klapper, 1966, p. 21, Pl. 4, figs. 7,9; Pl. 6, figs. 1, 5 (q.v. for full synonymy). Figured hypotype: F10901/17. Remarks : Although the illustrated specimen has a nearly bilaterally symmetrical platform with the anterolateral margins only slightly upturned, its posterior end is attenuated. It is therefore intermediate between P. symmetricus and P. longiposticus Branson and Mehl (Klapper, 1966, pp. 20-21). Klapper (loc. cit.) noted that many specimens in his material also were intermediate between these two species. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. M. PHILIP AND J. H. JACKSON (at P. symmetricus ranges from to VI strata (Bischoff, 1956) to cw II strata (Bischoff and Ziegler, 1956). Polygnathus vogesi Ziegler (Pl. v, Figs. 8, 19-22) Polygnathus vogest Ziegler, 1962, pp. 94-95, Pl. 11, figs. 5-7. Polygnathus styriaca Ziegler mm Fligel and Ziegler, 1957, pp. 47-48, Pl. 1, fig. 11 (not figs. 12-13 =styriacus). Polygnathus cf. styriaca Ziegler, Voges, 1959, p. 294, Pl. 34, figs. 36-41. Figured hypotypes: F10901/8, 19-22. Description: This species of Polygnathus has a thin, upwardly arched, lanceolate platform. The platform is ornamented with two distinct denticulate ridges which run from the anterolateral corners to the central part of the platform. The anterior margin of the platform is deeply trough-shaped and grooves usually are present also posterior to the radiating ridges. Aboral surface has a tiny basal cavity mounted on the prominent keel. The lower surface may possess grooves complementary to the radiating ridges of the oral surface. Remarks : This species closely resembles P. communis carinus Hass, 1959. Voges (loc. cit.) has already noted that in this latter form the basal cavity is distinctly larger, the radiating ridges are less regular, and the anterior end of the platform less sunken. The Australian specimens closely resemble those described by Voges. The specimens on which Ziegler (loc. cit.) based the species tend to have a somewhat broader platform and a suggestion of nodose ornament on the posterior part of the platform. In Europe P. vogesi ranges from the Middle costatus Zone (to V ?-to VI) (Ziegler, 1962) into cu I strata. Polygnathus sp. (Pl. v, Figs. 5-7) Figured hypotypes: F10901/5, 7. Remarks: This species resembles most closely Polygnathus obliquicostatus Ziegler (1962, pp. 92-93, Pl. 11, figs. 8-12 ; Klapper, 1966, p. 22, Pl. 6, figs. 2, 4). In its upper surface morphology it differs most notably in that the transverse ridges of the inner platform are not so oblique to the carina, and the carina extends to the posterior end of the platform. A keel is present throughout the length of the unit. In the possession of a rostrum, this species, like P. obliquicostatus, resembles species of Siphonodella. However, Klapper (1966), in distinguishing Siphono- della and Polygnathus, has emphasized that the latter genus has a raised keel which runs the length of the platform and is interrupted only by the basal cavity. In contrast, the keel of Siphonodella is either absent or is represented by a thin sroove which runs some distance posterior to the basal cavity. This species, which is abundantly represented in material of Early Carboniferous age from Queensland, will be described in detail elsewhere. Genus PSEUDOPOLYGNATHUS Branson and Mehl, 1934 Type species: Pseudopolygnathus primus Branson and Mehl. Pseudopolygnathus dentilineatus Branson (Pl. vi, Figs. 23-25) Pseudopolygnathus dentilineata Branson, 1934, p. 317, Pl. 26, fig. 22; Bishcoff, 1957, pp. 50-51, Pl. 4, figs. 29-32, 34; Voges, 1959, pp. 300-301, Pl. 34, figs. 49-50; Klapper, 1966, pp. 14-15, Pl. 5, figs. 10-11 (q.v. for full Synonymy); van Adrichem Boogaert, 1966, p. 185, Pl. 3, fig. 8; Canis, 1968, p. 546, Pl. 73, figs. 10, 29-31. Pseudopolygnathus dentilineatus Branson, Rhodes et al., 1969, pp. 208-209, Pl. 5, figs. 9a-13c; PI. 6, figs. 8a-c. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sours Watgs. Vou. 96. Part 1 12 LATE DEVONIAN CONODONTS, LUTON FORMATION, N.S.W. Pseudopolygnathus vogesi Rhodes et al., 1969, pp. 216-217, Pl. 5, figs. la-c, 3a-c, 5a-8 ; Druce, 1969, pp. 114-115, Pl. 36, figs. la—7b. Figured hypotypes: F10900/23-25. Description: The platform is usually narrow and pointed and ornamented with coarse nodes or irregular transverse ridges. The right side of the platform extends further toward the anterior end than does the left side. Basal cavity large, covering the entire width of the platform, and usually has flaring lips. Remarks: Rhodes et al. (1969), on the basis of the Carboniferous conodont sequence of Britain, postulated three successive independent developments of Pseudopolygnathus from species of Spathognathodus with double rows of denticles. The first development included forms which they named as P. vogesi and considered as homeomorphs of P. dentilineatus. This latter name was restricted to a form postulated as originating from Spathognathodus as a later time. No morphological characters serve to distinguish these species. Until such time as a similar discontinuity in the occurrence of species of Pseudopolygnathus is established in N. America (e.g. in the Hannibal Formation in Missouri) it seems premature to follow this division. Forms of the morphology of P. dentilineatus have a total range from the Upper styriacus Zone (to V) to the Z zone of the British Avonian (? ew IT beta/gamma). Pseudopolygnathus trigonicus Ziegler (Pl. vi, Figs. 16-19) Pseudopolygnathus trigonica Ziegler, 1962, pp. 101-102, Pl. 12, figs. 8-13 ; Freyer and Zakowa, 1967, pp. 109-110. Figured hypotypes: F10900/16-19. Description: This species of Pseudopolygnathus has a thin, arched, triangular platform and a long high blade. The platform is ornamented with nodes, the largest of which form secondary carinae which run to the anterolateral margins of the platform. The inner platform usually has a secondary lobe. The aboral surface with a central pit and a well-defined posterior keel. Arising from the keel are two ridges, one of which runs to the lateral extremity of the outer platform and the other to the secondary lobe of the inner platform. Remarks: The lateral ridges of the aboral surface delineate a shallow asym- metrical depression beneath the anterior part of the platform. This is interpreted as the basal cavity, and, as a consequence, the species was referred by Ziegler to Pseudopolygnathus. The species cannot be located here without some reservation as its upper surface morphology, however, is more akin to that of Ancyrodella. Ziegler (1962) originally gave the range of P. trigonicus as Middle to Upper costatus Zone. Freyer and Zakowa (loc. cit.) have extended its range to the Lower costatus Zone in Poland. Genus SPATHOGNATHODUS Branson and Mehl, 1941 Type species: Ctenognathus murchisoni Pander, 1856. Spathognathus aculeatus (Branson and Mehl) (PI. vi, Figs. 12, 20) Spathodus aculeatus Branson and Mehl, 1934, pp. 186-187, Pl. 17, figs. 11, 14. Spathognathodus aculeatus (Branson and Mehl, Ziegler, 1962, pp. 105-106, Pl. 13, figs. 27-36 ; Bouckaert and Ziegler, 1965, Pl. 5, figs. 1-4; Klapper, 1966, p. 24, Pl. 6, figs. 15-17; Glenister and Klapper, 1966, pp. 835-836, Pl. 95, fig. 11 (q.v. for complete synonymy); van Adrichem Boogaert, 1966, p. 186, Pl. 3, fig. 19; Freyer and Zakowa, 1967, p. 120, Pl. 1, fig. 12 ; Wolska, 1967, p. 425, Pl. 19, figs. 4-8. Spathognathodus cf. S. aculeatus (Branson and Mehl), Druce, 1969, p. 124, Pl. 27, figs. 5a-e. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 1 G. M. PHILIP AND J. H. JACKSON ites Figured hypotypes: F10900/12, 20. Remarks: The Luton specimens are all broken but are certainly referrable to S. aculeatus, as generally interpreted. This form species usually has three to five lateral denticles joined to those of the blade by transverse ridges in the region of the basal cavity, which is mounted at midlength and is wide and circular. Recently Rhodes e al. (1969, p. 236) stated that ‘‘ forms described from Germany and identified by Ziegler (1961) and other authors may be distinct from 8S. aculeatus and are probably a new species”. As no basis for such a separation is apparent, here Ziegler’s (1962) and Klapper’s (1966) interpretation of the species is followed and the specimens from the Bonaparte Gulf Basin, compared by Druce with this species, are included in it. Rhodes et al. (op. cit.) also describe a new species, S. plumulus, which differs from 8S. aculeatus in the possession of high, crested denticles at the anterior end of the unit. As interpreted here, the species in Germany ranges from the middle Lower costatus Zone to the Middle costatus Zone (i.e. the boundary of to V and VI) to to VI alpha (Ziegler, 1962). It has a similar range in Spain (Higgins ef al., 1964 ; van Adrichem Bouckaert, 1966), Belgium (Bouckaert and Ziegler, 1965), Poland (Freyer and Zakowa, 1967; Wolska, 1967), the Mississippi Valley (Collinson, Scott and Rexroad, 1962, pp. 17, 18), the Canning Basin, Western Australia (Glenister and Klapper, 1966) and the Bonaparte Gulf Basin, Western Australia (Druce, 1969). Canis’s (1968) record of this species from the Bachelor Formation of Missouri of cu II alpha age is based on S. antiposicornis Scott. Spathognathus crassidentatus (Branson and Mehl) (Pl. vi, Fig. 1) Spathodus crassidentatus Branson and Mehl, 1934, p. 276, Pl. 22, fig. 17. Spathognathodus crassidentatus (Branson and Mehl), Klapper, 1966, p. 23, Pl. 5, figs. 15-17 (q.v. for full synonymy) ; Canis, 1968, pp. 552-553, PI. 74, fig. 29 ; Rhodes et al., 1969, pp. 226-227, Pl. 3, figs. la—4b ; Druce, 1969, pp. 127-128, Pl. 27, figs. 2a—3b. Figured hypotype: F10900/1. Description: This is a bladed unit, slightly arched in profile, sloping downwards to its posterior end. The anterior end has two enlarged denticles, markedly wider and higher than the remainder. The basal cavity extends from somewhat in front of midlength to near the posterior end; its greatest width is at the rounded anterior margin, whence it tapers to the posterior end. Remarks: The Luton specimens agree closely with the paucidenticulate forms described by Klapper (loc. cit.) rather than, for example, those illustrated by Rhodes et al. (loc. cit.). Most authors, however, have commented on the wide range of variation in this species. Hitherto, S. crassidentatus has been recorded only from Early Carboniferous strata in N. America (Klapper, 1966 ; Canis, 1968), Europe (Rhodes e¢ al., 1969), and Australia (Druce, 1969). Spathognathodus praelongus Cooper (Pl. v1, Fig. 21) Spathognathodus praelongus Cooper in Cooper and Sloss, 1943, p. 175, Pl. 28, fig. 14 ; Klapper, 1966, p. 24, Pl. 6, fig. 23 (q.v. for full synonymy). Figured hypotype: ¥10900/21. Remarks: This is a bladed species of Spathognathodus with the posterior end of unit incurved. A slightly enlarged denticle present above the basal cavity, which is marked toward the posterior end of unit. Klapper (loc. cit.) gives the range of this species as Late Devonian in N. America. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WateEs, Vor. 96. Part 1 74 LATE DEVONIAN CONODONTS, LUTON FORMATION, N.S.W. Spathognathodus sp. A (Pl. vi, Figs. 11-12) Figured hypotypes : F10900/11, 12. Remarks: This is a bladed form of Spathognathodus in which the unit tends to be incurved. In profile the unit is arched. The basal cavity is symmetrical, widest at its anterior end and extending to near the posterior end of the unit. All specimens are badly broken, so that the species represented cannot be positively identified. It appears to be close to Late Devonian forms identified as 8. stabilis (Branson and Mehl) (e.g. Klapper, 1966, PI. 5, fig. 6). Spathognathodus sp. B (Pl. vi, Figs. 2-4) Figured hypotypes: F10900/2—4. Remarks : This is a massive species of Spathognathodus with regular denticulation and a prominent asymmetric basal cavity mounted toward the posterior end of the unit. Nodes may be present on the upper surface of the lobes of the basal cavity. The form apparently bears little relationship to previously described Upper Devonian species. Genus SYNPRIONIODINA Bassler, 1925 Type species: Synprioniodina alternata Bassler, 1925. Synprioniodina sp. (Pl. vi, Figs. 13, 15) Figured hypotypes: F10900/13, 15. Remarks: In all of the available specimens the posterior bar is missing, so that positive identification is not possible. The cusp and the denticulated anticusp compare closely with those of Synprioniodina alternata Bassler (Huddle, 1968, pp. 45-46, Pl. 6, figs. 3-5, 12). References ADRICHEM BooGaERT, H. A. Van, 1967.—Devonian and Lower Carboniferous conodonts of the Cantabrian Mountains (Spain) and their stratigraphic application. Leidse geol. Meded., 39: 129-192. BeEerGstrom,, S. M., 1964.—Remarks on some Ordovician conodont faunas from Wales. Acia Univ. Lund., 186: 1-66. Biscuorr, G., 1957.—Die Conodonten-Stratigraphie der rhenoherzynischen Unterkarbons mit Berucksichtigung der Wocklumeria-Stufe und der Devon/Karbon Grenze. New Guinea Dog, and reminding one of the Motu legend regarding the gift of speech. Suggestive also of an age-old association with man, though not of course the order of it. CONCLUSION A Papuan region covering the obvious biological unity of the mountainous region of Papua with the Atherton Tableland of N.E. Queensland, was proposed by Charles Hedley (1894). The types of vegetation, reptiles, birds, and marsupials were such, according to Hedley, that any traveller in the heart of the Atherton rainforest ‘‘ could scarcely answer, from the surroundings, whether he were in New Guinea or Australia ”’. Therefore, according with the recent discovery of skeletal remains of the Thylacine or ‘‘ marsupial wolf ’’ at 5,000 ft. (1,525 m.) in the Central Highlands of New Guinea, and doubtless its past occurrence on the Atherton Tableland, in view of persistent reports of a large striped marsupial having inhabited the Tableland, it is now postulated that the New Guinea Highland Dog had a similar prehistoric co-distribution, and became ancestral to the wild dog or Dingo of the Australian mainland, which provided an ample field for the development of the Dingo’s hunting resources and physical growth. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Wates, VoL. 96, Part 2 98 EARLY HISTORY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF NEW GUINEA HIGHLAND DOG References ANONYMOUS ARTICLE, 1842.—Australasian Islands. Colonial Magazine, 7: 62. BAUERLEN, WILLIAM, 1886.—The Voyage of the Bonito: An Account of the Fly River Expedition to New Guinea, pp. 28-29. Dz Vis, C. W., 1911.—A dog from British New Guinea. Ann. Qld. Mus., 10: 19-20, Pl. i. HEDLEY, CHARLES, 1894.—The faunal regions of Australia. Rept. Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, 5: 444. JENTINE, Dr. F. A., 1896.—The Dog of the Tengger. Notes Leyden Mus., 18: 217-220. Jones, F. Woop, 1925.—The mammals of South Australia. Handbook, 3: 151-157. , 1929. The cranial characters of the Papuan dog. Amer. Journ. Mammology, 10 (4) : 329-333, figs. 1-2. Loneman, HEBER A., 1928.—Notes on the dingo, the Indian wild dog, and a Papuan dog. Mem. Qld. Mus., 9 (2): 151-157. MacereGor, Sir Wmn., 1898.—Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1897-1898, p. 27. Mactay, N. DE Mixiouno-, 1881.—On the circumvolutions of the cerebrum of Canis dingo. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 6 (3): 624-626. Morton, ALEXANDER, 1883.—Notes on a trip to the islands of Torres Straits and the S.E. coast of New Guinea. Proc. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Austr., N.S.W. and Vict. Branches, i: 69. Prapo, Dreco pE, 1606.—Relacion of Torres’ voyages through the Strait, as translated from the Spanish by N. H. Stevens (1930). In New Light on the Discovery of Australia, p. 141. Ramsay, E. P., 1879.—Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 3 (3): 242. Rosen, Dr. Von, 1953.—Journal of the Swedish Kennel Club. Scouuz, Dr. Von Wo.urHart, 1969.—Zur Kenntnis des Hallstromhundes (Canis hallstromi Troughton 1957). Sonderdruck aus Zool. Anz., 183 (1-2): 47-72. Tats, G. H. H., 1952.—Archbold Exped., No. 66, Mammals of Cape York Peninsula (note on New Guinea dogs). Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 98 (7): 613-614. Troucuton, Exiis, 1957.—A new native dog from the Papuan highlands. Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1955-1956: 93-94. , 1967.—Furred Animals of Australia. 9th Edition, pp. 48—52. Wiutiams, F. E., 1930.—The Orokaiva Society, p. 62. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 2 AN UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF USTILAGO ON CY PERUS LUCIDUS R.Br. IN AUSTRALIA WITH COMMENTS ON ROBERT BROWN’S TYPE COLLECTION OF C. lucidus J. WALKER Biology Branch, Biological and Chemical Research Institute, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere, N.S.W. (Plates x, x1) [Accepted for publication 17th February 1971] Synopsis An ovary smut of Cyperus lucidus R. Br. found in New South Wales is described as Ustilago cypert-lucidt n. sp. It was also found in one collection of C. lucidus from Queensland and one from Victoria. Hxamination of two portions of Robert Brown’s original gathering of C. lucidus, made in N.S.W. in 1802-1805, showed that the smut was present in the portion filed in the Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, but not in the lectotype specimen in the British Museum (Natural History). The relationship of U. cyperi-lucidi to other species with pale spores, and especially to Ustilago spp. on Cyperaceae and Juncaceae, is discussed. INTRODUCTION During an examination of collections of Cyperus spp. at the National Herbarium of New South Wales, Mr. O. D. Evans found abnormal nuts in some collections of Cyperus lucidus R. Br. Detailed examination showed them to be filled with a vellowish nowder comnosed of snores of an hitherto unrecognized Mine ‘ions CORRIGENDA P. 100.—For Plate IX, read Plate X. For Plate X, read Plate XT. P. 102.—For Plate X, read Plate XT. itiae P. 103.—For Plate X, read Plate XI. eat P. 104.—For Plate X, read Plate XI. pitis P. 107.—For Plate IX, read Plate X. lina, For Plate X, read Plate XI. lata, oris. S et primitus 10-15 in fasciculis laxe adherentes, demum singulatim, interdum cum frustillis affixis hypharum, (15) 16-22 (25) um diam., spora gigantea rara ad 27 wm diam., vel sporae ovales 17-23 (25)x12-17 ym (minus quam 10% sporarum), pallide viridi-flavae usque pallide flavobrunneae, pariete 1-5—2-0 um lato, episporio subtiliter reticulato vel imperfecte reticulato, reticulum 1 -5-2-0 um altum, areolis 1-5—2-0 (2-5) um diam. Sporae in solano glucoso agaro ad 15—21° C. in diem per promycelium 3-septatum 26-33 x 5-9 um germinantes et sporidia ovalia 7-10 x 4-6 um a omni cellula formata. Habitat: In acheniis Cyperi lucidi in Nova Wallia Australi, Victoria et Terra Reginae, Australia. Holotypus: In pasture, property of R. Skellern, Wyndham, west of Pambula, N.S.W., 11.vii.1969, J. Hindle, DAR 17587a. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New Sours Wates, Vou, 96, Part 2 100 UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF USTILAGO CYPERUS LUCIDUS R.Br. U. cyperi-lucidi forms its sori within the nuts and in most collections all nuts in an infected inflorescence are smutted. Infected inflorescences are very difficult to detect except by a detailed examination of the florets, when the glumes are seen to be slightly more spread than in healthy florets. They are pushed open by the swollen diseased nuts between them (Plate rx, Fig. A). Sori are grey, elliptical to broadly obovate, and roughly the same length as normal nuts but somewhat wider (Plate 1x, Fig. C). They measure 1-5-2-0 mm. long and 1-1-5 mm. wide; nuts are roughly 2 mm. long and 0-5—0-8 mm. wide. In section, sori have a more rounded outline than the three-angled outline of normal nuts. The sori are covered by the unaltered wall of the nut, with no sign of a fungal sheath. At maturity, they split open, often along one side (the central sorus in Plate 1x, Fig. C) to expose the pale yellow (Munsell (1967) 7-5Y 9/4-6 ; Ridgeway (1912) Naphthalene Yellow) to pale yellow brown (Munsell 2-5Y 9/4-6 ; Ridgeway Warm Buff) spore mass. Some sori have a darker, pale reddish brown (Munsell 2-5YR 7/10; Ridgeway Ochraceous Salmon) spore mass and, in some sori with an otherwise pale spore mass, spores towards the base of the sorus are this darker colour. The spore mass is at first agglutinated but later powdery. There is a central columella of host vascular tissue. Spores are mainly globose to subglobose, some oval, and a few slightly more angular in shape. Some tend to adhere in clumps of 10-15 or more, especially in the lighter coloured spore masses, and spores from such masses are usually more angular in outline than single spores. Spores from pale spore masses also have a paler golden yellow to greenish yellow (Munsell 10Y 9/6-8, 2-5GY 9/4; Ridgeway Pale Green-Yellow) wall than those from the darker spore masses, where the spore wall is darker yellow to light golden brown (Munsell 5Y 9/8, 7-5Y 9/10; Ridgeway Buff Yellow to Light Orange Yellow). Spores measure (15) 16-22 (25) um in diameter, with an occasional giant spore up to 27 um. Oval spores are 17—23 (25) x12-17 um, and make up less than 10° of the number of spores. In some sori, fragments of hyaline hyphae 1-5-4 ym wide are seen amongst the spores. Often they are branched and twisted, and they vary in width along their length. Several spores with hyphal fragments up to 10-12 »m long attached to them occur and some spores have two fragments attached on opposite sides. The hyphae in the sori and attached to spores are seen mainly in paler, more agglutinated, less mature sori. The spore wallis rough. In equatorial view (Plate x, Fig. A) the roughening is seen as conical blunt projections, 1-5—2-0 um high and 1-5 um wide at the base. In surface view (Plate x, Fig. B; Text-fig. 1) these projections are seen to be the ridges of a reticulum, which is sometimes complete and produces angular areolae 1-5—-2-0 (2-5) um across. Often several ridges do not join up and an incomplete reticulum is formed. In a minority of spores, the surface pattern is seen aS elongated, sometimes branched ridges, which seems to represent a very incomplete reticulum (Text-fig. 1). These do not seem to be developmental stages as all patterns have been seen on lighter and darker spores in both agglutinated and powdery sori. Explanation of Text-fig. 1. Text-fig. 1. Figs. A-D. Surface markings of Ustilago cyperi-lucidi spores, showing complete and incomplete reticulate patterns. Figs. E-F. Details of reticulum. Figs. G-H. Spores germinating by septate promycelium producing sporidia. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER logim PROCEEDINGS oF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watgs. Vot. 96, Part 2 102 UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF USTILAGO CYPERUS LUCIDUS R.Br. Germination occurs within 24 hours when dry spores are sown on potato dextrose agar plates at room temperature (fluctuating 15°-21°C. during the test). A four-celled promycelium from 26-33 ym long and 5-9 um wide is formed and each cell produces oval sporidia 7-10 x 4-6 wm (Plate x, Fig. EH; Text-fig. 1, G—H). Plants from the type collection have been grown on in the glasshouse. Basal shoots from infected parent plants gave rise to daughter plants with smutted florets, indicating that the smut systemically infects its host. RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER SPECIES There are comparatively few species of Ustilago with a light coloured (yellowish brown to light reddish brown) spore powder. The seed smuts of Cruciferae (Ustilago thlaspeos (Beck) Lagerh. in Syd., and others) and of Oxalis spp. (Ustilago oxalidis Ell. and Tracy), and a few species on hosts in the families Junecaceae and Cyperaceae fall into this group. Nannfeldt (1959) suspects that the crucifer smuts and U. oxalidis show some relationship to those species of Thecaphora which have a pale spore powder. The pale reddish-brown colour of the spore powder in some sori of U. cyperi-lucidi is somewhat lighter than that seen in spore powders of Thecaphora deformans Dur. and Mont. in Tul. (DAR 11070: spore mass reddish-brown, Munsell 10R 4-6/10) and 7. seminis- convolouli (Desm.) Liro (DAR 13830: spore mass reddish-brown, Munsell 10R 4/8) but is very similar to that seen in a specimen of U. oralidis (DAR 11080 : pale reddish-brown, Munsell 2-5YR 6/12). In U. cyperi-lucidi, there is no sign of permanent spore balls or of spores ornamented only on one surface, or of other characteristics currently held for the genus Thecaphora. Spores of U. cyperi- lucidi are larger than those of U. owalidis and U. thlaspeos and differ in ornamentation. On the family Cyperaceae, Fischer and Holton (1957) list 111 species of smut fungi in 16 genera, and many other names occur in the literature. In Fischer and Holton’s list there are only six species of Ustilago and one variety on hosts in this family and only one of these, Ustilago subnitens Schroter and P. Hennings, in Hennings (1896) resembles U. cyperi-lucidi. U. subnitens was described originally from Brazil on Scleria sp. near S. pratensis Lind., and has also been reported on S. hispidula Hochst. from Ethiopia by Zundel (1953). It was described as an ovary smut, and in his commentary Hennings (1896) states that only some florets in an inflorescence were infected. The sori remained long closed and were pale cinnamon in colour. The spores were described as subglobose to ellipsoidal, 12-18 x10-15 um, with a smooth yellowish-brown epispore. He stated that thin threads were sometimes present between the spores and attached to some of them. From the description, U. subnitens seems similar to U. cyperi-lucidi, differing in the smaller smooth spores. Unfor- tunately the type specimen is unavailable in Herb. B and was possibly lost during World War II (Dr. H. Scholz, personal communication). No specimens under the name U. subnitens were found in the National Fungus Collections at Beltsville, where Zundel’s collections are kept (Dr. C. R. Benjamin, personal communication). Thus, no direct comparison of U. subnitens and U. cyperi- lucidi can be made. U. cyperi-lucidi does not resemble any other smut described on Cyperaceae. On the family Juncaceae, there are three species of Ustilago with a yellowish- brown spore powder. These are U. capensis Rees on Juncus spp. in South Africa (Zundel, 1953), U. vwyckii Oudemans and Beijerinck in Oudemans (1895) on Luzula spp. in Europe and America (Fischer, 1953; Zundel, 1953) and U. abstrusa Malencon on Juncus gerardii Loisl. in France (Zundel, 1953). All have a yellowish to pale reddish brown spore powder, with reticulate spores in PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Waues, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER 103 the range 14—24 um in diameter. From the descriptions, they seem very similar to one another and to U. cyperi-lucidt. Hight specimens of U. vuyckii, including the type collection, have been studied. The spore mass develops in the capsules of Luzula spp. and surrounds three small structures which may be ovule remnants. It is pale yellowish-brown to reddish-brown (Munsell 2-5YR 7/10 to Munsell 7-5YR 8/6) and is very similar to the darker shade seen in some sori of U. cyperi-lucidi. The spore mass in some sori is firmly agglutinated, but in others is granular to powdery. Spores are roughly spherical to globose, pale yellow in colour, (14) 16-20 (22) ym in diameter. They are strongly and regularly reticulate with roughly polygonal to hexagonal areolae 2-3 (3-5) um across. In equatorial view, the reticulum is seen to project 2-3 um above the spore surface (Plate x, Figs. C-D). Hyphal fragments are present in the sori, and many spores with one or two short hyaline hyphal fragments attached to them were seen. Some spores with a complete or partial, very thin (1 wm) hyaline sheath were seen, and this may be related to the method of spore development described for this species (Liro, 1924 ; Seyfert, 1927). Some immature spores inside hyphae were common in one specimen (Syd. Mye. germ. 2878). Spores were described by Oudemans (1895) as germinating by a simple or branched promycelium, 24 x 2-3 um, which produced colourless elliptical to ovate sporidia 3-5x2-5 um. U. cyperi-lucidi is very similar to U. vuyckti in several respects. It differs mainly in its spore ornamentation, its smaller sporidia and its host family. Specimens of U. capensis and U. abstrusa have not been seen. As described by Oudemans (1895) and Zundel (1938, as Cintractia ; 1953), U. capensis occurs on Juncus spp. in South Africa, and produces golden yellow powdery sori in the ovaries. Spores are globose, 15-16 um diam., with a three-layered reticulate wall. Little else is known about it. U. abstrusa occurs on Juncus gerardii Lois. in France and produces powdery sori in the ovaries. Spores are yellowish, 16—22 x 15-20 um, and reticulate, with areolae 2-2-5 um across (Viennot-Bourgin, 1956, as Cintractia). Both seem to be closely related to U. vuycku, which attacks plants in the same family. The Ustilago spp. on Juncaceae discussed above were all transferred to the genus Cintractia by Ciferri (1931, pp. 56, 72) because of the presence in their sori of a columella. They do not fit into this genus as it is currently defined and are best left in Ustilago. No smuts with light-coloured spores have been recorded previously in Australia on the families Cyperaceae or Juncaceae. Examination of the Australian collections of Luzula spp. and Scleria spp. in Herb. N.S.W. did not reveal the presence of any smuts. Brittlebank’s (1937-1940) record of Farysia olivacea (DC.) H. and P. Syd. (as Ustilago) on Cyperus lucidus is based on a Specimen of the smut on a species of Carex where the host was identified incorrectly (McAlpine, 1910, p. 158). THE ORIGINAL COLLECTION OF Cyperus lucidus The occurrence of a smut in several specimens identified as Cyperus lucidus prompted an examination of the original collection of this species. Some variation in the shape of the nut in C. lucidus has been suggested by some workers. In his monograph, Kiikenthal (1935) describes the nut of the typical variety of C. lucidus as “‘ obovata trigona obtusa ”’ and lists only the original collection made by Robert Brown, No. 5884. The majority of collections listed from Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania he places as C. lucidus var. sanguineo-fuscus (Nees) Kiikenth. and describes its nuts as ‘‘lineari-oblonga”’. Willis (1962), in listing C. lucidus for Victoria, states ‘‘ The most widely distributed variety, and only one represented in Victoria, has more remote glumes and PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy oF NEw SoutH Wates, Vow. 96, Part 2 104 UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF USTILAGO CYPERUS LUCIDUS R.Br. comparatively narrower nuts than in the typical Port Jackson form; it is distinguished as var. sanguineo-fuscus (Nees, ut sp.) Kukenth.”. Hooker (1858) describes the nut of C. sanguineo-fuscus Nees as ‘‘ sharply trigonous, linear- obovate, acute, white, smooth ”’ and lists two specimens. A duplicate of one of these, Gunn 956, in Herb. NSW has been examined and has healthy nuts as described by Hooker. At present, all specimens in Herb. NSW are filed under the name C. lucidus. The possibility that the wider nuts described for typical C. lucidus by some authors were in fact smutted was considered and an examina- tion of Robert Brown’s original collection was made. Several florets from the type sheet in the British Museum (Natural History), and a duplicate sheet from the same collection in the Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, were examined. On both sheets, two inflorescences were present. The British Museum specimen showed no nuts in one inflorescence and normal trigonous nuts in the other; the Kew specimen showed no nuts in one inflor- escence, and smutted nuts in all florets of the other (Plate x, Figs. B, D). Robert Brown thus unknowingly collected this smut, and his original collection of C. lucidus, made in the Sydney-Newcastle area of N.S.W., consisted of a mixture of healthy and diseased inflorescences. The portion in the British Museum is healthy and can be used as lectotype in accordance with the recommendation made by Stearn (1960) for the selection of lectotypes of Brown’s species. In nut shape, there is no difference between the BM specimen of C. lucidus and normal specimens of C. lucidus in Herb. NSW. Duplicates filed in other herbaria should be checked to see whether they are normal or smutted. The Kew specimen of Ustilago cyperi-lucidi in Robert Brown’s gathering of C. lucidus is one of the earliest specimens of a plant-parasitic fungus from Australia. SPECIMENS EXAMINED. Ustilago cyperi-lucidi J. Walker—all on Cyperus lucidus R.Br.—QUEENSLAND : Buderim Mountain, C. T. White, April 1916, NSW 65047 (portion as DAR 19558). NeEw SoutH WALES: Narrabri West, J. L. Boorman, June 1907, NSW 22730 (portion as DAR 16728); Walcha Road, Northern Tablelands, J. L. Boorman, Dec. 1912, NSW 65071 (portion as DAR 16731); in swamp, Brunswick Heads, B. G. Briggs 757, 25.v.1954, SYD without number (portion as DAR 17585); Upper Cudgegong River, HK. of Olinda, 15 m. E of Rylstone, H. S. McKee, 10.1.1953, NSW 65074 (portion as DAR 16730) ; duplicate of same collection, SYD without number (portion as DAR 17584) ; Port Jackson, Robert Brown 5884, 1802-1805, Herb. K without number (sori and slides as DAR 17581) ; Five Crossings, Australian Capital Territory, N. T. Burbidge (Herb. Australiense 6579), 1.iv.1960, NSW 65079 (portion as DAR 16729) ; about 2500 ft. level, Clyde Mtn., R. Carolin B145, 21.iii1.1957, SYD without number (portion as DAR 17586); property of R. Skellern, Wyndham, W. of Pambula, J. Hindle, 4.vi.1969, NSW 118232 (portion as DAR 17842); same locality, J. Hindle, 11.vii.1969, DAR 17587 (TYPE) ; China Wall, Tooma, E. J. McBarron, 4.1.1963, Herb. EH. J. McBarron 7330 (portion as DAR 17731); same locality, EK. J. McBarron, 4.1.1963, Herb. E. J. McBarron 7333 (portion as DAR 17730). VIcTORIA: Little River, Cathedral Range, near Taggerty, H. T. Clifford, 1950, MEL without number (portion as DAR 17583). Ustilago vuyckii Oud. and Beijr. in Oud.—NETHERLANDS: near Voorschoten, L. Vuyck, 22.v.1894, on Luzula campestris, Herb. L, TYPE, (slide as DAR 19759); Keukenhof, L. Vuyck, 31.v.1894, on LZ. campestris Herb. L (slide as DAR 19760). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrmTY oF NEw SoutH WaAtzs, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER 105 GERMANY: Sydow, Mycotheca germanica 2878, Brandenburg, near Kahnsdorf, E. Fahrendorff, June 1933, on L. campestris, Herb. L 937.56—90 (slide as DAR 19763); Sydow, Myc. germ. 3264, Brandenburg, Tiefensee near Werneuchen, H. Sydow, 10.v.1939, on L. pilosa, Herb. L 942.57-77 (slide as DAR 19761) ; Sydow, Myce. germ. 3265, Brandenburg, Hangelsberg, K. Fahrendorff, 18.v.1939, on L. pilosa, Herb L 942.57-30 (slide as DAR 19762); Sydow, Ustilagineen 311, Marienspring, P. Sydow, 6.vi.1904, on L. pilosa, Herb. L 910.253-449 (slide as DAR 19765). SWEDEN: Fijellnas in Herjedalia, G. V. Lagerheim, July 1897, on L. pilosa, Herb. L (slide as DAR 19766); duplicate of last collection, Sydow Ustilagineen 217, Herb. L 910.253-438 (slide as DAR 19764). Ustilago oxalidis Ell. and Tracy—UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: On Ovalis stricta. Park Lane, Virginia, W. H. Long, 1911, DAR 11080 (duplicate of BPI 3863), Thecaphora deformans Dur. and Mont. in Tul.—UNITED STATES OF AMERICA : on Desmodium nudiflorum, Virginia Polytechnic Institute, Montgomery Co., Virginia, A. B. Massey, 4.xi.1941, DAR 11070 (duplicate of BPI 71541). Thecaphora seminis-convolvult (Desm.) Liro—RUMANIA : on Convolvulus arvensis L., near Odorhei, Transylvania, K. Vanky Ust. 3, 8.ix.1956, DAR 13830. Cyperus lucidus R. Br.—NEW SoutH WALES: Port Jackson, Robert Brown 5884, 1802-1805, Herb. BM (lectotype). The collections of Cyperus lucidus in Herb. NSW were examined but the healthy collections are not listed in detail. The Australian collections of Scleria spp. and Luzula spp. in Herb. NSW were also examined. DISCUSSION The genus Ustilago is the largest single genus of the Ustilaginales, with about one-quarter of the described species in it (Fischer and Holton, 1957). In proportion, the genus is poorly represented on the host family Cyperaceae. Few smuts have been recorded on Australian Cyperaceae, and Ustilago cyperi- lucidi is the first species of Ustilago recorded on the family in Australia. It occurs in eastern Australia from southern Queensland to Victoria, and may occur over a wider range. Its detection in the field would be difficult, and all collections of it made up to the present have been detected initially only by a detailed examination of inflorescences in botanical specimens. Ustilago cyperi-lucidi causes a subtle distortion of infected plants. Nuts are altered in shape and this affects the appearance of the florets. It is possible that the alteration of the shape of the nuts by the smut in some collections of C. lucidus has been partly responsible in the past for varieties with narrow and wide nuts being distinguished. Systemic infection could result in the persistence of diseased plants in a locality and in these individuals retaining their character- istic appearance. A similar infection by a smut (DAR 6971 and others) has been found in N.S.W. on species in the Restio gracilis complex and on R. dimorphus Rk. Br. (Johnson and Evans, 1963). In this case, characters of the inflorescence were altered and, in the past, manuscript names, as varieties, had been given to some diseased specimens. The occurrence of U. cyperi-lucidi in portion of Robert Brown’s original gathering of C. lucidus also points to the potential hazard of inconspicuous diseases in botanical taxonomy. From the description, the smut of Scleria spp. described from Brazil as Ustilago subnitens is the species which most resembles U. cyperi-lucidi. No specimens of U. subnitens were available for study, and its exact relationship PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 2 106 UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF USTILAGO CYPERUS LUCIDUS R.Br. to the present species cannot be determined. The pale-spored smuts of Juncaceae are also very similar to U. cyperi-lucidt, differing in details of spore ornamentation and host family. The method of spore development in U. cyperi-lucidi has not been studied, but the attachment of hyphal fragments to the spores and their presence in the sori is very similar to that seen in several specimens of U. vuyckit. Spore formation in chains in hyphae and the development of clamp connections have been reported for U. vuyckw (Liro, 1924; Seyfert, 1927) and a study of spore development in U. cyperi-lucidi would be of value in establishing its relationship to other species. NOTE ON THE SPELLING ‘‘ VUYCKII ”’ Most authors who have mentioned Ustilago vuyckii have used the spelling ‘““ vuyjeku”’ for the specific epithet. This spelling also occurs on the labels of some exsiccati of this species (Sydow, Mycotheca germanica 3264 and 3265). The spellings “ vuijcku” and “ vuyckiw”’ both occur in Oudemans’ (1895) original paper, but on the type packet it is spelt ‘‘ vwyckii”’. As the fungus was named after its collector, L. Vuyck, the correct spelling is ‘‘ vwyckit”. IT am grateful to Dr. R. A. Maas Geesteranus for confirming this opinion. The confusion in spelling may have arisen from the difficulty with some handwriting in distinguishing between ‘“‘y”’ and ‘ij ”’. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS J am indebted to Mr. O. D. Evans, National Herbarium of New South Wales, for bringing this smut to my notice and for comments on the taxonomy of Cyperus spp.; to Mr. J. Hindle, District Agronomist, Bega, for collecting living infected plants; to Mr. E. McBarron, Veterinary Research Station, Glenfield, for allowing me to examine specimens of Cyperus lucidus from his private herbarium ; to Mr. J. H. Willis, National Herbarium of Victoria, for lending specimens of C. lucidus; to Mr. R. Ross, British Museum (Natural History), for florets from and a photograph of the lectotype of C. lucidus ; to the Director, the Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, for lending a duplicate of Robert Brown’s original collection of C. lucidus; to Dr. R. A. Maas Geesteranus, Rijksherbarium, Leiden, for lending collections of Ustilago vuyckii; to Dr. H. Scholz, Botanischer Garten und Museum, Berlin-Dahlem, and Dr. ©. R. Benjamin, National Fungus Collections, Beltsville, for searching for specimens of Ustilago subnitens ; and to Mr. A. Searle, Biological and Chemical Research Institute, Rydalmere, for taking the photographs. References BRITTLEBANK, C. C., 1937-1940.—A List of Australian Fungi. 410+5 pp. A manuscript list issued as blueprint copies by C.S.I.R.O. CrrERRI, R., 1931.—Quinta contribuzione allo studio degli Ustilaginales. Ann. Myc., 29: 1-74. FiscHer, G. W., 1953.—Manual of the North American Smut Fungi. xiit+343 pp., 136 figs. Ronald Press Co., New York. FiscHer, G. W., and Hotton, C. 8., 1957.—Biology and Control of the Smut Fungi. x-+-622 pp., 107 figs. Ronald Press Co., New York. Hennines, P., 1896.—Beitrage zur Pilzflora Stidamerikas. I. Myxomycetes, Phycomycetes, Ustilagineae und Uredineae. Hedwigia, 35: 207-262. Hooker, J. D., 1858.—Flora Tasmaniae, Part 2, p. 80, Plate 139. Jounson, L. A. 8., and Evans, O. D., 1963.—A revision of the Restio gracilis complex. Contrib. N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 3 (4): 200-217. KUKENTHAL, G., 1935.—Cyperaceae-Scirpoideae-Cypereae. Das Pflanzenreich, IV, 20, 671 pp. (Reprint edition, 1956. J. Cramer, Stuttgart.) Lansouw, J., and Stariev, F. A., 1964.—Index Herbariorum. Part 1. The Herbaria of the World. 5th Edition. Regnum Vegetabile, 31: vi+251 pp. International Bureau for Plant Taxonomy and Nomenclature, Utrecht. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socirry or New South WALES, Vou. 96, Part 2 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 2 PLATE X it r es ae. a . “HP tat Pr ea : bi ie De ais > a ,) aihe Ro ee ’ wats Ryeeyie ’ iia} j my has ry W Gos a, an aes ‘ih hee Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 2 PLATE Xi —_ fy iG 5 ia (i> | tal heel Ruan vi ie atte ‘ee yf ee ae m. ae, a F eee . # y a ba F | i Pitas, fae aie OMS fae a Cue oh a a ete Lee - » ‘ \ hyd y=), ‘ Boas cae : pr cS Ok ee a Bt pt ee ee MMOLE RGN 6 nal Konig y 4 a a 7 (ou Wy 3 a a a, " 7 oo a — wees Vat } . _ Sie i a J. WALKER LOT Lrro, J. I., 1924.—Die Ustilagineen Fimnlands, I. Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn., Ser. A, 17: xvii+636 pp. Helsinki. McAtpiIngE, D., 1910.—The Smuts of Australia. Their Structure, Life History, Treatment and Classification, vi--288 pp., 66 plates. J. Kemp, Government Printer, Melbourne. Munsell Book of Color, 1967.—-Neighbouring Hues Edition, Matte Finish Collection. Munsell Color Co., Baltimore. NANNFELDT, J. A., 1959.—Appendix, pp. 147-160, in Lindberg, Brita—Ustilaginales of Sweden (exclusive of the Cintractias on Caricoideae). Symb. Bot. Upsal., 16 (2): 1-175. Oupemans, C. A. J. A., 1895.—Over twee nog onbekende fungi: Septoria dictyotae en Ustilago vuycku. Verslagen van de Zittegen der Wis- en Natuurkundige Afd. van de Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschaffen Amsterdam, 3: 54—57. Ripeeway, R., 1912.—Color Standards and Color Nomenclature. 1v--44 pp., 53 plates. Washington, D.C. SEYFERT, R., 1927.—Uber Schnallenbildung in Paarkernmyzel der Brandpilze. Zeitschr. f. Bot., 19: 577-601. STEARN, W. T., 1960.—An Introduction to Robert Brown's * Prodromus Florae Novae Hollandiae ~ pp. V—LII in the J. Cramer facsimile reprint, 1960. J. Cramer, Weinheim. VIENNOT-BouRGIN, G., 1956.—Mildious, oidiums, caries, charbons, rouilles des plantes de France. Texte et Atlas. HEncycl. Mycol., 26, 27. Paul Lechevalier, Paris. Wits, J. H., 1962.—A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 1, Ferns. Conifers and Mono- cotyledons. xv+448 pp. Melbourne University Press. ZUNDEL, G. L., 1938.—The Ustilaginales of South Africa. Bothalia, 3 (3): 283-330. ZUNDEL, G. L., 1953.—The Ustilaginales of the World. xi+-410 pp. Contrib. No. 176, Dept. Botany, School of Agriculture, Pennsylvania State College. EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE Ix Ustilago cyperi-lucidi on Cyperus lucidus. A, left, healthy florets ex NSW 77363; right, smutted florets ex NSW 22730, x8. B, smutted florets from Robert Brown 5884 ex K, x8. C, left, three normal nuts ex NSW 77363; right, three smutted nuts ex NSW 22730, x13. D, left, three normal nuts from Robert Brown 5884, ex BM : right, three smutted nuts from Robert Brown 5884 ex K, one cut to show spore mass, x 13. PLATE X A-B, Ustilago cyperi-lucidt, equatorial and surface views of spores showing fine reticulum and irregular markings ex DAR 17587a, x1,000. C-—D, Ustilago vuyckii, equatorial and surface views of spores, showing coarser regular reticulum, ex TYPE in Herb. L, x1,000, &, Ustilago cyperi-lucidi, germinating spores with septate promycelium and sporidia, ex DAR 17587a, x 400. PROCEEDINGS oF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SourH Waters. Von. 96, Part 2 SHOOT BLIGHT OF EUCALYPTUS SPP. CAUSED BY AN UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF RAMULARIA J. WALKER AND A. lL. BERTUS Biology Branch, Biological and Chemical Research Institute, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere (Plates XII, XIII) [Accepted for publication 17th February 1971] Synopsis Ramularia pitereka n. sp. which causes a shoot blight and leaf spot of young plants of Hucalyptus spp. is described. It has been found only in eastern New South Wales on plants growing in nurseries and glasshouses. Inoculation tests and observations in nurseries indicate that only Eucalyptus spp. in the series Corymbosae-Peltatae of Blakely are susceptible. Angophora costata seedlings have been artificially infected. The possibility that this may have some taxonomic significance in the two host genera is mentioned. A possible relationship between R. pitereka and the canker fungus of Hucalyptus ficifolia in Western Australia is discussed. INTRODUCTION A sheot blight of Hucalyptus seedlings has been known in New South Wales for at least fifteen years. The only published information on it reports an outbreak in the N.S.W. Forestry Commission’s nursery at West Pennant Hills in the autumn, winter and spring of 1960, and states: ‘‘ An unidentified fungus was found causing severe blighting of the young shoot of seedlings of L. maculata and over 50°% of some plantings of this species had been lost through the disease. The same fungus was found on a few seedlings of EL. eximia”’ (N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, 1961). The disease was almost certainly described earlier than this by Mrs. J. de Bavay (personal communication) in notes she prepared in 1955. She observed a shoot blight on Eucalyptus maculata Hook. seedlings growing in a Sydney glasshouse and described it as follows: ‘‘ Distortion was considerable in the young leaf and shoot tissue, in the infected zones. Scattered irregular necrotic areas appeared, over which a greyish white waxy bloom developed, due to the converging of masses of individual minute erumpent conidial pustules, each about 4 to } mm. in diameter.’’ This is very similar to the disease described below. Forestry officers have noticed the disease for several years on young plants in nurseries. It has been seen only on plants over three months old and, if not controlled by spraying, can kill or severely damage them. Although more common in spring and autumn, it has been collected throughout the year in nurseries, but has not been found on plants in the field. Recent work has shown that the causal fungus is'a previously undescribed species of Ramularia, which is described below. Standard abbreviations as given by Lanjouw and Stafleu (1964) are used in citing specimens in various herbaria. DESCRIPTION Ramularia pitereka sp. nov. (etym., pitereka, alba, in lingua aboriginum Australiae). Pustulae in surculis juvenilibus tortis albae, confertae, usque ad 100 ym diametro, in caulibus erumpentes, in foliis praecipue hypophyllis et ex stomatibus orientes. Conidiophora in strato denso, cum stromate basali hyalino ex hyphis intertextis constata ; stromata 15-50 ym crassa. Conidiophora hyalina, usque PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wass, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER AND A. L. BERTUS 109 ad 50 um longa, 2-2-5 um lata, plerumque cicatricibus numerosis parvis praedita, saepe geniculata, in regione cicatricum non septata. Conidia acrogena, levia, non septata, formae valde variabilis, plerumque clavata vel elongato-clavata, saepe cylindrica vel anguste pyriformia, conidia minoria saepe obclavata vel ovalia, (5) 6-17 (20) x2-5-5 (6-5) wm, in catenis brevibus interdum portata, cicatrice vel basali vel in quoque extremo praedita, per hypham simplicem vel per ABSA S AIS Rene saese Itura entro sima, CORRIGENDA 0 um eS ieee spite P. 109.—For Plate XI, read Plate XII. ae: For Plate XII, read Plate XIII. eae? P. 110.—For Plate XII, read Plate XIII. ot E. P. 111.—For Plate XII, read Plate XIII. P. 115.—For Plate XI, read Plate XII. on 3 For Plate XII, read Plate XIII. ; and white Waxy cuticle and eventually rupturing it. The erumpent white pustules are up to 100 um in diameter and closely packed on the diseased area (Plate x1, Fig. B). Some fusion between neighbouring pustules may occur during their development. On leaves, spots range from 1mm. to 2mm. in diameter up to large irregular areas which often develop along one edge and result in twisting and distortion of the leaf (Plate x1, Figs. C-E). Large infected areas often develop along the mid-vein (Plate x1, Fig. C). Spots are brown with a thin reddish-purple margin. Sunken brown lesions up to 1-5 em. long have been seen on petioles and stems, especially on Hucalyptus ficifolia F.Muell. (Plate x1, Fig. F). Sporulation occurs abundantly on all diseased tissues; on leaf spots it is more prominent on the abaxial surface. Pustules are composed of a dense layer of conidiophores borne on a plectenchymatous stroma up to 50 um thick, which develops in the host tissue (Plate xm, Fig. B). On shoots, the pustules rupture the epidermis and the thick cuticle, and are separated by their fragments ; on leaves, they are mainly hypo- phyllous and the conidiophores emerge in clusters through the stomates from a sub-stomal stromata. Conidiophores are hyaline, up to 50 ym long and 2-2-5 ym wide, and non-septate. Older conidiophores have many spore scars (up to 14 or more), especially along the upper half, and are often prominently geniculate (Plate x11, Fig. E; Text-fig. 1, A and B). Conidia are borne singly at the tip of the conidiophore which grows on around the scar. The distance between scars is often very short, so that several conidia may appear clustered on a short length of conidiophore. Conidia are hyaline, smooth, strongly vacuolate, very variable in size and shape, generally clavate to elongated-clavate, often cylindrical to narrowly pyriform, smaller ones obclavate to oval, and measure (5) 6-17 (20) x 2-5-5( 6-5) um (Plate xu, Figs. C-E; Text-fig. 1). Whilst conidia on all hosts are variable in size and shape, there is a tendency for slight variations between hosts to occur. For example, many conidia from H. maculata are slightly longer and more regularly clavate than the somewhat shorter and more variable spores from E. eximia Schau. They often form short chains and have either a basal spore scar or scars at each end. Conidia sometimes germinate in the pustule, and they often form short secondary conidiophores bearing small secondary conidia (Text-fig. 1, A). Germination usually occurs by one to two germ tubes anywhere on the spore, except that germination through the scar has not been seen. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF NEw SoutH Wates, Von. 96, Part 2 110 SHOOT BLIGHT OF EUCALYPTUS SPP. On agar media, colonies are white, raised in the centre and when older, often wrinkled by fine radial folds (Plate x1, Fig. A). They are covered with an abundant dry growth of conidiophores and conidia. Conidiophores are of indeterminate length. Spore-bearing areas up to 120 um long have been seen Jo G0U0" (boy 000, js oe See 10pm ; 7 ee : 1) UU000 199!) oo 000000000 Yext-fig. 1. A-—D, Ramularia pitereka conidia and conidiophores. A, from Hucalyptus eximia (DAR 19773), two conidia showing secondary conidiophores. B, from culture ex DAR 19773, showing types of conidiophore development, and three spores with vacuolate contents. C, from EH. maculata (DAR 19769), natural infection. D, from E. maculata (DAR 19770), artificial inoculation. EH, “ Sporotrichum destructor ”’ spores from IMI 7368. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER AND A. L. BERTUS atl and often several zones of scars occur along a conidiophore. Because of these zones of sporulation, conidia appear to be borne in clusters of varying size along the conidiophore. The arrangement of scars on the conidiophore is very similar to that described and illustrated by Hughes (1951, Fig. 2, E) for Acrotheca acuta Grove in culture. Often, conidiophores are branched and, apart from the spore scars, are very similar to vegetative hyphae. Conidia from all hosts are similar in culture and show a similar variability in shape to those from infected plants, but are generally slightly smaller, measuring (4) 5-13 (16) x (2-5) 3-5 (6) um. Short chains are often formed (Plate xm, Fig. C; Text-fig. 1). ISOLATION AND GROWTH IN CULTURE Ramularia pitereka is isolated easily from spores. It grows slowly on potato dextrose and malt agars and has an optimum temperature for radial growth between 20° and 25°C. After 24 days, colonies on malt agar are 12 mm. in diameter at 25° C. and 6 mm. in diameter at 30°C. No growth occurs at 35° C. and growth is very slight at 5° C., colonies being only 2 mm. in diameter after 45 days. Colonies are white above and pale cream below. In cultures three to four months old, colonies often develop a faint cream to pink tint, and the medium is slightly darkened. INFECTION AND Host RANGE Artificial inoculations were carried out on a range of species of Hucalyptus and on Angophora costata (Gaertn.) Druce. Conidia from cultures were suspended in sterile water and applied with a fine brush to young shoots of seedlings in the glasshouse. Plants were kept in a humid atmosphere for 24 days after inoculation and then placed on the glasshouse bench. The characteristic symptoms of the disease and sporulation of the fungus were seen usually within three to four weeks of inoculation. The range of species tested and the results obtained are shown in Table 1. TABLE | Reaction of Seedlings of Eucalyptus and Angophora to Inoculation with Ramularia pitereka Section* Series Species Number Number Inoculated Infected Macrantherae Corymbosae-Peltatae H. exvmia Schau. 10 2 E. ficifolia F. Muell. 10 10 E. maculata Hook. 10 10 Transversae EH. longifoka Link and 10 0 Otto E. punctata DC. 10 0 Exsertae E. camaldulensis Dehn. 10 0 Macrantherae (Normales) Globulares E. bridgesiana R. T. 10 0 Bak. E. pulverulenta Sims 10 0 Renantherae (Normales) Pseudo-stringybarks EH. pilularis Sm. 10 0 Pachyphloiae E. caliginosa Blakely 10 0 and McKie Porantheroideae (Nor- Buxeales E. albens Benth. 10 0 males) Terminales _— ' E. sideroxylon A. Cunn. 10 0 ex Woolls Platyantherae Subulatae E. flocktoniae Maiden 10 0 Angophora costata 20 15 (Gaertn.) Druce * The Hucalyptus spp. are arranged according to the sections and series given by Blakely (1965) and their nomenclature follows Johnston and Marryatt (1965). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH Wa tes. Vou. 96, Part 2 112 SHOOT BLIGHT OF EUCALYPTUS SPP. In these tests the only Hucalyptus spp. attacked were in Blakely’s (1965) series Corymbosae-Peltatae. Several plants of Angophora costata were also infected. The significance of these results is discussed below. POSSIBLE RELATIONSHIP TO CANKER FUNGUS OF FUCALYPTUS FICIFOLIA Possibly closely related to R. pitereka is the fungus that causes canker disease of adult trees of red-flowering gum (H#. ficifolia F. Muell.) in Western Australia. Little has been published about this organism. In 1936 Mr. H. A. Pittman, then Government Plant Pathologist, reported on a canker disease of EL. ficifolia in Western Australia (Anon., 1936). It had apparently been known for some years before this (Beard, 1963 ; Cass Smith, 1970), but Pittman was the first to isolate the causal fungus and suggest control measures. At the time he also sent a culture to the Commonwealth Mycological Institute. Subsequently, the fungus was referred to in various publications as ‘‘ Sporotrichum destructor Pittman ”’. MacNish (1963) lists it as ‘“‘ Sporotrichum destructor Pittman n. sp.” and in a footnote states ‘“‘ pathogen named 1936”. Later authors dealing with canker have used this name (Beard, 1963; Cass Smith, 1970) or have referred to the disease as Sporotrichum canker (Pryor and Willing, 1963). The name ‘“ Sporotrichum destructor’’ has never been validly published, and no description of the fungus has been found in the literature. Mr. Pittman (personal communication) wrote that, whilst he proved its pathogenicity and tentatively referred to it as Sporotrichum, he did not eall it ‘ S. destructor”. However, a description under this name has been obtained from Mr. H. L. Harvey, of the Department of Agriculture, Perth, Western Australia. This description, dated 20.x.1936, came from files of correspondence with the Commonwealth Mycological Institute, and was prepared there by Mr. EK. W. Mason (F. C. Deighton, personal communication). It describes the fungus in culture. Colonies are described as ‘‘ floccose, then powdery, finally showing radiating striations ”’, at first white and later pinkish-buff in colour. The fertile hyphae are described as ‘‘ usually long (up to 150 u), more rarely lateral and shorter, unbranched, cylindrical, typically straight and bearing in a stellate manner a single whorl, or occasionally a spiral of a few (up to 10) conidia, sometimes gently bent and provided with two or even more verticills or spirals. Conidia hyaline, cylindrical or oblong, rounded at both ends, 0-septate, sessile (that is—without sterigmata), 6-8 uw long, 2 to 2-5 » broad.” The only specimen filed under the name “* Sporotrichum destructor’ at the Commonwealth Mycological Institute has been examined. It is a dried malt agar culture, light buff (Ridgeway, 1912) in colour, now showing as a fairly compact felted mat of hyphae on the dried agar. Abundant hyaline, unicellular conidia are present. They are variable in shape, cylindrical to clavate, with smaller conidia oval to obovate, measuring (2-5) 3-10 (12-5) x (2) 2-5-3-5 (4) wm, and have an indistinct spore scar at one end. Evidence of chain formation was present aS some spores had a sear at each end. Conidiophores could not be clearly distinguished, but some fragments with probable indistinct spore scars were seen. In some cases, clusters of conidia were seen around probable conidiophores. The spores from this specimen are smaller than those of R. pitereka in culture. From Mr. Mason’s description, its cultural characters and some aspects of its conidiophore and conidium morphology are similar to those of R. pitereka, but until it can be studied from fresh specimens, its identity remains uncertain. SPECIMENS EXAMINED Ramularia pitereka J. Walker and A. L. Bertus—NEw SouTH WALES: on Eucalyptus eximia Schau., in nursery, Forestry Commission of N.S.W., West Pennant Hills, A. L. Bertus and J. Walker, 3.vi.1970, DAR 19773 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Waters, Vou. 96, Part 2 J. WALKER AND A. L. BERTUS 113 (type) (portion filed as IMI 151369); same locality, J. Walker, 18.xi.1960, DAR 6469; same locality, A. L. Bertus, 5.v.1970, DAR 20366 ; artificial inoculation, glasshouse, Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere, A. L. Bertus, 15.xi.1967, DAR 19771. On Eucalyptus ficifolia F.Muell., in nursery, Forestry Commission of N.S.W., West Pennant Hills, A. L. Bertus and J. Walker, 3.vi.1970, DAR 20361. On Eucalyptus maculata Hook., in nursery, Forestry Commission of N.S.W., West Pennant Hills, J. Walker, 30.v1.1960, DAR 5867a ; in commercial nursery, Beverley Hills, J. Stronach, 24.11.1967, DAR 19768 ; same locality, J. Stronach, 28.11.1967, DAR 19769 (portion filed as IMI 151368) ; artificial inoculation, glasshouse, Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere, A. L. Bertus, 15.xi.1967, DAR 19770; in commercial nursery, Glenhaven, A. L. Bertus, 5.xi.1970, DAR 20468. On Angophora costata (Gaertn.) Druce, artificial inoculation, glasshouse, Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere, J. Walker, 16.xi.1970, DAR 20469. ‘* Sporotrichum destructor ’—-WESTERN AUSTRALIA: in dried malt agar culture, H. A. Pittman, 1936, IMI 7368 (slides filed as DAR 20410). On Hucalyptus ficifolia F. Muell., King’s Park, Perth, L. Harvey, Sept., 1970, DAR 20409 (cankers only, no fungus seen). DISCUSSION No previous description of a species of Ramularia on hosts in the family Myrtaceae has been found. Most species of Ramularia occur on herbaceous hosts and generally cause comparatively minor damage such as leaf spots and blotches. Rk. pitereka occurs on young growth of woody hosts and causes more severe damage than is usually seen with many other Ramularia spp. Whilst comparatively few species of Ramularia have been studied in culture, those that have generally shown sparse sporulation on artificial media; however, hk. pitereka produces abundant spores in culture. In the limited inoculation tests carried out so far only Hucalyptus spp. in the series Corymbosae-Peltatae of Blakely (1965) have been susceptible. The species used have also been arranged (Table 2) according to a new classi- fication and coding of the genus (Pryor and Johnson, 1971) and in this system all the susceptible species fall into the subgenus © Corymbia. The one species of Angophora tested, A. costata, waS experimentally infected. It is possible that this may have some taxonomic significance in the two host genera, and tests on a wider range of species will be carried out. The affinity in essential oil and certain morphological characters between species of Hucalyptus in the above and related series and the genus Angophora has been pointed out previously (Baker and Smith, 1920). Finally, R. pitereka may be the same as the undescribed fungus causing canker of red-flowering gums in Western Australia, and referred to in the literature as ‘‘ Sporotrichum destructor Pittman’. If so, it may have been introduced into eastern Australia from the west. Cass Smith (1970) indicates that in Western Australia the disease occurs naturally on Eucalyptus calophylla R. Br. ex Lindl., and that infections on cultivated H. ficifolia probably originated from naturally infected E. calophylla. So far, no plants infected with R. pitereka have been found in naturein N.S.W. Cass Smith (1970) also lists EH. haematoxylon Maiden as another host of the canker fungus. All the known hosts of ‘‘ Sporo- trichum destructor” thus occur in Blakely’s series Corymbosae-Peltatae (or subgenus © Corymbia in Pryor and Johnson’s (1971) classification), and this provides a further indication of a possible relationship between the canker fungus and R. pitereka. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety oF New SoutH Wates. Vou. 96, Part 2 SHOOT BLIGHT OF EUCALYPTUS SPP. 114 sony (‘uq4eBy) 0IDj800 DLoydobuy VAVVV aeulyeIsonN CGVVV 2B4B4s0) 8=VVV eunuloy Wy (snues) nioydobup V¥ arypoy, pue Ajexe[q Ysou262y9 “7 CHAVIN evuteprouesng WHVIN ovyeyouiden §=HVIN ‘ug seumnpd “qf WWIVIN ovullenyid VIVIN serenfiq IVIN BiueyjuBUuey = =VIN sngdAjeoouowW = W s]JOOA\A Xo ‘uUND “WY Uojkmovapis ° fT Exas eBiopoleyw! KAS “Yyquog sweq]D “A DO TOS evuvoonfom TOS eueyeupy iS SUIG DZUWapnuaand HT ONIds aBUl}ep10H Nids ye LU vumrsabpe.q “A OdId§ seButusisespiig dIds SOTBUIULT A Id$ Bieuepleyy ds ‘uyeq sisuaynpjowno “= =dAANS evuruiooyjeiey, WANS sourtooljer1ey, NS BIIeJOSKy NS Uepley, erwozyooy “A L:LIS 8BSO09[O LIS elieqoosiIq TS ‘Od vinpund “q CMHOUS evulyeqound = WOHS oy1Q pue yury vyofbuo) “q VWOOUS aeuljoyisuoT OOS esusTeg OS BIIBSIOASUBLT, HS sngadutoAyduidg “YOoR, MIDjNoMw “HT £000 osyemMory = O00 BIIBIUIQ OD TBYOS BIUIwe “iT aH VO0 ovIMIxy = =VOO eireigoQ =D ‘Tpury xe ag “y vyhydojp “7 = VOAVO evulieytuunyg) = A VO evrosrmmuny) =AVO suey = VO TouN a Pyofoy “qt WOAVO esuljoxiolng = =OAWO evrosturuny) =v eieny VO wiquidro) 9 epon sotoedg soroedg Sellosqng SOLIOG U01400G snuesqng (TL6T) uosuyor pun wohstg fo buspog pun uownoyrssny) ayy 07 burpsooopy pabun.opy nioydosuy pun snqgddjeong fo sazvadg @ WTA I, 96, Part 2 ~HE LINNEAN Soctety oF New SourH WaAteEs, VOL. PROCEEDINGS OF Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 2 PLATE XII bf if wager % Proce tins, Soc. NISIWe, Vol: 96) Part 2 PLATE XIIt a HERB. 1.M.I. COMMONWEALTH MYCOLOGICAL INSTITUTE Name ..Sperotrichum destructor. Fittman oo! Host 290... OK. BBL Y PHS oo cccccsneseessneenseenneesenseee Loe. “Nester Bustrekae so ee Cok he ee Petia 2 ar eee Date Letter dated 22. 9, 36 ve Dried dowm cult. on Malt Agar- one of the sbenltrvres from which the diagnosis was drawn up, ‘SY PUPP PRT EUDIT PUTED T TVA] TS] CTE CUTE TE CEPT EP) J. WALKER AND A. L. BERTUS 115 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We are indebted to Mr. D. J. Hartigan, Forestry Commission of N.S.W., and to the officers at the Forestry Nursery, West Pennant Hills, for providing information on the disease and specimens. Mrs. J. de Bavay, of Armidale, N.S.W., made available her early observations and Mr. H. A. Pittman, Upper Hawthorn, Victoria, provided valuable information on his work with “ Sporo- trichum destructor’. We thank Mr. F. C. Deighton and Dr. M. B. Ellis, of the Commonwealth Mycological Institute, for comments on these fungi and lending the specimen of ‘“ S. destructor”. Mr. lL. Harvey, Officer-in-charge, Plant Pathology Branch, Department of Agriculture, Perth, sent us information on canker disease and provided a canker specimen, and Mr. L. A. S. Johnson, National Herbarium of N.S.W., sent seed of species of Hucalyptus and Angophora and information on their classification. Professor L. D. Pryor and Mr. Johnson allowed us to quote from their new classification and coding of the genus Hucalyptus. The photographs were taken by Mr. A. Searle, Department of Agriculture, Rydalmere. References ANon., 1936.—Red-flowered gums. Control of canker disease. Ex West Australian, 17 Sept., 1936. (Abstract. in Rev. appl. Mycol., 16: 138, 1937.) Baker, R. T., and Smitu, H. G., 1920.—A Research on the Hucalypts Especially in Regard to Their Essential Oils. 2nd Edition. xv+471 pp. W. A. Gullick, Government Printer, Sydney. Brarp, J. S., 1963.—The stem canker disease of red-flowering gum. Australian Plants, 2 (14) : 62-63. BuaKxety, W. F., 1965.—A Key to the Eucalypts, with Descriptions of 522 Species and 150 Varieties. 3rd Edition. 359 pp. Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra. Cass SmituH, W. P., 1970.—Stem canker disease of red flowering gums. J. Dept. Agric. W. Aust., 4th Ser., 11 (2): 33-39. Hucues, 8S. J., 1951.—Studies on micro-fungi. V. Acrotheca. Mycol. Pap. No. 38, 8 pp., 2 figs. Commonwealth Mycological Institute, Kew. JOHNSTON, R. D., and MarryatT, Rosemary, 1965.—Taxonomy and Nomenclature of Hucalypts. Leaflet No. 92. 24 pp. Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra. Langouw, J., and StarLeu, F. A., 1964.—Imdex Herbariorum. Part 1. The Herbaria of the World. 5th Edition. Regnum Vegetabile, 31: vi+251 pp. International Bureau for Piant Taxonomy and Nomenclature, Utrecht. MacNisu, G. C., 1963.—Diseases recorded on native plants, weeds, field and fibre crops in Western Australia. J. Agric. W. Aust., 4th Ser., 4 (6): 401-404, 407—408. N.S.W. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, 1961.—Plant Disease Survey for the Year Ending 30 June, 1961, p. 49. Pryor, L. D., and Jounson, L. A. 8S., 1971.—A classification of the eucalypts. Pryor, L. D., and Witting, R. R., 1963.—The red flowermg gum. Australian Plants, 2 (14) : 35-37, 63-64. RipgEway, R., 1912.—Color Standards and Color Nomenclature. iv+44 pp., 53 plates. Washington, D.C. = EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE XI Ramularia pitereka on Hucalyptus spp. A, B, on H eximia (DAR 19773) showing shoot symptoms and white pustules. C, D, E, on H. maculata (DAR 5867a) showing shoot blight and leaf spotting and distortion. F, on EH. ficifolia (DAR 20361) showing stem lesion. A, C, D, E, slightly less than natural size. B, x3:5. F, x2. PLATE XII A-E, Ramularia pitereka. A, colonies 24 days old, on potato dextrose agar (natural size). B, young pustules on H. exwimia shoots, x 288. C, spores in culture, some forming short chains, S7/ St. Michael sweet orange C. sinensis (L.) Osbeck 1-59 Cleopatra mandarin (N.S.W.) C. lycopersicaeformis Hort. ex Tan. 1-74 Rangpur lime 3234 O. limonia Osbeck 1-82 Cummins sweet orange C. sinensis (L.) Osbeck 1-93 Ruby blood sweet orange 3699 oo Ks Bs ae 1:96 Viticultural nursery sweet orange ae 3 zi Be 1-99 Maltese blood sweet orange 3206 A is No ae 2-07 Moorland sweet orange ae 45 bsg ee 2-08 Ruby blood sweet orange 3696 “e A a ‘ Ho 1 Ruby blood sweet orange 3695 ss Bs ae i 2-2 Harrison sweet orange a2 BS i aS 2-54 Rough lemon C. jgambhirt Lush. 2-68 Smooth Seville 3151 C. aurantium L.? 2-75 * Refers to the accession number of the tree from which the seeds were obtained at the Horticultural Research Stations at Narara and Somersby. Experiment 3: Seeds of Troyer citrange, rough lemon and 13 clones of P. trifoliata were planted in rows (20 seeds per row) in troughs 3ft.x2ft.x6in. deep containing steam-air treated (140° F./30 min.) soil. When the seedlings were 4in. high corn-meal sand inoculum of 12 isolates of P. citrophthora grown for one month was incorporated into the soil. After five months plants were washed free of adhering soil and the root damage was assessed. Only eight of 40 rough lemon seedlings survived. The remainder had callused lesions in the collar region or on the taproot. In the majority of plants PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 3 BROADBENT ET AL. 125 at least 50°% of the root system had been destroyed and plants were surviving on two or three lateral roots as the taproot had been rotted. Root regeneration was a major factor in the survival of these plants. The trifoliate clones and Troyer citrange plants were all highly resistant to P. citrophthora. Some root tips had been attacked, but the disease had not spread to mature tissue. Stem and Root Inoculations of P. trifoliata Hybrids One hundred and nineteen F1 hybrids of Smooth Seville P. trifoliata, 130 F1 hybrids of Ellendale mandarin x P. trifoliata and 10 rough lemon plants of nursery row size were subjected to root and stem inoculation as described in Sections (1) and (2). Stem inoculations did not produce collar rot lesions in hybrid plants, although the rough lemon seedlings developed collar rot. Two hybrids of Smooth Seville x P. trifoliata were highly susceptible to root rot, while the remainder were moderately resistant. Kllendale mandarin hybrids varied in their reaction. In most plants only the tips of feeder roots were rotted away, but in seven plants the percentage of roots rotted varied from 10 to 40, compared with rough lemon, where 50-70°% of roots were rotted. DISCUSSION The resistance of Poncirus trifoliata and the citranges to root and collar inoculation with P. citrophthora confirmed field and nursery observations. All clones of P. trifoliata tested, one of which was a tetraploid, were extremely resistant to Phytophthora root rot. This was in contrast to the variation found by Klotz et al. (1958a) in percentage decay of fibrous roots of trifoliate orange selections caused by P. citrophthora and by P. nicotianae var. parasitica. Carpenter and Furr (1962) also found the percentage survival of trifoliate orange selections to be highly variable following inoculation with P. nicotianae var. parasitica and postulated that the reaction of P. trifoliata and its hybrids to P. nicotianae var. parasitica may be related to the degree of dormancy. No evidence to support this hypothesis was obtained with P. citrophthora in trials in New South Wales. Furr, Carpenter and Hewitt (1963) considered that differences in susceptibility of trifoliate oranges may be due to differences between young and old root systems, as well as to differences in pathogenicity of the species and isolates of Phytophthora. This explanation cannot be applied to the behaviour of P. citrophthora in New South Wales, where it has been found that the immature tissue in the region of elongation of trifoliate orange roots is rotted but mature cells are not attacked (Broadbent, 1969). It is possible that the Australian clones of P. trifoliata have been derived from a small number of original introductions, which might explain the narrow range of variation. The New South Wales selection of rough lemon, Volkamer lemon and the South African selection of rough lemon showed similar susceptibilities to root and collar infections by P. citrophthora. These stocks are vigorous and adaptable, and suitable for lemons, but lack the resistance to root rot necessary for citrus replant situations. The Terrigal selections of rough lemon were slightly less susceptible to Phytophthora root rot than the commonly grown rough lemon selection, and further search within the species for a more resistant clone may be desirable. The tangelos and mandarins showed intermediate resistance to P. citrophthora and were more resistant than most of the sweet orange selections tested. The Ellendale mandarin, an Australian variety which is postulated to be a natural tangor (Swingle and Reece, 1967), is unsatisfactory as a stock as all its seedlings are gametic. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 3 126 REACTION OF SEEDLINGS OF CITRUS TO PHYTOPHTHORA CITROPHTHORA Cleopatra mandarin is in limited use as a rootstock in Australia and overseas, and for mandarins has an advantage over rough lemon stocks. The rating of Emperor mandarin as slightly more resistant than rough lemon confirms field observations that seedling trees of this variety persist better in root rot situations. The resistance to root rot caused by P. citrophthora of four selections of Smooth Sevilles is in agreement with field observations and with the results obtained by Grimm and Garnsey (1969) using P. nicotianae var. parasitica. Under certain conditions Smooth Seville is highly susceptible to collar rot caused by P. citrophthora. The taxonomic status of the variety here called Smooth Seville is in doubt. It is not typical sour orange as described (Hodgson, 1967). A relatively high percentage of bifoliate and gametic seedlings is produced. Differences in susceptibility of unifoliate and bifoliate seedlings have been noted by Grimm and Garnsey (1969). Smooth Seville performs reasonably as a stock for lemons, but is unsatisfactory for oranges as this stock-scion combination declines due to tristeza virus (Stubbs, 1963). A high degree of susceptibility was shown by most sweet oranges. Sweet orange is commonly used as a rootstock on the neutral to alkaline, free draining sandy loam soils of the inland districts of New South Wales. Ruby blood selection 3118 and Parramatta orange selection 3443 were somewhat more resistant to Phytophthora root rot than most of the other sweet orange selections. It may be significant that the parent tree of the Parramatta strain of sweet orange was a 100-year-old seedling tree from Northmead (New South Wales). Tt was in this area, once a prosperous citrus growing district, that P. citrophthora caused serious damage in 1860 (Fraser, 1949). The reaction to Phytophthora root and collar rots of the range of species and varieties tested has provided a measure of the relative resistance of seedlings of many varieties of Citrus spp. and related genera. This can be used as a basis for further testing in the field as rootstocks and also provide information on resistance for future breeding purposes. The genetic constitution of the citrus host rootstock and the suitability of the environment are of prime importance in determining the course of development of Phytophthora root or collar rots in the field. In genera such as Poncirus, Microcitrus and Severinia, resistance is conferred by some factor of genetic constitution. Where resistance is not complete, the degree of damage caused can be influenced by age, chemical composition, succulence and vigour of the infected tissue (Carpenter and Furr, 1962). Under field conditions, environmental factors can influence both the course of the disease and the host. Soil characteristics, soil temperature, soil oxygen and moisture levels influence the development of citrus root rot (Klotz et al., 1965; Stolzy et al., 1965a). A low supply of oxygen in soils prevents root erowth and regeneration, creating an unfavourable soil condition for infected plants to overcome the adverse effects of root decay (Stolzy et al., 1965b). Soil fertility, with its effect on tree vigour and root development (Fraser, 1949), and the effect of the scion on rootstock (Klotz et al., 1967) are also important. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors are indebted to Mr. A. KE. Roberts, Chief Biometrician, New South Wales Department of Agriculture, for statistical analysis of the data. References BrRoapDBENT, P., 1969.—Observations on the mode of infection of Phytopthora citrophthora in resistant and susceptible citrus roots. Proc. First International Citrus Symposium, 3: 1207-1210. CARPENTER, J. B., and Furr, J. R., 1962.—Evaluation of tolerance to root rot caused by Phytophthora parasitica in seedlings of Citrus and related genera. Phytopathology, 52: 1277-1285. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoctmeTy or NEw SoutH Watzs, Vou. 96, Part 3 BROADBENT ET AL. iT Fawcett, H. §8., 1913.—Two fungi as causal agents In gummosis of lemon trees in California. Phytopathology, 3: 194-195. ————, 1923.—Gummosis of citrus. Part I. Gummosis due to Pythiacystis citrophthora. J. Agric. Res., 24: 191-213. Frasmur, L., 1942.—Phytophthora root rot of citrus. J. Aust. Inst. Ag. Sci., 8: 101-105. , 1949.—A gummosis disease of citrus in relation to its environment. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 74: 5-14. Furr, J. R., CARPENTER, J. B., and Hewitt, A. A., 1963.—Breeding new varieties of citrus fruits and rootstocks for the South-west. J. Rio Grande Hort. Soc., 17: 90-107. Grimm, G. R., and GARNsEY, 8. M., 1969.—Root rot and tristeza tolerance of smooth seville orange from two sources. Cvtrus Industry, 50: 12. Grimm, G. R., and WHIDDEN, R., 1962-3.—Range of pathogenicity of Florida cultures of the foot rot fungus. Proc. Fla. Sta. Hort. Soc., 75: 73-74. Hoacnanpb, D. R., 1919.—Relation of concentration and reaction of the nutrient medium to the growth and absorption of the plant. J. Agric. Res., 18: 73. Hopeson, R. W., 1967.—Horticultural varieties of citrus. In Reuther, W., Webber, H. J., and Batchelor, L. D. (eds.), The Citrus Industry, 2nd ed., Vol. 1, Ch. 4, pp. 514, 551. Univ. Calif. Div. Agr. Sei., Berkeley. Krorz, L. J., Brrrers, W. P., and DE Wotrs, T. A., 1965.—Citrus rootstocks resistant to Phytophthora root rot. California Agriculture, 19: 10. , 1966.—Resistance to Phytophthora root rot. Calif. Citrograph., 51: 257-258. Kuotz, L. J., and Dz= Wotrs, T. A., 1965.—Tetrazolium, an indicator of extent of infection in Phytophthora root rot of citrus. Pl. Dis. Reptr., 49: 423. Kiorz, L. J.. De Wore, T. A., and Batnszs, R. C., 1969.—Resistance of trifoliate orange stocks to gummosis. Calif. Citrograph., 54: 259-260. Kiorz, L. J., DE Wore, T. A., and Po-Pine Wone, 1958a.—Influence of two varieties of citrus scions on the pathogenicity of three isolates of Phytophthora parasitica to sweet orange rootstocks. Phytopathology, 48: 520-521. , 19586.—Decay of fibrous roots of citrus. Phytopathology, 48: 616-622. Kiorz, L. J.. D—E Wotre, T. A., Moorz, P. W., and Newcoms, D. A., 1967.—Testing sweet orange rootstocks. Calif. Citrograph., 52: 387-388. Knorz, L. J., and Fawcrrt, H. §., 1930.—The relative resistance of varieties and species of Citrus to Pythiacystis gummosis and other bark diseases. J. Agric. Res., 41: 415-425. Kuorz, L. J., and Soxotorr, V. P., 1943.—The possible relation of injury and death of small roots to decline and collapse of citrus and avocado. Calif. Citrograph., 28: 86-87. Krorz, L. J., Stonzy, L. H., De Wotrs, T. A., and Szuszxrewics, T. E., 1965.—Rate of oxygen supply and distribution of root-rottimg fungi in soils. Sow Science, 99: 200-204. Navurivau, L. J.. Saannon, L. M., and Froticn, EH. F., 1958—Eureka lemon trifoliate orange incompatibility. Am. Soc. Hort. Sci., 72: 273. Rossetti, V., 1947.—Susceptibility of different species of Cztrus to some species of Phytophthora. Arq. Inst. Biol., 18: 97-124. Stonzy, L. H., Lerey, J., Knorz, L. J., and LABANAUSKAS, C. K., 1965a.—Water and aeration as factors in root decay of Crtrus sinensis. Phytopathology, 55: 270-275. Stontzy, L. H., Lerry, J., Knorz, L. J., and Dr Wotre, T. A., 1965b.—Soil aeration and root rotting fungi as factors in decay of citrus feeder roots. Soil Science, 99: 403-406. Stupss, L. L., 1963.—Tristeza-tolerant strains of sour orange. #.A.O. Plant Protection Buil.. 1: 8-10. Swine se, W. T., and Re«Ec#, P. C., 1967.—The botany of Citrus and its wild relatives of the Orange subfamily. In Reuther, W., Webber,H..J., and Batchelor, L. D. (eds.), The Citrus Industry, 2nd ed., Vol. 1, Ch. 3, p. 514. Univ. Calif. Div. Agr. Sci., Berkeley. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALES. VoL. 96, Part 3 AUSTRALASIAN CERATOPOGONIDAE (DIPTERA, NEMATOCERA) Part XV: THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA MARGARET L. DEBENHAM School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney [Accepted for publication 21st April 1971] Synopsis The Australian and New Guinea species of the genus Alluaudomyia Kieffer are revised. Ten new species and one new subspecies are described, Skuse’s Ceratopogon latupennis is transferred to this genus, and Tokunaga’s Alluaudomyia novaguineae is placed in synonymy with Alluaudomyia spinosipes Tokunaga. New data are recorded for some previously described species, and a key is provided for identification of the 25 known species found in the area. This study was prompted by the publication of Wirth and Delfinado’s comprehensive revision of the Oriental species of Alluaudomyia (1964). In this paper the authors state that ‘‘ only the Neotropical and Australian species are now poorly known, but undescribed material indicates that the genus is not well represented in the extreme south. Only 3 or 4 species collected in Australia... are known to us.’’ The present study raises the number of species recorded from the Australian mainland to 14, but of these four are New Guinea or Oriental species which have penetrated to the far north of Australia and a further three have thus far only been recorded from the north of the continent, although they are not yet known from New Guinea. Of the remaining seven species, only two, latipennis and alpina, appear to have a purely southern distribution. The first species of the genus to be recorded from the Australia-New Guinea area was described by Skuse in 1889 under the name Ceratopogon latipennis, but the correct generic status of this species has until now been unrecognized, and consequently it was omitted from Wirth and Deifinado’s list of world species. No further record of the genus in this area appeared until 1955, when Lee and Reye reported its occurrence in Queensland and New South Wales. In 1959 a Single species was described from New Guinea by Tokunaga, and a further 11 species were named from the same area in 1963, while one species previously described from Micronesia was also recorded. The present paper increases to 25 the number of species known from the Australia-New Guinea area. Of these 10 are new and one is a new subspecies of an Oriental species. Wirth and Delfinado placed the Oriental species in five groups based on characters of wing pattern, spermathecae, hypopygium and leg banding. These groups have not been followed in the present paper as some of the Australian species combine the characteristics of more than one group, resulting in a partial breakdown of the classification. At present it appears that a group system based on the number and form of the spermathecae and certain male genitalic characters may be possible, but the resulting groups would be too large and contain too many widely differing forms to be of any practical value. METHOD OF DESCRIPTION All new descriptions are based on slide specimens cleared in a mixture of one part absolute alcohol to one part creosote and mounted in balsam on microscope slides, except for the few cases where alcoholic or pinned specimens have been available for detailed description of the thoracic pattern. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoctetTy or New SoutH WaAteEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 129 Table of Measurements Measurements of newly described species are based on the holotype and, if available, the allotype, unless otherwise stated. Measurements of previously described species are taken directly from the original descriptions. Wing length is measured from the basal arculus to the wing tip, which gives a value approxi- mately one-tenth less than the measurement employed by Tokunaga, and allowance should be made for this. Morphological Terms See Wirth (1952) and, for modifications, my previous paper in this series (Part XIII, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 94 (2): 145, 1970). For pupal characters, see Jones (1961). Length is measured from the vertex of the head to the tip of the abdomen. Illustrations Except for drawings of thoracic pattern, which are freehand, these were done with the aid of a graticule and squared paper. All are based on type specimens unless otherwise stated. In figures of femora and tibiae, the fore leg is uppermost. Location of Types Types of newly described species are lodged in the collection of the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney, unless otherwise stated. Paratypes, where available, are in the School of Public Health; Australian National Insect Collection, Canberra, A.C.T.; United States National Museum, Washington; British Museum (Natural History); B. P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Abbreviations S.P.H. & T.M... School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney. A.N.I.C. .. Australian National Insect Collection, Canberra, A.C.T. ely ee: .. anteromarginal (tubercle). d.a.s.m. .. dorsal anterosubmarginal (tubercle). l.a.s.m. .. lateral anterosubmarginal (tubercle). d.p.m. .. dorsal posteromarginal (tubercle). open .. lateral posteromarginal (tubercle). V.p.m. .. ventral posteromarginal (tubercle) Genus ALLUAUDOMYIA Kieffer Alluaudomyia Kieffer, 1913, Voyage Ch. Alluaud et R. Jeannel en Afrique Orientale, Dipt., 7: 12; de Meillon, 1939, J. ent. Soc. S. Africa, 2: 7; Okada, 1942, Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formosa, Jee olds Wart l 952. ‘Ann. ent. Soc. Amer., 45: 423; Tokunaga and Murachi, 1959, Ins. Micronesia, 12: 352; Wirth and Delfinado, 1964, Paci. Insects, On: 599. Type species, by monotypy, Alluaudomyia imparunguis Kieffer. Neoceratopogon Malloch, 1915, Bull. Ill. St. Lab. Nat. Hist., 11: 310. Type Species, by original designation, Ceratopogon bellus Coquillett. Prionognathus Carter, Ingram and Macfie, 1921, Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit., 14: 309. Type species, by original designation, Prionognathus marmoratus Carter, Ingram and Macfie. Thysanognathus Ingram and Macfie, 1922, Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit., 16: 244 (nom. nov. for Prionognathus Carter, Ingram and Macfie, nec La Ferteé- Sénectere). Isoecacta Garrett, 1925, Seventy New Diptera, p.9. Type species, by monotypy, Isoecacta poeyi Garrett=bella (Coquillett). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoctetTy or NEw SourH WatsEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 130 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER Generic Diagnosis (from Wirth and Delfinado, 1964) Body moderately slender, not strongly hairy, usually small to medium, but occasionally larger, up to 2-7mm. LHyes bare or pubescent, contiguous to narrowly separated above. Palp 5-segmented, segment III usually with a small round pit on apical half bearing sensillae. Antenna 15-segmented, 9 with distal 5 segments slightly elongated, 3 with distal 3 segments elongated, plume present. Legs slender, without strong spines, occasionally with spine-like hairs; hind first tarsal segment bearded ventrally, fourth tarsal segment of all legs cordate, fifth slender, unarmed. Empodium vestigial; 92 claws long and slender, simple, usually very unequal but sometimes subequal on one or more pairs of legs, ¢ claws all small and equal. Wing without microtrichia, macrotrichia usually present towards wing apex, sometimes extending over most of the membrane; first radial cell absent, R,,; thickened just before its junction with costa, costa ending before to beyond middle of wing, median fork petiolate. Abdomen moderately stout; 1 or 2 sclerotized spermathecae present, sometimes an aberrant third one also present; 4 genitalia with very diverse specific modi- fications, but ninth tergite usually elongate, ninth sternite usually short with caudomedian excavation, aedeagus usually with basal arch and distinct caudo- median stem, parameres usually separate, with a lateral, sometimes detached, basal arm, elongate stem, and distal armature of one or more spines, lobes or filaments. Key to Australian and New Guinea Species of ALLUAUDOMYIA 1. Wing with more than 8 conspicuous dark spots ....................-2205-- sees eeees 2 Wing with 3 or fewer conspicuous dark spots, these situated at end of costa, just before r-In Cross- vem, and On Mis sre scvals bis temas Mande tones an nae nbn s eels toleas Un ee ngeinenay Sue STS Ate 7 2. Wing with 7 spots arranged on M,, M,, M,,,, Cu, and anal vein, as well as mottling on MAC ASUS) 5 ie su sijocs Ae aos Sor ae Buwhitoke Pegeleil tael etapa ragays ecto Rega oe Perce cyanea coflaty aeayie A ae ea 3 \AVaiaee Trine, SPOOUS: SHURE! tin Cells Biss yrEll GS OM WAS oceccocdsccovoadcavgccvoo0adsb see 5 3. g wing with 3 dark punctures on Rs before r-m cross-vein; ¢ and 9 wing without dark PUNCHUTESMONMR ieee Wee. Lees) A sitad. Ab ae AEE eae ete ate man: EPaasey ee fel: 1. personata n. sp. ey wie without dark punctures on Rs before r-m cross-vein ; 2 wing with 2 dark punctures on R 4. Apdedeie with a very elongate caudal stem; spermatheca large, elongate oval, approxi- mately 0:12x0:08mm.; some macrotrichia of 9 wing with pale grey dots at bases ... B eC rausncre ho eeis PERE ee Bin erie Neen Ken Bini Abbie td bo Bln ah KD bo 48 2. annulipes australiensis n. subsp. Aedeagus with a short caudal stem ; spermatheca smaller, more rounded, 0-09 «0-06 mm. ; some macrotrichia of 2 wing with conspicuous black dots at bases .................... Gite ciel Teka weit de sive ne: SUV auch helt pale errenapeuaye pune eR Wc aegalctet tone en iar 3. tokunagat Wirth and Delfinado 5. Wing with spots in cells very close to wing margin ; spot at end of costa scarcely extending on to membrane ; mid and hind femora with basal half to two-thirds dark ;. spermathecae without) diverticula): . cle Anne serait one nhc Ree ate mor ee a ee eae one 14. varia n. sp. (9) Wing spots in cells not very close to wing margin; spot at end of costa extending consider- ably on to membrane ; all femora broadly pale basally ; spermathecae with diverticula .. 6 6. 9 with wing margin broadly infuseated, spot in cell M, elongate rectangular ; spot on vein R, absentiin= both. sexess 7. ait.t oe iksras aaa gentile ete tute een TOR RT Seen: 4. fumosipennis n. sp. © without conspicuous infuscation on wing margin, spot in cell M, small and round; both REDNESS Wailea, CHAE (SyoKoKy) Oral HEMI TB ooo saad ccccasscuneogdoccancucceed 5. unguistyla n. sp. 7. Wing with a single, usually pale, spot at end of costa, without definite spot on membrane just before r-m cross-vein, although Rs and M may be slightly infuscated ............ 8 Wing with a distinct spot before r-m cross-vein, sometimes also with a spot on R, .... 12 Ber TV OSs DALE: Bie ee cue he oc. auc geisie Cesena ieee CoB siete wae ego an cn twen enema een cee ARC teT ch nets eer ENE 9 Hiyesmpulbescomt ih. casei kos oki cuadae wut otis a ARES Ud eats EU REES Bier bor ona daeae Se abck aaa Cotes 11 Owwessrentinelysyellowil ees Ws es, lets Ie Les dee eee mice cies 6. tmmaculata Tokunaga ILE as yma, joBks) Javony Chistian loon IeIACKS . osc anevncconp eos aencaobsonoaduooueronD bE 10 10. Abdomen largely yellow; aedeagus of male plate-like, deeply bifid apically, somewhat inssCreala hinge fy iA, soos keaoe redo do nwiedooncooue€ 7. insulana Tokunaga and Murachi Abdomen dark brown dorsally, paler ventrally ; aedeagus of male arched, with a single, shortrapical spon’, ics:. seieitetne = eis Ueigkhs oe CeO eke eae 8. verecunda n. sp. 1 Tn this part of the key it is assumed that the unknown 9 of personata resembles the female of the closely related bifurcata Wirth and Delfinado ; this assumption may prove incorrect. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Sours WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 ne 14. 15. 16. We 18. 11). 20. 21. 25. 26. MARGARET L. DEBENHAM Sil Wing of 2 without macrotrichia, but with a row of spinule-like setae on anterior edge ; § aedeagus with a V-shaped apical notch, parameres hooked apically and with a long, slender RONCHI! PDROGETS . oS obs baccosedocoguasboodsmcogeseanugaouUDROboOe 9. papuae Tokunaga Mid femur with a narrow pale base, rest of basal half dark .......................... 23 Wing of 2 with a moderate number of macrotrichia, without spmule-like setae; g aedeagus with a W-shaped apical notch, parameres rounded apically, apical process long, flattened Bin! HEROIC oo5,.5 0 Pala OOOO ow. stole vo 0.00 6 bade aot SOE mENOne, otc. 10. bifasciata Tokunaga . Spermatheeae with diverticula; aedeagus bell-shaped, its apex produced into a short, verily login joroesss (anes, UA, PAS AIO, BO) coscopoucseasugepedcogcdedesaccnec 20 Spermathecae without diverticula ; aedeagus various, but never as above ............ 13 . Very dark species, the legs dark brown with narrow paler bands preapically on all femora andesub-basallysandspreapically, ony alletibiaemey sees. esas ee 11. alpina n. sp. mecannorerexbemsive live pale wera. c-lacppscbsteed ae nate Ghobs ols ls sae? CYR Meg ocd matty iters bs ke spay ote & 14 Spot at tip of R,,, extending well on to wing membrane, at least in 9 ; spermathecae elongate oval, the long axis parallel to the neck; ¢g with coxites long and narrow, parameres with depachedlaasalWemrmn Si panacea cl ene ee ee waeyee EA cha SeaLetohate srs nites tate Wl aisianss tksier ele woler de tts 15 Spot at tip of R,,; scarcely, if at all, extending on to wing membrane ; spermathecae round or, if oval, long axis perpendicular to the neck; g with coxites rather short and stout, (ORTNANEIRSS Wwantay losisell Grams GibeKelNeCl bo op k boos Soouadocbe oon eodur opusebeundEoebenaes 17 Mid tibia’ pale except for dark base and apex.................. 12. latupennis (Skuse) Mid tibia largely dark or at least with a distinct dark band on apical third ............ 16 Humeral areas of scutum entirely pale; g parameres with a long, broad, tapering preapical PLOcEssearisinaawellidowvbeysteniy ry.) ). pera eke a et 13. appendiculata n. sp. Humeral areas pale, but with distinct dark punctations at bases of setae; gj parameres with a pale, relatively short setose preapical process arising within the apical loop .......... I ets ccc sip MER acs fo estat fo Mrdee ses a) susp awa aAe a cv Ata) Seeeris «Boao oes eT ea 14. varia n. sp. (3) Mid femur almost entirely brown, only narrowly pale basally and preapically ........ FIN oy hai Eee Pe SR cree 5 IARC Ona LER oka ahre chet ailena tet) cenuace: 15. platipyga Tokunaga Mid femur with a broad brown central band, a narrow brown preapical band and a brown CIOERSY THES ATIAIS) ANCE Pear, Cotte & eeeRRI COE Sina G co tea cinta MIAO OAD CeCe Oto cin OM A Cee ieee ois eet 18 Aedeagus of g a simple arch with a single hook-like apical process arising from its dorsal surface ; parameres with stems slender, two long apical processes; 2 genital sclerotization simnjolle. Weslngyosel, macemeononoms (Iii, Gl) sscssescdnooscouasdccscuasue 16. reyei n. sp. Aedeagus with paired apical processes ; parameres with stems broad basally, a single apical process; 2 genital sclerotization larger, more conspicuous, U-shaped ................ 19 Apical processes of aedeagus horn-like, not bent, broad basally and tapering to a rounded point ; parameres with a long, tapering apical process; 2 genital sclerotization distinctly U-shaped, without a heavily sclerotized process inside the loop of the “U” (Fig. 157) .. PTR det ee ee oc lets ioe lot tabs WA ethtuchemne hee, ee eLeAnls Se Be, 17. bicornis n. sp. Apical processes of aedeagus laterally bent before tip ; parameres with a very short, parallel- sided process; 2 genital sclerotization very conspicuous, U-shaped but very broad and rounded, a triangular, heavily sclerotized process within the loop of the ““U”’ (Fig. 162) «6:0 0-09.07 ALG OEAIO Bi © EUCRORE Ren cigeh RCS ROR a EE en gon EERE ch SER epee Mees 9, On Mira tee 18. fragmentum n. sp. Mid femur with a distinct dark brown preapical band ..............--.---+------::- 21 Mid femur without a distinct dark preapical band ; if band present it is very pale ...... 24 Sub-basal dark band of mid tibia confluent with dark base forming a broad basal band 2, 21. Gubi oO GNA G (A snc dBs Sac cle RENAUD PREPS ITE ares RCI Citi ENE iti? Petrone wd Nee 19. petersi Tokunaga Sub-basal dark band of mid tibia separated from dark base by a distinet white or yellow loguavel Sea A dee Some ADRS BORE co Oo AORN ere eo COMM NO eS San ab 6. areca > Cy tree tee basalhaliror maid) femunientimely pale. 2225.4 2-25 see 12-20. astera Nokunaga . Two spermathecae, one with a short, straight diverticulum, the other with a long, undulate diverticulum ; stems of parameres slender, apices flattened, slightly bent laterally, sub- tineraaullene, slaeimolhy joomaech eodocnanccousbsseoscondssssacnsoge Mik amnnepsis iol Both spermathecae with straight diverticula; male unknown...... 22. smeei Tokunaga . Claws of fore and mid legs subequal in 2; diverticula of spermathecae slightly swollen apically ; stems of parameres very narrow on basal half, broader on apical half, apices short, pomped wbentrabenisbipansles|bOeStem ere) leila 23. spinosipes Tokunaga Claws of fore and mid legs very unequal in 2; diverticula not swollen apically ; parameres GUS Ty Sm ete ARE uN Aeon PPS ay SEN has SER ERMC UOS «GROEN ARE ILLS AWE os a ec ea eee, DO Fmd eters fuscous sonm basal! jwo-bhirds! Pele else ae eae eee 24. NEG. Now 1 Hind femur with base broadly pale and a dark central or post-central band .......... 26 Diverticula of spermathecae short, subequal, about 0-012 mm. long; basal half of stem of parameres strongly swollen, apices not undulate, somewhat rounded .. 25. brandti Tokunaga Diverticula of spermathecae unequal, longer, about 0-051 and 0-042 mm. long; stems of parameres only slightly swollen basally, apices slender, undulate, sharply tapered .... Solio alo b's Cid CLS SIS Oe ib CII Sie DIO totes Sib ee BloInlS Slo otelbib wo nacre MAO das Odenton A Nol an irays¥er=) PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES. Vou. 96, Part 3 132 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER ~ SY SS Qa Se TT fi: RNS RON Winn mie ro : ie Figs 1-3. Alluaudomyia personata. 1, g wing, X55; 2, g hypopygium, x200; 3, d parameres, x 200. Figs. 4-9. Alluaudomyia annulipes australiensis. 4,2 wing, x55; 5, ¢ wing (Townsville paratype), «55; 6, 2 spermatheca, x 200; 7, ¢ hypopygium (Townsville paratype), «200; 8, $ paramere (Maprik paratype), 200; 9, g coxite and style (Maprik paratype), «200. Figs. 10-14. Alluaudomyia tokunagai. 10, 2 wing (Siutmeri specimen), X55; 11, ¢ wing (Innisfail specimen), x 55 ; 12, 2 spermatheca (Korogo specimen), x 200; 13, g hypopygium (Innisfail specimen), «200; 14, g parameres (Korogo specimen), x 200. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEw SoutH WALES, Von. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM Lays 1. ALLUAUDOMYIA PERSONATA n. sp. (Figs 1-3, 15-16) Type: Holotype 3. Type Locality: Moran’s Creek, Innisfail, Queensland (5.ix.1963, H. Standfast). A small, brown and yellow mottled species, very similar to A. bifurcata Wirth and Delfinado. Female unknown. Male: Length 1-28 mm., wing 0:96 x0-37 mm. Head brown, vertex yellow. Eyes bare, separate. Palp brown, segment III with a small apical pit bearing sensillae (Fig. 15). Antennal segment II brown, segments ITI—XI whitish, XIJ—XIII brown, rest missing ; plume brown. Scutum yellow with brown mottling and punctures, scutellum yellowish but narrowly fuscous centrally, bearing 2 setae, postscutellum narrowly yellow on anterior edge, rest dark brown, pleuron yellow on upper half, brown on lower half. Coxae and trochanters light brown; legs whitish, all femora with basal half dark, femora and tibiae with many brown bands (Fig. 16), hind tibial comb of 5-6 spines; fore and hind first tarsal segment and basal half of mid first segment brown, rest of tarsi fuscous. Claws of fore and mid legs missing, of hind legs very small, less than one-third the length of the fifth tarsal segment, paired and equal, bifid at tip. Wing (Fig. 1) with a dark spot before the r-m cross-vein, one at junction of costa and R,,;, extending on to the wing membrane, and 7 posteriorly, one near apex of M,, one near either end of M,, one near apical end of M,,,, Cu,, and anal vein, and one on M,,, just beyond f{MCu,, as well as 3 small punctures on Rs and 1 on R,. Macrotrichia restricted to the wing margin between the ends of the costa and M,. MHaltere with stem white, knob fuscous but dark brown apically. Abdomen very pale brown, pleural membranes grey. Hypopygium (Figs 2-3) brown, coxites narrow and curved, each with a strongly recurved ventral root, styles. whitish, slightly swollen basally ; aedeagus deeply arched, with a v-shaped notch apically, caudal stem with a pair of slender apicolateral processes, parameres each with an attached basal arm, stem slightly curved, swollen apically, preapical process moderately long, approximately one-third the length of the stem. Distribution: Known only from the type locality. This species is very close, in both coloration and form of genitalia, to Alluaudomyia bifurcata Wirth and Delfinado from Malaya and Thailand. However, it can be distinguished by the dark bases on all femora, the recurved ventral root of the coxites, the pointed, not rounded, sides of the apical notch of the aedeagus, and the much longer preapical processes of the parameres. It can be distinguished from other similar species known from the area by the form of the male genitalia and the presence, in the male, of punctations on Rs; assuming that the female closely resembles the female of bifurcata, it will be distinguishable from the females of annulipes australiensis and tokunagai by the absence of punctations on R,,,; and the absence of dots at the trichial bases. 2. ALLUAUDOMYIA ANNULIPES AUSTRALIENSIS n. subsp. (Figs 4-9, 17-22) Types: Holotype 4, allotype 9 and 26 $¢g and 9 9° paratypes. Type Locality : Townsville, Queensland (holotype 0001-0300 hours, allotype 2100-2359 hours, 18.xi.1955, light trap, Belgian Gardens, flying fox bait, A. K. O’ Gower). Paratypes from ‘Townsville (12 33, Ors 9 exale 1955, 1900-2100 hours, Belgian Gardens, A. K. O’Gower; 2 gg, 1 9, 13.xi.1955, 2100-2359 hours, light trap, Belgian Gardens, mangrove tree, A. K. O’Gower ; le OFF 4a asl Oboe PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEw SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 3 134 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER light trap, Belgian Gardens, A. K. O’Gower; 1 3, 17.xi.1955, 1920-2100 hours, light trap, Belgian Gardens, flying fox bait, A. K. O’Gower; 4 gg, same data as holotype; 2 gd, same data as holotype but 0300-0530 hours ; 1 3, 1 9, same data as allotype; 1 g, 20.xi1.1955, 2200-0600 hours, light trap, Belgian Gardens, mango tree near polluted swamp, A. K. O’Gower), from Darwin, Northern Territory (1 9, 27—29.x1.1957, 2400-0630 hours, light trap, Maranga, H. J. Reye ; 1 g, 1 9, 13-14.vi.1958, light trap, Quarantine Stn., H. J. Reye; 1 3, same data but 16-17.vi.1958 ; 1 9, same data but 4-5.vi1.1958, N. J. light trap; 1 9, same data but 12—13.vii.1958 ; 1 9, same data but 26—27.v1i.1958, suction light trap), and from Maprik,t New Guinea (1 4, 1958). These specimens are very close to Alluaudomyia annulipes Wirth and Delfinado, described from Malaya and Thailand, but the males differ markedly in the length of the apical process of the parameres. In the Asian specimens this is very short and spine-like, but in the Australian and New Guinea specimens it is considerably longer, being approximately one-fourth the length of the stem. As this feature is consistent throughout the present series, the Australian-New Guinea form is here regarded as a distinct subspecies, at least until such time as intermediate forms may be collected. The females of annulipes australiensis can be distinguished from females of the nominate race only by locality of collection. Male: Length 1-59 mm., wing 1-01 x0-38 mm. Head brown, frons yellowish. Eyes bare, just contiguous. Palp brown, segment III with an apical pit bearing several sensillae (Fig. 18). Antennal segments Ii-III brown, IV—XI very pale, XII light brown, XIII brown on basal half, white on apical half, XIV brown with apical fourth white, XV brown (Fig. 20); plume yellowish-brown. Scutum yellowish with brown mottling and punctures, scutellum yellow, with 4 setae, postscutellum brown centrally, ochreous laterally, pleuron ochreous. Fore coxae ochreous, mid and hind coxae brown, trochanters brown, fore pair paler ; femora and tibiae yellow with brown bands and punctures as figured (Fig. 21), number of narrow bands variable, hind tibial comb of 5 spines; tarsi fuscous, fore segment I, base and apex of mid segment I, all of hind segment I and all fifth tarsal segments light brown. Claws of all legs small, under half the length of the fifth tarsal segment, paired and equal. Wing (Fig. 5) with a spot before r-m cross-vein, one on R, (the holotype also has a second small spot on R,), one at junction of R,,; and costa, and 7 small spots posteriorly, one near apex of M,, one near either end of M,, one near apical end of M,,, and Cu,, one at f{MCu,, and one on anal vein. Macrotrichia restricted to the wing margin between the ends of the costa and M,. Haltere whitish, apex of knob brown. Abdomen light brown, pleural membranes brown. Hypopygium (Figs 7-9) brown, the coxites yellowish apically and on their inner faces, styles bidentate, apices brown; aedeagus with a shallow, rounded basal arch and an elongate, apically forked caudal stem, parameres with a short, attached basal arm, stem slightly bent, apex expanded, blunt, bearing a flattened, tapering process about one-fourth the length of the stem. Female: Length 1:67 mm., wing 1:35 x0-:53 mm. Generally similar to male, differing as follows : Approximately 17 mandibular teeth. Antennal segments IV—V white, VI-VIII brown centrally, base and apex broadly white, IX—X brown centrally, base and apex light brown, XI—XTV brown with apex white, XV brown (Fig. 19). 1 Specimens with the data ‘“‘ Maprik, New Guinea ”’ are part of bulked light trap collections sent to §.P.H. and T.M. for study by Dr. W. Peters. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 135 Claws of all legs unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment 24:12: 25 in fore, 23: 12: 24 in mid, 17: 7: 20 in hind (Fig. 22). Wing (Fig. 4) also with several small brown punctures on Rs and R,,;. Macrotrichia more extensive, on apical half of wing and in anal cell, with greyish dots at bases of many macrotrichia. Cerci pale fuscous. Spermatheca large, elongate oval, with hyaline punctures anteriorly (Fig. 6). Distribution: New Guinea, Northern Territory, north-eastern Queensland. This subspecies can be distinguished from tokunagai by the form of the male genitalia, the larger, more elongate oval spermatheca, and the paler, less conspicuous dots at the trichial bases on the female wing. 3. ALLUAUDOMYIA TOKUNAGAI Wirth and Delfinado. (Figs 10-14, 23-27) Alluaudomyia splendida Tokunaga, 1963 (nec Winnertz, 1852), Pacif. Insects, 5: 216 (Type locality: Keravat, New Britain. Allotype from Goldie River, nr. Port Moresby, New Guinea; paratypes from Minj and Lae, New Guinea.) Alluaudomyia tokunagat Wirth and Delfinado, 1964, Pacif. Insects, 6: 633. Nom. nov. for splendida Tokunaga preoce. Winnertz, 1852. Specimens examined: New Guinea: Korogo, Sepik River (2 gd, 1 9, 8.i11.1964, D. H. Colless) ; Siutmeri, Sepik River (2 929, 17.iv.1964, D. H. Colless). Northern Territory: Darwin (1 g, 26—27.vii.1958, Quarantine Stn., suction light trap, E. J. Reye). Queensland: Innisfail (2 ¢g, 13.vi.1963, Eubenangee Swamp, H. Standfast; 1 3, 5.ix.1963, Moran’s Creek, H. Standfast). Characteristics: Medium-sized mottled species. Head yellowish-brown, vertex with dark median spot, eyes bare. Scutum yellow, mottled with brown dots and stripes, scutellum entirely yellow or with a narrow central fuscous band, 4 setae in female, 2 in male, postscutellum yellow ; legs yellow with many brown bands, basically as figured (Fig. 26) but number of narrow bands variable, female claws all very unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment Zo lao) 27 in fore) 29 212-5 228-5 im mid, 23-5: 9-5) 225 in hind (Fig. 27), male claws all small and equal. Female wing with dark spots on Rs, R,, R,,;, M,, M,, Ms,,, Cu,, and anal veins, and a spot proximal to r-m cross-vein, also with dark dots at some trichial bases (Fig. 10), male wing lacking spots on Rs and at trichial bases (Fig. 11), female with a moderate number of macrotrichia on apical half of wing and a few in anal cell, male with macrotrichia restricted to anterior edge and apex. MHaltere with all or part of knob, and sometimes part of stem, fuscous. Abdomen pale ochreous to pale brown. Spermatheca (Fig. 12) large, single, oval, with hyaline dots before base of duct. Aedeagus with a deep basal arch and a small, four-pointed apical lobe, parameres separate, apical third expanded and flattened, with a slender preapical process (Figs 13-14). Distribution: New Britain, New Guinea, Northern Territory, north-eastern Queensland. This species is readily distinguished from annulipes australiensis by the form of the male genitalia, the smaller, more rounded spermatheca and the very dark trichial bases on the female wing. 4, ALLUAUDOMYIA FUMOSIPENNIS n. sp. (Figs 28-49, 46-51) Types: Holotype Q, allotype 3, 20 gg and 29 99 paratypes. Type Locality: Darwin, Northern Territory (holotype 14—15.vi.1958, allotype 30-31.x.1957, Quarantine Stn., N.J. light trap, E. J. Reye). Paratypes from Darwin (2 $3, 2 99, 27—28.vi.1956, 1 g, 22—23.xi1.1957, 1 g, 10—11.vi.1958, 1 9, 11-12.vi.1958, 3 G9, 13-14.vi.1958, 1 9, same data as holotype, 1d, 299, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF NEw SoutH WaAtzEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 136 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER 17 Figs 15-16. Alluaudomyia personata. 15, 3 maxillary palp, segments III-V, x 350; 16, g femora and tibiae, «90. Figs 17-22. Alluaudomyia annulipes australiensis. 17, ° maxillary palp, x 350; 18, g maxillary palp, x 350; 19, 2 antennal segments VITI-XV, x 350; 20, g antennal segments XI-XV, «350; 21, g femora and tibiae, x90; 22, 2 fore (right) and hind (left) tarsus V and claw, «350. Figs 23-27. Alluaudomyia tokunagai. 23, 2 maxillary palp (Siutmeri specimen), x 350; 24, 9 antennal segments VIII—XV (Siutmeri specimen), x 350: 25, g antennal segments XI—XV (Korogo specimen), « 350; 26, 2 femora and tibiae (Siutmeri specimen), x90; 27, 2 fore (r7ght—Siutmeri specimen) and hind (left—Korogo specimen) tarsus V and claw, x 350. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF NEw SoutH WatEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 137 NOR oS re} te) os AD) W ° SMG 0% og a \ > \Yd gn 000, 0 J Nee Noe \ ee Wy o0 480,00 . | /\ l Sa DUS 8 Sco Jpeg? Qe iy 36 \ \ ia ONE NT Es Ay EN BONA LAU wD Figs 28-40. Alluaudomyia fumosipennis. 28, dorsum of thorax (Mt. Crosby specimen) ; 29, 2 wing, x55; 30, g wing, «55; 31, 2 spermathecae, «200; 32, ¢ hypopygium, ees eich } > Seed ose x9°S 8 OS -e ) Sees Gat Se WSL Ss ( yp ON SZ “fe a fo} LES tes rig? 2x) rsh %ory RIE Se Fh oN Yo Y 0 3 fs =| oe SUES YY Oa SON He oo 0°92 50,2 g Yotlo of Oe f) © Sse D0 qe ° yey) DOO Res OO me C2 DEW a- i Gy OL GE 00 2 0, Sy 0 } 0, 4 . \ op 08 Dp0,0°° nee \ ele 00% 0% « JI( i 0 i \ Dy’ © Nw 74 \ 109°), 0%, 02 / °9 fF 7/ au a) obo” / o,? i J ‘ SAIL noe Pc q Tatoo x 93 Bs n uh kPa aR rite i unis NA eye ED yy ying feN —F \ AYA eavanven” YO Qn Se ES ip Goats. | \ Eu SS lo | ) = Figs 90-95. Alluaudomyia latipennis, pupa. x 200; 91, profile of operculum, x 200; tubercles of 7th abdominal segment (Hornsby specimen), x 200; 94, tubercles of 8th abdominal 90, g respiratory trumpet (Nattai R. specimen). 92, dorsal tubercles of cephalothorax, 200; 93, segment (Hornsby specimen), x200; 95, g anal segment (Nattai R. specimen), x 200. Figs 96-101. Alluaudomyia appendiculata, pupa. 96, @ respiratory trumpet, x 200: 97, operculum (paratype), x 200; 98, dorsal tubercles of cephalothorax, x 200; 99, tubercles of 7th abdominal segment, x 200; 100, tubercles of 8th abdominal segment, « 200; 101, ¢ anal segment (paratype), x 200. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SoutH WaAtLgs, Vow. 96, Part 3 150 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER also with a broad, very pale fuscous sub-basal band, all tibiae with apex brown, fore tibia also with a narrow sub-basal brown band and broad, very faint fuscous central band, mid tibia with base brown, hind tibia with a pale fuscous central band (Fig. 110), hind tibial comb of 8-9 spines ; tarsi whitish except for distal two segments on all legs, which are pale fuscous, and hind segment I, which is light brown. Claws of fore and mid legs unequal, those of hind legs very unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment 34:17:27 in fore, 33:16: 27 in mid, and 25:9: 24 in hind (Fig. 112). Wing (Fig. 81) with numerous macrotrichia on apical half and in anal area. Three wing spots, one just before r-m, one on R,, and one at the junction of the costa and R,,;, the latter extending slightly on to cell R;. Haltere with stalk white, knob fuscous. Abdomen yellowish-brown. Cerci white. Spermathecae two, oval, sub- equal (Fig. 82). Male: Length 1-87 mm., wing 1-27 x0-48 mm. Generally similar to female, differing as follows : Antennal plume pale brown, flagearll segments III-XII pale yellow, XII-XVI brown (Fig. 109). Legs lacking pale fuscous areas on fore tibia and hind femur, but central band on hind tibia darker. Claws all paired, equal and simple, slightly more than half the length of the fifth tarsal segment. Wing with fewer macrotrichia, these restricted to the anterior edge and apical fourth of the wing. MHaltere white. Abdomen light brown. Hypopygium (Figs 83-85) light yellowish-brown, coxites long, narrow, styles short and scarcely curved, with rather blunt apices. Aedeagus with a low, squared basal arch and a pointed, dorsally curved apical process, caudal lobe long and narrow, ventrally curved; parameres expanded and just touching basally, each with a detached basal arm, apex elongated into a narrow, tapering process, a similar process arising subapically. Pupa: ULight yellowish-brown, dorsum of thorax darker. Respiratory trumpet pale to dark brown, 0-25 mm. long in female, slightly longer in male, with about 45 pairs of spiracles in female and 65-75 pairs in male, arranged obliquely along most of its length (Fig. 90). Operculum similar to that of appendiculata n. sp. (see Fig. 97), median tubercle without spine, placed well back from distal margin, a.m. tubercles situated between lateral corners, each with a short, basally directed spine, rest of surface without spines, but with very small tubercles, these most prominent around the bases of the a.m.’s and on the distal margin (Fig. 91). Dorsal tubercles of cephalothorax situated as figured, 1, 2 and 3 with very short, stout spines, 4 with a long fine seta, 5 with pore only (Fig. 92). Tubercles of abdominal segments 3-7 as figured, d.a.s.m. 2 and ].a.s.m. small with a short, stout spine, d.a.s.m. 1 with a long, fine seta, of d.p.m.’s 5 absent, 4 and 3, when present, represented by pores only, 1 and 2 of intermediate size, 2 with a short spine and 1 with a long seta, l.p.m.’s 1 and 3 large, with a short spine, 2 small, with a long seta, v.p.m.’s of small to medium size, 1 and 3 with a short spine, 2 with a long seta (Fig. 93). Tubercles of 8th abdominal segment as figured, d.a.s.m.’s and ].a.s.m. absent, as are v.p.m.’s 1 and 3, otherwise similar to preceding segment (Fig. 94). Anal segment with spines in a basal band of 2-3 rows (Fig. 95). Specimens examined: New South Wales: Mt. Dromedary (2 34, 9 99, 24.xi1.1965, light trap, I. F. B. Common and M. Upton) ; Hornsby (2 99, pinned, 11.iv.1956, 1 9, pimned, 16.1x.1956, 1 g, 1 9 both pinned, 19.ix.1956, 1 ¢, 23.1%.1956, 1S, 28.1x.1956, 1 9, 3.x 1956; 5 OO) 8:x°1956; hieht trap, D. J. Wee; 1 9, 9.x.1956, bred from pupa ex wet rock face, D. J. Lee and W. W. Wirth ; PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 151 Pee 9D GOL) Ga Zosel 9565 1 Gy 26-x. 1956, 1" 9, ge ne if OU Xe LOO light trap, D. J. Lee); Stockyard Creek, Colo Vale (1 9, 26.x.1954, ea hours, suction light trap, A. L. Dyce) ; Nattai eas Mittagong ais 9, 71.1964, light trap, D. J. Lee; 1 3g, 4.xi.1964, bred ex pupa, D. J. Lee and L. Smee ; 1 g, 15.xi.1968, bred ex pupa, D. J. Lee and M. L. Debenham). Distribution: New South Wales. The coloration and leg banding in this species is quite variable. In the Hornsby specimens the thorax ranges from fuscous yellow to ochreous brown, in the Colo Vale specimen it is ochreous yellow, in the Nattai River specimens yellow with fuscous clouds and a greenish tinge, and in the Mt. Dromedary specimens dark, slightly ochreous brown, sometimes with a greenish tinge. The legs are generally almost entirely pale, often with faint fuscous markings, but in the Mt. Dromedary specimens the markings are quite distinct (Fig. 111). The paler forms of this species are readily recognizable by the almost entirely pale legs. The darker forms resemble appendiculata n. sp. but can be distin- guished by the pale bases on all femora, the absence of a distinct preapical band on the mid tibia, and the different genitalia. 13. ALLUAUDOMYIA APPENDICULATA n.sp. (Figs 86-89, 96-101, 114-120) Types: Holotype g, allotype 9, 17 3g and 11 929 paratypes. Type Locality: Hornsby, N.S.W. (holotype 28.ix.1956, light trap, D. J. Lee, allotype 9.x.1956, bred from pupa ex wet rock face, D. J. Lee and W. W. Wirth). Paratypes from Hornsby (1 9, pinned, 6.ix.1956, D. J. Lee and W. W. Wirth; 1 4, 24.ix.1956, light trap, D. J. Lee; 1 dg, same data as holotype ; 1 4g, 8.x.1956, light trap, Die see eles oy SD 99 (3 29 pinned), same data as allotype; 1 3, 10.x.1956, 1 6, 24.x. 1956, tg, f 9, 25.%.1956, 2 Sg, 26.%.1956, light trap, D. Jeiee 3) 1 on 22.x.1957, light ‘trap, 300 ft., D. J. Lee ; J boats ProeaGal WES light trap, D. J. Lee ; il 3; 2X 1957, light trap, 300 ft, Dandie Lee) and Asquith, N.S.W. (2 33, 2 22, 19. xi.1965, 3 33, 1 9, 22.xi1.1965, light trap, A. L. Dyce). A large brown and yellow species, with legs distinctly banded, and the wing spot at the apex of the costa extending on to cell R,. Male: Length 2-62 mm., wing 1-42 x0-49 mm. Head brown. Eyes bare, contiguous. Palp light brown, segment III with a shallow preapical pit bearing several long sensillae (Fig. 115). Antennal segment II ochreous, III—XII very pale, XIJI-XV brown (Fig. 117); plume brown. Al Scutum yellowish-brown on anterior half with a large brown spot on posterior half, humeral areas whitish-yellow, scutellum yellow, dark fuscous centrally, with 4 setae, postscutellum and pleuron brown. Fore and mid coxae yellowish, hind coxa and all trochanters brown ; femora and tibiae yellow, the fore femur fuscous basally, broadly brown centrally, and with a brown preapical ring, mid femur brown on basal half and at apex, hind femur brown on basal half and with a brown preapical ring, fore tibia with a brown sub-basal ring, broadly brown centrally, apex brown, mid tibia with a brown sub-basal ring, a narrow brown preapical band and a brown apex, hind tibia with a brown sub-basal ring, a brown incomplete central band and a brown apex, hind tibial comb of 8 spines ; tarsi whitish but apices of segments I, II and III on fore and mid legs and segments II and III on hind leg fuscous, basal sixth of mid segment I and all of hind segment I brown, segments IV and V of all legs entirely fuscous. Claws of all legs small, equal, just over half the length of the fifth tarsal segment, each with a minute external basal tooth. Wing with three brown spots, one just before r-m cross-vein, one on R,, and one at junction of costa and R,,;, the latter extending posteriorly for some PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WALgs, Vot. 96, Part 3 152 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or New SoutH WALES, VOL. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 153 distance into cell R,, veins streaked with brown. Macrotrichia restricted to the anterior edge and apex between the ends of the costa and M,,,. Haltere white. Abdominal tergites brown except for the distal edge and posterolateral two-thirds, which are white, anterior sternites white, posterior sternites light brown on anterior half, pleural membranes white. Hypopygium (Figs 88-89) dark brown, coxites long and slender, styles whitish, short and rather stout ; aedeagus deeply arched, with a long, pointed apical lobe, parameres separate, with a short, arcuate, detached basal arm, a long tapering subapical process and a broad, flattened, tapered apical extension. Female: Length 2:25mm., wing 1-62 x0-64 mm. Generally similar to male, differing as follows: Colouring more yellowish. Eyes just contiguous. Mandibular teeth 12 large, 6 small. Segments I-III of palp (Fig. 114) whitish. Antennal segments brown, the basal ones paler, all except XV with base whitish (Fig. 116). Scutum more yellowish, scutellum entirely yellow. Legs (Fig. 118) banded asin male. Claws of fore and mid legs unequal, those of hind leg very unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment 20: 10: 25 in fore, 27 : 13 : 29 in mid, 25:8: 25 in hind (Fig. 119). Macrotrichia of wing (Fig. 86) much more extensive, covering apical half and part of the anal area. Brown streaking particularly prominent at base of M,. Abdomen more yellowish. Cerci white. Spermathecae (Fig. 87) two, subspherical, subequal, each with a short neck. Pupa: Pale brown, thorax darker dorsally. Respiratory trumpet light to dark brown, approximately 0-26 mm. long, with 50-60 pairs of spiracles extending obliquely along most of its length (Fig. 96). Median tubercle of operculum without spine, situated well back from the distal edge, a.m. tubercles situated between lateral corners, each with a short, basally directed spine, rest of surface without spines but with very small tubercles as described for latipennis (Skuse) (Fig. 97). Dorsal tubercles of cephalothorax as figured, 1, 2 and 3 with very short, stout spines, 4 with a long, fine seta, 5 with pore only (Fig. 98). Tubercles of abdominal segments 3-7 as figured, d.a.s.m. 2 and l.a.s.m. small, with a blunt spine, d.a.s.m. 1 with a long seta, d.p.m. 5 absent, 4 with a very short spine, 3 with pore only, 2 with a blunt spine and 1 with a fine seta, 1.p.m.’s 1 and 3 large, with a short, blunt spine, 2 smaller, with a long seta, b.p.m.’s also smaller, 1 and 3 with a short, blunt spine, 2 with a long seta (Fig. 99). Tubercles of 8th abdominal segment similar, but d.a.s.m.’s and l.a.s.m. absent, as are d.p.m.’s 3 and 4 and v.p.m. 1 (Fig. 100). Anal segment with basal band of spines in 2-3 rows (Fig. 101). Additional specimens: Queensland: Ravenshoe, nr. Tully Falls (1 9, 4.viii.1967, light trap, R. Ellis and L. Hawkins); Mt. Crosby (1 9, in alcohol, Haplanation of Text figs. 102-120 Figs 102-106. Alluaudomyia alpina. 102, 9 maxillary palp, x 200; 103, 2 antennal segments VIII-XV, x 200; 104, 9 femora and tibiae, x55; 105, 9 fore (right) and hind (left) tarsus V and claw, x200; 106, 2 genital sclerotization (paratype), x 200. Figs 107-113. Allwaudomyza latipennis. 107, 2 maxillary palp (Hornsby specimen), x 200; 108, 2 antennal segments VIII-XV (Hornsby specimen), x 200; 109, 3 antennal segments X—XV (Nattai R. specimen), «200; 110, 9 femora and tibiae (Hornsby specimen), x55; 111, 9 femora and tibiae (Mt. Dromedary specimen), «55; 112, 2 fore (left) and hind (ght) tarsus V and claw (Hornsby specimen), 200; 113, 2 genital sclerotization (Hornsby specimen), x 200. Figs 114-120. Alluaudomyia appendiculata. 114, 2 maxillary palp, x200; 115, g maxillary palp, segments TII-V, x 200; 116, 9 antennal segments VIII-XV, x 200; 117, 3 antennal segments XI-XV, x 200; 118, 2 femora and tibiae, x55; 119, 2 fore (left) and hind (right) tarsus V and claw, x 200; 120, 2 genital sclerotization, x 200. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WarEs, Vou. 96, Part 3 154 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER 4,.xii.1965, dusk—1.30 a.m., below dam bank amongst lantana, light trap, A. L. Dyce; 4 33, 2 99, all except 1 g in alcohol, 5.xii.1965, dusk-dawn, Lake Manchester Rd., 250 yds. from Brisbane Rd., in narrow, well-grassed, timbered eully, light trap, A. L. Dyce and M. D. Murray); Goodar Crossing, Weir River (1 g, 28.11.1953, suction light trap, 1730-2130 hours, W. HE. Poole); Noondoo (1 9, 16.xii.1963, light trap, A. L. Dyce and M. D. Murray); Yelarbon (3 ¢4, 27.11.1952, 1800-2115 hours, suction light trap, W. EH. Poole). New South Wales : Yagobie Crossing (2 99, 3.x1.1951, suction light trap, 1920-2100 and 2315-0200 hours, A. L. Dyce); Bundy via Moree (1 9, 20.v.1952, 1600 hours, net in creek bed, E. J. Reye); ‘“‘ Noonameena ’’ Station via Bingara (1 9, 24.ix.1952, swept in sunlight above pool, 1 9, 6.x.1952, swept from creek bank, A. L. Dyce); Bruxner Park, Coffs Harbour (3 99, 1.xi.1965, light trap, M. Upton); Otford (1 9, 5.ii1.1969), bred ex pupa from mud, M. L. Debenham, R. Russell and J. Citowitsch) ; Colo Vale (1 9, 17.x1.1954, suction light trap, 1930-2030 hours, A. L. Dyce); Nattai River, Mittagong (2 gg, 25.x.1968, D. J. Lee and M. L. Debenham); Minnamurra Falls (1 9, 16.xi1.1960, M. Upton). Australian Capital Territory : Black Mountain (1 4, 17.x.1960, light trap, I. F. B. Common) ; Canberra (1 3, 29.iv.1963, light trap, I. F. B. Common). Distribution: Queensland, New South Wales, A.C.T. The thoracic coloration of this species is very variable, ranging from yellow with very pale fuscous markings to entirely dark brown. Sometimes a greenish tinge is present. This species can be distinguished from the paler specimens of latipennis (Skuse) by the presence of distinct banding on the femora and tibiae, and from the darker specimens by the dark bases of the mid and hind femora and the presence of a distinct preapical brown band on the mid tibia, as well as by the different form of the aedeagus and the much broader apical lobe of the parameres. It is distinguished from the male of varia n. sp. by the absence of dark punctations in the humeral areas, the relatively narrow, well-defined preapical band of the mid tibia and the form of the genitalia. 14. ALLUAUDOMYIA VARIA n. sp. (Figs 121-131) Types: Holotype 3, allotype 9 (both in A.N.I.C.), 7 gg and 1 2 paratypes. Type Locality: Yelarbon, Queensland (27.11.1952, suction light trap, 1800-2115 hours, W. E. Poole). Allotype from Noondoo, Queensland (16.xii.1963, light trap, A. L. Dyce), paratypes from Yelarbon (5 ¢4, same data as holotype), Noondoo (1 3, 29-30.i11.1952, suction light trap, 2145-0130 hours, bored spring, W. E. Poole), Moree, New South Wales (1 9, date unknown, A. L. Dyce) and Mungie Bundie, Meehi R., Moree, New South Wales (1 3, 16.11.1952, suction light trap, 2000-2130 hours, A. L. Dyce). A medium-sized species, the male resembling appendiculata n. sp. in colora- tion and form of genitalia, the female with a distinctive wing pattern which readily differentiates it from other known species. The head is missing in the allotype. Male: Length 1:91 mm., wing 1-01 x0-39 mm. Head brown. Eyes bare, broadly contiguous. Palp whitish, segment III with a small preapical sensory pore bearing a few sensillae (Fig. 121). Antennal segment II dark brown, III—XII brown, XITI—-XV dark brown (Fig. 122) ; plume dark brown. Scutum brown, darker dorsally, humeral areas pale, dark punctations at setal bases, these especially conspicuous in the humeral areas, scutellum light brown with a broad dark band either side of centre, with 4 setae, postscutellum dark brown, pleuron brown. Coxae and trochanters brown, the hind pair darker ; legs whitish, extensively banded with brown, the fore femur broadly PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoctetTy or NEw SoutH WAtgEsS, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 155 Figs 121-131. Alluaudomyia varia. 121, g maxillary palp, « 350; 122, gj antennal segments XI-XV, x 350; 123, 2 wing, x90; 124, fg wing, x90; 125, 9 femora and tibiae, x90; 126, ¢ femora and tibiae, x90; 127, 9 fore (wpper) and hind (lower) tarsus V and claw, x 350; 128, © genital sclerotization, x 350; 129 92 spermathecae, « 350; 130, g hypopygium, =< 350; 131, 3 paramere, x 350. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SouTH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 156 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER pale basally, with a wide brown central band, a pale preapical band and a brown apex, mid femur brown on basal half and at apex, hind femur with basal two- thirds and apex brown, fore tibia largely brown with narrow, pale sub-basal and apical bands, mid tibia similar but sub-basal pale band broader, hind tibia with base and apex brown and a brown central band (Fig. 126), hind tibial comb of 6 spines ; tarsi pale fuscous, the distal segments slightly darker, apex of fore segment I, base and apex of mid segment I, and all of hind segment I, brown. Claws of all legs small, simple, equal, half the length of the fifth tarsal segment. Wing (Fig. 124) with three brown spots, one proximal to r-m cross-vein, one on R,, and one at junction of costa and R,,;, a8 well as a pale brown cloud anteriorly in cell R; beyond the end of the costa, veins slightly brownish. A small number of macrotrichia present on the anterior edge and apex of the wing, with a single row extending along the wing margin from M, to Cu,, and a few on the lower ends of M,, M, and M;,,. Haltere yellowish, apex of knob brown. Abdominal tergites whitish, each with a large, pale brown, M-shaped spot, sternites pale, pleural membranes pale fuscous. Hypopygium (Figs 130-131) dark brown, coxites long and slightly tapered, styles whitish, short, apices rounded and finger-like ; aedeagus with a squared basal arch surmounted by a pair of membranous lobes, and with a trifid caudal stem arising dorsal to the lobes, parameres separate, with a detached basal arm, stems broad basally, tapering gradually, the apex produced into a long, curving, pointed process, on the inner surface of which is a small, triangular flap from which arises a pale, short, tapered, setose process. Female: Length (without head) 1:75 mm., wing 1-14 0-53 mm. Generally similar to male, but differing as follows : Hind tibial comb of 8 spines. Claws of fore and mid legs unequal, those of hind legs very unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment 20 : 9 : 24 in fore, 22 : 10 : 22 in mid, 18: 4: 21 in hind (Fig. 127). Wing (Fig. 123) with three radial spots and pale cloud anteriorly in cell R; as in Male, but also with large spots around the wing margin, one each at the apices of cells R;, M,, M, and M,, and one large and several smaller along the margin of the anal cell, as well as a spot over the basal third of M,. Macro- trichia more extensive than in male, covering most of apical half of wing. Abdomen as in male, but distal tergites entirely brown. Cerci white. Spermathecae two, oval, equal (Fig. 129). Additional specimen: Queensland: Cunnamulla, Warrego River (1 3, 28.11.1963, A. L. Dyce and M. D. Murray). Distribution: Southern Queensland, northern New South Wales. The association of the sexes in this species is based on the close resemblances in coloration and leg banding, and the presence in both sexes of the pale brown cloud anteriorly in wing cell R; beyond the costa. However, a much larger series of specimens is needed before the association can be regarded as definite. 15. ALLUAUDOMYIA PLATIPYGA Tokunaga Alluaudomyia platipyga Tokunaga, 1963, Pacif. Insects, 5: 221 (g only). (Type locality : Maprik, Sepik District, New Guinea.) Characteristics: A small, dark brown species. Head brown, mouth parts white, eyes bare. Thorax mainly brown, lateral margins of scutum yellow, scutellum yellow with a dark median spot, 2 setae ; femora largely brown with bases ochreous and a white preapical band (very narrow in mid femur), tibiae largely white, bases and apices dark, fore tibia with a median dark band, mid and hind tibiae with a narrow dark band just before centre. Wing with three spots, one before r-m cross-vein and one on R, pale, one at junction of costa and PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 MARGARET L. DEBENHAM 157 R,,5 prominent, a few macrotrichia apically in cell R;. Haltere white. Abdomen almost white, with very pale fuscous clouds on tergites I-IV. Hypopygium complex, aedeagus twice as broad as long, subsquare, with lateral caudal angles hooked, parameres broadly fused, each with apical part flattened, angulated and irregularly barbed. Distribution: Known only from the type locality. The structure of the hypopygium is unique. 16. ALLUAUDOMYIA REYEI n. sp. (Figs 132-133, 149-154, 165-169) Types: Holotype 4g, allotype 9, and 15 ¢¢ and 45 9° paratypes. Type Locality: Darwin, Northern ‘Territory (holotype and allotype 26—27.vii.1958, Quarantine Stn., suction light trap, E. J. Reye, paratypes 14, A OO, 27—28.Vi1.1956, 1 9, 1—2.x1.1957, 1 9, 2-3.xi.1957, 3 99, 15-16.xi1.1957, 4 g3, 4 OO, 22—-23.x1.1957, 1 9, 22-23.v.1958, 1 3, 1 9, 28-29.v.1958, 1 9, 30-31.v.1958, 1 g, 4 29, 10-11.vi.1958, 2 99, 11-12.vi.1958, 2 99, 13-14.vi.1958, 1 9, 17-18.Vi.1958, 1 g, 4 99, 18-19.Vi.1958, 1 9, 28—-29.vi.1958, 1 9, 6—7.vii.1958, 2 99, 9-10.Vvii.1958, 1 g, 2 99, 12-13.vii.1958, 4 3d, 6 9, same date as holotype, all Quarantine Stn., ight trap, E. J. Reye; 1 4, 1 9, 25—-26.xi1.1957, R.A.A.F. Marine Sect., E. J. Reye; 2 99, 26—27.xi.1957, Hast Arm Convent, N.J. light trap, KE. J. Reye; 1 3, 28-29.xii.1957, N.J. light trap, J. Dyer ; 1 9, 19-20.1.1958, R.A.A.F., N.J. light trap, J. Dyer). A medium-sized brown and yellow species, the wing with spots on the anterior veins only. Male: Length 1:56 mm., wing 0-87 x 0-32 mm. Head yellowish, vertex brown, clypeus light brown, proboscis yellow. Hyes bare, just contiguous. Palp whitish, segment V pale brown, segment III with a shallow preapical pit bearing a few sensillae. Antennal segment IT dark brown, flagellum light brown (Fig. 167); plume brown. Scutum ochreous with dark brown markings, the humeral areas white, scutellum fuscous on anterior half, whitish on posterior half, with 2 setae, post- scutellum brown centrally, yellowish laterally, pleuron yellowish-ochreous, with fuscous clouds. Coxae and trochanters pale fuscous, hind pair more yellowish ; femora and tibiae whitish, with brown markings, the fore femur with a broad brown central band and a brown apex, the mid femur with a broad, very pale brown sub-basal band, an equally pale brown preapical ring and a brown apex (Fig. 169), the hind femur with a broad brown postcentral band and a brown apex, the fore tibia with a brown base and apex and a broad central brown band, the mid tibia with a brown base and apex and very pale, narrow brown bands on the basal and apical thirds (Fig. 169), hind tibia very slightly fuscous basally, and with a brown central band and apex, hind tibial comb of 6 spines; tarsi whitish except hind segment I, which is brown. Claws of all legs small, equal and simple, just over half the length of the fifth tarsal segment. Wing (Fig. 133) with two brown spots, one before r-m cross-vein and one at junction of costa and R,,;. Only a few macrotrichia present, these restricted to the anterior edge of the wing. Haltere white. Abdomen whitish, tergites I-V with a distinct, light brown M-shaped spot covering most of the tergite, VI with this spot indistinct, remaining tergites light brown. Hypopygium (Figs 152-154) brown, coxites short, styles almost straight, whitish, nearly as long as the coxites ; aedeagus consisting of a simple arch, shallowly excavated basally, from which arises dorsally a ventrally bent, hook-like caudal process, parameres with long, attached basal apodemes, stems slender, with a pair of processes arising apically, one about twice the length of the other. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watss, Vot. 96, Part 3 158 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER vote Y i vy ‘ WV Y, pent PLN Y c = - 0.030 jos oso, mao OM) 0-027 = on = 0.02007 = CT = (020 0-05 hte 0k) 030 0038 Oras a = oss ou oma aca 0.026 = ong 4s pee 0026 0-023 0-020 0004 0M 0.000 0-098 0053 oo 0026 0041 0.026 0.032 035 0-042 0033, - 044 0-032 0mm 06 oom rea rare ici Mt Sita onan sient bent Dore yy 0-030 6-060 0-035 0053 OoLS 0090, OO 0030 0/030, 008 0-04 0-033 - 0-048 0-031 0-020, 0-030 oor - 0-030 0-055 : i030 1:00 0:0) ke naa th08t Sis oor Osage cta on OOM ork Bote Oso = Dos bo) mdr oe baw ose Tost Oeas Oo 08 0 026 = $100 0-083 9.030 0-030 0009 . i o-0st 0.037 mt . u ; = y ° ; : a comes ie sah) 8s oe Hcp eect ek Be eS eee ste ete ea a ea ated Se wats td dates > Se om 0.072 0058 0.033 0:087 0st 00a bok 0.008 Om Ot hone OIL 078 = Dom bods sok 0-053 0-057 O08 = en oor = g-oss 9-08) fom hon D080 MOK 80D $060 0780-088 Oo 0106-04000 = 0-037 0-004 OAL MD HL 0:04 0-051 0-096 0 04 ome = 0-073 o-078 outs 0-084 0:09 = ow tisk O08 i = Gat 0.0088 0se OTH = 0.08 O05; a0 BMD 10m Sa = * ; m7 233 oa a4 0.300 ) 3 03 oar 0285 0-318 O8IB 89a, tesa at 0.975 0-234 0315 08s 3s oe 0-38 3s 0403 a : 0300 pass Dash 0.300 ner OHO 0263 aves SNR Oa 6300-201 O55 9.285 O3H0 O35 8-361 Ca base 0-385 pet 0-436 o-10 . 13 ° ° 0-168 F 1m 0-404 O10 =O 108 0-208 pe Bt pes Ane oa as eee oe sete fe soars: eg pa ae cre meee) ett re A Oe Fe won (0.038 om: on 010034 034 = Gos1 032.0 0038 0-00 0.03300 Oo Ob26 Goss ot fai o-ga 00a 033,039 09 8088-0928 bom Oe 04026 8S 0026. 0-038 = f:028 b 032 034 Hi 6-08) WO 8 Dost aarp So3s 8082 a com O-nge 0038 0390-08 D038 wea gaze oun ban OOM 8091 ONS wR S088 = 0055083. OB (072 O02 908.088 8-095 0.030 0.070 0:03K OR rc at = 5 re, 2 7: a 0 0-7! 0 0430 ONS 0-480, 0-300, 0-405 0-491 0-351 om 000 0-452 o-3st oon 0 0 0486 0.003 0-300 0-510 0-480 os 04200420 85 0-404 0-600 A712 0.720 0409 ‘ 7 , 2 i re me oan 030 Ott OKs as jas 31s 0am Bay Bae oasis ans O43 tas a0 am am teat 031 one = ox 0am Boom es 227 ue 7 0 0 om ome 0193 0-205 0-195 0. F 0-243 om a.to1 209 oma orm a4 ga ong or 0-300 o-ai ° peas) Cony A et cals 0.008 Goss Odie O06 OTE 086 OE fd 0-098 0-108 0-104 0 068 0-095 0-070 0-060 0-007 O-110 0 104 0070 o- 102 0106 8s 7 7 ees 0-030 oe 0-030 0-039 0-033 0-052 Wm Ons 0-048 os Hoa at Oa3t Cr FT 0-03R Da 6.053 6 O:038 0-045 Dos wos D0 Oos G04 a-ngvawegtggo.udy 8 WV Diese 8:08 01030030 Om ant Ho 8.026 9032 00m 050.087 0 0-038 fms heat te 9-40 029 wosr a Gross Omak eS . 03k Ona Door QE 8.064 oom host 08) ge 600k O08 th 0-049 0.07 (038 Sow Gore 0a 08S Wend 27 2 iT 0.31 +300 0-280 a oso 0 9-300 0-364 0-264 0.507 Waa 330 0420-480 0:50 0.300 oaxs 0390 oz ass 0338 O9BL 0387090080897 0.376 0405 0-315 0-300 2 je oe Tie ie eT ao 0300 842 O.a60 0-270 308982 OBR ONTOS MAR OBRSADS 0.330 0.390 SS OT OBE 0-256 as? to 4a 351 0am 0-833 inet 3 130 O16 OTe o.20 oss Our 163 sts 0-205 O13 O12 ote Ota ono O43 0598159205, onl 6-103 o-t48 0-108 3 ws o4 u oss co 8076 0.038 0.004 00 5-060 0-040 0.058 0.008, 0.087 0.036 0 0.000 8-045 0004 Ovone 0-059, 048 moss) os 0-085 9-048 9-085 Mt O00 0b 0.030 OOO b-028 00%) Ou? 88 0.038 0-026 0-004 0-00 0-030 O03 O03 Gos | 3 a8 = a3 0-088 w O:0oK OLAS Dor? oom O03 O02 Dose 0-037 038O 0.030 6.038 0030 finxe ona D037 o.n26 9.000 0-0 = hon | Sroms : 00:8 0-070 Dour 0080 008k 808 0-030 0.005 O00 OOS OOO = 0-030 0-088 0.008.008 0-030 0-08 7 5 Wier 203 1% 235 2:50 = 2:00 Las Lo 220 2.20 203 oa 2.00 to Las 2:30 os ea B Mid 34s 3-04 et 320 gaz 238 245 248 203 3% ao 2-01 “0 348 is 2 © Ze zs Hind " 233 2-60 io 24t Paty 24 2.02 280 230 2 200 i 24a 4 Re OHya ce. Ma 2s = a rat ob ives os O48 oa oa on 06 O40 O48 0b OW 0.98 08 2 O-8s bo Oo a ¥ vous aus cs Sparmatboca = = 60 o.0s30-05) 7 é = se 0-043 + 0-042 048 0.048: 0063 0-045, = 006K «D.05; —O.08RxO.0NI8, = O-DETXMONS, = * 9-041 0-019 wvosaien-os7; "=" 00485 0'1s9,0-050;60,048 00520950 0/045 0,048 "0-014 0,0414D 9 «0.04 V 0480-02 9-051 «0-051 A +0018 0-037 x 0-026 0042 0 040; 0-049 x 0-045, “0. +0 + $0:0215 +0: . + 5 oa 0.048 x0 041 0.040 7 0048 (0.018 0-018) 0-008 0-049 0.057 «0.047 0:05 <0: 046, 9-041 0-046 0 049 x0 053 0-041 «0-047 0-054 0-048 0.056 = 0:04 0.030 x0: 096 0-043 40,0380 51 <9. a8 0-030 0.08 0.045 0.048 $022 0-022 0.017 70-020 40-018 2001 2 a TMossarementa of Hornsby specimens. * Hornsby: paratype, 7 From type Of seroyuinese—not given for types of epinanipe. * From allotype of newmgvinear. Darwin specimen. Paoceeninos oF yuk Linxxax Soctery or New Sovrn Wates, Vou. 96, Part 3 174 THE GENUS ALLUAUDOMYIA KIEFFER Characteristics: A small to medium-sized, largely yellow species. Head brown, eyes contiguous to just separate. Thorax almost entirely yellow, scutum entirely yellow or with pale fuscous clouds, sometimes with fuscous dots at setal bases, scutellum yellow but fuscous centrally, 4 setae, postscutellum brown centrally, yellow laterally, legs white to yellow, with dark bands as figured (Fig. 215), female claws all unequal, ratio of length of claws to fifth tarsal segment 28:15 : 32 in fore, 29: 15 : 29 in mid, 20: 9: 26 in hind, male claws all small and equal. Wing (Fig. 214) with two-three spots, one before r-m cross-vein, some- times one on R,, and one at junction of costa and R,,, extending into cell R,, macrotrichia spread on apical half of wing on female, restricted to wing margin between the ends of the costa and M, in the male. Haltere white or with knob pale fuscous. Abdomen widely white, in male anterior three tergites each with two lateral and one median brown spots, next two tergites with a very large subsquare brown spot, tergite VI with a T-shaped dark spot, VII with a pair of lateral spots, VIII with a narrow caudal dark band, female with tergites II-VI and VIII with pale fuscous bands anteriorly, cerci white. Spermathecae two, round and subequal, each with a long, slightly curved diverticulum. Aedeagus (Fig. 216) bell-shaped, short caudal stem bent ventrally, parameres (Fig. 218) with detached basal arms, stems not swollen, apices sharply bent laterally, narrow, Strongly tapered, slightly undulate. Distribution: New Guinea, northern Queensland. This species can be separated from brandti Tokunaga, which has a similar pattern of leg banding, by the longer processes on the spermathecae and the more slender stems and narrower, tapering, undulate apices of the parameres. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS J wish to thank Dr. W. W. Wirth, Systematic Entomology Laboratory, U.S. Department of Agriculture, and Mr. A. L. Dyce, McMaster Laboratory, C.8S.IL.R.0O. Division of Animal Health, Sydney, for the use of their preliminary notes and sketches on some of the Australian species, and to Mr. Dyce thanks are also due for the loan of many partially sorted specimens. The assistance given by Associate Professor D. J. Lee, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney, in the preparation of this paper, and the loan of type material from the B. P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu, is also gratefully acknowledged. References Jones, R. H., 1961.—Descriptions of pupae of thirteen North American species of Culicoides (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer., 54 (5): 729-746. Lee, D. J., and Reyes, H. J., 1955.—Australasian Ceratopogonidae (Diptera, Nematocera). Part VII. Notes on the genera Alluaudomyia, Ceratopogon, Culicoides and Lasiohelea. PRoc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 79 (5-6): 233-246. SKusg, F. A. A., 1899.—Diptera of Australia. Part 6—The Chironomidae. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 4 (2nd series): 286-311. Toxunaca, M., 1959.—New Guinea biting midges (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Paczf. Insects, 1 (2-3): 177-313. , 1962.—Biting midges of the Ryukyu Islands (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Paczf. Insects, 4 (1): 153-217. , 1963.—New Guinea biting midges (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Pacif. Insects, 5 (1): 211-279. Tokunaga, M., and Muracut, E. K., 1959.—Insects of Micronesia. Diptera: Ceratopogonidae. Ins. Micronesia, 12 (3): 103-434. WirtH, W. W., 1952.—The Heleidae of California. Univ. Calif. Pubs. Ent., 9: 95-266. Wirt, W. W., and Detrinapo, M. D., 1964.—Revision of the Oriental species of Alluaudomyia Kieffer (Diptera, Ceratopogonidae). Paczf. Insects, 6 (4): 599-648. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 3 SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE GENERA TRIODIA R.BR. AND PLECTRACHNE HENR. (GRAMINEAE) S. JACOBS Botany Building, School of Biological Sciences, University of Sydney [Accepted for publication 23rd June 1971] Synopsis The taxonomic position of Triodia and Plectrachne is investigated using essentially non-floral characters from 23 species of Triodia and two species of Plectrachne. The characters used are (i) morphology of the first seedling leaf, (ii) silica cells, (ii) bicellular microhairs, (iv) bundle sheath anatomy, (v) iodine staining, (vi) lodicules, (vii) chlorenchyma cells, (viii) starch grain morphology, and (ix) chromosome number and size. The usefulness and significance of these characters is discussed and the variation noted. From these characters it appears that the two genera are either Panicoid or EHragrostoid, but after consideration of floral morphology it is concluded that they are distinctly Hragrostoid and could perhaps be considered as primitive representatives of the tribe Hragrosteae. The validity of the generic division between the two genera is discussed and accepted from present data. INTRODUCTION The position of Triodia and Plectrachne within the family Gramineae has been a source of some disagreement. Mueller (1858-1882) implies a close relationship with Festuca, if only by placing some Triodia species in that genus. Hubbard (1934) placed them in his tribe Eragrosteae and this system was retained for nearly 20 years. Vickery (1953) includes Triodia amongst members of the tribe Eragrosteae. Gardner (1952) distributed members of the tribe Eragrosteae, which he did not recognize, between his tribes Festuceae and Chlorideae. He placed Triodia and Plectrachne in the tribe Festuceae, along with other genera now included in the tribe Danthoneae, and this system has been retained by Vickery (1961). These opinions have been largely based on comparative gross morphology. A Ithough Burbidge (1946) presented an extensive study of the leaf anatomy of Western Australia T’riodia species, little seems to have been done to incorporate these results into the classificatory system. Since the work of Avdulov (1931) grass taxonomy has included more and more microscopic characters. The incorporation of these features has solved some seemingly intractable systematic problems, and the present investigation was undertaken to determine whether these characters could clarify the systematic position of Triodia and Plectrachne. METHODS The references accompanying each of the methods refers to publications in which the basis for the descriptive technique used here is set out. The characters and methods used were: (1) The morphology of the first seedling leaves (Bor, 1960) were observed after germinating seeds of 7. pwngens, T. basedowti and T. irritans in sand. (2) Preparations for the study of silica cells (Metcalfe, 1960) were prepared by boiling portions of the leaf blade in a 1:1:1 mixture of 90 vols. " PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 3 176 SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF GENERA TRIODIA AND PLECTRACHNE hydrogen peroxide: glacial acetic acid: water, until colourless, then transferring through a series of solutions to xylol and finally mounting whole in polystyrene. (3) Bicellular microhairs (Tateoka, 1959) which were visible in the preparation for the silica cells. (4) Bundle sheath anatomy (Brown, 1958) was determined by preparing transverse sections with a sledge microtome, using sections from near the centre of two leaves if possible ; double staining the sections with safranin and aniline blue, and subsequently mounting them in poly- styrene. (5) Iodine staining for location of areas of starch formation is a relatively new technique for which no records of any extensive investigations have been found to date. It was found that all sections had to be prepared from leaves collected immediately before staining if a consistent result was to be obtained. Sections were mounted in a weak iodine solution and no permanent mounts were prepared. (6) Lodicules (Tateoka, 1960) were dissected from inflorescences, freshly preserved in 70°% alcohol, mounted on slides, and drawn with the aid of a drawing apparatus. (7) Separated chlorenchyma cells (Jacques-Felix, 1962; Freir, 1959) were prepared by macerating the leaf blade in a 1:1 mixture of 10% nitric acid and 10°% chromic acid for approximately two to three days. After treatment, the material was transferred to absolute alcohol and, gently squashing the material, mounted in euparal. (8) Starch grain morphology (Tateoka, 1962) was determined by scratching the surface of a seed of 7. pungens and staining the starch obtained with a weak solution of iodine. (9) Chromosome number and chromosome size (Avdulov, 1931) root tips were treated in 8-hydroxy quinoline for 3—4 hours, macerated in a 1:1 concentrated HCl and ethanol mixture, then stained in aceto-orcein. The type species for the genus Plectrachne was designated by Henrard as Plectrachne schinzii in Schinz. Vierteljahrs Naturf. Ges. Zurich (74: 132), whilst the type species for Triodia has been taken as Triodia pungens R.Br. (see Hitchcock, 1920). Both these species, as well as 22 other species of Triodia and one other species of Plectrachne, were examined for aS many of the above characters as possible. MATERIALS All specimens for leaf characters were obtained from the National Herbarium of N.S.W., the majority of which were determined by Dr. N. T. Burbidge. Seed material was obtained by collections made by the author for 7. basedowi and 7. irritans and from Dr. N. T. Burbidge for 7. pungens. Fresh sections for starch formation were obtained from specimens, collected by the author, growing in the Botany Department, University of Sydney. Material for the lodicules was obtained from collections made by the author for T. irritans and from herbarium specimens from the N.S.W. National Herbarium for 7’. longiceps and T. pungens. Material for chromosome counts was obtained from specimens growing in the Botany Department, University of Sydney. RESULTS (1) The morphology of the first seedling leaf has been classified into two main classes (Bor, 1960; Jacques-Felix, 1962) : PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 S. JACOBS WAH (i) Panicoid: characterized by an ovate to narrow-ovate first seedling leaf. (ii) Poédid: characterized by a linear first seedling leaf. Of these two classes, Triodia basedowti has a narrow-ovate first seedling leaf and is therefore Panicoid, and both Triodia pungens and Triodia irritans have linear first seedling leaves and are therefore Podid. (2) The characteristic silica cell shapes for various tribes have been described in detail by several authors (Duval-Jouve, 1875; Prat, 1932; Metcalfe, 1960 ; Bor, 1960; Jacques-Felix, 1962). In Triodia and Plectrachne several different forms were encountered which could be divided into two types (Fig. 1 (a)), viz. the basic Panicoid, or dumb-bell shape, and a series of similar types showing affinities with the Eragrostoid forms. Table 1 indicates an almost equal division of the species with Panicoid and Eragrostoid characteristics. S) Crs ea neiticsae en) C3) ROS CSRS (i) (ii) \ \\ O Oy aioe che wea 0 2 9 noumie (iii) #4 (iv) , ; | : Wy il (iii) (ii) c Fig. 1. (a) Silica cells or bodies of (i) J’. concinna, (11) T. pungens, (ii) T. fitzgeraldw, and (iv) T. basedowti. All x 250. (i) and (ii) are characteristic Panicoid forms and (iii) and (iv) are characteristic Eragrostoid form. (6b) Bicellular microhairs from TJ. irritans (x 500). A typical Eragrostoid form. (c) Lodicules of (i) 7’. l-ngiceps (x 60), (u) 7’. pungens (x 36), (ii) 7. irritans (x42). Showing variations of the basic cuneate Eragrostoid form. The silica cells of the Plectrachne spp. examined were observed to be well inside the range of variation exhibited by the Triodia spp. Silica cell shapes are generally considered of importance as taxonomic characters, and presumably they are of use in the majority of cases for tribal classifications, but the presence of two very different forms in one genus makes PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTy or NEw SoutH WaAtess, Vou. 96, Part 3 178 SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF GENERA TRIODIA AND PLECTRACHNE their use difficult in this particular case. On the evidence available, sub- family classification has two alternatives (viz. Panicoideae or Eragrostoideae), but Panicoid silica cell forms have been reported in sub-family Eragrostoideae by Tateoka (1959). (3) Bicellular microhairs were analysed using two ratios and a derived angle as an index of shape (Tateoka, 1959). The characteristics used were : .. Maximal width. @) Total length Length of upper cell. Length of lower cell | Maximal width —basal width x (il) 1 Length from base to rim of maximal width (iii) @=tan-!. TABLE | Grouping of Species on Silica-cell Shapes Panicoid-type Silica Eragrostoid-type Silica Cells Cells Triodia pungens Triodia basedowti 7. mitchella hi. secunda a. marginata T. fitzgeraldii She arritans Ts longiceps Oh. concinna TR. clelandir 90. hostilis Ae wiseana fh. stenostachya Dy, racemigera Pe microstachya fs roscida fhe hubbardiz as mutilis T. spicata T. 32° <36° F.) and 16 severe frosts (screen temperature <32° F.). Day length (civil twilight) at the experimental site ranges from a maximum of 15 hours in December to a minimum of 10 hours in June. In summary, incidence and quantity of rainfall and the period of heavy frost were the factors which differed most markedly between the two years. Soils (i) Topography and general distribution The topography and soils of the general area have been described by Churchward (1958). The three experimental sites are located at the C.8.I.R.O. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SoOcIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 3 O. B. WILLIAMS 195 Falkiner Memorial Field Station, the D. caespitosa and Stipa variabilis-D. caespitosa grasslands on the lower and upper levels of the clay plains, and the S. aristiglumis-D. caespitosa grassland on the loam of the Stud Park River Ridge. (ii) Soil-types The soils at each site are similar to those described and named by Smith (1945), Butler and Johnston (1946), and Johnston (1953) as Riverina clay, Billabong clay, and Deniboota loam. Riverina clay is a grey clay (Stace et al., 1968, p. 79) with a 0-0-5in. A horizon of slightly structured light clay which is hard when dry and sticky when wet. The B, horizon of 0-5—10 in. is a moderately structured heavy clay over- lying grey poorly-structured heavy clay. The permanent to semi-permanent: cleavage planes extend to the surface. All three components of the gilgai micro-relief, the puff, shelf and depression are represented (Williams, 1955). Billabong clay is a brown clay (Stace et al., 1968, pp. 79, 103) with a 0-0-5 in. A horizon of grey-brown compacted clay loam which is hard when dry and sticky when wet. The B, horizon of 0-5—-12 in. is a dark grey-brown massive heavy clay with blocky structure. It is hard when dry and intractable when wet. Below 12 in. the soil is a poorly-structured heavy clay. Cleavage planes are few and rarely extend to the surface. There are few areas of puff, and a small amount of depression. Deniboota loam is a red-brown earth (Stace et al., 1968, pp. 211, 214) with a 0-3 in. A, horizon of brown loam which is hard when dry and friable when. wet. The A, horizon is 3-6 in. of grey-brown sandy clay loam which is slightly compact and hard when dry but friable when wet. The B, and B, horizons from 6—24 in. are medium clays with well developed medium prismatic structure grading into grey-brown clay. : The main chemical differences between the three soils in the top 24 in. are (1) the acid reaction of the Billabong clay and Deniboota loam surfaces compared with the alkaline reaction of the Riverina clay (pH 6-1, 6-5 v. 7-5) and the pronounced alkaline reaction (pH 8-8) of the loam below 9 in., (2) the small amount of chloride in the Deniboota loam profile compared with the amounts in the Riverina and Billabong clays (0-034 v. 0-237 and 0-206 at the 9-18 in. depth, expressed as NaCl per cent. oven dry weight). The differences in nitrogen and phosphorus status between the various. surface soils are small, with a range of 0-052 to 0-100% and 0-017 to 0-020°% respectively. Both calcium and magnesium on the exchange complex of Riverina clay greatly exceed the values obtained from Deniboota loam (13-98 v. 2-27 and 14-05 v. 1-92 m-equiv./100 g. oven dry weight). (iii) Soil moisture relationships The periods over which water in the 0-3 and 3-9 in. depth is available for plant growth are set out in the lower part of Fig. 1, together with a record of the sampling dates and the incidence of rain sufficient to raise the moisture content of the 0-3 in. depth to the 15-bar level and above for short periods between sampling dates. These periods were calculated for the various depths. by gravimetric determinations of soil moisture for two sites in each gilgai component on the clay soils, and at two sites in the loam, 15-bar values for each depth, and bulk densities for the soil horizons. Slivers of wet soil were taken from the sides of cracks after rain and the soil water content determined. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF New SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 3- 196 PHENOLOGY OF SPECIES COMMON TO SEMI-ARID GRASSLANDS The amount of water which raised the moisture content of the surface 0-3 in. from the minimum field value to the 15-bar value ranged from 0.08 in. for Deniboota loam, 0-28 and 0-40 in. for the shelf of Riverina clay and Billabong clay, to 0-50 and 0-56 in. for the depression of the Riverina clay and Billabong clay. Small amounts of rain are sufficient to provide available water in the surface of Deniboota loam. The available water within the maximum wetted profile over the 1952-53 period ranged from 4-3in. in the Deniboota loam, 1-7 and 1-0in. in the depression and shelf of the Riverina clay, to 0-8 and 0-4 in. in the depression and shelf of Billabong clay. In 1952 the Deniboota loam had available water in the 0-3 in. depth for 270 days, the Riverina clay for 260 days (depression) and 240 days (shelf), the Billabong clay for 220 days (depression) and 140 days (shelf). In 1953 these periods were shortened by from 70 to 110 days. Depressions tend to be wetter than 15-bar values, per se, indicate because depressions are recipients of run-off from the massive surface of the neighbouring shelf. Further, run-off into cleavage planes modifies the generalized available water situation because it produces localized pockets of wet soil at depth. Water penetration is more uniform in Deniboota loam. Vegetation The three grasslands appear to differ markedly from the original communities of 100 years ago. (i) Danthonia caespitosa grassland. This grassland has been the subject of several papers (Williams, 1955, 1956, 1961). It has developed from an Atriplex nummularia Lindl. shrub-steppe community, possibly by way of an A. vesicaria Hew. ex Benth. community. The last A. vesicaria plants were eliminated from the experimental area by sheep grazing in 1948. (ii) Stipa variabilis-Danthonia caespitosa grassland. This grassland appears to have developed from the Acacia pendula- Atriplex nummularia association (Moore, 1953a, pp. 514-5). Few areas of unmodified shrub woodland now exist. The present grassland has been described by Moore (1953), p. 561) as a disclimax community, and Williams (1956) has measured its botanical com- position. Of the original dominants, only scattered plants of Kochia aphylla R.Br. remain. (iii) Stipa aristiglumis-Danthonia caespitosa grassland This grassland is a disclimax community at the western margin of the Eucalyptus woollsiana-Callitris columellaris association within the H. woollsiana alliance (Moore, 1953a, p. 508). Small areas of the original savanna woodland still exist to the east of the Field Station. The present grassland developed under intensive sheep grazing and the felling of trees for drought-fodder, structural timber or firewood. PROCEDURE ; The procedure followed the pattern of the previous study (Williams, 1961), with the frequent recording of species behaviour within a fixed area in each of the three grasslands. These observations were made monthly, or more frequently, e.g. every two or three days, when plants were flowering. The commencement of leafing, onset and duration of flowering and leaf senescence were recorded for each species. The periods when plants were PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WaLEs, Vow. 96, Part 3 O. B. WILLIAMS 197 vigorously vegetative, or were making limited leaf growth were estimated using plant height, plant diameter, or leaf length, appropriate to the growth habit of the particular species. Recording commenced in mid-1951 and continued until the end of 1954. Confirmatory checks of bloom periods were made between 1956 and 1961. Soil sampling was started in mid-1951 and continued until the end of 1953. The two years 1952 and 1953 with coincidental vegetation and soil moisture data are used in this paper. RESULTS The phenological data are presented in two sections: (a) the leafing phenology of seven species common to all three grasslands in 1952 and 1953, and (b) the flowering phenology for 25 common species during the same period. (a) Leafing Phenology Figure 1 illustrates the leafing phenology of seven species chosen because there were complete records for both soils and years and because they illustrate the behaviour of many species in the grasslands. Rainfall, frost periods and periods of available water in the 0-3 and 3-9 in. depths for each site are shown for 1952 and 1953. ARGUE SPECIES GRASSLAND 1952 1953 1.—A HORDEUM LEPORINUM LINK {" STIPA VARIABILIS HUGHES 2 P DANTHONIA CAESPITOSA GAUDICH. (+ P ATRIPLEX SEMIBACCATA R BR P SIDA CORRUGATA LINDL P CHLORIS ACICULARIS LINDL A-B CHLORIS TRUNCATA R BR | 36° OR CESS —_ FROST PERIOD 32° OR LESS ae OR LESS }___—___->"__, = DEPRESSION >| a ooo —EE ° GE SHELF . om mE «COO (O00 mo Ommo oc 0 6(0CamIE EEE Go tT cle la SHELF or CO 0 0 mets 0 9 COOH © ° miteatbetlios © ES a ° SOIL SAMPLING DATES (IN. 7 15 DAYS) 4 3 RAINFALL = aL. , i) Fig. 1. The three groups are numbered 1, 2, and 4, and are arranged as previously described (Williams, 1961) in the order of predominantly cool-season growth, through growth in all seasons, to predominantly warm-season growth. Groups 3 and 5 are omitted because they contained no species which grew continuously on all three soils in each year. The difference between the sites is illustrated by the performance of species as follows : Deniboota loam and the depressions in Riverina clay tend to maintain green leaf longer, as with Hordeum leporinum in spring and early summer, than do the other soils. In Group 2-1952 Stipa variabilis tends to start growth first in Deniboota loam, then Billabong clay, and Riverina clay. In Group 4 there were differences in species behaviour on the three soils, e.g. Atriplex semibaccata (May, 1953), Sida corrugata (January-February, 1952), Chloris acicularis (March, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaAtEs, Vout. 96, Part 3 198 PHENOLOGY OF SPECIES COMMON TO SEMI-ARID GRASSLANDS D. CAESPITOSA S. VARIABILIS D. CAESPITOSA D. CAESPITOSA S. ARISTIGLUMIS No OF SPECIES FLOWERING —) nN ts} iS q i - i= - ft si) taf Est 4 1 1 4 ut | TLiELIMCRAGIN, SGPURUIGEA EGF UOMINID Blas SU FIEINIt AUR SRA MIS? 70) SR UES Mi TALIM) Ue) SAW iSiaOeN SD: Fig. 2. SPECIES GRASSLAND YEAR |\yilude JESU WA Maa yA 8S) SOM NID 1952. ge 52 ° | = As ERODIUM CICUTARIUM (L.) L'HERIT. ecg L 53 e ee0o _— A® VULPIA BROMOIDES (L.)S.F. GRAY oe oes i aa | e = = A HELIPTERUM PYGMAEUM (BENTH) DC 2 are =a ca Doane = A HELIPTERUM MOLLE (A. CUNN. ex DC ) S28 | | | eee] | PG. WILSON 33 Re E-= es A® BROMUS RUBENS L. 52 eSs 53 683 A HELIPTERUM AUSTRALE (A. GRAY) DRUCE 22 ine =e ie A® HORDEUM LEPORINUM LINK. ae oss See 53 2 A ASPERULA CONFERTA HOOK. f 22 ES 53 ae P KOCHIA EXCAVATA JM BLACK oa 53 : e A ERODIUM CRINITUM CAROLIN oe 53 52 A DAUCUS GLOCHIDIATUS (LABILL ) 538 eee FISCH, MEY. & AVE-LALL of? Az MEDICAGO POLYMORPHA L Ss iadlnal al PI Eat = 52 ee ; P STIPA VARIABILIS HUGHES ae 53 e : ec0e A® HEDYPNOIS CRETICA (L.) WILLD pe aaae Bute OOK P PTILOTUS SPATHULATUS (R. BR.) POIR ena re mu 53 os$ rel A® LOLIUM RIGIDUM GAUDICH 92 “33 53 o$3 52 ° P DANTHONIA CAESPITOSA GAUDICH ots 53 ee 7 eee Joe LIM VyAl IMs (9D JO TAe SH Or eN@ fb Fig. 3. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH WALES, VOL. 96, Part 3 O. B. WILLIAMS 199 1952), but more particularly C. truncata (January to April, 1952; August to October, 1952; and September to November, 1953). The growth differences between 1952 and 1953 were substantial. In 1952 active growth commenced in mid-March, but in 1953 there were two false starts, and the species in Group 1 did not commence active growth until the end of June. The heavy rainfall in October, 1952, with the vigorous leaf-growth of Group 4 species, which continued until the end of December, contrasts strongly with the tapering off in the growth of these species at the conclusion of the 1953 spring. Low winter temperatures and frosts do not prohibit leaf growth in Groups 1 and 2. Years in which the soil moisture is low in autumn and winter, as in 1953, are not unusual. (b) Flowering Phenology (i) Flowering rhythms In Fig. 2 the flowering rhythms of the three grasslands are set out. The maximum number of species observed flowering in each particular month of the two-years experimental period has been used to construct this figure. A feature of these flowering rhythms is the contribution made by species that have more than one bloom period. SPECIES GRASSLAND YEAR 1952 48 53 52 53 52 53 52 53 52 53 52 53 52 53 P HELICHRYSUM APICULATUM (LABILL, DC. A WAHLENBERGIA GRACILENTA LOTHIAN A-B CHLORIS TRUNCATA R. BR P GOODENIA SUBINTEGRA F. MUELL. P CHLORIS ACICULARIS LINDL. P ATRIPLEX SEMIBACCATA R. BR. P SIDA CORRUGATA LINDL. (ii) Flowering dates The flowering dates for species common to the three grasslands are set out in Figs 3 and 4. Figure 3 summarizes the records for 18 species which have consistently exhibited one main bloom period between July and December, but at no other time. They are arranged in order of flowering. Most plants in these disclimax grasslands belong to this category. The onset of the main bloom period differed between soils for Ptilotus spathulatus in 1952, Helipterum pygmaeum in 1953, and to a lesser degree for Helupterum molle and Daucus glochidiatus in 1953. It differed between years for Helipterum australe and Hordeum leporinum. Though the bloom periods of some species, e.g. Hordeum leporinum started earlier in 1952 than in 1953, other PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrEetTy oF New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 3 200 PHENOLOGY OF SPECIES COMMON TO SEMI-ARID GRASSLANDS species, e.g. Vulpia bromoides, behaved in the opposite manner. Peak bloom in 1952 was generally a few days to a week earlier than in 1953. Species which may exhibit one bloom period between July and December, and another in summer and autumn, cause the February to April peak in Figure 2. The flowering periods of seven species in this group, arranged in order of spring flower appearance, are shown in Fig. 4. The onset of the spring bloom period differed between years for Wahlenbergia gracilenta and Chloris truncata. Differences between the soils in either 1952 or 1953 were seldom greater than one week for these species, but up to six weeks for species such as Goodenia subintegra. Summer and autumn flowering varies markedly between years, and, with the exception of Chloris acicularis, between soils in the one year. DISCUSSION Leafing Phenology Differences in leafing phenology of common species in the three grasslands are apparent in early 1952 in the S. aristiglumis-D. caespitosa grassland, where there was a tendency for Group 1 species to start growth first and for the Group 4 species to Maintain vigorous growth over a longer period than in the other two grasslands. This performance was repeated in late 1952, but not in late 1953. The summer-growing species of Group 4 are rather irregular in their performance, because they depend on the erratic summer rains. Even so, there are several important differences between the grasslands for species such as Sida corrugata and Chloris truncata. These differences are attributed to differences in soil water between Deniboota loam, Billabong clay and Riverina clay, and in particular, to the low 15-bar value, high permeability, and large water-holding capacity of Deniboota loam relative to the other soils. The crude nature of the relationship between the overall leafing phenology and available water in Fig. 1 reflects the inadequacy of the gravimetric method for determining moisture in soils which rains penetrate unevenly and roots do not exploit uniformly. The relationship between the drying cycles and the leafing phenology is particularly unsatis- factory. Itis noteworthy that the more successful studies of this type have been recorded on permeable soils in regions of pronounced seasonal rainfall (Specht, 1957): The pattern of vegetative growth in 1952 and 1953 illustrates the performance in a long and a short season ; performances which occur frequently over large tracts of southern Australia. There is nothing atypical in the two false starts of the 1953 season and the associated contrast in leafing phenology between annuals and perennials. Heavy rain makes moisture available for germination or growth on all three soils, whereas a light rain elicits a response only from the loam soil. Specht and Rayson (1957), in their studies of the vegetative performance of heath species at Dark Island, South Australia, reported that, as expected in southern Australia, the geophytes made maximum growth in spring. However, some perennial components of the heath grew during hot, dry summers on soil water stored from the preceding winter-spring rains. Occasional ineffective rain, or rare effective storms between December and March, do not appear to upset the notion that this lack of a relationship between the vegetative growth cycle of the dominant perennial (Banksia ornata), and the present rainfall regime is due to a long-term shift in climate (Specht and Rayson, 1957 ; Specht, 1958). These summer-growing species Maintain vegetative growth patterns which are possibly characteristic of this previous climate. Burbidge (1960) has commented PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SourH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 3 O. B. WILLIAMS 201 upon this out-of-phase characteristic for Eucalyptus and Banksia spp. in Western Australia, and Johnston and Briggs (1963) for Proteaceae. It is likely that these rare effective storms, together with impoverished soils, frequent burning, and the low intensity of grazing by introduced herbivores have been important in main- taining the dominants at Dark Island. Groves (1965a) has recorded the maximum growth-rate of Victorian heaths in summer, from December to March, and of Themeda tussock grassland (Groves, 1965b) from October to early December. He contrasted these performances with the performance of a sown pasture of Lolium perenne and Trifolium sub- terraneum, which exhibited a maximum growth-rate from August to September (Twentyman, 1938). Groves commented further that the productivity of the Danthonia spp. in the Themeda grassland suggests that a Danthonia grassland may reach its maximum growth-rate some months before the Themeda com- munity. Within most communities studied so far there are species groups which do not conform to the general community pattern. For example, Holland (1968), in seasonal growth studies in mallee communities in central New South Wales and western Victoria, has shown that tall shrubs and mallee eucalypts do make summer growth, but field layer plants do not. The three grasslands in the present study contain a wide range of phenological performances which similarly preclude a statement as to the particular community growth-rhythm. In the Riverine plain the original communities appear to have been dominated by species with potential growth-rhythms of the warm-season type. From 1845 onwards these communities have been shaped by the process of species elimination, species invasion under the influence of sheep, rabbits, various other herbivores, and intermittent droughts (Williams, 1968). These processes have favoured the plants that can complete their life-cycle within the more reliable rainfall period from May to October, resulting in either the dominance of indigenes which can cope with the new conditions or the dominance of annual and perennial species of the Mediterranean type, or a mixture of the two groups. The remaining species are wholly, or partly, opportunist and rely on the erratic summer rains. Amongst the wholly. opportunist species is Chloris truncata. Perennial species such as Chloris acicularis represent the vegetative pattern of the type of indigene which dominated the original communities. In spite of the wide-ranging root systems of these perennial indigenes, the growth pattern is not as regular as that of the heath dominants described by Specht and Rayson (loc. cit.), doubtless because soil moisture storage and rooting depth, even in Deniboota loam, are limiting on more occasions than they appear to be under heath vegetation. Thus each of the three communities expresses a wide range of species phenology. The exact form of this vegetative phenology is influenced by micro-topography, soil water differences between the grasslands, and different rainfall between years. Flowering Rhythms The flowering rhythms of the two species groups in each of the three grasslands are similar (Fig. 2). They appear to have counterparts in Themeda grassland (Groves, 1965b) and in southern heaths (Specht and Rayson, 1957 ; Groves and Specht, 1965), but not in montane communities in New Zealand (Scott, 1960; Clarke, 1968). In the Riverine plain this two-population situation probably reflects the partial species elimination and concurrent invasion of species discussed previously. Flowering Phenology It has already been suggested (Williams, 1961) that the regular onset of bloom for spring flowering species of the Danthonia caespitosa grassland may be attributed in part to changes in day-length. This suggestion appears to be valid for these species in the other two grasslands. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrEety or NEw SourH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 3 202 PHENOLOGY OF SPECIES COMMON TO SEMI-ARID GRASSLANDS Plasticity in vegetative characteristics does not appear to extend to flowering phenology. At best, a large vegetative response may promote a small flowering response in bloom period, but no shift in date of first bloom has been noted so far. Extended, or additional bloom periods in such annual species as Medicago polymorpha and the two Hrodium spp. appear to be due to progressive flowering in favoured sites and the presence of more than one age group in the population. The processes of species elimination and invasion, coupled with the reliable rainfall period in winter and spring, have favoured annual or perennial species of the Mediterranean type. By seeding profusely before the end of October, with or without hard-seed production, these species maintain themselves in the community. The species which can flower in spring-summer and at other times are ephemerals of the Wahlenbergia gracilenta type or long-lived perennials of the Chloris acicularis type. An examination of the dates of first bloom has shown that the spring and autumn photoperiodic range for individual species is wide under natural conditions, and critical investigations using clones, transplants and field irrigation are needed. The frequent-flowering perennials at Deniliquin are important from the ecological viewpoint because they are either remnants of the indigenes which dominated the original communities or are similar to them in leafing and flowering phenology. Their population density is low, as might be anticipated in a pastoral zone. This also appears to be the case at Trangie (Biddiscombe, 1953). In principle, the maintenance of a plant in a community depends upon the longevity of the plants, the opportunity during that life-span to produce viable seed, the viability of the seed in the soil, and the opportunity to germinate and establish. Flowering, per se, may not mean much for trees and long-lived shrubs, but will mean a great deal for annuals (Holland, 1968). It will be critical in the early stage of colonization by a new species, becoming less important as the seed supply in the soil builds up and the area colonized increases. Until the advent of domestic stock, there seems to have been scant advantage for the indigenes to produce seed or to possess superlative seedling vigour, because the parent plants were long-lived. In contrast, today there is a survival advantage in heavy spring seeding, in leaf-growth during the reliable rainfall period, and possibly in a limited vegetative response to out-of-season rainfall. Although the grazing pressures applied to the communities should favour earlier flowering through changes in botanical composition, the erratic summer storms support a counter movement. Herein lies one more reason for the difficulty in manipulating grasslands of this type by grazing, per se (Williams, 1969). It is concluded that differences between species common to the three grass- lands are found to some degree in leafing phenology, particularly the leafing of the warm-season species, and to a more limited degree in the flowering phenology. The substantial difference between grasslands is not found so much in representation by different species or in the flowering phenology of those species common to the grasslands, as in the number of individuals of each species, and the leafing phenology of the warm-season species common to the three grasslands. Apparently the general soil differences, though substantial, have not been sufficient to provide a stimulus for ecotypic differentiation in the presence of the grazing animal over the past 100 years. References BippiscoMsE, EH. F., 1953.—A survey of the natural pastures of the Trangie District, New South Wales, with particular reference to the grazing factor. Aust. J. agric. Res.,4: 1-28. BrppiscoMsBE, EH. F., CurHsBertson, E. G., and Hurcnuines, R. J., 1954.—Autecology of some natural pasture species at Trangie, N.S.W. Aust. J. Bot., 2: 69-98. BursipGe, Nancy T., 1960.—The phytogeography of the Australian region. Awsi. J. Bot., 8: 75-212. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw South Wates, Vou. 96, Part 3 O. B. WILLIAMS 203 Butuer, B. E., and Jounston, E. J., 1946.—A report on a detailed soil survey of Falkiner Memorial Field Station. Coun. Sci. Industr. Res. Aust. Div. Soils Rep. (Mimeo.) CHURCHWARD, H. M., 1958.—The soils and land use of the Denimein Irrigation District, New South Wales. C.S.JI.R.O. Aust. Soils and Land Use Ser., No. 27. CuaRKE, C. M. H., 1968.—Flowering periods of alpine plants at Cupola Basin, Nelson, New Zealand. N.Z. J. Bot., 6: 205-220. Derrick, Epiru A., 1962.—Relative importance of various plants in causation of hayfever and asthma in Australia. Med. J. Aust., 1: 972-977. Groves, R. H., 1965a.—Growth of heath vegetation. II. The seasonal growth of a heath on a ground-water podzol at Wilson’s Promontory, Victoria. Aust. J. Bot., 13: 281-289. , 1965b.—Growth of Themeda australis tussock grassland at St. Albans, Victoria. Aust. J. Bot., 13: 291-302. Groves, R. H., and Specut, R. L., 1965.—Growth of heath vegetation. I. Annual growth curves of two heath ecosystems in Australia. Aust. J. Bot., 13: 261-280. Havitannd, E., 1886.—Flowering seasons of Australian plants. Proc. Liyn. Soc. N.S.W., 11: 1049-1051. HEYWARD, JEAN, 1931.—Flowering periods of Victorian plants. Proc. roy. Soc. Vic., 43 (n.s.) : 154-165. Houanpd, P. G., 1968.—Seasonal growth of field layer plants in two stands of mallee vegetation. Aust. J. Bot., 16: 615-622. Jounston, E. J., 1953——Pedology of the Deniboota Irrigation District, New South Wales. C.S.I.R.O. Aust. Soils Publ., No. 1. JoHNSoN, L. A. S., and Brieas, BarBara G., 1963.—Evolution in the Proteaceae. Aust. J Bot. VW: 2I=61-. Marpen, J. H., 1909.—A plea for the study of phenological phenomena in Australia. J. Proc. roy. Soc. N.S.W., 43: 157-170. Moore, C., 1880.—Anniversary address. J. Proc. roy. Soc. N.S.W., 14: 1-18. Moors, C. W. E., 1953a.—The vegetation of the south-eastern Riverina, New South Wales. I. The climax communities. Avwst. J. Bot., 1: 485-547. , 1953b.—The vegetation of the south-eastern Riverina, New South Wales. II. The disclimax communities. Aust. J. Bot., 1: 548-567. Patton, R. T., 1933.—Ecological studies in Victoria—The Cheltenham flora. Proc. roy. Soc. Vic., 45 (n.s.): 205-218. , 1936.—Ecological studies in Vietoria. IV. Basalt plaims association. Proc. roy. Soc. Vic., 48 (n.s.): 172-191. Scorr, D., 1960.—Seasonal behaviour of some montane species. N.Z. J. Sci., 3: 694-699. Smith, R., 1945.—Soils of the Berriquin Irrigation District, N.S.W. Coun. Sci. Industr. Res. Aust. Bull., No. 189. Specat, R. L., 1957.—Dark Island Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). V. The water relationships in heath vegetation and pastures on the Makin sand. Aust. J. Bot., 5: 151-172. , 1958. The geographical relationships of the flora of Arnhem Land. Amer.-Aust. Sci. Hupedit. to Arnhem Land, 3: 415-442. SpecHt, R. L., and Rayson, Parricia, 1957.—Dark Island Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). J. Definition of the ecosystem. Aust. J. Bot., 5: 52-85. Stacr, H. C. T., Hussiez, G. D., Brewer, R., et al., 1968.—A Handbook of Australian Soils. Rellim. Tech. Publ., Glenside, South Australia. TWENTYMAN, R. L., 1938.—Pasture improvement. J. Dept. Agric. Vic., 36: 155-170, 197-204. Wrttiams, O. B., 1955.—Studies in the ecology of the Riverine Plain. I. The gilgai microrelief and associated flora. Aust. J. Bot., 3: 99-112. , 1956.—Studies in the ecology of the Riverine Plain. II. Plant-soil relationships in three semi-arid grasslands. Aust. J. agric. Res., 7: 127-139. , 1961.—Studies in the ecology of the Riverine Plain. III. Phenology of a Danthonia caespitosa Gaudich. grassland. Aust. J. agric. Res., 12: 247-259. , 1968.—Studies in the ecology of the Riverine Plain. IV. Basal area and density changes of Danthonia caespitosa Gaudich. in a natural pasture grazed by sheep. Aust. J. Bot., 16: 565-578. , 1969.—Studies in the ecology of the Riverine Plain. V. Plant density response of species in a Danthonia caespitosa grassland to 16 years of grazing by Merino sheep. Aust. J. Bot., 17: 255-268. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 3 The Proceedings, of the Linnean Society of New South Wales contain original papers relative to “the Science of Natural History in all its branches’’, and reports of business transacted at the meetings of the Society. NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR AUTHORS Original papers may be submitted for consideration for publication in the Society’s Proceedings. Submission of a manuscript must imply that the contents are original and have not been published previously in the same, similar, or abbreviated form, and that no similar paper is being or will be submitted for publication elsewhere until it has been either (a) not accepted for publication by the Society or (0) withdrawn by the author. Papers submitted should embody the results of a significant piece of work. Interim reports, serialized studies and student theses should not be submitted. Papers are accepted for publication (or otherwise) by the Council of the Society after taking into consideration advice received from at least one referee. The decision of Council is final. Once accepted for publication a paper becomes the property of the Society, and copyright is vested in the Society. Reproduction of the author’s synopsis in abstracting journals is authorized. A paper may be withdrawn by the author at any time prior to acceptance. Papers may be submitted by members or non-members of the Society but a paper submitted by a non-member must be communicated by a member of the Society, and will not ordinarily be considered for acceptance before July in each calendar year. SUBMISSION OF MANUSCRIPTS Manuscripts should be forwarded to the Secretary, The Linnean Society of New South Wales, 157 Gloucester Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000. Text and illustrations must be submitted in duplicate. The illustrations may be duplicated by any acceptable clear method and the duplicate set need not necessarily be identical in size with the originals. The author should retain a third copy for checking proofs. If a paper is not accepted for publication, the original copy of the typescript and illustrations will be returned to the author, but the duplicate copy may be retained by the Society. Owing to the ever growing costs of publication, authors are requested to write their papers clearly and concisely and exercise all reasonable economy in the number and form of illustrations and tables. Grants towards the cost of publication should be secured wherever possible from the author’s own institution or elsewhere; contributions from authors, especially non-member authors, may be requested at Council’s discretion, particularly in the case of lengthy papers, or those with numerous illustrations or tables. Manuscripts must be submitted in final, fully corrected form. Authors may be liable for the cost of proof corrections (if allowed) if the number of alterations and corrections is considerable. Authors are urged to submit their paper to a colleague for constructive criticism prior to final typing and submission for publication. MANUSCRIPTS Papers should be typewritten, double spacing throughout, on one side of quarto or foolscap paper, with at least one-inch margins all round. The desired position of all text-figures, maps and tables may be indicated in the margin. All pages should be numbered serially and securely fastened together. Papers should conform to the following general layout as far as practicable or appropriate: (a) Title—The title should be concise but informative. The name(s) of the author(s) and the name of the institution where the work was carried out should follow the title. The name of a new taxon of plants or animals should not be included in the title. A short title appropriate for the running heading of subsequent pages may be suggested. The title, etc., should be on a separate page at the commencement of the typescript. (b) Synopsis.—A concise abstract (without abbreviations), preferably consisting of not more than about 200 words, should be supplied on a separate sheet and in triplicate. It should be complete in itself and indicate the scope of the work. It will be printed below the title of the paper and in the Society’s Abstract of Proceedings; it will be available for reprinting by abstracting journals. (c) Table of Contents—This should give the complete hierarchy of headings and sub-headings used in the subject-matter of the paper. It should be supplied on a separate sheet for guidance of the editor and will not ordinarily be printed. (d) Introduction, followed by the Subject Matter of the paper. Papers may be divided into sections described by short headings. (€) Discussion, Conclusions or Summary (if necessary).—This should summarize the conclusions reached rather than be a précis of the paper as a whole (cf. Synopsis). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF New Soura WALES, VoL. 96, Part 3 NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR AUTHORS (f) Acknowledgements, if any. (g) References.—The author, who is alone responsible for their accuracy, should earefully check all references against the text, to ensure especially that: (i) The spelling of authors’ names is consistent, and the dates, volume numbers and page numbers are correct. (ii) All authors quoted in the text are included in the list of references. References should be cited in the text by the author’s name and date, e.g., Bullough (1939) or (Bullough, 1939) according to context, and listed alphabetically under References thus: Bullough, W. S., 1939—A Study of the Reproductive Cycle of the Minnow in Relation to the Environment. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond., 109, A: 79-108. If more than one reference by the same author(s) published in the same year is cited, use a, b, etc., after the year in both text and list, e.g., Bullough (1939 a). Titles of books must be given in full together with the place of publication, name of publisher and indication of edition if other than the first. Latin names of plants and animals (genera, species and their subdivisions) should be underlined to indicate italics. An initial capital letter must be used for Latin names of orders, families and similar names, but these should not be underlined. Abbreviations.—Only standard abbreviations should be used; authors should refer to the British Standard 1991: Part 1, 1967. Recommendations for Letter Symbols, Signs and Abbreviations. The abbreviations of names of periodicals should conform to those in the World List of Scientific Periodicals. Footnotes should be avoided as far as possible. Codes of Nomenclature.—The Botanical and Zoological Codes of Nomenclature must be strictly followed. If a new taxon is described, the institution in which the type material is deposited must be indicated. Language.—Papers in languages other than English are unlikely to be accepted for publication. Foreign authors are urged to seek assistance, if necessary, in rendering the paper in fluent English prior to submission. Measurements must be expressed in the metric system as far as practicable, and exclusively in scientific description. ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES The maximum dimensions available for either text-figures or plates are 20 x 12.5 cm. Black and white drawings and diagrams for text-figures should be in Indian ink on smooth white card such as Bristol board the lines cleanly drawn, and due attention paid to the consequences of reduction. Graphs should similarly be in Indian ink on white card, or on faint blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Maps should be in Indian ink on white card or tracing linen; if the latter the linen should not be folded. Maps should be of a size and scale that can be conveniently reduced to the size of a single page. It is desirable that all black and white illustrations should be drawn 13-2 times the size that they will appear in print. Photographs for half-tone plates should be the size required for final reproduction or slightly larger, printed on glossy paper, of good contrast and best quality. A number of small photographs can be arranged to form one plate. Illustrations for colour reproduction cannot be accepted unless the author meets the difference in cost between black and white and colour reproduction. Illustrations of all kinds shouid bear the author’s name and the number of each, lightly pencilled on the back, and their required orientation clearly indicated. Legends for illustrations should be typed on separate sheets at the end of the manuscript. Great care should be taken in stating magnifications of illustrations, making it clear whether numbers quoted refer to before or after reduction. Tables —Tables should be numbered consecutively and referred to specifically in the text by number. Hach table, together with a heading descriptive of its contents, should be submitted on a separate sheet. Elaborate tables should be avoided. GENERAL Proofs —A set of galley proofs will be forwarded to the author who should correct and return them promptly to the Secretary. Reprints.—Twenty-five reprints are supplied free to authors who are members of the Society. Additional reprints may be ordered at the authors’ expense, if desired. No free reprints are supplied to non-members who may, however, order the number required at their own expense. Orders for reprints should be placed with the Secretary immediately after the paper has been accepted for publication. Orders received after the paper has been printed may not be accepted. Joint Authorship.—In the case of papers by more than one author, one of them must accept responsibility for all correspondence with the Society regarding the paper. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF NEw SoutH Wars, Vot. 96, Part 3 AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO. LTD. 71-79 ARUNDEL ST., GLEBE, SYDNEY, N.S.W., 2037 ws ‘ Petit pales ding aoce ob er Ih ae one ie een: ie co mare Srey ine fie a ea oe ie “ai gi ca TNS ) dca? jxme ott fee tama peDeeeiyt iyvaoe wats . monet; (eromimrgy ny ten ig) Kua ‘ont si r ; MATH Hf a Corer Sete ry au Cath erry Te 34 Sei ie nay Me fiat Si VENA ie, Cty Nee v 6 iF i nee it pig’ has , casi ne Tee tate ret alhs ap ne gar : he LAL iui ter q papi Pee it PLHavGan > any 10" (0as18* As asiryioes yr Gaara "a ie ein at ! Y NOlig! PARE vd uve dates) Poets Yi ol Neat EY Ph eae bad gay im ry aan Uw er peat jee gitar wie ONL ‘i pow ( j UP oO ie vat Py hE | eal oes| ‘in oui an el win. fn ity Dd et hipe bra) eelinsihal Oa nena au. “ pie?) f vel hits euatye ATS in Lik ee Haat eg © He Brave tity A i a j Bl magTDL Lasiten’ bairory Wh etlnit. The fia ii ay thee om st tanita in oeedh od aint rathist in bee Botley wi9hio. love oo fan ee : blue pe eden tots asd dy HOO amd prvi, vmoetnatnd ae ie 4 aT ale a oR YU IRMRAIONS AM. TOOL PO CNM a DSA ET Bins oane Ee oe punt a ie r eer tO Oah AN | 1h! wit La lee ade fits’ Tec Lialae? 1 ; Cure hopes: afi btcoatinks po tol bokeh al ; “Fie uc Ewe) Bee URS fl babio vee blinsia asioart geaveintdin J viva lt janine dis Lae ee ripe Spee rene 't, hash i L Satie nol dark! (pore bi it, ae Ay ithe hh ——" sunie od ih bafnotbal we Hanneb af pie” $ vse) eyed { 1 Kt eh ae tit iif: YTS i Pig DING a ee i , a) by Wn OP Poet OT, oni sii rae) Oe Shee ere meats at . ft (PQ. aa anh Pele etyewe 7 = ‘ ‘rel eine sain 7 I nt aE LT pech fina SEf weg aay Pat tty tat ‘sael tee Taz} asian Rat eee A at eine miughiant 12 Asati ' ay hen A gars ci aa ooh’ fh At Hf ah a (pers | Bs il nara eh wrt {. oa ane RLY ; a seer farhich [ 2 ' : feloua if byl tis 4h ie we . #4 agar. ne heater f peut, wf a. biunieoad el) 2 aay Ga hhiinoy alg ‘pol a ibivodac wont? we yarink Habib re oh ayy tin. ye 1). ae tootsie ert cy Ligadro eg red Meigs y aerial vou Sin aie ae Aveta! lack TERE ta ful hal | feeds hndatedt Poles ath eas tinot 4 gel ai 3 int} tide e he y rouble A Tbe pot wi he J aig EOS . ot bi aa mG 7 - in ; ain t ie ¢) ne mire branatia mE Wi @ lrn 1a Wie ax vy re aaa ' oe aor hurr tole fue Mibu Tae rope a an dal hr en eT hits Hos, “yunth tote | Titec mse eoee 5 eT eet it “Tre Pe Sey dar haeitte nc Yh UR NOT IF Aidadas saiveniow ne 2 bea tet no } 7 epaownoggt | —- = - = = =: enoonj0dug = I + qnooumeq mg = - = = — — = = = — - = Es “00 owoonmumnrg = - ** opoommes spy owooupraovdgy ousesT1equy) * evoout[vry 1 I ous owoonns0|W HL : onoouas0uO a ae ++ onoonywmoyujoTy I if 1 Fd £ I Ge ovoomysA Wy + gueonqesqui0; evoousoydozmyay ++ poouruoqzuiazvgy ar | er aq Mawar mb oda Rincon evooNlyBISmUOS ovoonmyy AT evoononamayy, = 9 ~ evouj00g | 2 1 over | = “+ enoovropiesud 1 -* == @maauyora, = I = evooumodsayyoo9, ‘ovoourmospuwagT omoOUUNGWIST onoou uel 8 £ > T = = 1 se “= evz071gqnd) to L ovOOBTTNIES Hele7g[recoeeaie | jae PS ae — ci opoovonqtmog: ~ a ea | | + 2 owsowalyyT noon aS ev Pe Wh) Eine owpouuurey yy ovooepuidug evoonINOY ong I = 20 euoovsqeu[og = -* enooerosinby CI ace meas - ** evoowrpavowny ovoourqaoydng, ovoouppasjoa > @woow[oyy am aa 2 lr | | | 2 crea cn jen ali onoanao8sng — = i = ad oROONQNIBONG 5 fe a SS evoouy[aydossz, Far aISee|e aaa | Pot Sees a || | jesse erect | | jammer | oe min evoonjAxosyySagy evooEpVxO, [Pela tietiscgqecnssgjosase s|- CI ers Co eo x ess esi ST hes evoourayz0p) onoonuortdeg = tS S gpttiscia |e a = ele evoournid|yRoRD) = | 2 alsa ousoBSOMITY a ovaoucory eveovsodsorytq (VIN at ea | aj-¢ TRU A es = (IPSS SPER s)Pamaamas gnsayionay \jezjes evoovsoandud I *- exeowrpuBmze xT — “> qwaowanwy - = = onoononsud yy onpounouuy = = ++ gvoowmuodsraoyy | 2elnas | | | | | | | owoownoununy ovoonySydoqus09 owoonouy dans yy *- avaovySydossey ousouonmgiod “= gmsowozry | | Jr i | | a I sole [atc ee = oweowsoousqdg Qlrmeseacjss | [aw cimces |i s = = I — —-y_—** ovoomoMMsos4 6) I oeooumteyo4 £ ¥ v OL °° eeeougquumury al | 6) . 2 ui | v1 | sic ovoourpodousy ovoowto3sjog = ~* ovoourqoo] cc * emaowidO, ovoowjequWg enoouyyUWIO' erdeen o ey | eon | Teal ees ever | | | Cl Scimseersecin a aa ¥ 8 z I GS onoona}as - = owoanonap) I onoow0yy ouooutny{) ~* ouoowsodtel ao I - T 7° oee9uutnen:) : = = : ewooupryouO anne | | ovoouruuMELn gy onoows0qisianz ! - = euoowor09801(T > ovoowo0u, On-c neonates exniste WOO TE ae, Fars gin < S = I ovooupryaawary — owoonsopomoux L woOwILT = ovoourysimgxory — 4 “> @weowoun* I 1 I | | | evoonapsyiyd ongontuapoquod ovoowrserU0.) ovaou[nuoosy, ~-qwoompudX avoowpidoox7u0) Prtdtt 2505 oor CT eta Pa jajrte=s| | NE =" ea Litt Hit OCT SPP EE 2 e a o ” © o oo ~ © wn 2 a = I st z z L 9 pp Beane xt) 11 * > ouoonzuyoorpAH I t ~- esowwMSTTY U = € °° eveouLiezneyog a og sires jaceies [a [maw | eam ** evoowuojoioucdy > qwooUpUrNN % —_ eveowunrosouNiog owoouuwpund [jer ltd i 2 i | a | (Hy H H 2 4 ewooUUYo9| \- ovooupunydsyou., oveourujdsy jae | | | | ewoowoyvd onooUpHo} owoowsuNIpy owoouowspur'y ovoouyAqdomou.s aaennan \- tlt 111 Ill 111 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS °° gwooerpewysmu0g 5 omaonTaMyoIo]£) ouoowouZTYoS ovoowssojSorydo ouoowofted [ene 1 | Pyddty tied | UAE HPT eit OE owoowe0sT o ovaovyomsujog RMS RR SCI OI OO MAINO EIA AG WUE Pe Rae ATT (S-= sreooutpodoas"y ‘od GWA Wa oa ‘oa oa * f € CWA AWA “LA “LH GWA La “WO wa wo ‘vo 210 (moroods oAUoApU 30 poziy Rsopusry usoyial Mi JF SI Wo IAS] OF “MAOYY caw IOquInU o3 11 us eUDT Tur} Jo uoungurerT Iydos6ory 3 miavy, Paoceepivos or Tim LowweaN Socrery or New Sours Watxs, Vou. 96, Part 4 “4 — a 2 ee ae ba os Pea ents Px, ert. a > al See to. es i" ve 1AM Be ie AChetaiicint Ci era Resse pnt eh “ree maa to Ha | sein ort OU EE ee a | Hepa Hal i neil dh / teeta ‘i Dp 4 SORIA BBR cn eee ‘i, iment pw iver ier “a aes onan . i, aes | ty walt G. M. CHIPPENDALE 211 still presents difficulties owing to the lack of all-weather roads to some areas. The trees and shrubs have been reasonably, though not exhaustively, collected. Many species in the area need investigation to ascertain not only their taxonomic position within the Australian flora, but also their relationship with species in neighbouring islands and Asia. The Victoria River district has a comparatively low total number of species, and it seems likely that more records are yet to be made. The number of species in the Barkly Tableland is low, and from experience it seems unlikely that there will be any vast increase in this number. Further thorough collecting in both of these districts seems necessary. Since Chippendale’s (1959) check list for Central Australian plants, the number of recorded species has increased from 1,101 to 1,236. Some of this increase has been on account of new collections, particularly in the area adjacent to Western Australia, but recent revisions of genera have also contributed by distinguishing species not previously described. J. H. Willis (personal com- munications), from the Melbourne Herbarium, advised of previous misidenti- fications and of some undescribed species : Styphelia mitchellia F. Muell., recorded from Mt. Sonder, is actually an undescribed species of Leucopogon. Prostanthera schultzii F. Muell. ex Tate, recorded from Mt. Sonder, is actually an undescribed species of Wrixonia. EHriostemon argyreus F. Muell. ex Tate, in Central Australia, was a mis- identified fragment of a species of Pityrodia from the ‘“‘ Mt. Saunders ” area near Coolgardie, Western Australia. Goodenia sp. nov. (Palm Valley). Goodenia sp. nov. (Mt. Liebig). Ricinocarpos sp. nov. (Simpson’s Gap). Euphorbia sp. nov. (King’s Canyon). Portulaca sp. nov. (King’s Canyon). Revisions of many genera in recent years have been most valuable, including Pandanus, Cassia, Triodia, Bassia, Enneapogon, Ptilotus, Ficus, Capparis, Sesbania, Swainsona, Zornia, Neptunia, Erodium, Drosera, Frankenia, some Hibiscus, Gossypium, some Hucalyptus, some Melaleuca, Velleia, Stylidium, Nicotiana, Utricularia, Brachycome, Calotis, some Acacia and parts of the families Loranthaceae, Sapotaceae, Cruciferae and Acanthaceae. Much needed are revisions of the important and extensive Cyperus, Fimbristylis, Sida, Eragrostis, Indigofera, Tephrosia, Desmodium, Crotalaria, Phyllanthus, Euphorbia, Terminalia, Mitrasacme, Heliotropium, Dicrastylis, Neweastlia, Solanum, Eremophila, Borreria, Goodenia, Scaevola, and the family Scrophulariaceae. Table 1 shows the degree of endemism to be greatest in the Darwin and Gulf and the Victoria River Districts, if these adjoining zones are considered as one. Central Australia District, and the Darwin and Gulf District show only a slight difference in percentage endemism, but considering the probability of unrecorded species in the more northern seasonally-wet areas, it seems likely that the Darwin Gulf District will ultimately show the greatest percentage of endemism. There appears to be little endemism in the Barkly Tableland and Victoria River District. In Table 2 it can be seen that ferns are notably more prevalent in the Darwin and Gulf District, with a much smaller number in Centra] Australia, and only a few species elsewhere. This same pattern is evident in Cyperaceae, Loranthaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Myrtaceae, Scrophulariaceae, and Rubiaceae. A similar pattern, but with an increased number of species in Central Australia, is shown for PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF New Soutra Wates. Vor. 96, Part 4 212 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS Gramineae, Papilionaceae and Caesalpiniaceae. There are approximately equal numbers of species in central and northern regions in Liliaceae, Proteaceae, Amaranthaceae, Atzoaceae, Mimosaceae, Malvaceae, Sapindaceae, Sterculiaceae and Boraginaceae. The number of species in the Central Australia District is significantly greater in Portulacaceae, Cruciferae, Zygophyllaceae, Frankeniaceae, Solanaceae, Myoporaceae, Goodeniaceae and Compositae. The northern areas have a greater number of species in Palmae, Araceae, Hriocaulaceae, Haemodoraceae, Orchidaceae, Moraceae, Rutaceae, Tiliaceae, Combretaceae, Loganiaceae, Lenti- bulariaceae and Stylidiaceae. Table 2 also shows the distribution geographically and botanically, of naturalized or adventive species. Few of these are widespread. The majority are within the influences of the larger population centres, particularly Darwin and Alice Springs. In the check list, Verbena officinalis is recorded by Ewart and Davies (1917) and V. macrostachya is recorded by Tate (1896), and supporting specimens are in the National Herbarium of Victoria, Melbourne. These two taxa have been regarded as native Australian species by Bentham (l.c.). However, there has been no further record of these species in the Northern Territory. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I acknowledge gratefully the vast assistance I had in the collection and caring for specimens and in the beginning of the compiling of the check list from Mr. D. J. Nelson of the Primary Industry Branch, Northern Territory Adminis- tration, Alice Springs, and Mr. R. F. Swinbourne, who is now at the Botanic Garden, Adelaide. Mr. J. Maconochie, Primary Industry Branch, Northern Territory Adminis- tration, Alice Springs, assisted in checking some specimens. Mr. J. Willis, National Herbarium, Melbourne, advised regarding re-identifications of some rare specimens, and Mr. G. Stocker, Forestry and Timber Bureau, Darwin, supplied a list and specimens of Melville Island plants. Dr. Paul Fryxell, United States Department of Agriculture, Texas, advised regarding four species of Hibiscus which are to be described by Dr. F. D. Wilson and Mr. N. Byrnes. Advice on other special groups of plants was received from the following : Mr. D. Symon, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide (Solanum spp.). Mr. L. Pedley, Queensland Herbarium, Brisbane (certain unnamed Acacia spp.). Mr. M. Lazarides, Division of Land Research, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra (Gramineae). Dr. Mary Tindale, National Herbarium of New South Wales, Sydney (Pteridophyta). The manuscript was examined by the botanists at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney, who kindly made a number of suggestions for inclusions and exclusions. Mr. K. Lyon, Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra, prepared the map in ome Bibliography References quoted in the text are included in the following list, which also has many references which support specimens or taxonomic details in the check list. ApEMA, F., 1969.—Identities of the herbaceous species of Polygala represented in the Brisbane Herbarium. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 80: 125-30. Arry-SHaw, H. K., 1934.—The genus Dentella in Australia. Kew Bull., 1934, 290-301. Aut, 8S. I., 1969.—Senecio lautus complex in Australia. V. Taxonomic interpretations. Aust. J. Bot., 17: 161-76. ANoN., 1919.—Review of The Flora of the Northern Territory. J. Bot., 57: 69-71. Bartey, F. M., 1899-1905.—The Queensland Flora. Parts 1-6, and dex. Brisbane. Baitey, L. H., 1935.—Certain ptyochospermate palms of horticulturists. Gentes Herbarum, 3: 410-37. Bartow, B. A., 1962.—Studies in Australian Loranthaceae. I. Nomenclature and new additions. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 87: 51-61. , 1963.—Studies in Australian Loranthaceae. JII. A revision of the genus Lyszana. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. 88: 137-50. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Wates Vout. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 213 , 1966.—A revision of the Loranthaceae of Australia and New Zealand. Aust. J. Bot., 14: 421-99. , 1970.—Viscum flexicaule, a new species from Northern Australia. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 4: 95. Beavte, N. C. W., Evans, O. D., and Carouin, R. C., 1962.—Handbook of the Vascular Plants of the Sydney District and Blue Mountains. Armidale. BENL., G., 1958.—Beitrag zu einer revision der gattung Ptilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Mettteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, Heft 19-20: 401-9. ———-—-, 1959.—Beitrag zu einer revision der gattung Ptilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Meitteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, 2 Teil, Band IIT, 34-43. , 1960.—Beitrag zu einer revision der gattung Ptilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Meirtteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, 3 Teil, Band IIT, 510-18. , 1961.—Zwei neue Ptilotus—Arten. Sonderdruck aus den Meitteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, Band IV, 75-82. , 1962.—Beitrag zu einer revision der gattung Péilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Meitteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, 4 Teil, Band IV, 277-84. , 1964.—New taxa of Ptilotus. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 88: 53-60. , 1965.—Beitrag zu eimer revision der gattung Ptilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Meitteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, 5 Teil, Band V, 563-69. , 1967a.—Beitrag zu eimer revision der gattung Ptilotus R.Br. Sonderdruck aus den Meitteilungen der Botanischen Staatssammlung Munchen, 6 Teil, Band VI, 493-504. , 19676.—The genus Ptilotus R.Br. Aust. Pl., 4: 109-24. BENTHAM, G., 1863-78.—Flora Australiensis. Vols. 1-7. l. Reeve, London. Buacr, J. M., 1943—57.—Flora of South Australia. Parts 1-4, 2nd edition. Adelaide. BuacKkati, W. E., and Grinve, B. J., 1954-65.—How to Know Western Australian Wildflowers. Parts 1-3. Perth. BuakeE, 8. T., 1937.—Notes on Australian Cyperaceae. I. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 47: 89-94. . 1938.—The genus Jseilema in Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 49: 82-94. . 1939.—A monograph of the genus Eleocharis in Australia and New Zealand. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 50: 88-132. . 1940a.—Studies on Queensland grasses. I. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 51: 169-76. , 19405.—Monographic studies in the genus Fimbristylis. Part I. University of Q. Paper's, 1 (13): 1-14. . 1941a.—Studies on Queensland grasses. II. University of Q. Papers, 1 (18): 1-22. , 1941b.—New genera of Australian grasses. University of Q@. Papers, 1 (19): 1-12. , 1943.—Critical notes on the Gramineae and Cyperaceae of South Australia with deserip- tions of new species. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67: 42-61. , 1944.—Monographic studies in the Australian Andropogonae. Part I. University of Q. Papers, 2 (3): 1-62. ————,, 1947.—Notes on Australian Cyperaceae. VII. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 58: 35-50. -, 1952.—The identification and distribution of some Cyperaceae and Gramineae chiefly from Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 62: 83-100. . 1953.—Botanical contributions of the Northern Australia Regional Stuvey. I. Studies on Northern Australian species of Hucalyptus. Aust. J. Bot., 1: 185-352. , 1954.—Botanical contributions of the Northern Australia Regional Survey. II. Studies on miscellaneous Northern Australian plants. Aust. J. Bot., 2: 99-140. . 1961—Two new species of Scleria. Blumea, 11 (1): 219-23. , 1963.—New or noteworthy plants, chiefly from Queensland. II. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 73: 61-77. , 1964.—A revision of Micraira, a genus of grasses of exceptional structure and distri- bution. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 74: 45-52. , 1968.—A revision of Melaleuca leucadendron and its allies. Contrib. from the Q. Herb., No. 1: 1-114. . 1969a.—Studies in Cyperaceae. Contrib. from the Q. Herb., No. 8: 1-48. , 1969b.—Taxonomic and nomenclatural studies in the Gramineae. No. 1. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 80: 55-84. . 1969c.—Taxonomic and nomenclatural studies in the Gramineae. No. 2. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 81: 1-26. , 1971.—A revision of Plectranthus (Labiatae) in Australasia. Contrib. from the Q. Herb., se ol thet Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 1. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., a “Tithe Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 2. Proc. Lryn. Soc. N.S.W., 47: melee eae Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 3. Proc. Liryn. Soc. N.S.W., 47: 622d. the Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 4. Proc. Lryn. Soc. N.S.W., 48: PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutrH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 214 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS ———-—, 1922e.—The Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 5. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 49: 79-96. , 1925.—The Loranthaceae of Australia. Part 6. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 50: 1-24. , 1965.—A Key to the Hucalypts. 3rd ed. Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra. Boomsma, C. D., 1964.—A description of a new mallee species of Hucalyptus from central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 88: 115-16. Borssum WAALKES, J. VAN, 1966.—Malesian Malvaceae revised. Blumea, 14: 1-213. BremeKkamp, C. HE. B., 1962.—Remarks on the position of some Australian Acanthaceae. Acta Botanica Neerlandica, 11: 195-200. , 1964.—On the systematic position of the Australian Nelsonias and Thunbergias and of the Ruellia species which by Domin were referred to Aporuellia Clarke. Koninkl. Nedert. Akademie van Wetenschaffen Amsterdam, Proc. Series C 67 (5): 301-6. Brenan, J. P. M., and Brummirr, R. K., 1965.—The variation of Dichrostachys cinerea (1..) Wight and Arn. SBoletim da Sociedade Broteriana, 29: 61-115. Brraes, Barsara G., and Jonnson, L. A. 8., 1968.—The status and relationships of the Australasian species of Typha. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 4: 57-69. BorBipGeE, Nancy T., 1940—-1.—A revision of the Australian species of Hnneapogon Desv. Proc. Linn. Soc. of London, 153rd session (1): 1-91. , 1953.—The genus Triodia R.Br. Aust. J. Bot., 1: 121-84. ————, 1958.—A monographic study of Helichrysum subgenus Ozothamnus (Compositae) and of two related genera formerly included therein. Aust. J. Bot., 6: 229-84. , 1960.—Further notes on Triodia R.Br. with descriptions of five new species and one variety. Aust. J. Bot., 8: 381-94. , 1965.—The Australian species of Sesbania Scopoli (Leguminosae). Aust. J. Bot., 13: 103-41. Byrnes, N., 1971.—New species of Lophopetalum (Celastraceae), a genus new for Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. In press. Carouin, R. C., 1958.—The species of the genus Hrodiwm L’Her. endemic to Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 83: 92-100. ——, 1967.—The genus Velleia Sm. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 92: 27-57. CHIPPENDALE, G. M., 1959.—Check list of central Australian plants. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 82: 321-38. , 1960.—Contributions to the flora of central Australia. No. 1. Trans. Roy. Sec. S. Aust., 83: 199-203. —, 1961.—Contributions to the flora of central Australia. No. 2. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 84: 99-103. , 1963.—Contributions to the flora of central Australia. No. 3. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 86: 7-9. , 1964.—Records of Northern Territory plants. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 88: 175-80. CuemeEnt, I. D., 1957.—Studies in Sida. I. Contrib. from the Gray Herb. of Harvard Univ., 180 : 3-91. CocHRANE, G. R., 1967.—The description and mapping of vegetation in Australia. Vic. Nat., 84: 299-316. Cooper, R. C., 1956.—The Australian and New Zealand species of Pittosporum. Annals of the Missouri Bot. Gard., 43: 87-188. CopPpELAND, KH. B., 1947.—Genera Filicum. The Ronald Press Co., New York. Corner, KE. J. H., 1960.—Taxonomie notes on Ficus L., Asia and Australasia, Sections 1—4. The Gard. Bull., Singapore, 17 (3): 368-485. —, 1965.—Check List of Ficus in Asia and Australasia, with keys to identification. The Gard. Bull., Singapore, 21: 1-186. Curtis, WINIFRED M., 1956—67.—The Student’s Flora of Tasmania. Parts 1-3. Govt. Printer, Tasmania. Davis, Gwenpa L., 1948.—Revision of the genus Brachycome Cass. Part 1. Australian species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 73: 142-241. ————, 1949.—Revision of the genus Brachycome Cass. Part 3. Description of three new Australian species and some new locality records. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. 74: 145-42. ————, 1952.—Revision of the genus Calotis R.Br. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 146-88. ————, 1955.—Supplementary notes on the genus Brachycome Cass. Description of five new Australian species and some new locality records. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. 79: 203-10. ——, 1956.—Revision of the genus Podolepis Labill. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 81: 245-86. DeListe, D. G., 1963.—Taxonomy and distribution of the genus Cenchrus. Iowa State J. Sc., 37 (3): 259-351. Etcuuer, Hs., 1965.—Supplement to J. M. Black’s Flora of S. Aust. S. Aust. Branch of the British Se. Guild Handbook Committee, Adelaide. Erickson, Rica, 1958.—Triggerplants. Paterson Brokensha Pty. Ltd., Perth. ————, 1968.—Plants of Prey in Australia. Lamb Publications Pty. Ltd., Western Australia. ————, and Wiis, J. H., 1966.—Some additions to Australian Stylidiaceae. Vic. Nat., 83: 107-12. PROCEEDINGS Or THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Waters, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 215 Ewarr, A. J.. and Daviss, Otrve B., 1917.—The Flora of the Northern Territory. Minister for Home and Territories, Melbourne. Ewart, A. J., and JARRETT, PHytiis H., 1927.—\Contribution to the flora of Australia. No. 33. Additions to the flora of the Northern Territory and locality records. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 39: 154-61. , 1928.—Contribution to the flora of Australia. No. 34. Additions to the flora of the Northern Territory and locality records. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 40: 83-87. Forpg, N., and Isrne, E. H., 1958.—Acacia calcicola, a new species of importance to the ecology of the Australian arid zone. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 81: 153-60. FRYXELL, P. A., 1965.—A revision of the Australian species of Gossypium with observations on the occurrence of Thespesia in Australia. Aust. J. Bot., 13: 71-102. , 1968.—A redefinition of the tribe Gossypieae. Bot. Gaz., 129: 296-308. , 1969.—A classification of Gossypium L. (Malvaceae). Taxon, 18: 585-91. GARDNER, C. A.. 1952.—Flora of Western Australia. Vol. 1, Gramineae. Government Printer, Perth. HarrLey, W., 1942.—New species and varieties of Hriachne R.Br. J. Linn. Soc. Botany, 52 (344) : 342-48. HeEnxKER, H., 1967.—Die gattung Szgesbeckia. Arch. Nat. Meckl., X1: 7. HusBarp, C. H., 1928.—The genus Astrebla, or Mitchell grasses. Bull. Misc. Inf., No.7: 2 , 1935.—Species novae vel minus cognitae. Hook. Ic. Pl., tt. 3283-6. ————, 1939.—Species minus cognitae. Hook. Ic. Pl., t. 3385. , 1952.—Whiteochloa, a new genus of grasses from the Northern Territory of Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 62: 109-12. Hucues, D. K., 1923.—The genus Panicum of the Flora Australiensis. Bull. Misc. Inf. Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, 9: 305-32. Isine, E. H., 1964.—The species of Bassia All. in Austraha. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 88 : 63-110. Jacoss, M., 1964.—The genus Capparis from the Indus to the Pacific. Blumea, 12: 385-541. JANSEN, P., 1930.—Two new species of Hriachne. Mededeelingen’s Rijks Herbarium, Leiden, No. 59: 1-2. JEDWABNICK, ELISABETH, 1924.—Eragrostidis speciarum imprimus ad herb. Berol. Hamburg, Mona., Regimont digestarum compactus. Bot. Archiv., V. Band: 177-216. Jounson, L. A. S., 1959.—The families of Cycads and the Zamiaceae of Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 84: 64-117. KostERMANS, A. J. G. H., 1965.—A monograph of the genera Maranthes Bl]. and Cyclandrophora Hassk. of the Asiatic and Pacific area. Candollea, 20: 103-42. , 1969.—New and critical Malesian plants. VIII. Retnwardtia, 7: 443-49. LAZARIDES, M., 1959.—The Australian species referred to Ichnanthus Beauv. Aust. J. Bot.. 7: 328-46. : , 1970.—The Grasses of Central Australia. Australian University Press, Canberra. Lez, Atma T., 1948.—The genus Swainsona. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 1: 131-271. ————, 1962.—Notes on Lomandrain N.S.W. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 3: 151-64. LEeENHouTs, P. W., 1959.—A monograph of the genus Canarium. Blumea, 9: 275-475. MouHLENBROCK, R. H., 1961.—A monograph of the leguminous genus Zornia. Webbia, 16: 1-141. Morton, J. K., 1966.—A revision of the genus Aneilema R.Br. J. Linn. Soc. (Bot.), 59: 431-78. Monk, W. J. pe, 1962.—Preliminary revision of some genera of Malaysian Papilionaceae. III. A census of the genus Crotalaria. Reinwardtia, 6: 195-223. Nean, P. T., 1965.—A revision of the genus Wrightia (Apocynaceae). Annals Missouri Bot. Gard., 52: 114-75. Oostsrroom, 8S. J., 1934.—A monograph of the genus Hvolvulus. Mededeelingen van het Botanical Museum en Herbarium van de Rijksuniversiteit te Utrecht, 14: 1-267. , 1938.—The Convolvulaceae of Malaysia. 1. Blumea, 3: 62-94. , 1939.—The Convolvulaceae of Malaysia. 2. Blumea, 3: 267-371. —————, 1940.—The Convolvulaceae of Malaysia. 3. Blumea, 3: 481-582. , 1943.—The Convolvulaceae of Malaysia. 4. Blumea, 5: 339-411. , 1945.—The Convolvulaceae of Malaysia. 5. Blumea, 5: 689-91. Payvens, J. P. D. W., 1957.—Revision of some Papuan Liliaceae. Nova Guinea, n.s. 8 (2): 390. ————, 1967.—A monograph of the genus Barringtonia (Lecythidaceae). Blumea, 15: 157-263. PEpDLEY, L., 1964a.—Notes on Acacia, chiefly from Queensland. I. Proc. Roy. Soc.Q., 74: 53-59. , 1964b.—Notes on Acacia, chiefly from Queensland. II. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 75: Or in fon) ~I 29-35. , 1969.—Notes on Acacia, chiefly from Queensland. III. Contrib. from the Q. Herb., No. 4: 1-7. Puitcox, D., 1968.—Revision of the Malesian species of Lindernia All. Kew Bull., 22: 1-72. PotHity, R. M., 1968.—Miscellaneous notes on African species of Crotalaria L. II. Kew Buill., 22 (2): 169-348. ve Ranperia, A. J., 1960.—The composite genus Blumea, a taxonomic revision. Blumea, 10: 176-317. Raven, P. H., 1963.—The Old World species of Ludwigia (including Jussiaea) with a synopsis of the genus. Reinwardtia, 6: 327-427. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SourH Waters. Vou. 96, Part 4 216 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS Rosyns, A., 1963.—Essai de monographie du genre Bombaz. Bull. Jard. Bot. Bruax., 33 (1): 1-316. Royen, P. van, 1957.—Revision of the Sapotaceae of the Malaysian area in a wider sense. VII. Planchonella Pierre. Blumea, 8: 235-445. Sauer, J., 1964.—Revision of Canavalia. Brittonia, 16 (2): 106-81. ScHoppE, R., 1963.—A taxonomic revision of the genus Millotia Cassini (Compositae). Trans. ' Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 87: 209-41. ScHwakRz, O., 1927.—Plantae novae vel minus cognitae Australiae tropicae. Meddes Repertorium, 14: 80-109. Suaw, ExizaBetu A., 1965.—Taxonomic revision of some Australian endemic genera of Cruciferae. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 89: 145-258. SmirH, L. S., 1956.—New species of and notes on Queensland plants. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 67: 29-40. Sprcur, R. L., 1958a.—The Gymnospermae and Angiospermae collected on the Arnhem Land Expedition. The American-Australian Scientific Hupedition to Arnhem Land. Vol. 3, Botany and Plant Ecology, No. 9: 185-317. STauFFER, H. U., 1959.—Revisio Anthobolearum. Mitteclungen aus dem Botanischen Museum der Universitat Zurich, 213: 1-260. Sreents, C. C. G. J. van, 1929.—A revision of the Queensland Bignoniaceae. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 41: 39-58. Sr. Joun, H., 1962.—Revision of the genus Pandanus Stickman. Part 13. Pandanus in the Northern Territory, Australia. Pacific Sc., 16: 409-28. SuMMERHAYES, V. S., 1929.—A revision of the Australian species of Frankenia. J. Linn. Soc. Bot., 48: 337-87. Symon, D. E., 1966.—A revision of the genus Cassia L., Caesalpiniaceae in Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 90: 73-146. TiInDALE, Mary D., 1958.—The Pteridophyta of Arnhem Land. The American-Australian Scientific Hapedition to Arnhem Land. Vol. 3, Botany and Plant Hcology, No. 9: 171-84. , 1968.—Notes on Australian taxa of Acacia. No. 1. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 4: 73-78. , 1970.—Notes on Australian taxa of Acacia. No. 2. Contrib. from the N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 4: 137-43. Waits, C. T., 1936.—Contribution to the Queensland Flora, No. 5. Proc. Roy. Soc.Q., 47: 1-35. , 1950.—Additions to the flora of Arnhem Land. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., 61: 55-58. Wits, J., 1942.—Botanical bulls. Vic. Nat., 59: 72. , 1945.—More botanical bulls. Vic. Nat., 61: 175. , 1962.—A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 1. Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. , 1967.—Systematie notes on the indigenous Australian flora. Muelleria, 1: 117-63. —, 1969.—Prostanthera schultzii seen in flower for the first time. Vic. Nat., 86: 132. Witson, F. D., and Byrnes, N.—Two new species of Hibiscus, Section Furcaria (Malvaceae) from Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 95: 194-97. Witson, P. G., 1960.—A consideration of the species previously included within Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.) DC. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 83: 163-77. Winpvter, D. R., 1966.—A revision of the genus Neptunia (Leguminosae). Aust. J. Bot., 14: 379-420. Wirt, H. C. D. pz, 1956.—A revision of Malaysian Bauhinieae. Reinwardtia, 3: 381-541. CHECK EIST * Naturalized. + Adventive. C.A. IBA, =. \WelolD, IDs @e Gi LYCOPODIACEAE Lycopodium cernuum lL. .. a as ae se af we x x SELAGINELLACEAE Selaginella ciliaris (Retz.) Spring ay at ate aa ss Sis Xx Selaginella uliginosa (Labill.) Spring .. vie e. ies He o6 x JSOETACEAE Tsoetes humilior F. Muell. ex A.Br. se a, ae x< PSILOTACEAE Psilotum nudum (L.) Griseb. te “At, Fe fe x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 2NF GAL) SB ya eee: OPHIOGLOSSACEAE Helminthostachys zeylanica (Li.) Hook. .. Se ‘ic ic sar a x Ophioglossum lusitanicum L. ssp. coriaceuwm (A. Cunn.) Clausen .. = a aie rp x Ophioglossum mulgatum ee x: SCHIZAEACEAE Lygodium flexuosum (1.) Swartz .. Lygodium japonicum Swartz Lygodium microphyllum (Cav.) R. Br. Schizaea bifida Willd. Schizaea dichotoma (L.) Sm. XX XX X GLEICHENIACEAE Dicranopteris linearis (Burm. f.) Underwood .. “igs ae oo o6 x Dicranopteris sp... bk ae ae 5 on ae Sc x x Gleichenia sp. aA a be ae a a ee O00 x DENNSTAEDTIACEAE Histiopteris incisa (Thunb.) J.Sm. ae ee Ki x HyMENOPHYLLACEAE Selenodesmium sp. .. ot ists a ae 6.0 dre as 5c x LINDSAEACEAE Lindsaea ensifolia Swartz .. 6 Ps a0 ae x o¢ 50 x Lindsaea frasert Hook. on oi ae a O¢ ate Oc re x Lindsaea orbiculata Mett. x ADIANTACEAE Adiantum hispidulum Swartz oot ai a ae x Adiantum philippense L. .. be x Cheilanthes distans (R.Br.) Mett. Ey an fas ae Ke x Cheilanthes fragillima F.Muell. .. | Dit 50 2c o-6 De oe x Cheilanthes javensis Moore im a ee eo om x Cheilanthes lasiophylla Pic.-Ser. .. oe aa a x Cheilanthes paucijuga Benth. ae ae Bie so ae aa x Cheilanthes ? sciadioides Domin .. Ms a Se o is x Cheilanthes siebert Kuntze ae ae se ae Cheilanthes tenuifolia (Burm. f.) Swartz var. tenuzfolia. . Cheilanthes tenuifolia (Burm. f.) Swartz var. nudiuscula (R.Br.) F. M. Bail. Rh: ae ae 5 ote Ss Cheilanthes vellea (R.Br.) F. Muell. << Ae as xx Ls x Gymnogramma reynoldsti (F. Muell.) J. M. Black ahs x ae Me Neurosoria pteroides (R.Br.) Mett. ae ed ‘ ig a Ss Platyzoma microphyllum R.Br... is 50 00 oe ffs 20 x Taenitis blechnoides (Willd.) Swartz as iG ne vo a Se x xX M6 x PTERIDACEAE Acrostichum speciosum Willd. ie 0% ois ar aie is Be x Pteris tremula R.Br. ae sig te =e & x POLYPODIACEAE Drynaria quercifolia (L.) J.Sm. ee Microsorium scolopendria (Burm. f.) Copel. xX PARKERIACEAE Ceratopteris thalictroides (L.) Brongn. .. ae a Bie ae oe x DAVALLIACEAE Nephrolepis cordifolia (L.) Pre Ce a i hs x He Pr we Nephrolepis obliterata (R.Br.) C fe ec ae 53 a fe x ASPLENIACEAE Pleurosorus rutifolius (R.Br.) Fée ; ar ~< Pleurosorus subglandulosus (Hook. et Grev. \M . Tindale x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 218 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T V.R.D. D. & G. THELYPTERIDACEAE Cyclosorus gongylodes (Schkuhr) Link .. Bs ai x x Cyclosorus sp. we ee cies : x BLECHNACEAE Blechnum indicum Burm. f. x Blechnum orientale L. wt se ake x Stenochlaena palustris (Burm. f.) Bedd. .. x ASPIDIACEAE Polystichum proliferum (R.Br.) Presl .. se a x MARSILEACEAE Marsilea angustifolia R.Br. bie ee mK ee x « Marsilea crenata Presl i a Ny. ke ay x x Marsilea drummondw A.Br. ae Ny ne a x ie me x Marsilea exarata A.Br. Bd ae fe ne ae x x x Marsilea hirsuta R.Br. or ve i a: ae x x ae Marsilea mutica Mett. bar ate ¥ ay ae 4 x x AZOLLACEAE Azolla pinnata R.Br. x CyYCADACEAE Cycas media R.Br. x Cycas sp. x ZAMIACEAE Macrozamia macdonnelli (F. Muell. ex Mig.) A.DC. .. ~ CUPRESSACEAE Callitris glauca R.Br. ex R.T.Bak. et H.G.Sm. Se: < ae ee Callitris intratropica R. T. Bak. et H.G.Sm. x x TYPHACEAE Typha domingensis Pers. i BS ms ae x x PANDANACEAE Pandanus arnhemicus St.John. x Pandanus basedowiu C. H. Wright x Pandanus convexus St. John x“ Pandanus darwinensis St. John 30 x Pandanus integer St. John x x Pandanus latifructus St. John x Pandanus semiarmatus St. John x Pandanus spechtii St. John x Pandanus thermalis St. John ; x Pandanus yirrkalaensis St. John .. x POTAMOGETONACEAE Potamogeton tenuicaulis F. Muell.. . Me ac ae x Potamogeton tricarinatus A. Bennett ie se is Sg Ruppia maritima L... om a wn a ote x NALIADACEAE Naias marina L. Ne APONOGETONACEAE Aponogeton elongatus (F. Muell.) Benth. x ScHEUCHZERIACEAE Triglochin calcitrapa Hook. x Triglochin centrocarpa Hook. as S Triglochin hexagona J.M. Black .. sie ae x 5 a Triglochin procera R.Br. var. dubia (R.Br.) Benth. x x Triglochin procera R.Br. var. procera x x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SourH Wates, Vow. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 219 C.A. Bai V.RD. D. & G. ALISMATACEAE Alisma acanthocarpum F.Muell. .. SE a 52 is te x Me Alisma oligococcum F. Muell. 54 oe i ae is ae x Ke HyYDROCHARITACEAE Blyxa octandra (Roxb.) Planch. ex Thw. Blyxa sp. Halophila ovalis (R. ‘Br. ) Hook. f. Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle Ottelia alismoides Pers. is at ae me ne ve Ottelia ovalifolia (R.Br.) L. C. Rich a ae 9: xe as ay Sy Vallisneria spiralis L. Ses us us a uf ee Ai Ate x x XX XX GRAMINEAE Acrachne racemosa (Heyne ex R. et 8.) Ohwi Alloteropsis semialata (R.Br.) Hitche. ; Amphipogon caricinus F. Muell. var. caricinus Amphipogon caricinus F. Muell. var. sericeus J. Vickery Aristida anthozxanthoides (Domin) Henr. : = Aristida biglandulosa J. M. Black Aristida browniana Henr. .. 5 Aristida capillifolia Henr. Aristida contorta F. Muell... Aristida echinata Henr. . Aristida euserta S. T. Blake Aristida hygrometrica R.Br. Be Be - 23 Aristida inaequiglumis Domin .. iG ae Ee x oe x Aristida ingrata Domin .. ie = e Pe ae _ ee x Aristida jerichoensis Domin ae Be mA ae Aristida latifolia Domin .. as wt uf se x Aristida macroclada Henr. ae 56 ue ae it is ie x Aristida nitidula (Henr.) 8. T. Blake ex J. M. Black .. x Aristida obscura Henr. ae oo as Si ae x : ue Aristida pruinosa Domina .. Pe se a a x x x x Aristida queenslandica Henr. aie tae aE ae ae sf EN x Aristida schultz Mez ae 2g ae a Ss Aristida strigosa (Henr.) S. T. Blake Re ae Be x Arundinella nepalensis Trin. A : : Arundinella setosa Trin. .. Astrebla elymoides F. Muell. ex F. M. Bail. ae s< Astrebla lappacea (Lindl.) Domin Ne x Astrebla pectinata (Lindl.) F. Muell. ex Benth. x Astrebla squarrosa C. E. Hubbard ; atc pe Be +Avena fatua Iu. 4 ie +4 ae x “4 Bambusa arnhemica F. Muell. is ae ae ae 2 3 sf x Rothriochloa decipiens (Hack.) ©. E. Hubbard var. cloncurrensis (Domin) C. E. Hubbard th ae is x Bothriochloa ewartiana (Domin) C. E. Hubbard St x ae = Bothriochloa bladhi (Retz.) S.T. Blake .. a Ss x x x SK Brachiaria argentea (R.Br.) Hughes st ie ae Se oe =e 4 *Brachiaria distachya (1..) Stapf x Brachiaria gilesii (Benth.) Chase a od nes x a = Brachiaria holosericea (R.Br.) Hughes .. Me i x as se Brachiaria miliiformis (C. B. Presl) Chase x : Brachiaria mutica (Forsk.) Stapf we es ag : Brachiaria notochthona (Domin) Stapf .. Be = x ev se Brachiaria piligera (F. Muell. ex Benth.) Hughes ae x x< x x Brachiaria polyphylla (R.Br.) Hughes .. : a sf: _. o. Sx Brachiaria praetervisa (Domin) C. E. Hubbard | x 3 es oi: Brachiaria ramosa (L.) Stapf var. grandiflora Hughes | = Be x Xx Brachiaria reptans (l.) C. A. Gardn. et C. E. Hubbard me as x x Brachyachne ciliaris (Benth.) C. E. Hubbard .. s S< =e é Brachyachne convergens (F. Muell.) Stapf ae a Ss x Brachyachne tenella (R. Br.) C. E. Hubbard ae his oh 6 x Capillipedium parviflorum (R.Br.) Stapf a = ot se e x Capillipedium spicigerum : T. Blake .. ic oc sé i ~ XS XXX: XX X XX 4 Ne XxX XXKXXX! x xX xX: x > SOX 6 x xX X BS OX 2h OS OS OX < ~< *Cenchrus echinatus The as AS a 8G << ae Li, Cenchrus elymoides F. Muell. are Be ie “i ae Pe x *Cenchrus setigerus Vahl *Cenchrus tribuloides L. : Chamaeraphis hordacea R.Br. kg ys ae a8 Chionachne cyathopoda (F. Muell.) ‘F. Muell. ex Benth... # a x Chionachne hubbardiana Henr. .. ue a, x F Chloris acicularis Lindl. .. ae fa ue we x *Chloris barbata (L.) Swartz : ae os be Bae a Chloris pectinata Benth. .. Be ots ae ee x x Chloris pumilio R.Br. : Chloris scariosa F.Muell. .. Chloris virgata Swartz ; Chrysopogon fallax 8. T. Blake Chrysopogon latifolius 8. T. Blake : =i BY: a ae Chrysopogon pallidus (R.Br.) Trin. ex Steud. .. we x x Chrysopogon setifolius Stapf ea ae he i Coelorhachis rottboellioides (R.Br.) A. Camus Cymbopogon ambiguus A. Camus ie Cymbopogon bombycinus (R.Br.) Domin Cymbopogon obtectus 8. T. Blake .. Pe Cymbopogon procerus (R.Br.) Domin Cymbopogon refractus (R.Br.) A. Camus *Cynodon arcuatus J.S. Pres] ex C. B. Presl os oe *Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. ae ae Ae ae x =: *Dactyloctentum aegyptium (L.) Beauv. .. an ae ae x Dactyloctenitum radulans (R.Br.) Beauv. Danthonia bipartita F. Muell. Dichanthium affine (R.Br.) A. Camus Dichanthium annulatum (Forsk.) Stapf .. Dichanthium fecundum §S. T. Blake Dichanthium sericeum (R.Br.) A. Camus Dichanthium tenuiculum (Steud.) 8. T. Blake Digitaria adscendens (H.B.K.) Henr. . Digitaria ammophila (F. Muell.) Hughes Digitaria brown (R. et S.) Hughes Digitaria coenicola (F. Muell.) Hughes Digitaria ctenantha (F. Muell.) roe ae Digitaria eriolepis Henr. sie SG Sct nig Digitaria gibbosa (R.Br.) Beauv. ae ees = me eat x Digitaria leucostachya (Domin) Henr. Digitaria longiflora (Retz.) Pers. Digitaria papposa (R.Br.) Beauv. Digitaria robusta Hughes .. Digitaria sanguinalis (L.) SestDe Be oe RD Si: ht ah Ed Digitaria stenostachya (Benth.) Hughes .. x ore ae a x Dimeria ornithopoda Trin. au aie : Diplachne fusca (L.) P. Beauv. Diplachne muellert Benta. Bes Dinlachne parviflora (R.Br.) Benth. Echinochloa colonum (L.) Link x ae se Echinochloa crus-galli (L.) Beauv. ee a a ar so S< Echinochloa turneriana Domin .. on Se og oa x Echinochloa stagnina (Retz.) Beauv. Ectrosia agrostoides Benth. Ectrosia laxa 8. T. Blake a se ee es s a Ectrosia leporina R.Br. var. leporina ie i on x 4 x Eetrosia leporina R.Br. var. micrantha Benth. a bys Sg Ectrosia scabrida ©. E. Hubbard he Be eh ats x as Kictrosia schultzii Benth. .. hs ae snes at as es x Hleusine indica (L.) Gaertn. : Elyonurys citreus (R.Br.) Munro ex Benth. ; an ae Be Hlytrophorus spicatus (Willd.) A. Camus oi fe x x x x OK OK OK OS OS KOS x 6 xX xX: x << x xX X X Bo EX aes XK 2S OK OG OK OS ON BS OX OS OS OK OK OS OS OK OK OKO x x XxX x X X x 5 POSES es a xs xX xX XK X XxXXXX: M5 OX Lr Meee So OX XS OS OS OK SOKO xXXX! x x BOS MK XK Ks XxX KKK, oS 7A ORS 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soctety or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 271 C.A. Wsiho | (Wolb ID, ID, te (61, Enneapogon avenaceus (Lindl.) C. EK. Hubbard .. Enneapogon clelandwu N.T. Burbidge Enneapogon cylindricus N. T. Burbidge Enneapogon glaber N. T. Burbidge Enneapogon lindleyanus (Domin) C. E. Hubbard Enneapogon oblongus N. T. Burbidge Enneapogon pallidus (R.Br.) Beauv. Enneapogon planifolius N.T. Burbidge Enneapogon polyphyllus (Domin) N. T. Burbidge Enneapogon purpurascens (R.Br.) Beauv. Eragrostis barreliert Daveau Bragrostis bleesert Pilger : Eragrostis browni (Kunth.) Nees t+EHragrostis cilianensis (All.) Link ex Lutati Eragrostis concinna (R.Br.) Steud. Eragrostis confertiflora (J. M. Biss) J. M. Black Hragrostis cumingw Steud.. Hragrostis desertorum Domin Hragrostis diels Pilger .. Hragrostis elongata (Willd.) J. F. Ji deeds Eragrostis eriopoda Benth. Eragrostis falcata Gaud. Eragrostis tnterrupta Beauv. ae Eragrostis japonica (Thunb.) Trin. Hragrostis kennedyae F. Turner Hragrostis lacunaria F. Muell. ex Benth. Eragrostis laniflora Benth. Hragrostis leptocarpa Benth. ‘ Eragrostis parviflora (R.Br.) Trin. Eragrostis schultzii Benth. : Eragrostis setifolia Nees : Hragrostis speciosa (R. et S.) Steud. : Eragrostis stenostachya Steud. var. floribunda Benth. be Hragrostis tenax Jedw. a a Be oe as a3 x< x Eragrostis xerophila Domin Se, ae eae re Shs x we ax ane Eriachne agrostidea F. Muell. a ue Be sh a bs me 3 Eriachne aristidea F. Muell. one a sa x a x A Eriachne armitiw F. Muell. ex Benth. My: a a x Fs Pa x Eriachne avenacea R.Br. .. : ae 48 te ee at x S< Eriachne basedowit W. Hartley .. Pee ae ae Pe Be x Eriachne benthami W. Hartley .. ae whe “i x am : a Eriachne burkittu Jansen .. oA a as eee a =f ae x Hriachne ciliata R.Br. i are A a ats ai x x x Hriachne festucacea F. Muell. are ae a a6 ae eis >< Eriachne filiformis W. Hartley Su Ses Pe a bu x Hriachne glauca R.Br. ae oe 53 oie oe te x x Eriachne helmsii (Domin) W. Hartley Hriachne isingiana J. M. Black ae sits oF ae se Hriachne laidlawu Jansen ae 5 a a A a ae x Eriachne melicacea F. Muell. os 35 Sie a x< x x Hriachne mucronata R.Br. var. mucronata ‘ x Eriachne mucronata Ji.Br. var. desertorum C. A. Gardn. x x x x 26 xX SLOSS Hah Ss SEK G OS 6 ON Gb ON ON WS ASG SH eNOS x x SG rie OE ONG rcs 5 OS Ge OS OL eS OS ne ES CASTES EAS XXXXKXX: x5 BS OS OS OS OS OK x xX X 4 SMM OS OS p HDS DS OS © x xX Xx x 2% OS OS 6 xX X Hriachne nervosa Ewart et Cookson Eriachne obtusa R.Br. var. obtusa Bi Hriachne obtusa R.Br. var. major Ewart et Davies .. ag we oe bx Eriachne pulchella Domin .. an oe ae as x a ait oe Eriachne rara R.Br. , ae a ve a fe ~ ee x EHriachne schultziana F. Muell. ext or oe Be is Ba Hee s Eriachne scleranthoides F.Muell. .. aye ae Se >< v3 a EHriachne setacea Benth. .. avo Br is 6 $y a we x Eriachne squarrosa R.Br. .. oe Mt ae x x Hriachne stipacea F. Muell. var. hirsuta W. Hartley Rid ae os ay Xx Hriachne sulcata W. Hartley ae : of ae an ay SK ee EHriachne triodioides Domin ae a a ue 3 sh a x Eriachne triseta Nees et Steud. .. aE Als AF A ioe t x Eriochloa australiensis Stapf ex Thell. .. a ae x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 222 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. & G. Eriochloa crebra 8. T. Blake : Hriochloa procera (Retz.) C. E. Hubbard — : Eriochloa pseudoacrotricha Steptoe ex Thell. ) C. E. Hubbard ex 8. T. Blake .. : x oe Bs. Eulalia fulva (R.Br.) Kuntze sts a as x x x Eulalia mackinlayt (F. Muell. ex Benth.) S. T. Blake aff. Hulalia (undescribed sp.) : : ae ate Heterachne abortiva (R.Br.) Druce ; and ves a wet Heteropogon contortus (L.) Beauv. ex R. et S. we Sh x x Heteropogon triticeus (R.Br.) Stapf sis a aie +Hordeum leporinum Link .. 30 a0 36 x Hymenachne acutigluma (Steud.) Gillil. : He Imperata cylindrica (L.) Beauv. var. major (Nees) C. E. Hubbard a he te af tis ne ib 8 x Isachne confusa Ohwi Isachne firmula Buse Ischaemum arundinaceum F. Muell. ex Benth. Ischaemum australe R.Br. var. villosum Benth. Ischaemum decumbens Benth. ties de sat Ischaemum rugosum Salish. var. segetum (Trin.) Hack. : Tseilema dolichotrichum C. E. Hubbard .. ae oe x sits Tseilema fragile 8. T. Blake ae ot x es us x SKE GEO x X DS SOR OK OS OS OS Tseilema macratherum Domin fie a Tseilema membranaceum (Lindl.) Domin Tseilema vaginiflorum Domin : Iseilema windersw C. E. Hubbard Iseilema sp. Leptochloa brownti CO. E. Hubbard ; es Sy 42 Leptochloa digitata (R.Br.) Domin Be ae iA x Lepturus repens (Forst. f.) R.Br. Lepturus xserophilus Domin 3 ate ar or 30 tLolium rigidum Gaud. Ae se he ae Bae x Micraira subulifolia F. Muell. Neurachne alopecuroides R.Br. Neurachne mitchelliana Nees Neurachne muellert Hack. .. ke hide Neurachne munroi (F. Muell.) F. Muell. .. ote he vfs Ophiuros exaltatus (L.) Kuntze .. ie ie Br ee a x Oplismenus burmannit (Retz.) Beauv. We ge ae +e =e Oryza australiensis Domin 24 5a ty a ae wv: x Oryza rufipogon Griff. Panicum airoides R.Br. une Li sig i te BE ce Panicum australiense Domin a Ma as as x x x Panicum capillipes Benth... a Ss un We es a a Panicum cymbiforme Hughes 54 a aC ws x x x Panicum decompositum R.Br. be eae aN ue Xx x Xx Panicum delicatum Hughes oe oF at A: Panicum effusum R.Br... Be an x o 6 8 Panicum majusculum F. Muell. ex ‘Benth. ae the Sad ws x Panicum pauciflorum R.Br. Panicum seminudum Domin ; he *iks oe we a se Panicum trachyrhachis Benth. .. sie Hi a be ys Xx Panicum trichoides Swartz. . Panicum white J. M. Black Paractaenum novae-hollandiae Beauv. Paspalidium clementii (Domin) C. E. Hubbard - Paspalidium constrictum (Domin) C. KE. Hubbard ee = 9 afi eo Paspalidium distans (Trin.) Hughes A : i Se ss ot x Paspalidium gracile (R.Br.) Hughes ae Be i ote x te ois Paspalidium jubiflorum (Trin.) Hughes of a as ote x x Paspalidium rarum (R.Br.) Hughes as a: a x Xx x x Paspalidium retiglume (Domin) Hughes a ne af x oe Paspalum orbiculare Forst. f. i he af oF ds 2 i Xx Pennisetum arnhemicum F. Muell. ee i Be Bt obs x ate *Pennisetum polystachyon (Thell.) Schultz Se 48 ae er ft x Perotis rara R.Br. .. ae ate a Bi aft x x x x OOS OK x XX x x Ss OK NEES aD nie ee ON NEON SOK OS OK ORG OS OK EGS GOS OES OS OS xXXKX! PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SourH Wates. Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 223 C.A. Ba VER AD Darcie Pheidochloa gracilis S.T. Blake . ae a Te Phragmites karka (Retz.) Trin. ex Steud. i t33 x Plagiosetum refractum ee Muell.) Benth. a she x re ate Plectrachne bynoet C. EK. Hubbard oe he ae Ne: i x Plectrachne melvillei C. E. Hubbard Ae Pa Me x te Plectrachne pungens (R.Br.) C. E. Hubbard var. pungens x x x x Plectrachne pungens (R.Br.) C. E. Hubbard var. callosum C. E. Hubbard .. a ae ne ae a a Me: x Plectrachne schinzii Henr. .. ae ae ee Re x x x Pseudopogonatherum contortum (Brongn.) A. Camus Pseudopogonatherum irritans (R.Br.) A. Camus. . ae ae Pseudoraphis spinescens (R.Br.) J. Vickery ie iA x *Rhynchelytrum repens (Willd.) C. E. Hubbard .. a: x a ae Rottboellia formosa R.Br. .. ae se Sts Ea ae ee x Sacciolepis indica (l.) Chase ats Sacciolepis myosuroides (R.Br.) A. Camus ar eve i Schizachyrium fragile (R.Br.) A. Camus. as x x x Schizachyrium pseudeulalia (Hosokawa) S. T. Blake Sclerandrium grandifiorum 8.T. Blake .. a= Sclerandrium trancatiglume (F. Muell. ex Benth) Stapf et C. E. Hubbard ae ae ad a Sehima nervosum (Rottl.) Stapf .. = ae E. Sr x Setaria adhaerens (Forsk.) Chiov. ae ae Setarta apiculata (Seribn. et Merr.) K. Schum. aie e ahs Setaria brown Herrm. .. ae ie a aie x x Setaria dielsia Herrm. Ze ae ae ie ae x Setaria glauca (L.) Beauv. Setaria oplismenoides Herrm. Se te 58 a Setaria viridis (L.) Beauv. é Si eis x an : Sorghum australiense Garber et Snyder a = oe! x x Sorghum intrans F. Muell. ex Benth. Sorghum laxiflorum F.M. Bail. Sorghum macrospermum Garber mae a oe — uid Sorghum matarankensis Garber et Snyder a Ate at a x Sorghum plumosum (R.Br.) P. Beauv. ... ore an x x x Sorghum stipoideum (wart et White) C. A. Gardn. et C. E. Hubbard .. oe ao ae a ue Sorghum sp. aff. angustum Sorghum sp. ae oe Ae oe Spathia neurosa Ewart et “Archer ay ahs ae 4 a? Spinifex longifolius R.Br. a wie ea a we ae SK Sporobolus actinocladus (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Sporobolus australasicus Domin oe Sporobolus carolt Mez ah es a oe = Sporobolus mitchellii ee) C. E. Hubbard ex S.T. Blake = Sie oe ak x Sporobolus pulchellus R.Br. Sporobolus virginicus (L. ie Kunth. as Be ae Sporobolus sp : : ae Re ahs x Stipa scabra taney Pe ae aS x Thaumastochloa major S. T. Blake ey a Thaumastochloa pubescens (Domin) C. EH. Hubbard Themeda arguens (L.) Hack. : ae es ee 3G Themeda australis (R.Br.) Stapf : Be x < S< 4 Thuarea involuta (Forst. f.) R. et S. ss Tragus australianus 8. T. Blake x Triodia basedowiw EK. Pritz. au a Ps aa x Triodia clelandii N.T. Burbidge eh ws ate X Triodia hubbardit N. T. Burbidge is ae x ee by Triodia intermedia Cheel .. : ao ee Ec a ie S< Triodia inutilis N.T. Burbidge .. ies Bt om He XS x Triodia trritans R.Br. var. irritans ise Sc : Triodia longiceps J. M. Black F 2 Ne Bid a Triodia microstachya R.Br. ae Ex he é% ue ee x Xx Triodia procera R.Br. So a ate Hs ie Lt a x x x x OM XOX xX X x xXXXKXK KM KX: XE OK OS OS 7K OS OX OK ON OS ae > ON Os BX rs x X X n os OX x x 5 eX x Ok OK OS OS OS x X PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrpety or New SoutH Wates. Vou. 96, Part 4 224 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Triodia pungens R.Br. var. linearis N.T. ees oy oe x Triodia pungens R.Br. var. pungens .. a6 x Xx Triodia racemigera C. A. Gardn. am Triodia roscida N.T. Burbidge .. Me we a et Triodia spicata N.'T. Burbidge .. bi are a: x Triodia stenostachya Domin : Triodia wiseana C. A. Gardn. var. wiseana ffs Tripogon loliiformis (F. Muell.) C. E. Hubbard Triraphis mollis R.Br. a ae Au bc Uranthoecium truncatum (Maid. et Betche) Stapf Vetiveria elongata (R.Br.) Stapf ex C. HE. Hubbard Vetiveria paucifiora S.T. Blake .. ats wt Whiteochloa semitonsa (F. Muell. ex Benth. ) C. E. Hubbard Xerochloa barbata R.Br. ae: 3S: ae on Bs ve out Xerochloa imberbis R.Br. .. nia be ate ce a oe x Xerochloa laniflora Benth.. : ae oe x ah x Zygochloa paradoza (R.Br.) ‘8. T. Blake tte if x A SON DN eS ee SNC 5 IS eS OS ON x HN DN ONES OSG OS OSG Xe CYPERACEAE Arthrostylis aphylla R.Br. ae see ae aa ok Ws ay Bulbostylis barbata (Rottb.) C. B. Clarke a ae, S< x x Bulbostylis turbinata 8. T. Blake 6 mies ae x Caustis flecuosa R.Br. BE 4 Cladium glomeratum R.Br... Cladium procerum 8. T. Blake Crosslandia setifolia W. V. Fitzg. Cyperus albomarginatus Mart. et Schrad. ex Nees Cyperus angustatus R.Br. Cyperus aquatilis R.Br. Cyperus armstrongii Benth. Cyperus articulatus L. : o6 26 do oc ot br ae Cyperus bifaz C. B. Clarke a Hh: i “m x x Xx Cyperus bulbosus Vahl ie x Cyperus castaneus Willd. var. brevimucronatus Kukenth. Cyperus compressus L. : a0 5 i ae ba Cyperus conicus (R.Br. a Boeck. .. Bis ee af Xx Cyperus cristulatus 8.T. Blake .. $s a ba ae Cyperus cunninghami (C. B. ee C. A. Gardn. Ye x Cyperus cuspidatus H.B.K. : boy a ae a a as Cyperus dactylotes Benth. Sk xe oe vie x Xx Xx Cyperus decompositus (R.Br.) F. Muell. “a cee Ne a Cyperus difformis L. Re oe Ko at - x x 3 Cyperus diffusus Vahl Cyperus diphyllus Retz. .. om rs bes Ae tits Cyperus fasciculigerus (F. Muell.) Domin Lhe o% x a Cyperus gilesiz Benth. ae ce a a bis be x Cyperus gunni Hook. us wa as a ae x aM a Cyperus haspan L. 5 ne oe iG Af i me x Cyperus holoschoenus R.Br. ah Bes an Sc a x x Cyperus iria L. a be Si oe Xx x Cyperus txiocarpus F. Muell. on ae ae os x : ee Cyperus microcephalus R.Br. oP See 4 Ae mae Xx x Cyperus pennatus Lam. .. 3 ae at we = a x Cyperus platystylis R.Br. .. Cyperus polystachyos Rottb. aud sdf ae vee th at Cyperus pulchellus R.Br. .. = Aus us a te: bs x Cyperus pygmaeus Rottb. .. fe, ms ve dc < £8 x Cyperus ramos Kukenth.. . *Cyperus rotundus lL. me oe oa os as Cyperus rutilans (C. B. Clarke) Maid. et Betche re x Cyperus scariosus R.Br. ae ae Si i a a As Cyperus sporobolus R.Br. .. 58 or os ae +e x Cyperus squarrosus L. Bi: a4 2h i he x Cyperus stoloniferus Retz. : ss Me Cyperus subpinnatus WKukenth. var. subpinnatus 4 Cyperus subpinnatus Kukenth. var. subrigidellus Kukenth. x XG NI MK Ge KKK MKS ROKK SG Bt PS OS SOc. ON Osos ON ON ON xX 5 Nts PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy or NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 225 C.A. 13) 51 V.R.D. D. & G. Cyperus tegetuformis Roxb. Cyperus tenuispica Steud. Cyperus trinervis R.Br. Cyperus tuberosus Rottb. Cyperus vaginatus R.Br. .. ses Cyperus victoriensis C. B. Clarke Cyperus xserophilus Domin. . Cyperus sp. Cyperus sp. Diplacrum pygmaeum (R. Br.) Nees ex Boeck. Eleocharis atropurpurea (Retz.) Kunth. .. Eleocharis brassi 8. T. Blake ; Hleocharis caribaea (Rottb.) 8. T. Blake ; Hleocharis dulcis (Burm. f.) Trin. ex Hensch. .. Eleocharis nigrescens (Nees) Steud. Eleocharis pallens S.T. Blake Eleocharis sphacelata R.Br. fie Eleocharis spiralis (Rottb.) R. et S. Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimobristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fumbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Pimbristylis PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF New SoutH WaALEs, acicularis R.Br. acuminata Vahl allenttd Turrill argentea Vahl ; arthrostyloides W.V. Fitzg. . bisumbellata (Forsk.) Bubani_ caespitosa R.Br. ae cardiocarpa F. Muell. cephalophora F. Muell. compacta Turrill corynocarya F. Muell. cymosa R.Br. cyperoides R.Br. debilis F. Muell. densa 8S. T. Blake denudata R.Br. depauperata R.Br... diphylla (Retz.) Vahl dipsacea (Rottb.) Benth. ox C. B. Clarke ferruginea Vahl a: : 5 furva R.Br. humilis 8. T. Blake leucocolea Benth. littoralis Gaud. macrantha Boeck. macrostachya Boeck. microcarya FE. Muell. miliacea Vahl monandra F. Muell multifolia Boeck. nuda Boeck. ue nutans (Retz.) Vahl obtusangula F. Muell. oligocephala W. V. Fitzg. oxystachya FE. Muell. . . pallida 8. T. Blake paucifiora R.Br. oe phaeoleuca S. T. Blake pterygosperma R.Br... punctata R.Br. quinquangularis Kunth. rara R.Br. recta KF. M. Bail. rhyticarya F.Muell. .. schoenotdes (Retz.) Vahl schulizit Boeck. : sericea R.Br. setacea Benth. 5 oN OS ON ON ON G x XX; xX! x OS OS BS OS 6 5 ON OS OX a 5 OSS OG XXX KRXXXKX XXX: EP OS OG ONS RDN, OMG x 5 OS Oh OM xx: SPOS ROR Vou. 96, Part 4 226 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Fimbristylis Pimbristylis Fimbristylis Pimbristylis Fimbristylis s solidifolia F. Muell. sphaerocephala Benth. spiralis R.Br.. A SQUATTOSA Vahl. var. squarrosa squarrosa Vahl var. esquarrosa Makino .. x squarrulosa F. Muell. stellata S. T. Blake tetragona R.Br. trachycarya FF. Muell. trigastrocarya EF. Muell. ayridis R.Br. F sp. aff. dichotoma Fuirena ciliaris (L.) Roxb. Fuirena incrassata 8. T. Blake Fuirena umbellata Rottb. Lepironia articulata (Retz.) Domin Lipocarpha microcephala (R.Br.) Kunth. Rhynchospora Rhynchospora Rhynchospora Rhynchospora Rhynchospora Rhynchospora affinis W.V. Fitze. heterochaeta 8. T. Blake longisetus R.Br... oterochaeta F. Muell. rubra (Lour.) Makino tenutfolia Benth. Schoenus falcatus R.Br. Schoenus sparteus R.Br. Scirpus articulatus L. Scirpus debilis Pursh. ; : Scirpus dissachanthus 8. T. Blake Scirpus grossus L..f. 3h: Scirpus laevis 8. T. Blake .. Scirpus lateriflorus Gmel. Scirpus litoralis Schrad. Scirpus maritimus L. Scleria brownit Kunth. Scleria ciliaris Nees Scleria hebecarpa Nees Scleria lithosperma Willd. .. Scleria margaritifera Willd. Scleria novae-hollandiae Boeck. Scleria pygmaea R.Br. Scleria rugosa R.Br. Scleria tricuspidata 8S. T. Blake Tricostularia fimbristyloides (F PALMAE Carpentaria acuminata (Wendl. et Drude) Bece. Corypha elata Roxb. Hydriastele wendlandiana Wendl. et Drude Kentia ramsayi (Becc.) Becc. Tivistona benthamu ¥F.M. Bail. Tivistona humilis R.Br. Livistona loriphylla Bece. LTivistona mariae F. Muell. Nypa fruticans Wurmb. .. Ptychosperma elegans (R.Br.) Bk ARACEAE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEW Amorphophallus galbra F. M. Bail. Amorphophallus variabilis Bl. Pistia stratiotes L. .. Raphidophora australasica ¥. M. Bail. Typhonium angustilobum F. Muell. Typhonium browni Schott. Typhonium liliifolium Schott. Typhonium oblongifolium Engl. F. Muell.) Benth. 5 wes ON ek G x SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, 5 os OS Oxo XxX: Part 4 Sees xXxXXX: SRK ee Re OS XN RUS Rs ee OU ROG og KMXKKKKKXKXK: xX XX XK XK IS OR OG OSPR OS OOS ON iG G. M. CHIPPENDALE FLAGELLARIACEAE Flagellaria indica L. RESTIONACEAE Leptocarpus elatior R.Br. .. Leptocarpus spathaceus R.Br. CENTROLEPIDACEAE Centrolepis banksw (R.Br.) R. et 8. Centrolepis exserta (R.Br.) R. et 8. Centrolepis polygyna (R.Br.) Hieron Centrolepis pusilla (R.Br.) R. et S. XYRIDACEAE Xyris complanata R.Br. Ayris juncea R.Br. AXyris paludosa R.Br. Xyris pauciflora Willd. ERIOCAULACEAE Hriocaulon australe R.Br. Eriocaulon bifistulosum van Heurck et J. Muell. Hriocaulon cinereum R.Br. : % EHriocaulon graphitinum F. Muell. et Tate ex Ewart et Cookson 2 Eriocaulon heterogy, ynum F. Muell. Hriocaulon scartosum R.Br. Eriocaulon schultzii Benth. Eriocaulon tortuosum FE. Muell. Eriocaulon sp. COMMELINACEAE Cartonema parviflorum Hassk. Cartonema spicatum R.Br. Commelina cyanea R.Br. Commelina ensifolia R.Br. Commelina lanceolata R.Br. Commelina undulata R.Br. Cyanotis axillaris (L.) D.Don .. Murdannia gigantea (R.Br.) Bruckn. Murdannia graminea (R.Br.) Bruckn. Murdannia vaginata (L.) R.Br. PONTEDERIACEAE Monochoria cyanea F. Muell. PHILYDRACEAE Philydrum lanuginosum Banks et Soland. ex Gaertn. JUNCACEAE Juncus sp. Juncus sp. RoOxXBURGHIACEAE Roxburghia javanica Kunth. LILIACEAE Anguillaria dioica R.Br. . Asparagus racemosus Willd. Caesia setifera Baker a Corynotheca lateriflora (R. Br.) Benth. Dianella caerulea Sims 56 Dianella ensifolia Red. Dracaena angustifolia Roxb. ue o¢ st a Lomandra leucocephala (R.Br.) Ewart ssp. robusta A. Lee Lomandra multiflora (R.Br.) J. Britt. 8 ae PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH WaAtLEgES, VOL. Ns V.R.D. D. & G. 96, mS OS OS ON G OS ON oleN eS 26 ON OSes ON 0 xX X X xX XK XX x RN KOK OK KE Oa: Part 4 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. Lomandra patens A. Lee .. Ae ee te 4 x Smilax australis R.Br. Smilax latifolia R.Br. Sowerbaea alliacea F. Muell. Thysanotus chinensis Benth. A Thysanotus exiliflorus F. Muell. x Thysanotus tuberosus R.Br. x Tricoryne elatior R.Br. x Xanthorrhoea thornton Tate x B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. HAEMODORACEAE Haemodorum brevicaule F. Muell. Haemodorum coccineum R.Br. ; Haemodorum ensifolium F. Muell. Haemodorum leptostachyum Benth. Haemodorum parviflorum Benth. .. Haemodorum subvirens F. Muell. AMARYLLIDACEAE Crinum asiaticum L. var. asiaticum : Crinum asiaticum L. var. angustifolium Benth. ae es Crinum flaccidum Herbert ae a ae or x Crinum uniflorum F. Muell. Curculigo ensifolia R.Br. TACCACEAE Tacca leontapetaloides (L.) Kuntze DIOSCOREACEAE Dioscorea bulbifera L. 5 Dioscorea sativa L. var. sativa ; oe Dioscorea sativa L. var. rotunda F.M. Bail. Dioscorea transversa R.Br. ZINGIBERACEAE Curcuma australasica Hook. f. BuRMANNIACEAE Burmannia juncea Sol. ORCHIDACEAE Cymbidium canaliculatum R.Br. ar. barrettii W. H. Nicholls Be ad Dendrobium dicuphum F. Muell. Dendrobium johannis Reichb. f. Dipodium stenocheilum O. Schwarz Eulophia holtzei F. Muell. . . Hulophia venosa Reichb. f. Geodorum pictum (R.Br.) Lindl. Habenaria elongata R.Br. at Habenaria ferdinandi Schlechter . . Habenaria holtzer F. Muell. Fe Habenaria hymenophylla Schlechter Habenaria ochroleuca R.Br. Luisia teretifoia Gaud. Nervilia sp. Spiculaea sp. CASUARINACEAE Casuarina cunninghamiana Miq. om ae Pr Casuarina decaisneana F. Muell. aft a O10 x Casuarina equisetifolia Forst. et Forst. f. PIPERACEAB Peperomia pellucida (L.) H.B.K... Piper holtzec F. Muell. x Piper novae-hollandiae Miq. x x x 5 x oti x x x x x 3: x x x x x x x x x x Si x x x x x x Se x x x x x x xe io x x “ ae x x x x x x x x D< PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 229 C.A. lef ho \WolsD)S 1D), a5 (Gr ULMACEAE Celtis philippensis Blanco ie re ae it she a0 x x Trema amboinensis (Willd.) Bl. .. a a ae Ai 46 Bc x Trema aspera (Brongn.) BI. Be 2/5 ie ie x x Xx MORACEAE Antiaris toxicaria Lesch. var. macrophylla (R.Br.) Corner... hs Se x Fatoua pilosa Gaud. te Pee a ais ae are ws x Ficus benjamina L. var. benjamina = a x. on 5h x Ficus coronulata F. Muell. fa ai se os ae ne x Ficus hispida L.f. var. hispida ae “his a a a x Ficus lacor Buch. Ham. .. a “8 ve a es “i x Ficus leucotricha Miq. var. leucotricha a 6 x Ficus leucotricha Miq. var. megacarpa F. Muell. ex - Corner ae x v Ficus obliqua Forst. f. var. obliqua : ae 50 a Xx Ficus opposita bees var. indecora (A. Cunn. ex Mia.) Corner .. 3 i: St se x Ficus opposita Mig. var. micracantha (Miq.) Corner .. oD ot x x Ficus platypoda (Miq.) A. Cunn. ex pet var. angustata (Miq.) Corner .. ore Pe as x Ficus plat uo pede (Miq.) A. ‘Cunn. ex Mia. var. cordata Specht ee oe x Ficus Pode (Miq. A. Cunn. ex - Miq. var. minor Benth. x 3 ¢ x Ficus platypoda (Miq.) A. Cunn. ex pee var. a eo ee x we Ficus racemosa L. var. racemosa ae wt x Ficus scobina Benth. é He ye Ficus superba Miq. var. henneana (Miq.) Corner Ficus virens Ait. Malaisia scandens (Lour.) ‘Planch. MK OK OK RK a URTICACEAE Parietaria debilis Forst. f. oe af ae ag x TUrtica urens L. of B09 a ak 56 o 0 x PROTEACEAE Banksia dentata L.f. Grevillea agrifolia A. Cunn. ex R. Br. Grevillea angulata R.Br. .. Grevillea dimidiata F. Muell. isd wit a4 ss bis Grevillea dryandrt R.Br... Bm ae ae oe A x Grevillea eriostachya Lindl. ae se ae He < 6 Grevillea goodw R.Br. A me os & vA $2 ti ee x Grevillea heliosperma R.Br. au ae ae of oe x Grevillea juncifolia Hook. ae ae x x Grevillea leucadendron A. Cunn. ex oe Br. Grevillea mimosoides R.Br. ns Ses exe ae Grevillea nematophylla F.Muell. .. ag ae 2 x Grevillea pachypoda O. Schwarz < x x x Lysiana subfalcata (Hook.) Barlow eee, ae Ses x re x an Viscum flezicaule Barlow .. an Pe Bs a x SANTALACEAE Anthobolus leptomerioides F. Muell. ae ae x he ae a Anthobolus filifolius R.Br. Be a we sa Be De on x Hzxocarpos latifolius R.Br. es she oe ay as BS x x Haocarpos sparteus R.Br. .. x ne : Santalum acuminatum (R.Br.) A. DOs x Santalum lanceolatum R.Br. var. angustifolium Benth. x oe Santalum lanceolatum R.Br. var. lanceolatum ae x x x x Santalum ovatum R.Br... ua ee 36 eae Ae wes se x OPILIACEAE Cansjera leptostachya Benth. a on ae ay hy Le 2% x Opilia amentacea Roxb. .. oe ans ts La nie on x Xx OLACACEAE Olax aphylla R.Br. ane rs a Se te a aif ae x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 231 C.A. BT. V.R. D. D. & G. ARISTOLOCHIACEAE Aristolochia thozetis F. Muell. POLYGONACEAE +Emex australis Steinh. oe as De bu x Muehlenbeckia cunninghamii (Meissn.) F. Muell. x » x A Polygonum attenuatum R.Br. Ae te an x x x +Polygonum aviculare L. . x Polygonum lapathifolium Tbe, x Polygonum orientale L. he si 1h oe ae ne Re eS x Polygonum plebecum R.Br. Polygonum serrulatum Lag. Rumex crystallinus Lange . . *Rumex vesicarius Li. XX XK X CHENOPODIACEAE Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees var. halocnemoides Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees var. pergranulatum J. M. Black ae 34 iG ips 5 Me ae se x Arthrocnemum leiostachyum (Benth.) Paulsen Atriplex angulata Benth. .. Atriplea conduplicata F. Muell. Atriplex elachophylla F. Muell. Atriplex holocarpa F. Muell. Atriplex incrassata F. Muell. Atriplec limbata Benth. Atriplex lindleyi Moq. Atriplex muellert Benth. Atriplezr nummularia Lindl). bi Atriplex pseudocampanulata Aellen Atriplex semibaccata R.Br. Atriplex spongiosa F. Muell. ; 53 Atriplex turbinata (R. H. Anderson) Aellen Atriplex velutinella F. Muell. ee Atriplex vesicaria Heward ex Benth. Babbagia acroptera F. Muell. et Tate Babbagia dipterocarpa F. Muell. Bassia anderson Ising 4 Bassia bicornis (Lindl.) F. Muell. var. bicornis Bassia bicornis (Lind].) F. Muell. var. horrida (Domin) C. T. White ay Be Bassia biflora (R.Br.) F. Muell. var. biflora Bassia birchit (F. Muell.) F. Muell. : Bassia calcarata Ising is ae Bassia chippendalei Ising Bassia clelandw Ising bef an Bassia convexula R.H. Anderson. . Bassia cornishiana F. Muell. Bassia costata R. H. Anderson Bassia decurrens J. M. Black Bassia diacantha (Nees) F. Muell. Bassia divaricata (R.Br.) F. Muell. Bassia eremaea Ising ee a: Bassia eriacantha (F. Muell.) R. H. Anderson Bassia glabra (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Bassia intricata R. H. Anderson .. Bassia johnsoni Ising : oe Bassia lanicuspis (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Bassia limbata J. M. Black : Bassia longicuspis F. Muell. Bassia luehmannii F. Muell. Bassia obconica Ising Bassia obliquicuspis R. H. ‘Anderson Bassia paradoxa (R.Br.) F. Muell. Bassia parallelicuspis R.H. Anderson Bassia patenticuspis R. H. Anderson Z x XKXKXKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK He KG OK OK OK OS OK OK OK ON OK OK OK OK OK OS OR OS OK ERK OS PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wass, Vou. 96, Part 4 232 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Bassia a eel es (F. Muell.) F. Muell. var. lanata Ising ‘ ws he ee a ahs Bassia quinquecuspis (F. Muell.) F. Muell. var. villosa (Benth.) J. M. Black .. ae Bassia sclerolaenoides (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Bassia urceolata \sing Chenopodium anidioph yllum ‘Aellen Chenopodium auricomum Lindl. .. ae Chenopodium cristatum (F.Muell.) F.Muell. .. Chenopodium desertorum (J.M. Black) J.M. Black .. Chenopodium melanocarpum (J.M. Black) J. M. Black tChenopodium murale L. . Chenopodium nitrariaceum (F. Muell. ) F. Muell. ex “Benth. Chenopodium pumilio R.Br. : Chenopodium rhadinostachyum F. Muell. Dysphania littoralis R.Br. Dysphania plantaginella F. Muell. Dysphania simulans F. Muell. et Tate ex : Tate Enchylaena tomentosa R.Br. se ae Kochia aphylla R.Br. Kochia appressa Benth. .. Kochia astrotricha L. Johnson Kochia brevifoia R.Br... Kochia coronata J. M. Black Kochia enchylaenoides (J. M. Black) J. M. Black Kochia georger Diels Bic Kochia lanosa Lindl. Kochia lobiflora F. Muell. Kochia planifolia F. Muell. Kochia scleroptera J. M. Black Kochia spongiocarpa F. Muell. Kochia tomentosa F. Muell. Kochia triptera Benth. Kochia villosa Lindl. Kochia sp. Kochia sp. . a6 or 56 Pachycornia tenuis (Benth.) J. M. Black Pachycornia triandra (KF. Muell.) J. M. Black Rhagodia nutans R.Br. se Be Rhagodia parabolica R.Br.. Rhagodia spinescens R.Br... Salsola kali L. var. kala Salsola kali L. var. strobilifera Benth. Tecticornia cinerea (F. Muell.) Hook. f. et Jackson Threlkeldia inchoata (J.M. ee J.M. Black . Threlkeldia procerifiora F. Muell. z: x SS NE SK SS DK EK OR NE OR KR ORK KOK KK KKK KKK KKK KX BK KK KKK KK KK KX x x 5 ek OS OS 6 AMARANTHACEAE Achyranthes aspera L. Alternanthera anqustifolia R.Br. Alternanthera denticulata R.Br. .. Se Alternanthera micrantha (Benth.) Domin Alternanthera nana R.Br. evs shi site 3 x x Alternanthera nodiflora R.Br. ate 5 Bed 5.6 x x x *Alternanthera pungens H.B.K. : se Be x x Amaranthus cochleitepalus Domin ae aye a a x Amaranthus grandifiorus (J.M. Black) J.M. Black .. x Re at Amaranthus interruptus R.Br... ae 5 it Xx is x Amaranthus leptostachyus Benth. oy a at ts if, Amaranthus mitchelliia Benth. sa an ste a x x ae Amaranthus pallidifiorus F. Muell. O0 56 20 5c Ae x tAmaranthus viridis L. Ne ih i ae =< *Celosia argentea Ih. ue ay cd a he. ans a Gomphrena affinis F. Muell. ts ae ae a iY: ve x Gomphrena alba Farmar .. Ne ae aa a ok A a: Gomphrena brachystylis F. Muell. at ot ae Be, x x xX X X 2X xX X X xX XK XK XK KX) ee XXxXXX: PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or NEw SoutH WALES, Vot. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE C.A. Isto (VIR ID IDS 64 Gr Gomphrena canescens (Poir.) R.Br. Gomphrena conferta Benth. Gomphrena conica Spreng. 20 He Gomphrena cunninghamw (Moq.) Druce .. Gomphrena flaccida R.Br. Gomphrena humilis R.Br. Gomphrena lanata R.Br. .. Gomphrena parviflora Benth. ae Ptilotus aervoides (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Ptilotus aristatus Benl 2a Ptilotus arthrolasius F. Muell. A 1x ne Piilotus atriplicifolius (A.Cunn. ex Mog.) Benl var. atriplicifolius oe S¢ aye ig an: Ptilotus atriplicifolius (A. Cunn. ex Mog.) Benl. var. eldert (Farmar) Benl. as a ste it Ptilotus calostachyus (F. Muell.) F. Muell. var. calostachyus Piilotus calostachyus (F. Muell.) F.Muell. var. procerus (Diels) Benl By ae Ptilotus clementi (Farmar) Benl . Piilotus conicus R.Br. Ptilotus corymbosus R.Br. var. acutiflorus Benth. Ptilotus corymbosus R.Br. var. corymbosus Ptilotus decipiens (Benth.) C. A. Gardn. Piilotus dissitiflorus F. Muell. i Ptilotus distans (R.Br.) Poir. Ptilotus exaltatus Nees ex Lehm. : Pitlotus fusiformis (R.Br.) Poir. var. fusiformis an Ptilotus fusiformis (R.Br.) Poir. var. gracilis (R.Br.) Benl Ptilotus gaudichaudiu (Steud.) J.M. Black var. ee chaudiw .. te : Ptilotus helipteroides (F. Muell.) F. “Muell. oe Ptilotus incanus (R.Br.) Poir. var. elongatus Benl Ptilotus incanus (R.Br.) Poir. var. incanus Pilotus latifolus R.Br. var. latifolius ae Ptilotus latifolius R.Br. var. mator (C. A. Garda.) Benl Ptilotis leucocoma (Moq.) F. Muell. a Ptilotus lophotrichus Benl Prtilotus macrocephalus (R.Br.) Poir. Ptilotus murrayi F. Muell. : = Ptilotus nobilis (Lindl.) F. Muell. var. nobilis be Ptilotus obovatus (Gaud.) F. Muell. var. griseus Benl | Pitilotus obovatus (Gaud.) F. Muell. var. obovatus Ptilotus obovatus (Gaud.) F.Muell. var. parviflorus (Lindl.) Benl .. ie 5% oe a Ptilotus parvifolius (F. Muell.) F. Muell. om $e Piilotus polystachyus (Gaud.) F.Muell. emend Benl forma polystachyus .. ar 50 ae at Ptilotus poalystachyus (Gaud.) F.Muell. emend Benl forma rubriflorus (Black) Benl a3 ee Pitilotus schwartz F.Muell. ex Tate a A Ptilotus spicatus F.Muell. ex Benth. ssp. leianthus (Benth.) Benl var. letanthus ae as Pitilotus spicatus F.Muell. ex Benth. ‘ssp. leianthus (Benth.) Benl var. longiceps Benl .. an is Ptilotus spicatus F. Muell. ex Benth. oe, spicatus Pupalia lappacea (l.) Juss. : ae NYCTAGINACEAE Boerhavia diffusa L. Shs Boerhavia repanda Willd. Pisonia aculeata L. GYROSTEMONACEAE Codonocarpus cotinifolius (Desf.) F. Muell. Gyrostemon australasicus (Moq.) Heimerl. Gyrostemon ramulosus Desf. 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEW x y. x x x x x es x x x x & x x x x x x x nt x x x x x x x x x x x a: ys x x x x x x x x x x x x ei x x M8 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x SoutH WALEs, VOL. S§ oMiek a xX XXX: CNOA eS 96, Part 4 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS V.R.D. D. C.A. Bey & G. Gyrostemon sp. x 56 Gyrostemon sp. x x SPHENOCLEACEAE Sphenoclea zeylanica Gaertn. 4 AIZOACEAE Aizoon quadrifidum (F. Muell.) F. Muell. S< EY: Aizoon zygophylloides (F. Muell.) F. Muell. x M3 x Glinus lotoides L. .. ne ue ee x x x Glinus oppositifolius (L.) A.DC. .. x x x ilinus orygioides F. Muell. Xx A Macarthuria apetala Harv. ie x Mollugo cerviana (L.) Ser. ate >< oe : Mollugo molluginea (F. Muell.) Druce x x x Me Mollugo pentaphylla L. 5 x Sesuvium portulacastrum L. by x Trianthema oxycalyptra F. Muell. x af : a Trianthema pilosa F. Muell. x x x x Trianthema portulacastrum 1. x Trianthema triquetra Willd. var. " clavata (J. M. : Black) Eichler .. x x Trianthema tr iquetra Willd. var. triquetra x te x Zaleya galericulata (Melville) Eichler x x PORTULACACEAE Calandrinia balonensis Lindl. x 2 Calandrinia eremaea Ewart x Ae Calandrinia gracilis Benth. Dy x Calandrinia polyandra Benth. x Calandrinia ptychosperma F. Muell. x Calandrinia pumila (F. Muell. ex Benth.) F. Muell. x a A. Calandrinia quadrivalvis KF. Muell. : a x x Calandrinia remota J. M. Black x Calandrinia spergularina F. Muell. x Calandrinia stagnensis J. M. Black x cc oe Calandrinia uniflora F. Muell. x x Portulaca bicolor F. Muell. use x x Portulaca digyna F. Muell. os x x 4% Portulaca filifolia F. Muell. x x x x Portulaca intraterranea J.M. Black x at ise ae Portulacu oleracea L. x x x x Portulaca oligosperma F. Muell. aR x x i. Portulaca CERES F. Muell. ex Benth. ae é x x Portulaca sp. : x E CARYOPHYLLACEAE +Cerastium aff. glomeratum Thuill . . x oe - Polycarpaea breviflora F. Muell. x x x Polycarpaea burtoniit F.M. Bail. oa ae ah Se Polycarpaea corymbosa (L.) Lam. x x * x Polycarpaea holtzii Maid. et Betche ae 5 x Polycarpaea involucrata F. Muell.. 2 P x iz x x Polycarpaea longiflora F. Muell. var. longiflsra 24 x x x Polycarpaea longiflora F. Muell. var. lewcantha Benth. x x Polycarpaea staminodina F. Muell. : . a x x Polycarpaea synandra ¥F. Muell. x x x Polycarpaea triloba Ewart et Cookson x - Polycarpaea violacea (Mart.) Benth. a x Polycarpon Te (L.) L. x TSpergularia sp. : My x NYMPHAEACEAE Nelumbo nucifera Gaertn. .. Se se . x Nymphaea gigantea Hook. var. gigantea ae a x x Nymphaea violacea Lehm. x x x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or New Sours Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE CERATOPHYLLACEAE Ceratophyllum demersum L. RANUNCULACEAE tAdonis aestivalis L. MENISPERMACEAE Hypserpa decumbens (Benth.) Diels : Pachygone ovata Miers ex Hook. f. et Thomas Stephania japonica ge Miers var. timoriensis (DC.) Forman Tinospora smilacina Benth. ANNONACEAE *Annona reticulata L. Polyalthia holtzeana F. Muell. gas Polyalthia nitidissima (Dene.) Benth. Popowia australis Benth. .. : Uvaria holtzet F. Muell. Uvaria membranacea Benth. MYRISTICACEAE Myrtistica insipida R.Br. .. Horsfieldia australiana 8. T. Blake LAURACEAE Cassytha filuformis L. Cassytha glabella R.Br. Cryptocarya cunningham Meissn. Intsea chinensis Lam. i Iitsea glutinosa (Lour.) C. B. Robinson .. HERNANDIACEAE Gyrocarpus americanus Jacq. PAPAVERACEAE +Glaucitum corniculatum (L.) Rudolph tPapaver hybridum L. SA ae CRUCIFERAE Arabidella trisecta (F.Muell.) Schulz Blennodia canescens R.Br. Fi ae Blennodia pterosperma (J. M. Black) J. M. Black *Brassica tournefortis Gouan. : a Ae +Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.) Medik. +Carrichtera annua (L.) Prantl —- a: Harmsiodoxa blennodioides (F. Muell.) Schulz Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi Thell. : Lepidium oxytrichum Sprague Lepidium papillosum F. Muell. Lepidium rotundum (Desv.) DC. Menkea sphaerocarpa F. Muell. uf a Menkea villosula (F. Muell. et Tate) J. M. Black Phlegmatospermum cochlearinum (F. Muell.) Schulz +Sisymbrium erysimoides Desf. Se ai +Sisymbrium wvrio L. +Sisymbrium orientale L. . Stenopetalum lineare R.Br. ex DC. Stenopetalum nutans F. Muell. Stenopetalum velutinum F. Muell. CAPPARIDACEAE Capparis lasiantha R.Br. ex DC. Capparis loranthifolia Lindl. var. loranthifolia Capparis mitchellii (Lindl. ex F. ae Benth. Capparis quiniflora DC. a; PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy or New Sours Wa.eEs. VoL. 96, xX KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK XK XK XK XK Xe BK x XX 235 VRD. D. & G. x xX x KK KX x Part 4 236 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Capparis re L. ssp. wumbellata (R.Br. ex DC.) Jacobs a Capparis spinosa L. var. nummularia De.) F. M. Bail. x Ae Capparis umbonata Lindl. x x Cleome ouwalidea F. Muell. Cleome tetrandra Banks ex DC. ae ie ae Gd és Cleome viscosa L. .. ee ies ie ae ah x < Justago cleomoides (F. Muell.) Kuntze 5 OS x xxx xXx EXE KORE DROSERACEAE Drosera burmanni Vahl .. oy a, a ee x i xx Drosera indica L. .. Me sh me ats ae x x x Drosera petiolaris R.Br. ex DC. ie We bas it ee x xX XX BYBLIDACEAE Byblis liniflora Salisb. < of te ne aa ar he x % CRASSULACEAE Crassula colorata (Nees) Ostenf. .. a: ae a < Crassula purpurata (Hook. f.) Domin .. bye si x PITTOSPORACEAE Pittosporum ferrugineum Ait. we a oc a3 ao ovo xX Pittosporum melanospermum F. Muell. .. ‘its be bt WY x x Pittosporum phylliraeoides DC... ae a ae x aa < RosACEAE Parinari corymbosum (Bl.) Miq. .. ae a Ne Le sc 50 x Rubus hill F. Muell. ee aw ik oe of an af a) x Stylobasium spathulatum Desf. x MIMOSACEAE Acacia acradenia F. Muell. ae ay: or ¥e x Xx Acacia adsurgens Maid. et Blakely ae ae cs 4 4 x . Acacia alleniana Maid. .. ah a 3 of ea ah x Acacia amentifera F. Muell. whe a sa sat 6 x Acacia ancistrocarpa Maid. et Blakely ashe ae Ny < Xx xX Acacia aneura F. Muell. ex Benth. var. aneura 4 x Acacia aneura F. Muell. ex Benth. var. ee J. M. Black... : =; x Acacia argyraea Tindale Acacia arida Benth. : a be? a, st ic es Pe Acacia asperulacea F. Muell. ws a Bi x Acacia aulacocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth. var. aulacocarpa of x x Acacia aulacocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth. var. macrocarpa Benth. oe ° Acacia auriculiformis A. Cunn. ex Benth. is Si a Acacia basedoww Maid. .. he ee oe a x bn ae Acacia aff. bidwillii Benth. ake me ae ie FR nae x Acacia brachystachya Benth. Acacia calcicola Forde et Ising Acacia cambagei R. T. Bak. Acacia chisholmii F.™M. Bail. xf <7: & Acacia colletioides Benth. a st 2s SF xX <2 wt A Acacia conspersa F. Muell. oe ae ah ee 3 Me x Acacia coriacea DC. Acacia cowleana Tate 4 Acacia cunninghamw Hook. Acacia cuthbertsonii Luehm. : F ne a x Acacia cyperophylla F. Muell. ex Benth. a sit x Acacia dictyophleba F. Muell. a x Acacia difficilis Maid. th oe ee a ke eh fd Acacia dimidiata Benth. .. oe af b. ne cn a x Acacia dineura F. Muell. oF Be 2 A Acacia aff. doratoxylon A. Cunn. ae Bey she x Be ae Acacia drepanocarpa F.Muell. .. eG 0 wis Ke a x XX *KXX*X: xX XK X XE OK OK 2S 28 xX KK XK Ks x KS 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETy or NEw SourH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE bo ies) ~ Acacia Acacia Acacia dunnvw (Maid.) Turrill estrophiolata F. Muell. farnesiana (L.) Willd. Acacia froggatti Maid. Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia Acacia galioides Benth. aff. genistoides A. Cunn. ex ; Benth. georginae FE. M. Bail. Bye gonocarpa F. Muell. : gonoclada F. Muell. ex Benth. hammondu Maid. hemignosta F. Muell. hemsleyt Maid. hiliana Maid. aff. hippuroides Heward ex Benth. holosericea A. Cunn. ex G. Don. humifusa A. Cunn. ex Benth. impressa F. Muell. jennerae Maid. kempeana F. Muell. aff. kempeana F. Muell. lamprocarpa O. Schwarz latescens Benth. latifolia Benth. leptocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth. aff. leptocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth. leptophleba F. Muell. tea ligulata A. Cunn. ex Benth. linarioides Benth. linophylla W. V. Fitzg. luehmannii F. Muell. : lycopoduifolia A. Cunn. ex Hook. aff. lycopodiifolia A. Cunn. ex Hook. aff. lycopodiifolia A. Cunn. ex Hook. aff. lycopodiifolia A. Cunn. ex Hook. lysiphloia F. Muell. ex Benth. ~ mattlandit F. Muell. Me malloclada Maid. et Blakely O06 microbotrya Benth.. e minutifolia F. Muell. monticola J. M. Black mountfordiae Specht 3 murrayana F. Muell. ex Benth. nuperrima Bak. f. oligoneura F. Muell. oncinocarpa Benth. oswaldi F. Muell. aff. oswaldii F. Muell. 5 pachyphloia W.V. Dee ex Maid. pallida F. Muell. pellita O. Schwarz peuce EF’. Muell. phlebocarpa F. Muell. plectocarpa A. Cunn. ex Benth. polystachya A. Cunn. ex Benth. praelongata F. Muell. oor proxima Maid. pruinocarpa Tindale ptychophylla F. Muell. pyrifolia DC. ramulosa W.V. Fitzg. retiventa KF. Muell. salicina Lindl. : sericata A. Cunn. ex Benth. sessiliceps F. Muell. shirleyt Maid. : PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SooreTy oF NEw SoutH WALm#s, VoL. 9 C.A. 1834 \WARID, IDE we (Et O68 x x x ane x x x oe x x x x x Ave x x x ee x x oe DG "4 x >< Be x in x x x x 06 eee x Op x x x x x sive x x nie x x x x x os x x x Des ae x x x Fe Se x x — aad aft Xx x x 5.6 x x< : x< x x a) ae x x x x x x or bie x x x ie see x x x ee att x x nee yom x Xx x ae xX x x x as o x x see x a3 x Xx x ns xX X x ae Xx i's x x ye Oa as x< x x Ke x X ee ws x Xx x xX x ae a: he x x x a5 a ae X xX x 6, Part 4 238 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Acacia aff. stbirica S. Moore 33 ws ae? ae x Acacia aff. signata F. Muell. ae aoe an ah x Be Acacia simsit A. Cunn. ex Benth. sig Al we ay x Acacia spondylophylla F.Muell. .. E aie ae x x Acacia stenophylla A. Cunn. ex Benth. .. Br ss x x Acacia stigmatophylla A. Cunn. ex Benth. ae me HA Acacia stipuligera F. Muell. ae ue fd ne x Acacia stipulosa F. Muell. we a a9 Zu er, Acacia strongylophylla F.Muell. .. un ae a6 x Acacia subternata F. Muell. : 5 6 Acacia sutherlandw F.Muell. Acacia tanumbirinensis Maid. Acacia tenuissima F. Muell. a a a0 bed x Acacia tetragonophylla F. Muell. .. a ats yd x x x a KK eX x ae REN OS Acacia torulosa Benth. Acacia translucens A. Cunn. ex Hook. ne os i Acacia tumida F.Muell. .. : “Ee a wee Me x x Acacia umbellata A. Cunn. ex Benth. ae cols x Acacia validinervia Maid. et Blakely .. Kis os x Acacia victoriae Benth. : 56 ae # aby x Acacia wickhamii Benth. .. oe a ae es =f ae x Acacia wilhelmiana F. Muell. a ea eh ae sé st Acacia wylocarpa A.Cunn. ex Benth. .. Bs se x x Acacia yirkallensis Specht. . Albizia canescens Benth. = a fs, san 5 58 +Albizia lebbek Benth. Eee Bis oe: xX ae Cathormion umbellatum (Vahl) Kostermans wi ai Ss x Dichrostachys cinerea (L.) Wight et Arn. subsp. malesiana Brenan et Brummitt . : ai oF ua Dichrostachys spicata (F. Muell.) Domin. nf ie i x x *Leucaena leucocephala (Lam.) de Wit *Mimosa acanthocarpa Poir. *Mimosa pigra L. *Mimosa pudica L. as are xi ee a ae Neptunia dimorphantha Domin a hs x x x Neptunia gracilis Benth. forma glandulosa Windler .. nie x x Neptunia gracilis Benth. forma gracilis x Neptunia major (Benth.) Windler : Bt he ot a Be Neptunia monosperma F.Muell. .. on he a x x x OS ci OS Oe OS ce cso OX OS OS OK Gs XXXKXXX IS OS CK OX 6 CAESALPINIACEAE Bauhinia cunninghamii (Benth.) Benth. at we x x XK Bauhinia hookeri F. Muell. ae a Se Hite ee Bs Cassia absus L. oy: 2 ae Aes a re by oe, x *Cassia alata L. Cassia artemisioides Gaud. ex DC. ae Cassia costata J. F. Bail. et C. T. White Cassia desolata F. Muell. Cassia glutinosa DC. Me, aes ae a as > Le Cassia harneyt Specht ae Ne he he oe a se Se x Cassia helmsti Symon AY a ae ote oe x 52 x s3 Cassia leptoclada Benth. .. “4 ae a Sy aa oe a 4 Cassia luersseniti Domin .. We ihe a aS x fo a3 Cassia magnifolia F. Muell. Se fs ate be, ae me x 53 Cassia mimosoides L. oh a ie ae ot of x x Cassia eremophila GD GsG OS EIRCOM SOR KEDCON, PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocretTy or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 240 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. & G. Cyclocarpa stellaris Afz. ex J.G. Bak. .. M a at va ws x Daviesia arthropoda F. Muell. ae a ake “2 x oe a a Daviesia reclinata A.Cunn. ex Benth. .. ie ae Bes e% dhs x Davwiesia sp. Se ae a ae ae : Dendrolobiwm stipatum S. T. Blake Ss as as At Mt 2 x Xx PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socipty oF New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 Derris trifoliata Lour. Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Desmodium Dicerma biarticulatum ( campylocaulon F. Muell. ex Benth. filiforme Zoll. et Morr. gangeticum DC. : a Bes ie ae mueller? Benth. a we ate as x aff. mueller? Benth. ae re ee neurocarpum Benth. Be a “e x aff. neurocarpum Benth. polyneurum 8S. T. Blake aff. polyneurum S. T. Blake tortuosum (Sw.) DC. trichostachyum Benth. aff. trichostachyum Benth. umbellatum DC. L.) DC. Dunbaria singuliflora F. Muell. Hriosema chinense Vog. . Erythrina variegata L. var. ‘orientalis (L.) Merr. ae ne Erythrina vespertilio Benth. ae. ae x Galactia megalophylla (¥. Muell.) Ui Fel, Willis Galactia muellert Benth. Galactia tenuiflora (Klein ex Willd.) Wight et Arn. Gastrolobium grandiflorum F. Muell. a oe Glycine canescens F. J. Herm. Glycine clandestina Wendl. Glycine falcata Benth. SOS 26 eS Glycine tabacina (Lab.) Benth. Glycine ton ventosa Benth. Hovea longifolia R.Br. ex Ait. var. longifolia , Hovea long Benth. Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Indigofera Isotropis atropurpurea F. Muell. Isotropis parviflora Benth. Isotropis wheelert F. Muell. ex Benth. Isotropis winneckeana F. Muell. Jacksonia Jacksonia Jacksonia Jacksonia Jacksonia Jacksonia Kennedya ufoia R.Br. ex Ait. var. pannosa (A. Cunn.) Gamedonn E. Tent. : brevidens Benth. var. Breaidene 5 brevidens Benth. var. uncinata Benth. colutea (Burm. f.) Merr. cordifolia Heyne dominii Hichler. . george HK. Pritz. glandulosa Willd. haplophylla F. Muell. hirsuta L. aff. hirsuta L. leucotricha E. Pritz. linifolia (L.f.) Retz. monophylla DC. a parviflora Heyne ex Wight et Arn. saxicola KF. Muell. ex Benth. subulata Heyne. . tinctoria L. F trita L.f.. SOX XE ea, ORS OK OS XS 5 anomala Ewart et Morr. dilatata Benth. .. odontoclada F'. Muell. ramosissima Benth. thesioides A. Cunn. vernicosa F. Muell. ex Benth. prorepens (F. Muell.) F. Muell. BS OK OX S x x: XO NE DK OS EK SK OS ER OK OK OK OS OS ORK OE KE OOK Oe KOS XE So xX OK GK FE G. M. CHIPPENDALE 241 i C.A. Be VekveLD) ae: & G. Lotus australis Andr. var. australis Lotus australis Andr. var. exstipulatus J M. Black Lotus cruentus Court Lourea obcordata Desv. e. ee +Medicago polymorpha L. var. brevispina (Benth. ) ‘Heyn }+Medicago polymorpha L. var. vulgaris (Benth.) Shinners }+Medicago truncatula Gaertn. var. truncatula at Mirbelia viminalis (A. Cunn.) C. A. Gardn. Moghania involucrata (Benth.) Kuntze Moghania lineata (Roxb.) Kuntze Moghania parviflora (Benth.) Kuntze Moghania pauciflora (Benth.) Kuntze Mucuna gigantea (Willd.) DC. é Mucuna urens (L.) DC. var. papuana F. M. Bail. a Paratephrosia lanata (Benth.) Domin .. ee x Phaseolus lathyroides L. 5 me a M2 <3 =e as {Phaseolus mungo L. hs a oy et Ht ni ae x +Phaseolus radiatus L. ee af: aS ne Ud st x Pongamia glabra Vent. : Pongamia pinnata (L.) Pierre Psoralea archert F. Muell. .. be mes nie So a Me ae Psoralea badacana (Blanco) Benth. var. badacana a ate ae ate x Psoralea badacana (Blanco) Benth. var. grandiflora Benth. x Psoralea balsamica F. Muell. : Psoralea cinerea Lindl. Psoralea eriantha Benth. Psoralea leucantha F. Muell. Psoralea martini F. Muell. Psoralea patens Lindl. AG Se ow a x Psoralea plumosa ¥. Muell. ie ats te oie x Psoralea pustulata F. Muell. aM me an x x Psoralea schultzii F. Muell. a oF 5 Be ae x Psoralea walkingtoni F. Muell. Pitychosema anomalum F. Muell. Ptychosema stipulare J. M. Black Ptychosema trifoliolatum F. Muell. Pycnospora lutescens (Poir.) Schindl. Rhynchosia acutifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. Rhynchosia australis Benth. ‘ 4 a ie oe Rhynchosia minima (L.) DC. : 3 Dissiliaria tricornis Benth. ae a ig bus Fs a A x Drypetes australasica (J. Muell.) Pax et Hoffm. Ne fi ae as x Huphorbia alsinaefiora Baill. 4d Fre : x Euphorbia armstrongiana Boiss. rs a ae a 5 igs x Huphorbia atoto Forst.f. .. by te Ff in =f) ay ‘ x Huphorbia australis Boiss. Huphorbia boophthona C. A. Gardn. Euphorbia coghlani F.M. Bail. Be as ae Euphorbia comans W.V. Fitzg. .. he ie a ae x *Huphorbia dentata Michx. .. te es ed he: a 55 aS Euphorbia drummondii Boiss. 5 Be ay te x x x Huphorbia eremophila A.Cunn. .. Ne aie Be x x x Euphorbia filipes Benth. .. ae as ate a! Euphorbia finlaysonii J.M. Black = bie i x *Huphorbia heterophylla L. 5 a8 Huphorbia hirta L. ae ae we Ha se as ae by Huphorbia micradenia Boiss. ae i ore fa x x Euphorbia mitchelliana Boiss. var. mitchelliana Bs ee x x< Huphorbia mitchelliana Boiss. var. stenophylla Benth. Euphorbia muelleri Boiss. ve a3 ay sit is tHuphorbia peplus L. P a a vie x Euphorbia petala Ewart et Kerr. ‘ Bai aes x b3 a Euphorbia schizolepis F. Muell. ex Boiss. bd as aie sig x Huphorbia schultzii Benth. a se i Ne ee x x Huphorbia stevenii F.M. Bail. he ae Ne Bt x x Euphorbia tannensis Spreng. he Euphorbia vachelii Hook. et Arn. 8s ee ee Sie Euphorbia wheelert F.M. Bail. .. at aie en x Euphorbia sp. ae ae ae ag x sig sie ae Hxcaecaria agallocha rae By ae Om Ss ee A x x Excaecaria parvifolia J.Muell. .. Ae Be ss of: x Glochidion ferdinandi (J. Muell.) F.M. Bail. var. fer- dinandi Glochidion ferdinandi (J. Muell.) F. M. Bail. var. _ supra: axillaris (Benth.) F. M. Bail. Hemicyclia lasiogyna F. Muell. Hemicyclia sepiaria Wight et Arn. ek a of ae *Jatropha gossypifolia L. .. ae ie ae a x Macaranga involucrata (Roxb.) Baill. Macaranga tanarius (L.) J. Muell. Mallotus nesophilus F. Muell. ex J. Muell. x SESS SK SSE SEES xX X x XO DM NOC OMEN ON, De a OS XXKXKXKXKXXKXK PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 245 V.R.D. D. & G. *Micrococca mercurialis (Li.) Benth. : Petalostigma banksiz Britten et S. Moore Petalostigma haplocladum Pax et K. Hoffm. Petalostigma quadriloculare F. Muell. Benth. var. glabrescens Petalostigma quadriloculare F. Muell. var. nigrum Ewart et Davies ; Petalostigma quadriloculare ‘F. Muell. var. “quadriloculare Petalostigma quadriloculare F. Muell. var. sericeum J. Muell. Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus adam aj. Muell. ; baccatus F. Muell. ex Benth. carpentariae J. Muell. ditassoides J. Muell. .. Phyllanthus fuernrohru F. Muell. Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Domin Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus Phyllanthus huntit Ewart et Davies lacunarius F. Muell. on maderaspatanus L. var. angustifolius Benth. maderaspatanus L. var. maderaspatanus .. aff. maderaspatanus Li. ochrophyllus Benth. .. ae = ramosissimus (F.Muell.) J. Muell. rhytidospermus F. Muell. ex J. Muell. : simplex Retz. var. ae eee ee Muell. simplex “Retz. var. simples - aff. sumplex Retz. thesioides Benth. trachygyne Benth. . trachyspermus F. Muell. urinaria L. : xerocarpus O. Schwarz Poranthera coerulea O. Schwarz Poranthera ee eh Ricimocarpos sp. *Ricinus communis Tt, Sebastiania chamelaea ( L.) J. Muell. Securinega virosa (Roxb. ex Willd.) Pax et Hoffm. .. ANACARDIACEAE Blepharocarya depauperata Specht Blepharocarya involucrigera EF. Muell. Buchanania Buchanania Buchanania Semecarpus AQUIFOLIACEAE angustifolia Roxb. arborescens (Bl.) Bl. obovata Engl... australiensis Eng]. Ilex arnhemensis (F. Muell.) Loes. CELASTRACEAE Denhamia obscura (A. Rich.) Meissn. Elaeodendron melanocarpum F. Muell. Lophopetalum arnhemicum N. Byrnes Maytenus cunninghamui (Hook.) Loes. STACKHOUSIACEAE Macgregoria racemigera F. Muell. Stackhousia Stackhousia Stackhousia Stackhousia SAPINDACEAE Allophylus serratus (Roxb.) Kurz. 3 Atalaya hemiglauca (F. Muell.) F. Muell. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutrH WaAtLgEs. VoL. 96, intermedia F. M. Bail. megaloptera F. Muell. muricata Lindl. viminea Sm. ex Benth. KXXEX XS: Seo Ze x >. x X SG x xX x KES: Na Part 4 246 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.&G. Atalaya salicifolia Bl. Atalaya varuifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. Cardiospermum halicacabum L. .. Cupaniopsis anacardioides (A. Rich.) Diplopeltis stuart F. Muell. Distichostemon filamentosus S. Moore Radlk. Distichostemon hispidulus (Endl.) Baill. © .. .. .. x x Dodonaea attenuata A. Cunn. Dodonaea lanceolata F. Muell. Dodonaea microzyga F. Muell. Dodonaea oxyptera F. Muell. Dodonaea peduncularis Lindl. var. Davies Dodonaea petiolaris F. Muell. Dodonaea physocarpa F. Muell. Dodonaea platyptera F. Muell. Dodonaea polyzyga F. Muell. 5 ON ON OX x x coriacea Ewart et Dodonaea viscosa Jacq. var. spatulata (Sm.) Benth. .. x Ganophyllum falcatum Bl. Harpullia leichhardti F. Muell. ex Benth. Heterodendrum floribundum KE. Pritz. Heterodendrum oleifolium Desf. RHAMNACEAE Alphitonia excelsa (Fenzl.) Benth. Alphitonia incana (Roxb.) Teijsm. et Binn. ex Kurz. Alphitonia aff. moluccana Tiejsm. et Binn. Alphitonia petret Braid. et White Colubrina asiatica (L.) Brongn. Spyridium spathulatum (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth... x Ventilago viminalis Hook. Ziziphus mauritiana Lam. Ziziphus oenoplia Mill. Be Ziziphus quadrilocularis F. Muell. VITACEAE Ampelocissus acetosa (F. Muell.) Planch. he bys 4; if x Ampelocissus sp. Cayratia trifolia (L..) ‘Domin Cissus reniformis Domin Cissus repens Lam. Leea brunoniana C. B. Clarke ELAEOCARPACEAE Elaeocarpus arnhemicus F. Muell.. . TILIACEAE Corchorus acutangulus Lam. Corchorus capsularis L. Corchorus echinatus Benth. Corchorus eldert F. Muell. Corchorus fascicularis Lam. Corchorus macropetalus Domin Corchorus olitorius L. ate Corchorus pascuorum Domin Corchorus pumilio R.Br. ex Benth. Corchorus rostrisepalus Domin Corchorus sericeus Ewart et Davies Corchorus sidioides F. Muell. Corchorus tridens L. Corchorus vermicularis F. Muell. Grewia breviflora Benth. .. Grewia latifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. Grewia multiflora Juss. é Grewia orbifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. Grewia orientalis Benth. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY XXX: 5c ON OS ON S or New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 MONON ON NS 5. ON OS 6 XXXXXKXK SM OX gee DOS OS OOO 5 OS OX x x! KS SF x G. M. CHIPPENDALE 247 C.A. B.T. V.B.D. D. &G. Grewia retusifolia Kurz. x x Grewia scabrella Benth. . 4 be. Grewia santhopetala F. Muell. ex Benth x x Triumfetta appendiculata F. Muell. ae x“ Triumfetta denticulata R.Br. ex Benth. .. = 2 Triumfetta glaucescens R.Br. ex Benth. ae wt x SG x Triumfetta micracantha F. Muell. .. oe be 5 x x x a Triumfetta plumigera F. Muell. x x x Triumfetta rhomboidea Jacq. Be te Ki we ne x Triumfetta winneckeana F. Muell.. ae = ae < MALVACEAE Abelmoschus ficulneus (L.) Wight et Arn. oe aie x x x Abelmoschus moschatus Medic. ssp. tuberosus (Span. ) Borss. .. ee Be a oe og x Abutilon andrewsianum W. V. Fitze. oy: Se ake a es >< x Abutilon crispum G. Don .. fe ae x x Abutilon cryptopetalum (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex - Benth. x ie ee Abutilon cunninghami Benth. .. : He: a ve > Abutilon frasert (Hook.) Hook. ex Walt. ee sé Abutilon indicum (L.) Sweet var. australiense Hockr. ex J. Britt. 4 £3 ue a of as ae a. an x Abutilon aff. indicum (L.) Sweet ats >< a3 4 Abutilon leucopetalum (KF. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. x x x Abutilon macrum F. Muell. : es x a Abutilon malvifolium (Benth.) J. M. Black x sy Abutilon otocarpum F. Muell. as ae a x x x x Alyogyne pinonianus (Gaud.) Fryxell var. pinonianus x Br iy be Camptostemon schultzii Mast. ah fs 54 ae a Be x Gossypium australe F. Muell. 1 are aa ae > x x >< Gossypium bickiti Prokh. .. i bk at a. x x x Gossypium cunninghami Todaro .. ee ss ae ae < *Gossypium hirsutum L. var. Re (Schum. ) J. B. Hutch. .. at a Wee Ae x Gossypium sturtianum 5. TEL. ‘Willis var. sturtianum off x Bis - Hibiscus brachychlaenus F. Muell. a a ale x x x x Hibiscus brachysiphonius F. Muell. x i Hibiscus caesius Garcke .. of 348 as = x x x Hibiscus crassicalyx J. M. Black . ae - a x es ae ss Hibiscus divaricatus Grah. My ie 5% Les ae 3 7 x Hibiscus drummondit Turcz. me & ae ts x Hibiscus farraget F. Muell. aes te i 58 x ae oa ble Hibiscus heterophyllus Vent. a oie ae ate ate ad x Hibiscus krichauffianus F. Muell. var. chippendaler Fryxell .. oa xx x Hibiscus krichauffianus F. Muell. ‘var. brichaufianus 50 x ies ot Hibiscus leptocladus Benth. : : ae x x Hibiscus menzelii F. D. Wilson and N. Byres a ot a x Hibiscus meraukensis Hochr. 5S . a x x x x Hibiscus panduriformis Burm. f. .. x x Hibiscus pentaphyllus F. Muell. x x *Hibiscus sabdariffa L. : x x Hibiscus setulosus F. Muell. ae mA aes ic be a ae x Hibiscus sturtit Hook. var. campylochlamys Benth. .. aA x< x x Hibiscus sturtii Hook. var. grandiflorus Benth. x x b>. a Hibiscus sturtti Hook. var. muellert Benth. x see x Hibiscus sturtii Hook. var. platychlamys Benth. X x x Hibiscus sturtit Hook. var. sturtiz if ee x x Hibiscus sturtii Hook. var. truncatus Fryxell .. xe x as a nee Hibiscus symonii F. D. Wilson and N. Byrnes Ne st ae sh x Hibiscus tiliaceus L. ssp. tiliaceus Sis ae 36 ot x ae x Hibiscus trionum L. ae a oa Fa a Ss x x Hibiscus zonatus F. Muell... we ar aa aie oe oe oe x Lavatera plebeia Sims RY on oe we Se 7 ae Sa *Malachra fasciata Jacq. .. ast ft St 8 ne ac ae x *Malva parviflora L. i et oa ae ar x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF New SourH WateEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 248 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. & G. Malvastrum americanum (L.) Torr. sie dies Be x x x Plagianthus glomeraius Fie Benth. .. : we x Be ih Me *Sida acuta Burm. f. ay + AM ee x x Sida ammophila F. Muell. ex J. H. Willis x rsh Sida calyxhymenia J.Gay ex DC. x x x Sida cardiophylla F. Muell. x x ap Sida cleisocalyx F. Muell. x x x *Sida cordifolia L. .. a a ap far si x Sida corrugata Lindl. var. “angustifolia Benth. Sida corrugata Lindl. var. corrugata Sida cryphiopetala F. Muell. Sida cunninghamu White .. Sida fibulifera Lindl. Sida aff. fibulifera Lindl. Sida filiformis A.Cunn. .. Bt ae Sida goniocarpa (F. Muell. ex Benth. Domin .. Sida intricata F. Muell. a's : Sida lepida F. Muell. otis ae Sida macropoda F. Muell. ex Benth. ae 5 x Sida petrophila F.Muell. .. eS Me bs a": ae x* x Sida platycalyx F. Muell. ex Benth. x Sida rhombifolia L. var. incana Benth. a ue M, e Sida rhombifolia L. var. rhombifolia ot ue ae bo * oe x Sida rohlenae Domin Bs ze! os AY, f x x i ae Sida spinosa L. re ah Se nts x x x Sida subspicata F. Muell. ex Benth. ‘y ae A ae fe x Sida trichopoda F.Muell. .. ate 5 x x Sida virgata Hook. var. phacotricha (F. Muell. ) Benth... x ae a Sida virgata Hook. var. eae oe At a a5 x in 4 Sida sp. : an Xx Thespesia lampas (Cav.) Dalz. ex Dells ‘et Gibbs var. thespidioides (R.Br. ex Benth.) Fryxell Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol. ex Corr. Urena lobata L. : a x A Urena spencert (Ewart) Fryxell .. XX XK XX xX Bee Grd x OKO XX X > ON ON 2S OSS x x xX a ae xX xX XK X BOMBACACEAE Bombax ceiba L. var. leiocarpum Robyns x STERCULIACEAE Brachychiton diversifolium R.Br. .. ae ae a My x x x Brachychiton gregorit F.Muell. .. ae = pee x hs oh ote Brachychiton paradoxum Schott. .. ee ae By! ff o< Xx Xx Brachychiton tuberculata W.V.Fitzg. .. AK a *, Hs Xx ‘Commersonia crispa Turcz. oe : Commersonia melanopetala F. Muell. ae “4 a zt bg Dicarpidium monoicum F. Muell. os Bi se af Lt ne x x Xx Gilesia biniflora F. Muell. x Hannafordia bissellia F. Muell. hs ae ae x aN Be mE Helicteres cana (Schott.) Benth. ae ae oi 4 Xx Helicteres dentata F. Muell. ex Benth. var. dentata ae a he x Helicteres dentata F.Muell. ex Benth. var. flagellaris Benth. .. i Pe 2 x Helicteres dentata F. Muell. ex Benth. var. procumbens Benth. .. si Se ne oF MM as st uf 4 x Helicteres isora L. .. Sy ae Sh oie 23 ay ae Xx Keraudrenia integrifolia Steud. pas we aN "3 x x x Keraudrenia nephrosperma (F.Muell.) F.Muell. ex J. M. Black ae me ot A Pak x ae x 5 Melhania oblongifolia F. Muell. = 3 af ag < x Xx Xx Melhania ovata (Cav.) Spreng. .. ae oh MN jie x oh ya Melochia corchorifolia L. ns ste He an oy ae x 4 Melochia pyramidata L. .. oe os oe St ei Ae x x *Pentapetes phoenicea L. ae ae Be Sis is x Rulingia kempeana (F. Muell. ) F. Muell. ex J.M. Black x Ry: fe Rulingia loxophylla F. Muell. x He ae x 4 5 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETyY oF NEw SoutH WatsEs, Vow. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE Rulingia magniflora F. Muell. Sterculia quadrifida R.Br. Waltheria indica L. Waltheria virgata Ewart et ‘Cookson DILLENIACEAE Dillenia alata (R.Br. ex DC.) Martelli .. Hibbertia browniz Benth. Lie Hibbertia cistifolia R.Br. Hibbertia dealbata Benth. Hibbertia glaberrima F. Muell. Hibbertia holizec F. Muell. Hibbertia lepidota R.Br. . Hibbertia muellert Benth. Hibbertia oblongata R.Br. var. brevifolia Benth. Hibbertia oblongata R.Br. var. oblongata Hibbertia scabra R.Br. ex Benth. Hibbertia tomentosa R.Br. .. as Pachynema complanatum R.Br. Pachynema dilatatum Benth. Pachynema junceum Benth. : Pachynema sphenandrum F. Muell. “et Tate GUTTIFERAE Calophyllum australianum F. Muell. Calophyllum inophyllum L. Calophyllum lonchophyllum_O. Schwarz Calophyllum ramiflorum O. Schwarz Hypericum gramineum Forst. f. Hypericum japonicum Thunb. ELATINACEAE Bergia ammannioides Roth. a aN Bergia pedicellaris F. Muell. ex Benth. Bergia perennis (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. Bergia pusilla Benth. Bergia trimera Fisch. et Mey. Elatine gratioloides A. Cunn. FRANKENIACEAE Frankenia connata Sprague Frankenia cordata J. M. Black Frankenia gracilis Summerh. Frankenia muscosa J. M. Black Frankenia planifolia Sprague et Summerh. Frankenia serpyllifolia Lindl. Frankenia speciosa Summerh. Frankenia stuartii Summerh. CocHLOSPERMACEAE Cochlospermum frasert Planch. Cochlospermum gillivrayt Benth. .. Cochlospermum gregorti F. Muell. .. VIOLACEAE Hybanthus enneaspermus (L.) F. Muell. var. banksianus Domin Hybanthus enneaspermus (ie ) ie Muell. var. enneaspermus PASSIFLORACEAE Adenia australis (R.Br. ex DC.) Engl. *Passifiora foetida L. a: ei: *Passiflora suberosa L. CACTACEAE *Opuntia stricta Haw. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw Soutru WaAtes. Vou. 96, an A DK OL OK OK OK OK OK OK SSSR x Part 4 250 NORTHERN THRRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. & G. THYMELAEACEAE Phaleria blumei Benth. var. latifolia Benth. .. ae a Sh ae x Pimelea ammocharis F. Muell. aa : at a x x x Pimelea microcephala R.Br. oe Ee te site x Bi He Se Pimelea punicea R.Br. the a ae ae us sue x SK x Pimelea trichostachya Lindl. oe af er ae x LYTHRACEAE Ammannia Ammannia Ammannia Ammannia Ammannia Ammannia auriculata Willd. crintpes F. Muell. andica Lam. .. multiflora Roxb. occultiflora Koehne var. leichhardtii ‘Koehne triflora R.Br. ex Benth. SEE OX G er Lawsonia alba Lam. : ae “is 2 ts 5¥3 ne Lythrum arnhemicum F. Muell. .. a su No ba anh x Pemphis acidula FYorst. et f. : ons es oe i. ae fe Rotala diandra (F. Muell.) Koehne os on He x ahh 4 Rotala mexicana Cham. et Schlecht. ae wee ab sive x ox Rotala roxburghiana cere oe ae ae cee is x x Rotala verticillaris L. 2 ae a ae aie x Rotala sp. XXXKXKXXKXKXXKXKX: xs SONNERATIACEAE Sonneratia caseolaris (L.) Engl. .. oo i me m 3 +4 x BARRINGTONIACEAE Barringtonia acutangula (L.) Gaertn. ssp. acutangula er Be x Planchonia careya (F.Muell.) R. Knuth.. = ‘ xX RHIZOPHORACEAE Bruguiera gymnorrhiza Lam. Bruguiera parviflora (Roxb.) Wight et Arn. Bruguiera rheediw Bl. Bruguiera sexangula (Lour. ) Poir. ae ae oe gt Ss Carallia brachiata (Lour.) Merr. .. pe te We ee a x Ceriops tagal (Perr.) C. B. Robinson er St a ag at x Rhizophora mucronata Lam. 2 Rhizophora stylosa Griff. XxxXXKXXKXKXX CoMBRETACEAE LIumnitzera littorea (Sack) Voigt Lumnitzera racemosa Willd. or a an Sf 5H ss Macropteranthes kekwickit F. Muell. ae 24 cu 0 Xx x x X Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia aridicola Domin arostrata Kwart et Davies bursarina F.Muell. .. canescens (DC.) Radlk. carpentariae White erythrocarpa F. Muell. Terminalia ferdinandiana Exell Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia Terminalia MYRTACEAE grandiflora Benth. latipes Benth. .. a melanocarpa F. Muell. platyphylla F.Muell. .. platyptera F. Muell. pterocarya EF. Muell. sericocarpa EF. Muell. volucris R.Br. ex Benth. Acmena smithii (Poir.) Merr. et Perry .. Baeckea intratropica (F.Muell.) Niedenzu Baeckea polystemona F. Muell. Baeckea virgata Andr. XX: x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocieTY or New SoutH Watss, Vou. 96, Part 4 MOXSKKS KR KG XK OK OK KOK XK 5 oN eX G. M. CHIPPENDALE 251 C.A. IsjfbG (WilbtID5 ID. ae (Gi Callistemon aff. viminalis ay ex Gaertn.) G. Don ex Loud. Calytriz achaeta F. Muell. Calytriz arborescens ¥. Muell. Calytriz brachychaeta F. Muell. Calytriz laricina R.Br. ex Benth. Calytriz longiflora F. Muell. Calytrix microphylla A. Cunn. Cleistocalyz operculata (Roxb.) Merr. et Perry Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus abbreviata Blakely et Jacobs alba Reinw. ex Bl. .. apodophylla Blakely et Jacobs argullacea W. V. Fitzg. aspera EF’. Muell. bigalerita F. Muell. bleeser? Blakely brachyandra F. Muell. brevifolia F. Muell. camaldulensis Dehnh. j clavigera A. Cunn. ex Schau. cliftoniana W. V. Fitzg. confertiflora KF. Muell. cyanoclada Blakely dichromophloia F. Muell. FHucalyptus ferruginea Schau. Hucalyptus foelscheana F. Muell. Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus gamophylla F. Muell. gongylocarpa Blakely grandifolia R.Br. ex Benth.. herbertiana Maid. ‘ intertexta R.T. Bak. .. Eucalyptus jacobsiana Blakely Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Eucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus Hucalyptus jensenit Maid. .. latifolia F. Muell. mannensis Boomsma .. microtheca EF. Muell. minmata A. Cunn. ex Schau. morrisit R. T. Bak. nesophila Blakely normantonensis Maid. et Cambage ae odontocarpa F. Muell. oligantha Schau. oxymitra Blakely pachyphylla F. Muell. papuana F. Muell. patellaris F. Muell. phoenicea F. Muell. polycarpa F. Muell. porrecta S. T. Blake pruimosa Schau. ptychocarpa F. Muell. sessilis (Maid.) Blakely setosa Schau. stg tectifica F. Muell. terminalis F. Muell. tetrodonta F. Muell. thozetiana F. Muell. oo aff. transcontinentalis Maid. . . trivalvis Blakely umbrawarrensis Maid. websterana Maid. Hugenia armstrong Benth. Hugenia bleesert O. Schwarz Hugenia eucalyptoides F. Muell. Hugenia suborbicularis Benth. Fenzlia retusa Endl. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety or New SourH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 ~ ox 5 XxX Ke 0 ON Mo 5 oN eG eee ate ee IO) ON rss OGRE Se BOGGS Oe 6 ON OK ING x X XxXXXXXX: 5 OS ON OS OS OG ON OK SG KORO K KOK No MN ORS << OS 6 MOOS OK KK 5 ON 5 oA os PSO 252 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Homalocalyx ericaeus F. Muell. Leptospermum abnorme F. Muell. ex Benth. Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca Melaleuca acacioides F. Muell. alsophila A. Cunn. ex Benth. argentea W. V. Fitzg. bracteata F. Muell. cajuputt Powell. . dealbata 8. T. Blake dissitiflora F. Muell. glomerata F. Muell. lasiandra F. Muell. leucadendron (L.) L. linariifolia Sm. linophylla F. Muell. magnifica Specht minutifolia F. Muell. nervosa (Lindl.) Cheel symphyocarpa F. Muell. viridiflora Sol. ex Gaertn. Je SC O8 OS 5 SOK x xX X OSCR OG Metrosideros eucalyptoides (F. ae F. Muell. a oe ahs x Micromyrtus flaviflora (F. Muell. ) F. Muell. ex J. M. Black .. : ats x Osbornia octodonta 190 Muell. died as “4 aus Thryptomene maisonneurvtt F. Muell. ee ine ic x Thryptomene parviflora (F. Muell.) Domin Sh ai x ae aH Tristania grandiflora Cheel ie ai te oe bis x x Tristania lactiflua F. Muell. : Tristania suaveolens Sm. var. glabrescens 1, M. Bail. Ss <3: ri Tristania suaveolens Sm. var. suaveolens ae ae abe ae x Verticordia cunninghami Schau. . . is we i 5 Be x Verticordia sp. ae oa fel it sis “ Xanthostemon par adoxus F. Muell. as a: or ae se x XS 6 XE OK KOK OK SOK MELASTOMATACEAE Melastoma denticulatum Labill. Memecylon pauciflorum Bl. a Be ae Ss 2h ne Osbeckia australiana Naud. ee, hs Pi an ay iy x x XX ONAGRACEAE Ludwigia adscendens (L.) Hara .. ae ae ato R uss # x Ludwigia hyssopifolia (G. Don) Exell .. a “ee a ys x Ludwigia octovalvis (Jacq.) Raven ssp. octovalvis ; ae *< x x Ludwigia octovalvis (Jacq.) Raven ssp. sessiliflora (Mich. ) Raven ae Ludwigia perennis ih, x X x! x HALORAGACEAE Haloragis acanthocarpa Brongn. .. eis Ss ae 3% os < x Haloragis glabrescens C.'T. White Ag Sue sts ” x Haloragis gossei ¥. Muell. ae a Haloragis heterophylla Brongn. var. glaucifolia Schindler .. aD x Haloragis heterophylla Brongn. var. Hes ce Haloragis odontocarpa F. Muell. Loudonia roet (Endl.) Schldl. Myriophyllum diococcum F. Muell. Myriophyllum verrucosum Lindl. .. MRA OX 6 x 28 OS 5 ARALIACEAE Mackinlaya macrosciadea (F.Muell.) F. Muell. .. nt if dig a x Schefflera actinophylla (Endl.) Harms .. oe: a a i ie x UMBELLIFERAE Actinotus schwarzii F. Muell. a: tek ae x tApium leptophyllum (DC.) F. Muell. : : x Daucus glochidiatus (Labill.) Fisch., Mey. Gi Acre: Tae Sg PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New Soura WaAteEs, Vou. 96, Part G. M. CHIPPENDALE Hydrocotyle trachycarpa FE. Muell. Platysace arnhemica Specht Trachymene Trachymene Trachymene Trachymene Trachymene Trachymene Trachymene didiscoides (F. Muell. ) ic L. Burtt dusenit (Domin) B. L. Burtt A gilleniae (Tate ex Domin) B. L. Burtt glaucifolia (F. Muell.) Benth. microcephala (Vent.) B. L. Burtt setosa (O. Schwarz) B. L. Burtt villosa (F. Muell.) Benth. EPACRIDACEAE Leucopogon sp. MyRsINACEAE Aegiceras corniculatum (L.) Blanco PRIMULACEAE tAnagallis foemina Mill. *Anagallis pumila Swartz Samolus valerandi L. PLUMBAGINACEAE Aegialitis annulata R.Br. Plumbago zeylanica lL. SAPOTACEAE Mimusops elengi L. Planchonella arnhemica (F. Muell. ex Benth. ) van in Royen Planchonella crocodiliensis van Royen : Planchonella laurifolia (Richard) Pierre Planchonella sericea (Ait.) Baehni EBENACEAE Diospyros calycantha O. Schwarz Diospyros ferrea (Willd.) Bakh. var Bakh. .. we ee Diospyros maritima BI. es Diespyros montana Roxb. var. timorensis Bakh. Diospyros sp. . humilis (R.Br.) OLEACEAE Jasminum Jasminum Jasminum Jasminum Jasminum Jasminum Jasminum aemulum R.Br. calcarium F. Muell. didymum Forst. f. lineare R.Br. molle R.Br. 2 simplicifolium Forst. f. volubile Jacq. LOGANIACEAE Fagraea racemosa Jack Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme Mitrasacme alsinoides R.Br. ; ae arnhemica Specht var. arnhemica .. arnhemica Specht var. Ns waar connata R.Br. elata R.Br. easerta K. Muell. gentianea F. Muell. indica Wight laevis Benth. laricifolia R.Br. longifiora F. Muell. ex "Benth. lutea F. Muell. multicaulis R.Br. nummularia S. Moore polymorpha R.Br. oso KKK OE KK ae Sia Oe xX X XXX XX xXx: eX OS KX XOX ea sae Xx PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF New SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 254 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. & G. Mitrasacme prolifera R.Br. Mitrasacme stellata R.Br. var. latifolia Benth... Mitrasacme tenuiflora Benth. : ee bs by a a Mitrasacme volubilis O. Schwarz as A d. et ay ays x Strychnos lucida R.Br. aes she a Eve ate aH x x xX X X x GENTIANACEAE Centaurium spicatum (L.) Fritsch a3 bh EAs x bad x x Canscora diffusa R.Br. ee ae es a a be a x MENYANTHACEAE Nymphoides crenatum (F. Muell.) Kuntze is at 53 x Nymphoides geminatum (R.Br.) Kuntze ae 50 x sce Nymphoides furculaefolia Specht .. site a Nymphoides indica (L.) Kuntze xs Nymphoides minimum (F. Muell.) Kuntze 36 OS SK OK OK APOCYNACEAE Alstonia actinophylla (A. Cunn.) K.Schum. .. a oe y a Alstonia ophiowyloides F.Muell. .. a ats BG aE he x Alyxia spicata R.Br. ae a a sh ane a si Carissa lanceolata R.Br. .. 53 As ™ x x x Ervatamia orientalis (R.Br.) Domin Ervatamia pubescens (R.Br.) Domin wn ne ae ay af Parsonsia velutina R.Br. .. ie SF: “e ee x Wrightia pubescens R.Br. ssp. pubescens sas ae se ee ce Wrightia saligna (R.Br.) F. Muell. ex Benth. .. 3 ae se x x XK XK XK K XK XK XK ASCLEPIADACEAE *Calotropis procera (Willd.) R.Br. ex Ait. on LA Ae “3 a Cynanchum carnosum (R.Br.) Domin .. 6 a a 31 x Cynanchum floribundum R.Br... ae sae als x de ORES OK ORS 6 x ae Saar PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH WaAteEs. Vou. 96, Part 4 258 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. &G. SCROPHULARIACEAE Adenosma muellert Benth. Bacopa floribunda (R.Br.) Wettst.. Buchnera filicaulis O. Schwarz ac iB ae a5 Buchnera linearis R.Br... e be Hs we x< Buchnera tenella R.Br. Buchnera tetragona R.Br. Buchnera urticifolia R.Br. aA 4 Centranthera cochinchinensis (Lour.) Merr. A #3 Elacholoma hornit F. Muell. et Tate ae ae Ss x Hemiarrhena plantaginea Benth. .. : Tlysanthes clausa (¥. Muell.) With. Ilysanthes mitrasacmoides O. Schwarz an ah Sto Iimosella australis R.Br. .. oe a ae fe x Limnophila chinensis (Osbeck) Merr. at De e: . Ste Limnophila fragrans (Forst.f.) Seem. .. we te oie i x Lindernia alsinoides R.Br. Me Lindernia crustacea (L.) F. Muell. Lindernia grossidentata O. Schwarz Are aa ae ae om Lindernia lobelioides (F. gece F. Muell. ne ae x ae x Lindernia pubescens (Benth.) F. Muell. 28 Tindernia scapigera R.Br. .. Lindernia subulata R.Br. var. glanduligera Specht A oe ea Lindernia subulata R.Br. var. subulaia .. a es x Microcarpaea muscosa R.Br. Mimulus gracilis R.Br... Mimulus linearis (R.Br.) Wettst. Morgania floribunda Benth. : Morgania glabra R.Br. Morgania gracilis R.Br. Morgania parviflora Benth. Morgania pubescens R.Br... Peplidium humifusum Delile a Peplidium maritimum (L.f.) Wettst. Peplidium muellert Benth. Scoparia dulcis L. Stemodia coerulea Benth. Stemodia debilis Benth. ‘ is ke 5a Be He Stemodia grossa Benth. .. a8 an Bi is a is x Stemodia micrantha O. Schwarz Ae We a ae a oF Stemodia viscosa Roxb. .. 3 ae as ee: x ee x Stemodia viscosa Roxb. var. x Striga curviflora (R.Br.) Benth. : a bh ate oe a Striga multifiora Benth. .. ae oy Ae oe x ie x M35 2K 5 OX xxXXXXXXX 5 OE Dane Sea eos OX eX Oe SOE x x x SSS OS ee OOO OOO OGIO x 5 Mo NM G XX 5 BIGNONIACEAE Dolichandrone filiformis (DC.) Seem. .. a ai i a x x Dolichandrone heterophylla F. Muell. Ae ae i x x< Pandorea doratozylon (J. M. Black) J. M. Black a Xx PEDALIACEAE Josephinia eugeniae F. Muell. ‘e oe ae x he x are *Sesamum indicum L. ne ae we a ae ee 6 ae x MARTYNIACEAE *Martynia annua L... x LENTIBULARIACEAE Utricularia albiflora R.Br.. Utricularia bifida L. ex D. Oliver Utricularia biloba R.Br. Utricularia caerulea L. é Utricularia capilliflora F. Muell. Utricularia ceratophylloides O. Schwarz x oes Ms ae Pie Utricularia chrysantha R.Br. an =o se fea or af ~< Utricularia dunstanii Lioyd x XX XK XK XK XK XK PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SootETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 259 C.A. Bee Utricularia exoleta R.Br. .. ar ah Ss ats ee i ye Utricularia flava R.Br. Utricularia flexuosa Vahl a Utricularia fulva F. Muell. Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia Utricularia ACANTHACEAE hamilton Lloyd holtzec F. Muell. : , infleca Forsk. var. stellaris (L. kamienski F. Muell. kimberleyensis C. A. Gardn. lasiocaulis F. Muell. leptoplectra F. Muell. leptorhyncha O. Schwarz limosa R.Br. .. minutissima Vahl pachyceras O. Schwarz scandens Benj. singerana F. Muell. tubulata F. Muell. uliginosa Vahl. . f.) P. Taylor Acanthus tlicifolius L. *Andrographis paniculata (Burm.) “Wall. ex Nees *Barleria prionitis L. is ae ie F Dicliptera glabra Dene. .. Dipteracanthus corynothecus ( F. Muell. ex Benth.) Brem. var. corynothecus : Dipteracanthus cor ynothecus (F. Muell. ex Benth. Brem. var. grandiflorus Brem. Bio : Ac Dipteracanthus sessiliflorus Brem. EHbermaiera Hygrophila glauca Nees salicifolia Nees Hypoestes floribunda R.Br. var. angustifolia Benth. Hypoestes floribunda R.Br. var. floribunda : Hypoestes floribunda R.Br. var. paniculata Benth. Nelsonia campestris R.Br. oe is Rostellularia pogonanthera F. Muell. : Sarojusticia kempeana (F. Muell.) Brem. Thunbergia MYoProRACEAE Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila arnhemica F. Muell. alternifolia R.Br. : battii F.Muell. var. battis .. battia F. Muell. var. major J. M. Black bignoniifiora F. Muell. calycina 8. Moore castelli arminit H. Pritz. christophert F. Muell. cordatisepalea L. Smith dalyana F. Muell. duttont F. Muell. eldert F. Muell. exotrachys Kraenzl. EHremophila freelingii F. Muell. Hremophila Hremophila Hremophila Eremophila Hremophila Hremophila EHremophila EHremophila Hremophila EHremophila gibsoniit F. Muell. é gilestt F. Muell. var. argentea Ewart : gilestti F. Muell. filiforme Ewart et Davies gilesii F. Muell. var. gilesi .. : L glabra (R.Br.) Ostenf. goodwintt F. Muell. latrobet F. Muell. leonhardiana EK. Pritz. longifolia (R.Br.) F. Muell. macdonnellii EF. Muell. var. glabriuscula J. M. Black Hremophila PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or NEw SoutH Wares, Vow. 96, Part 4 PeedanneliD F. Muell. ee, Fananlorornglhs 5 SOS 5 SOK OS OK OS OS OS OS OS OS OS CS OS OS OS OS ON OK OS ON ON xX X Bie ro Grose 0 x X xxKXKXKKKXKXKXKKKKKKXKXKXKX XXXxXXXKX: x 6 x 260 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D.& G. Eremophila macdonnellii F. Muell. var. macrocarpa Ewart et Davies ne og als oe: ee EHremophila maculata (Ker-Gawl.) F. Muell. Eremophila obovata L. Smith var. obovata Eremophila paisleyi F. Muell. Eremophila rotundifolia F. Muell. ae Eremophila serrulata (A. Cunn. ex A. DC.) Druce Eremophila strehlowiit HB. Pritz. .. it oH Eremophila strongylophylla F. Muell. Eremophila sturtu R.Br. .. Eremophila willsiia F. Muell. var. integrifolia Ewart Eremophila willsit F. Muell. var. willsi Myoporum montanum R.Br. SK oN 2S DE ORK OK OOK OK ON KX PLANTAGINACEAE Plantago varia R.Br. sens. lat. MZ A RUBIACEAE Borreria australiana Specht ‘ ae hs x x Borreria brachystema (R.Br. ex Benth.) ‘Valet... Ae x x Borreria breviflora (F. Muell. ex Benth.) Specht ab ce x Borreria breviflora (F. Muell. ex Benth.) Specht var. si ch Borreria carpentariae Specht as “igs £; Borreria euserta (Benth.) K. Schum. 5 ae Borreria geeingwa Specht var. dilatata (Benth.) “Specht Borreria geeingwa Specht var. gaa em ) mp Borreria gilliesae Specht : a oe Borreria hillit Chippendale ea x x ats be Borreria tnaperta (F. Muell.) K. Schum.. : 5 ae Shs < Borreria involucrata (O. Schwarz) Chippendale 2 Borreria leptoloba (Benth.) Specht 5 iF ok Ae a: a Borreria pogostoma (Benth.) K.Schum... ae ee of ao x Borreria suffruticosa Spey fe 2 Si 2 a 7 Borreria sp. ae age oe ae x x Canthium attenuatum R.Br. ex Benth. Canthium latifolium F. Muell. ex Benth. Canthium lineare E. Pritz. oe an Bs sft se: be: Canthium aff. lucidum Hook. et Arn. “2 tt Le Me o): ae x Canthium schultzii (O. Schwarz) Chippendale .. i te a i x Canthium sp. nie as = x ‘ve a Coelospermum reticulatum (F. Muell. ) Benth. .. ee ne sad x x Dentella asperata Airy-Shaw ae ie ah oe x ie it bs Dentella browniana Domin oe : ms Ee BY bs uff x Dentella dioeca Airy-Shaw te si = x Dentella pulvinata Airy-Shaw var. “repanda Airy- Shaw x in vi Dentella repens (L.) Forst. et f. 2 sh fy x x Gardenia edulis F.Muell. .. : mE ae ae ie os SE x Gardenia fucata R.Br. ex Benth. x Gardenia megasperma F.Muell. var. arborea Ewart et Cookson Bs ina x x Gardenia megasperma “F. Muell. var. megasperma a: fe oe x x Gardenia aff. megasperma F. Muell. ae i He fi Ee Shs x x x x X X XXX KKK KK XK KR OX x X X Gardenia petiolata O. Schwarz ves a6 sity a AY Gardenia pyriformis A.Cunn. ex Benth. ai ta a as x Gardenia resinosa F. Muell. : ae es bs a oe x Gardenia suffruticosa R.Br. ex Benth. .. veh ae ae Ste a x Guettarda speciosa L. fs of Sid son we a Hedyotis mitrasacmoides F. “Muell. oo Je ae ah un < x Hedyotis pterospora F. Muell. aie alg ae be 4 oe 4 Hedyotis scleranthoides F.Muell. .. a8 burt a x ae x Ixora coccinea L. . ae Ixora klanderana F. Muell. Izxora pentamera Benth. Izora timorensis Dene. gy as oe Ae eke Bis ui Ixora tomentosa Roxb. sts a a ae a ah ie x Knouia stricta Gaertn. OKO PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 261 C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. &G. Morinda citrifolia L. in ae Oe Ae 2 ie Bc Nauclea orientalis L. se ae we zie Bn a8 st x Oldenlandia corymbosa L. .. ae to sis # a Oldenlandia galioides (F. Muell.) F. Muell. Sg a x Oldenlandia mollugoides O. Schwarz ae : Oldenlandia tenuissima O. Schwarz Pavetia brownw Brem. var. brownti Pavetta browni Brem. var. glabra Brem. a Be ae of Pavetta granitica F.Muell. ex Brem. .. ae ys or x x Pavetta muellert Brem. . vy fu Pomaz umbellata (Gaertn.) Soland. ex A. ‘Rich. ay x Psychotria nesophila F. Muell. ; : ie Randia cochinchinensis (Lour.) Merr. Randia lamprophylla O. Schwarz Scyphiphora hydrophyllacea Gaertn. f. .. Sa ve she Synaptantha tillaeacea (F. Muell.) Hook. f. a ae x Tarenna dallachiana (F. Muell. ex Benth.) 8S. Moore .. an a 35 Timonius timon (Spreng.) Merr. .. ss a Ba aa ae x XXX XK XX XK X > 3 SS KE Sos CUCURBITACEAE Bryonopsis laciniosa (L.) Naud. .. *Citrullis colocynthus (L.) Schrad. *Citrullis lanatus ae Mansf. Coccinea cordifolia (L.) Cogn. Coldenia procumbens L. Cucumis melo Li. ssp. agrestis (Naud.) Greb. *Cucumis myriocarpus Naud. : my 8 Se nt Luffa aegyptiaca Mill. ae Sy me ke 3 ae te oe x Luffa graveolens Roxb. .. oo Be sf 0 ae x 90 Melothria maderaspatana (L.) Cogn. : Ae x x x x Melothria micrantha (F. Muell.) F _ Muell. ex Cogn. Bs x : Trichosanthes cucumerina L. : De zh i x xe x x ONION xX: CAMPANULACEAE Isotoma petraea F.Muell. .. a) RS ag aS x 4 Pe Lobelia arnhemiaca Wimmer a ye ae fs ae a8 x ate Lobelia dioica R.Br. 3 ae oi = sis ae bs O60 x Lobelia heterophylla Labill.. ‘ ae Re a ae ¥ ote Lobelia stenophylla Benth. a a a ak = a ap x Lobelia quadrangularis R.Br. a oe aa ae % a) XK x Lobelia aff. Migr yokes de Vr. Wahlenbergia sp. Wahlenbergia sp. Wahlenbergia sp. Wahlenbergia sp. .. ae a Be a ae A Wahlenbergia sp. .. Pe 2 sts a ae oh oo x Ss Wahlenbergia sp... a4 au Mi 5 ae iM we No x x XXX X X GOODENIACEAE Calogyne berardiana (Gaud.) F.Muell. .. mite ae x Calogyne heteroptera F. Muell. : Be Be ras a Calogyne hians O. Schwarz Calogyne holizeana Specht is us ae Pe » Calogyne pilosa R.Br. ie as ae oe te of x Calogyne purpurea F. Muell. me oe Ay et oN Calogyne raphanoides O. Schwarz. . a Catosperma goodeniaceum (F'. Muell.) Krause Dampiera candicans F. Muell. Dampiera cinerea Ewart et Davies Goodenia armitiana F.Muell. var. armitiana .. : Goodenia armitiana EF. Muell. var. multicaulis Blakely : Goodenia armstrongiana de Vr. .. ae su ay wis oe x x Goodenia aff. armstrongiana de Vr. ie ae fs ae ae ok SS Goodenia auriculata Benth. 5 oe AS ws 22 = x x Goodenia aff. auriculata Benth. .. an i is ae oe * x Goodenia azurea F. Muell. .. as ne ue a x x S< Be ON Ew OK OK KOK XK KKK: PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutrH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 262 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS Goodenia Goodenia Goodenta Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia basedowtt Krause cirrifera F. Muell. ays aff. coronopifolia R.Br. cycloptera R.Br. .. nie erecta Hwart glabra R.Br. we glauca F. Muell. .. gracilis R.Br. grandiflora Sims heterochila F. Muell. var. ‘foliosa Benth. heterochila F. Muell. var. heterochila .. heterochila F. Muell. var. runcinata Benth. hirsuta F. Muell. hispida R.Br. ; aff. hispida R.Br. horniana Tate .. lamprosperma F. Muell. larapinta Tate .. linifolia W. V. Fitzg. ex ; Krause lunata J. M. Black : microptera KF. Muell. mitchelliana Benth. mueckeana F. Muell. pumilio R.Br. purpurascens R.Br. var. minima F. Muell. ex Benth. Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia sepalosa F. Muell. ex Benth. var. brachypoda purpurascens R. Br. var, “purpurascens ramelii F. Muell. : scaevelina F. Muell. F. Muell. ex Benth. Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia Goodenia sepalosa F. Muell. ex Benth. var, sepalosa Bh strangfordi F. Muell. subintegra F. Muell. ex Tate vilmorinae F. Muell. sp. s Pp: Leschenaultia agrostophylla. F. Muell. Leschenaultia divaricata F. Muell. Leschenaultia filiformis R.Br. Leschenaultia striata F. Muell. Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola aemula F. Muell. .. aff. aemula F. Muell. angulata R.Br. .. collaris F. Muell. .. daleana Blakely .. densevestita Domin depauperata R.Br. Scaevola frutescens (Mill.) Krause Scaevola Scaevola Scaevola ovalifolia R.Br. var. glabra R. Br. ovalifolia R.Br. var. ovalifolia paniculata Ewart et Davies Scaevola parvifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. Scaevola Scaevola revoluta R.Br. spinescens R.Br. Velleia connata F. Muell. Velleta glabrata Carolin Velleia macrocalya% de Vr. BRUNONIACEAE Brunonia australis Sm. STYLIDIACEAE Levenhookia chippendalet Erickson et Willis Stylidium alsinoides R.Br.. Stylidium ceratophorum O. Schwarz C.A. DX XS OK 06K x 6 a XX DS SS Kee xXx xX: x B.T. 4 OX KOE V.R.D. D. & G. o¢ x x O¢ x x oe ac x x x x x x x x x x x x x x oc 6 0 x x 6.0 x x x x x x x x x ono 26 x x o¢ x x x Xx xX O06 x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF New SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 263 C.A. 1eyib | (WV ARID, ID). ay (GC Stylidium cordifolium W. V. Fitzg. Stylidium ericksonae J. H. Willis .. i wt BE Fa! ae ic Stylidium fissilobium F.Muell. .. oa re Sil * e x Stylidium floodi F. Muell. ye me Stylidium floribundum R.Br. Stylidium imaequipetalum J. M. Black Stylidium irriguum W. V. Fitzg. Bee a8 ne ae a Stylidium leptorrhizum F. Muell. des te om on se x Stylidium lobuliflorum F. Muell. .. Be “a as oe & x Stylidium multiscapum O. Schwarz ot ot a at se Stylidium muscicola F. Muell. a We fi a 2G Me 4 Stylidium pachyrrhizum F. Muell. Stylidium pedunculatum R.Br... Stylidium quadrifurcatum Hrickson et Willis Stylidium schizanthum F. Muell. Stylidium tenerrimum F. Muell. Stylidium uliginosum Sw. 5 ON OX OX < XX XK XK XK XxX! eee ZNvie XxX XXXXXX: CoMPOSITAE *Acanthospermum hispidum DC. .. =p ve te: an Actinobole uliginosum (A. Gray) Hichler. . 3 BS x Adenostemma lavenia (L.) Kuntze ; ‘ Ageratum conyzoides L. . ae Angianthus pusillus (Benth.) Benth. Angianthus tenellus (F. Muell.) Benth. Bidens bipinnata L. * 53 *Bidens pilosa L. .. Blainvillea dubia Specht . : Blumea diffusa R.Br. ex Benth. Blumea hieracifolia (D. Don) Dey ss Ae & ys Blumea integrifolia DC. .. ii He £6 lf ts x Blumea lacera (Burm. f.) DC. Blumea mollis (D.Don) Merr. Blumea pannosa O. Schwarz Blumea sazatilis Zoll. et Mor. Brachycome blackiit Davis : Brachycome ciliaris (Labill.) Less. var. ciliaris. Brachycome ciliaris (Labill.) Less. var. lanuginosa (Steetz) Benth. .. ae ae af ae Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. Brachycome lineariloba (DC.) Druce Brachycome tesquorum J.M. Black Calocephalus knappii Ewart et Davies . Calocephalus platycephalus ee aca Benth. = oF . Calotis breviseta Benth. . as cud S x x x 5s eX OS 6 OS x X 5 MM 5 OS OS OS Gg 5 ON OS ON ON ON ON 0% ON OS OS G xX XK XK XK & Calotis cuneifoa R.Br... x Calotis cymbacantha F. Muell. x Calotis erinacea Steetz os on x i Calotis hispidula (F. Muell.) F. Muell. x x 4 Calotis kempei F.Muell. .. x Calotis latiuscula F. Muell. et Tate x Calotis multicaulis (Turez.) Druce X< Calotis porphyroglossa F. Muell. ex Benth. x *Carthamus lanatus L. a x A: Centipeda cunninghamiu (DC.) A.Br. et Aschers x Xx Centipeda minima (L.) A.Br. et Aschers var. lanuginosa (DC.) Domin ae 3 os: ae eh x = Centipeda minima (L.) A.Br. et Aschers var. minima x S Centipeda thespidioides F. Muell. x Chthonocephalus pseudevax Steetz x as Coleocoma centaurea F. Muell. x x *Conyza bonariensis (lu.) Cronquist ‘ Lit Sis x oe rs Craspedia chrysantha (Schlechtd.) Benth. a on ck x }+Cryptostemma calendula (l.) Druce 3 ae SS a8 Eclipta alatocarpa Melville ; te ae ae a S bu St Eclipta platyglossa F. Muell. a gs a a si es ae x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutrH WaAtzEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 264 NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS C.A. B.T. V.R.D. D. &G. Eclipta prostrata (l.) L. Hlephantopus scaber Bx : *Hmilia sonchifolia (L.) DC. os ys 5 ae Epaltes australis Less. : a G6 be he 4 Le x Hrigeron ambiguus F. Muell. ee 45 nea ne a x *Hrigeron floribundus (H.B.K.) oe ae Flaveria australasica Hook. on bcs Glossogyne filifolia F. Muell. ex Benth. oa a a we x Glossogyne tenuifolia (Labill.) Cass. ie mae ie a Gnaphalium involucratum Forst. f. Gnaphalium luteoalbum L. ae Gnephosis eriocarpa (F. Muell.) Benth. Gnephosis foliata (Sond.) Hichler ae Helichrysum ambiguum Turez. var. ambiguum . Helichrysum ambiguum Turcez. var. paucisetum J. M. Black Helichrysum aff. ambiguum Turcz. a OS 2X OX OS OX xX X x x 5 x Dom Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum Helichrysum apiculatum (Labill.) D ayersit F. Muell. bracteatum (Vent.) Andr. cassinianum Gaud. . davenportit F. Muell. kempet F. Muell. ramossisimum Hook. semifertile F. Muell. .. thomsoniit F. Muell. .. Helipterum charsleyae F. Muell. Helipterum corymbiflorum Schlechtd. Helipterum fitzgibbonit F. Muell. .. Helipterum floribundum DC. Helipterum Helipterum Helipterum Helipterum Helipterum Helipterum moschatum (A. Cunn. ex DC.) Benth. pterochaetum (EF. Muell.) Benth. saxatile Wilson stipitatum (F. Muell.) ¥. Muell. ex Benth. strictum (Lindl.) Benth. : aa¢ tietkenswi F. Muell. tHypochoeris glabra L. : Ixiolaena leptolepis (DC.) Benth. : ¢Lactuca serriola L. var. integrifolia Gren. et Godr. ftLactuca serriola L. var. serriola .. Millotia greevesw F. Muell. ssp. kempet (F. “Muell.) Schodde var. helmsii (F. Muell. et Tate) Schodde Millotia greevesti Schodde var. kempew F. Muell. ssp. kempez (F. Muell.) Minuria cunninghamti Benth. Minuria denticulata (DC.) Benth. Minuria integerrima (DC.) Benth. Minuria leptophylla DC. .. a Moonia ecliptoides (F. Muell.) Benth. Moonia procumbens (DC.) Benth. Myriocephalus rudallai (F. Muell.) Benth. Myriocephalus stuartii (F. Muell. Benth. et Sond. ex Sond.) Olearia ferresii (F. Muell.) ¥. Muell. ex Benth. Olearia aff. muellert (Sond.) Benth. : Olearia stuartii (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. Olearia subspicata (Hook.) Benth. : Bi: Phacellothrix cladochaeta F. Muell. Pluchea dentex R.Br. ex Benth. Pluchea indica Less. a le a ie Pluchea rubelliflora (F. Muell.) B. L. Robinson Pluchea squarrosa Benth. : ae Pluchea tetranthera F. Muell. var. tetranthera Pluchea tetranthera F. Muell. var. tomentosa Benth. Pleurocarpaea denticulata Benth. . . Podocoma cuneifolia R.Br... Podocoma sp. KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKXXKKXKXKXXX x 0 ON KKK xx: PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy or New Soura WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 265 C.A. Bl VER D2 D&G: Podolepis canescens A. Cunn. ex DC. Podolepis capillaris (Steetz) Diels Podolepis georgei Diels ie Pterigeron adscendens Benth. a Pterigeron cylindriceps J. M. Black Pterigeron decurrens (DC.) Benth. Pterigeron dentatifolius F. Muell. Pterigeron liatroides (Turcz.) Benth. : ye S. Pterigeron odorus (F. Muell.) Benth. var. “major ‘Benth. : ats ns x Pterigeron odorus (F. Muell.) Benth. var. odorus ; ; Pterocaulon glandulosum (F.Muell. ex Benth.) Benth. et Hook. f. var. glandulosum a Pterocaulon glandulosum (F.Muell. ex Benth.) ‘Benth. et Hook. f. var. velutinum Ewart et Davies Se x Pterocaulon serratum O. Schwarz .. A ae Pterocaulon sphacelatum (Labill.) Benth. et Hook. fie x Pierocaulon verbascifolium F. Muell. Bd ae Rutidosis helichrysoides DC. i Ee a ae x x Senecio aff. cunninghamii DC. Senecio gregortt KF. Muell. ae at ae Senecio laceratus (F. Muell.) Belcher nt x Senecio lautus Forst. f. ex Willd. aff. =P, dissectifolins Ali F ie : a3 ae x Senecio magnificus F. Muell. tes Be a ve x Senecio odoratus Hornemann ae Be oe x ss Senecio sp. .. a wits se oe ne x Sigesbeckia microcephala DC. a5 iS ie ie x *Sonchus oleraceus L. ik Fa ee a x Sphaeranthus africanus 188 30 as ae: its Ke oe an: Sphaeranthus hirtus Willd. ee sis 5 a ee oe x Sphaeranthus indicus L. .. a! 3 wh a By x x Spilanthes grandiflora Turcz. Synedrella nodiflora (L.) Gaertn. ah Thespidium basiflorum (F. eg tee F. Mane *Tridax procumbens _L. : ne Et a oe 3 Vernonia cinerea (L.) Less. var. cinerea ber ee i x >< Vernonia cinerea (L.) Less. var. lanata Kost. .. oF x ay ws Vittadinia brachycomoides F. Muell. Bs si - a ae x Vittadinia macrorhiza (DC.) A. Gray... 3 ie Me x Vittadinia pterochaeta (F. Muell. ex Benth.) J. M. Black Vittadinia scabra DC. ’ : =e ae Vittadinia aff. scabra sensu J. M. “Black Vittadinia triloba (Gaud.) DC. sens. lat. Vittadinia sp. ae ate : Vittadima sp. Boe Waitzia acuminata Steetz .. Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz Wedelia asperrima (Dene.) Benth. : Ne ake ash Wedelia biflora (L.) DC. .. te ce he a ne aN ats x Wedelia stirlingi Tate a wi ae oe Bc at So Cr Wedelia verbesinoides F. Muell. ex Benth. on oe ine re at x *Xanthium spinosum L. ae ah oe : ae x x XXX XX XX > a N Wa ww aA >. exe XI: SK a SOK GX NGS xxx KK XK XXX x ADDENDUM Since this paper was submitted to the Society, several papers concerning Northern Territory plants have been published. These are: Court, A. B., 1971—A new combination in the genus Bossiaea Vent. (Papilionaceae). Muelleria, 2 (2): 139-42. FRYXELL, P. A., and Hasumt, SHARIFUL H., 1971.—The segregation of Radyera from Hibiscus (Malvaceae). Bot. Gaz., 132 (1): 57-62. Maconocuigz, J. R., and Byrnes, N., 1971.—Additions to the Flora of the Northern Territory. Muelleria, 2 (2): 133-37. Maconocuig, J. R., and Parker, 8S. A., 1971.—Further collections of two little known Stylidiaceae from the Northern Territory. Muelleria, 2 (2): 145. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrrty oF NEw SoutH WaAtLEs, Vow. 96, Part 4 266 The information and records in these papers will mean small corrections to Tables 1 and 2, but do not significantly affect the comments on these tables. NORTHERN TERRITORY PLANTS total numbers of plant species now known to the following : Northern Territory : 2736 native spp., 114 introduced spp. The records in the papers bring the Central Australia : 1208 5 on 55 53 Barkly Tableland : 495 ,, a 8 a Victoria River District: 919 ,, 53 9 06 Darwin and Gulf: 1581 3 AD 64 35 Additions to the Check List are: TYPHACEAE Typha orientalis Presl HYDROCHARITACEAE Blyxa auberti Rich. a Maidenia rubra (W. V. Fitzg.) Rendle GRAMINEAE Eragrostis australasica (Steud.) C. E. Hubbard Hragrostis clelandw 8.'T. Blake Ste : Sporobolus elongatus R.Br. PONTEDERIACEAE Monochoria hastata (L.) Solms. ORCHIDACEAE Nervilia discolor (Bl.) Schltr. ae Nervilia holochila (F. Muell.) Schltr. PROTEACEAE Grevillea erythroclada W. V. Fitzg. Grevillea pterosperma F. Muell. Hakea rhombales F. Muell.. . SANTALACEAE Santalum album L. CHENOPODIACEAE Atriplex suberecta I. C. Verdoorn Bassia astrocarpa F. Muell. Bassia articulata J. M. Black oi ad oe Bassia brachyptera (F. Muell.) R. H. Anderson Bassia george: EK. H. Ising ; alps : Bassia minuta E. H. Ising Kochia radiata P. G. Wilson : ae i Malacocera tricornis (Benth.) R. H. Anderson Suaeda australis (R.Br.) Mogq. AMARANTHACEAE Ptilotus royceanus Benl PORTULACACEAE Anacampseros australiana J. M. Black Calandrinia disperma J.M. Black MIMOSACEAE Acacia pachyacra Maiden et Blakely PAPILIONACEAE Bossiaea bossiaeoides (A. Cunn. ex Benth.) A. B. Court (syn. Bossiaea phylloclada F. Muell.) Crotalaria alata Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don Crotalaria quinquifolia L. ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Tribulus hirsutus Benth. V.R.D. D. & G. x X X x XX XK xX Xx pa oe xX X x PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocreTy oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. M. CHIPPENDALE 267 C.A. Jejdlo WeliID), IDE a's (Cy RUTACEAE Geijera linearifolia (DC.) J. M. Black x EUPHORBIACEAE Omalanthus populifolius Grah. .. sets 6 vis ait ee oo Ke RHAMNACEAE Eimmenosperma cunninghami Benth. .. 56 ore ae ae Be x MALVACEAE Radyera farraget (F. Muell.) Tete et Hashmi ee Hibiscus farraget F.Muell.) . x CoMBRETACEAE Terminalia crassifolia Exell : ae ite are oye a ays x Terminalia fitzgeraldi C. A. Gardner 2% whe ae af see ot x BoRAGINACEAE *Amsinckia hispida (Ruiz. et Pav.) I.M.Johnston .. x VERBENACEAE Newcastlia cladotricha F.Muell. .. ae ae fe x SCROPHULARIACEAE Mimulus prostratus Benth. jie sis be ae x Mimulus repens R.Br. fe st a oe ae x MYOPORACEAE Hremophila polyclada (F. Muell.) F. Muell. S33 4 x Hremophila turtoni F. Muell. fe re ap Se x GooDENIACEAE Leschenaultia helmsii Krause a ae “ a x STYLIDIACEAE Levenhookia chippendalei Hrickson et Willis se “ies x ae 4 ae PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Soorety or NEw SoutH Watgs, Vou. 96, Part 4 A BRACHYOPID LABYRINTHODONT FROM THE LOWER TRIAS OF QUEENSLAND ANNE HowIe Tinnean Macleay Fellow School of Biological Sciences, University of Sydney* [Accepted for publication 21st July 1971] (Plates XIV, XV) Synopsis The skull of a new species of brachyopid labyrinthodont from the Lower Triassic Rewan Formation of Queensland is described and compared with other brachyopids using the method of Welles and Estes (1969). It is the most complete and the best ossified brachyopid yet found and is closely related to a form from the Mangali Beds of Central India. INTRODUCTION Following an initial productive field trip to the Lower Triassic Rewan Formation in 1969 (Bartholomai and Howie, 1970; Howie, in press), a second trip was organized in June, 1970. The purpose of this was first to collect from known vertebrate-bearing localities, and second to explore likely areas of the Bowen Basin for further Rewan exposures. The trip was a success on both counts, yielding an excellent capitosaur skull (an account of which is almost ready for publication), several small reptile skulls similar to those reported by Bartholomai and Howie (1970), a tiny (2 cm.) temnospondylous labyrinthodont skull, and many fragmentary fish, amphibian and reptilian remains from the chief known locality (Queensland Museum field locality L78), and providing us with a new productive locality some 79 miles north-north-east from L78. Field Locality The new locality (A. A. Howie Field Locality Q6) is at the headwaters of Duckworth Creek, south-west of the settlement of Bluff, and lies on the north-west edge of the Mimosa Syncline. Here faces of the rarely exposed Rewan Formation are found beneath the more massive escarpments of the Middle Triassic Clematis Sandstone and the overlying Lower Jurassic Precipice Sandstone which form the northern edges of the Blackdown Tableland. Malone, Olgers and Kirkegaard (1969) note that in this area the Rewan sediments are so similar lithologically and in stratigraphic position to the Rewan Formation of the type area (which is near locality L78) that direct correlation is justified and add that they are almost certainly continuous below the surface. This Duckworth Creek exposure consists of several small linked erosion gullies, and specimens are found in these and in the alluvium at their bases. Rewan mudstone was exposed to a maximum depth of about 20 feet and included a Single broad pale green band of very fine-grained sandstone. Associated Material Associated with the brachyopid labyrinthodont described below were several other amphibian species but no fish or reptiles, a strong contrast with locality L78, where reptiles were a common component of the fauna. Laby- * Present address, School of Geology, University of Melbourne. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New South WaAtzEs, VoL. 96, Part 4 ANNE HOWIE 269 rinthodont remains include a femur which probably belonged to a very large capitosaur, left and right femora and other postcranial remains of a more terrestrial type of labyrinthodont, nodules containing rhachitomous vertebrae, bone scraps bearing ornament of the type described by Cosgriff (1965) in Deliasaurus kimberleyensis, numerous coprolites, and fragments of an unprepared skull which I think can be assigned to Rewana sp. (Howie, in press). Although the brachyopid skull was found in the red mudstone, all the other more complete remains came preserved in nodules from the pale green band. The Family Brachyopidae In 1956 Watson published a review of the brachyopid labyrinthodonts and was followed by Cosgriff (1969), who largely used Watson’s criteria for inclusion of a species within the Family Brachyopidae, and Welles and Estes (1969), who built on studies of Watson, Shishkin (1964, 1966) and Bystrow (1935) to establish a revised and extended set of brachyopid characters. Within the ‘ brachyopids proper’? Watson recognized Bothriceps australis and B. major (which he renamed Trucheosaurus), Brachyops laticeps, Batracho- suchus watson and B. brown, Pelorocephalus, and “ Platyceps’’ wilkinsoni, but he included forms such as Hobrachyops, Dvinesaurus and the plagiosaurs within a larger brachyopid grouping. Panchen showed in 1959 that the plagiosaurs were not closely allied to the brachyopids. Cosgriff made ‘“‘ Platyceps”’ wilkinsoni the type of a new genus, Blinasaurus which had two known species, B. wilkinsoni and B. henwoodi, and recognized Bothriceps, Trucheosaurus, Brachyops laticeps, Batrachosuchus watsom, B. browni, Hadrokkosaurus and Boreosaurus aS being true members of the Family Brachyopidae. Welles and Estes took a more conservative viewpoint, eliminated genera which they thought were doubtful (Boreosaurus, for example) and ended with Blinasaurus henwoodi, Bothriceps (which included B. australis, Watson’s Trucheosaurus major and ‘“* Platyceps”’ wilkinsoni, Cosgriff’s type for Blinasaurus), Batrachosuchus watson, B. browni and B. lacer (from Sushkin’s Batrachosuchoides lacer), Brachyops and Hadrokkosaurus, thus reducing the number of brachyopid genera to five. I intend to follow Welles and Estes’ grouping of the brachyopids and their set of brachyopid skull characters, while adding to these Cosgriff’s characters for brachyopid lower jaws. I do not agree with Cosgriff’s brachyopid skull character of palatal teeth being present only on the vomer bones; irregular palatine teeth can be seen in Hadrokkosaurus (on the ectopterygoid and palatine bones) and in Brachyops allos nu. sp. (on the ectopterygoid bone). SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTION Class Amphibia Subclass Labyrinthodontia Order Temnospondyli Superfamily Brachyopoidea Family Brachyopidae Characters of the family. Skull short, broad ; no zones of intensive growth (other than in the cheek region—see below). Orbits anterior and usually relatively large. Otic notch absent, or at most a shallow embayment. Tabulars short and broad; tabular horns absent or weak. Parasphenoid flat, becoming elevated anteriorly above vomers. Usually a single tusk pit pair on vomer, palatine, and ectopterygoid ; interstitial smaller teeth little developed or absent ; tusks usually much elongated and massive ; dentary tooth row relatively short. Vomerine plate short. Occiput with strong slope posteroventrally to occipital condyles, the latter usually quite large. Quadrate condyles large, ventrally produced, anteroventral in position relative to occipital condyles. Squamosal and qaadratojugal with strong occipital flanges forming a vertical transversely PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socipty oF New SoutH Wages, Vou. 96, Part 4 270 A BRACHYOPID LABYRINTHODONT concave trough lateral to the pterygoid. Pterygoid forming a steeply arched, flat-roofed palate. Quadrate somewhat compressed laterally, wedged antero- laterally between flange of pterygoid and squamosal-quadratojugal trough. Retroarticular process elongate. Posterior meckelian foramen and angular- prearticular suture on ventral surface or very low on lingual surface. Brachyops Owen 1855 Type species: Brachyops laticeps Owen. Brachyops is the first described and thus the typical brachyopid. Other brachyopids differ from Brachyops mainly in their skull proportions—the most obvious differences are as follows : Blinasaurus Cosgriff (1969) differs in that its snout is more rounded, its orbits are larger and therefore closer together, its external nostrils are closer together, its parietal foramen is relatively much closer to its orbits, its tabulars and postparietals are reduced, its interpterygoid vacuities are much longer relative to their width, so that the anterior part of the palate is shortened and the posterior part lengthened. Bothriceps Huxley (1859) has a much narrower skull so that its orbits and nares are closer together, and its interpterygoid vacuities are longer relative to their width. Hadrokkosaurus Welles (1957) is larger than Brachyops, its skull is much broader relative to its length and is shorter postorbitally. Batrachosuchus Broom (1903) has a broader, less pointed skull, the preorbital skull is shorter, the interpterygoid vacuities are longer relative to their width, and the anterior part of the palate is shortened. Brachyops allos n.sp. Holotype. A skull complete but for the left cheek region, part of the right quadratojugal and pterygoid, and a few scraps from the dermal skull roof. Queensland Museum No. F6572. Type locality. A. A. Howie field locality Q6, near the headwaters of the Duckworth Creek, south-west of the settlement of Bluff, South Central Queensland. Horizon. Lower Upper Rewan Formation of the Mimosa Group, Lower Trias. Characters of the species. Brachyops allos differs from Brachyops laticeps, especially in that its exoccipital condyles are much nearer the level of the quadrate condyles, so that the backwardly sloping portion of the occiput in B. allos is greatly reduced. Although this character is one which Watson (1956) considered showed the stage of evolutionary advancement of a brachyopid, the two species are otherwise so alike that generic separation at this stage would be foolish. The cultriform process of the parasphenoid in B. allos is clasped laterally by posteriorly directed processes of the vomers rather than overlying these as it does in B. laticeps. Posteromedially the process bears an area of dermal denticles in B. allos. On the dorsal surface of the skull the tabulars are exposed a little less in B. allos than they are in B. laticeps. Anteriorly the interpterygoid vacuities are broader in B. allos, but this difference is less between B. allos and B. laticeps than between B. allos and all other brachyopids. The rather long tripartite anterior palatal foramen in B. allos is also distinctive. THE SKULL OF BRACHYOPS ALLOS When found, the skull was lying upside down with the anterior part of the palate exposed. Although a large area was excavated when the skull was being encased in a plaster cast, no postcranial material which could positively be associated with the skull was recovered. In the laboratory exposed bones were PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH Wa ss, Vou. 96, Part 4 ANNE HOWIE Diels glued together with Butvar B76 and impregnated with Butvar B98. Preparing the skull was difficult as the bone was softer in places than the matrix and the latter tended to remove a layer of bone as it was chipped away with an automatic mallet. Much of the matrix on the ventral surface of the skull roof has been left as a reinforcing agent as the bone is extremely thin. Slight dorsoventral crushing has forced the anterolateral margins of the skull outwards (Plate xtv) and has caused a little warping in the occipital region, but on the whole the skull is well preserved. Typical labyrinthodont ornament is present on all the skull roofing bones and the sensory canals where present are well impressed into this. The ornament is more reticular than that found in B. laticeps but is linear towards the edges of the bones, especially the squamosal and quadratojugal. So the suggestion by Bystrow (1935) that brachyopids have no regions of elongation in the skull does not apply to this deep cheek region where the pattern of ornament shows that the skull bones have grown rapidly ventrally. Watson (1956) notes this transverse elongation in the cheek region of Batrachosuchus, as did Save-Séderbergh (1937) in brachyopids in general. Dorsal Surface. In dorsal view the skull is very similar in shape to that of Brachyops laticeps except that less of the occiput is exposed. The orbits and choanae are rounded and the parietal foramen is small and set well back in the skull. A cross-section of the midline of the skull roof shows a strongly developed ventrally produced ridge which runs along the midline from the anterior part of the frontal bones posteriorly to end behind the parietal foramen (Fig. 1, x—y). Nine millimetres in front of this foramen the ridge divides into two, bypasses the foramen, and comes together again at the level of the ventral surface of the skull roof 6mm. behind the foramen. The result is an elongate pineal cavity which is loaf-shaped at the level of the external opening. The premaxillae, nasals, frontals, parietals, postparietals, postfrontals, post- orbitals, supratemporals and squamosals are very like those of Brachyops laticeps except that the suture between the frontals and parietals is more towards the front of the skull in B. allos. A flange of the nasal bone which extends lateral to the external naris on each side could be a septomaxilla as shown by Shishkin (1966) in Batrachosuchus lacer, but no nasal-septomaxillary suture is visible. More probably the circle of bone which floors the nostril is the septomaxilla, as could have been the case in Hadrokkosaurus (Welles and Estes, 1969). No suture can be found between the maxillary and prefrontal bones; the suture shown in this position in Fig. 1 is hypothetical and has been placed in its most likely position in relation to the ornament and the sensory canals. If it is correctly placed it excludes the maxilla from the orbit. A thin process of the jugal extends around the anterior border of the orbit to a greater extent than it does in other brachyopids. Much of the right quadratojugal remains and forms the posterolateral corner of the skull, sending sheets of bone medially to cover parts of the posterior and anterior faces of the quadrate. Ventral Surface. A ventral view of the skull shows unusually wide interpterygoid vacuities and an enlarged anterior palatal vacuity. The latter is tripartite (Fig. 2), as is the one found by Shishkin (1966) in Batrachosuchus. Large tusks and tusk replacement pits are found in the vomers palatines and right ectopterygoid, which also bears a palatal tooth. While no palatal teeth can be found on the vomer, an additional small tusk is present right of the midline just posterior to the anterior palatal vacuity. A raised median area on the cultriform process of the parasphenoid bears a shagreen of minute denticles which are not present elsewhere on the palate. Premaxillary, maxillary, vomer and palatine bones vary little from the characteristic brachyopid pattern as seen in B. laticeps. The parasphenoid body PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociEeTY oF New SoutH WaAtss, Vou. 96, Part 4 272 A BRACHYOPID LABYRINTHODONT Fig. 1. Brachyops allos n.sp. a: Dorsa)] view of the skull drawn normal to the skull roof. b: Ventral view of the skull drawn normal to the parasphenoid. x, y: Sections of the skull midline at x and y. x¥%. Sensory grooves are stippled. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrreTy OF NEw SoutH WatgEs, VoL. 96, Part 4 ANNE HOWIE 273 Fig. 2. Brachyopsallosn.sp. a: Occipital view of the skull. b: Anterior view of the skull. ce: Lateral view of the skull drawn normal to the saggital plane of the skull. x 3. Fig. 3. Brachyops allos n.sp. Sketch of a section of the skull in the braincase area to show the (?) epipterygoid. Looking posteriorly from the proximal end of the cultiform process. x # PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 274. A BRACHYOPID LABYRINTHODONT is arched a little dorsally and extends further posteriorly than it does in B. laticeps, so that the exoccipitals are separated in the midline. No crista muscularis as noted by Welles and Estes in Hadrokkosaurus is present, but a well-developed ridge runs from the cultriform process behind the interpterygoid vacuity and is continued on the palatal ramus of the pterygoid. The cultriform process dips dorsally above the vomers at its anterior end but is narrower here than it is in B. laticeps, being clasped laterally by posterior extensions of the vomers rather than bearing these on its ventral surface. The pterygoids are typically brachyopid except in their lateral margins. On the left side the anterolateral border of the palatal ramus of the pterygoid is a true edge (edge, Fig. 2), so that on this side the ramus is less than half the width of the right ramus. However, a ridge on the right ramus follows a similar line to that taken by the true edge of the left ramus. I interpret this edge as being the suture line between the pterygoid and ectopterygoid, so that the ectopterygoid extends posterolaterally along the pterygoid. The right quadrate is preserved and shows an advanced level of ossification when compared with other brachyopids. The condyle has a lateral area and a larger and more ventral median area, the two being linked by a groove to form a screw-Shaped condyle similar to that found in other well ossified rhachitomes. Because of the greater degree of ossification in this specimen, an occipital view differs from the same view in other brachyopids in that the gap between the Squamosal-quadratojugal complex and the pterygoid is filled with a dorsal extension of the quadrate. The supraoccipital and basioccipital areas are unossified, but a well-developed processus lamellosus divides the supraoccipital space from the foramen magnum. The processus basalis of the exoccipital is even more fully ossified than it is in Hadrokkosaurus. A paraquadrate foramen is present in the right quadratojugal. The posterior face of each tabular has a large rugosity above the paroccipital process. The lamina ascendens or dorsal process of the pterygoid is much the same as the one present in Hadrokkosaurus except that it reaches the skull roof, touching the tabular medially and the squamosal more laterally. Epipterygoid. On the right side, 4mm. medial to and a little behind the leading edge of the dorsal process of the pterygoid, is a further ossification (Figs 2 (a), 3) which may be an epipterygoid. This originates from an 8mm. base on the pterygoid near its suture with the parasphenoid and ascends dorsomedially, becoming narrower and rounder to end just anterior to the postparietals and 7 mm. lateral to the midline. A small excavation beneath the anteromedial edge of the ascending process of the pterygoid is probably the conical recess for the basi- pterygoid process of the basisphenoid. Between the head of the (?) epipterygoid and the anterior face of the paroccipital process and attached to the latter is an irregular ossification which may be part of the otic capsule. From Husthenopteron through early amphibia like Hryops and Hdops and later Triassic Amphibia like Parotosaurus the epipterygoid whether more or less well ossified bears a contant relationship to the pterygoid ; it is found adpressed to the lateral (morphologically internal) surface of the dorsal process of the pterygoid. In Husthenopteron and early Amphibia the palatoquadrate cartilage ‘is present as a continuous element which runs forward from the quadrate along the dorsolateral margin of the pterygoid, but is usually not preserved anterior of the epipterygoid region. In the more ‘‘ advanced ” labyrinthodonts ossifica- tion in the palatoquadrate is gradually reduced to a quadrate element and an epipterygoid element, the latter consisting of an expanded basal portion which usually forms the dorsal roof of the conical recess for the basipterygoid process of the basisphenoid, an anterodorsal process which eventually becomes the columella cranii of reptiles, and a posterodorsal or otic process. In Triassic PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 ANNE HOWIE 275 amphibians such as Lyrocephalus, Parotosaurus and Metoposaurus the otic process is lost. In life, no doubt a cartilaginous connection was maintained between the quadrate and the epipterygoid. Previously described brachyopids have been poorly ossified, a condition reflected in their fragmentary or missing quadrates and the lack of any ossification in the braincase area. In Brachyops allos the quadrate is better ossified than it is in many earlier labyrinthodonts, and it would not be unreasonable to expect some part of the epipterygoid to be preserved. However, the column of bone preserved in B. allos differs from other known epipterygoids in that its foot lies just medial to the pterygoid rather than being adpressed to its lateral edge, so that any cartilaginous connection between the epipterygoids and the quadrate would be extremely awkward. One possibility is that the element is a displaced stapes, but Watson described a very different stapes in Batrachosuchus, as did Bystrow (1937) in Dvinosaurus. Also, the bone is apparently in place within the skull and slopes dorsomedially ; a Stapes would be more likely to have its distal end at least outside the skull, and would slope dorsolaterally. RELATIONSHIPS OF BRACHYOPS ALLOS In their review of the brachyopids Welles and Estes (1969) used the method developed by Welles and Cosgriff (1965) for their review of the capitosaurus. A series of arbitrary measurements is made on the skulls, and indices are derived from these measurements.- The sum of the differences between indices for any two species is then assumed to be a useful indication of the relationship between these species. Welles and Estes acknowledge the various shortcomings of this method of analysis, one of which is the small number of specimens from which all measurements can be obtained. Data from additional specimens can only improve this situaton so the relevant figures for B. allos are tabled below. The figures given are for the reconstructed skull; they differ slightly from those obtained from the actual specimen. 5 Der awas Interorbital breadth, A : Breadth of skull roof across quacdratojugals, B Midline postorbital length, D : ie Length of yvomers, HE Midline distance between noetrile and orbits ¥ Breadth across vomers, G Height of parasphenoid, H Internarial breadth, J be ae ms A: at Length of skull roof, L .. np oe Se es ser eel Midline preorbital length, O : Distance behind orbits of parietal foramen: Pp Length of body of pterygoid, Q x Breadth across pterygoids at concavity, R Distance of parietal foramen in front of end skull table, T Midline orbital length, U . : Length of interpterygoid Sorat W Breadth of interpterygoid vacuity, Z Hm mow We bh bs Oot Pe Amnonwnorwowoan-.‘ ~j CW ob bw ow Or Indices : B: L . 130 U:L 19 G:E » 29 J 20 15 D:L 51 (A) 818s 27 A:L 41 P:A 66 Were Ib 48 O:L 30 T:A 49 Lieve 70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WaAtzEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 276 A BRACHYOPID LABYRINTHODONT Sums of Differences (using Welles and Estes data as plotted in figs 2-13) : Brachyops allos aes 149 Hadrokkosaurus bradyt Brachyops allos 73 Batrachosuchus watsoni “* Brachyops allos 61 Batrachosuchus brownt Brachyops allos 62 Brachyops laticeps Brachyops laticeps 146 Blinasaurus henwoodi Brachyops allos 101 Bothriceps major Brachyops allos etd hia cece 113 Bothriceps australis Brachyops allos 155 Dvinosaurus primus Assuming that the smaller totals of index differences are real measures of relationship, this table shows that Brachyops is most closely related to Batra- chosuchus and next to Bothriceps—the same finding as Welles and Estes’ original analysis showed. The fact that Brachyops allos is closer by one point to Batra- chosuchus browni than to Brachyops laticeps only emphasizes the fact that until more brachyopid specimens are known a few points difference between two skulls cannot be taken as a significant measure of a relationship or a non- relationship ; the equivalent figures for the Brachyops allos skull before recon- struction indicate that B. allos is closer by five points to B. laticeps than it is to Batrachosuchus watsoni. Welles and Estes suggest that a sum of differences of 57 might reasonably be considered as representing a specific level. If this is so, then Brachyops allos should be placed in a genus separate from Brachyops laticeps and Batrachosuchus. This would be “ splitting ’’ in the extreme and it could be more valid to unite Brachyops laticens, Brachyops allos and Batrachosuchus into a single genus. Whether it is Brachyops or Batrachosuchus, Brachyops allos will link Welles and Hstes’ two Palaeogeographic units, their Australian brachyopid line, and their second brachyopid line which includes African and Indian-North American forms. Brachyops allos is thus a particularly well-preserved and well-ossified member of its family and hence shows several features not previously found in the Brachyopidae. These include the presence of a paraquadrate foramen, an area of denticles on the parasphenoid, an ossified quadrate and a probable epipterygoid. Being the first brachyopid to be described since Welles and Estes’ analysis of the family, it can be used to test their methods. These proved to be accurate in indicating relationships at a level a little above the generic one, but, at least until the discovery of more specimens allows a statistically valid index to be calculated, the methods cannot be used to establish generic or specific relationships. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank my field party, R. Evans, E. McLean and J. Warren, Mr. R. Goodwin who kindly allowed us to work on his property, and Professor L. C. Birch for having me in his department and allowing me to use that department’s station wagon. The work was supported initially by a Sydney University Post-Doctoral Research Fellowship, and secondly by a Linnean Macleay Fellowship. Subse- quently support has been obtained from the Australian Grants Committee. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETy oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 4 PLATE XIV Brachyops allosn.sp. a: Dorsal view of the skull. b: Ventral view of the skull. x clo Howl Bow arnt : ; ; 5 Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 4 PLATE XV Brachyops allos n.sp. a: Occipital view of the skull. b: Anterior view of the skull. ce: Lateral view of the skull. x 2. a ni ve - ws ai | $<” ee ae eat _ is earns o i. quid ocak oDicte vglt ‘to wale Nang ee y Y, a - - = 7” a ANNE HOWIE 277 References BarTHotomal, A., and Howis, A. A., 1970.—Vertebrate fauna from the Lower Trias of Australia. Nature, Lond., 225: 1063. Broom, R., 1903.—On a new stegocephalian (Batrachosuchus browni) from the Karroo Beds of Aliwal North, South Africa. Geol. Mag., 10, 4: 499-501. Bystrow, A. P., 1935.—Morphologische Untersuchungen der Deckknochen des Schadels der Wirbeltiere. 1. Mitteilung. Schadel der Stegocephalen. Acta zool., Stockh., 16: 65-141. , 1938.—Dvinosaurus als neotenische Form der Stegocephalen. Acta zool., Stockh. 19: 209-295. Bystrow, A. P., and Erremoy, J. A., 1940.—Benthosuchus sushkini Efr.—a labyrinthodont from the Eotriassic of Sharzhenga River. Trudy paleozool. Inst., 10,1: 1-152. CoscrirF, J. W., 1965.—A new Genus of Temnospondyli from the Triassic of Western Australia. J. Proc. R. Soc. West. Aust., 48: 65. , 1969.—Blinasaurus, a brachyopid Genus from Western Australia and New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. West. Aust., 52: 65-88. Howie, A. A., 1970. A new capitosaurid labyrinthodont from East Africa. Paleontology, 13, 2: 210-258. On a Queensland labyrinthodont. (In press.) Hux ey, T. H., 1859.—On some amphibian and reptilian remains from South Africa and Australia. Proc. geol. Soc., 15: 642-658. Matoneg, EH. J., OucErsS, F., and KrrKEGAARD, A. G., 1969.—The geology of the Duaringa and Saint Lawrence 1: 250,000 sheet areas, Queensland. Ortow, I. A., Ed., 1964.—(Elements of Paleontology) Moscow: Izdatelstov Nauka., 1-772 (Russian). Owen, R., 1855.—Description of the cranium of a labyrinthodont reptile, Brachyops laticeps, from Mangali, Central India. Q. Jl. geol. Soc. Lond., 11: 37-39. Pancuen, A. L., 1959.—A new armoured amphibian from the Upper Permian of East Africa. Phil. Trans., 242: 207-281. SAVE-SODERBERGH, G., 1937.—On the dermal skulls of Lyrocephalus, Aphaneramma, and Bentho- suchus, labyrinthodonts from the Triassic of Spitzbergen and N. Russia. Bull. geol. Inst. Univ. Upsala, 27: 189-208. SuisHxKin, M. A., 1964.—Stereospondyli. In Orlov, 1964: 83-122. , 1966.—(A brachyopid labyrinthodont from the Triassic of the Russian Platform.) Pal. Jour., 1966, 2: 93-108. (Russian.) Susuxin, P. O., 1936.—Notes on the pre-Jurassic Tetrapoda from U.S.S.R. IIT. Dvinosaurus Amalitsky, a perennibranchiate stegocephalian from the upper Permian of North Dvina. Trudy Paleozool. Inst., 5: 43-91. ; Watson, D. M. S., 1919.—The structure, evolution and origin of the Amphibia. The “ orders ”’ Rhachitomi and Stereospondyli. Phil. Trans. B, 209: 1-73. , 1956.—The brachyopid labyrinthodonts. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. Geol., 2: 317-391. WELLEs, S. P., 1947.—-Vertebrates from the Upper Moenkopi formation of Northern Arizona. Univ. Calif. Publs Geol. Sci., 27: 241-289. WELLES, S. P., and Coserirr, J., 1965.—A revision of the labyrinthodont Family Capitosauridae and a description of Paratosaurus Peabodyi n.sp. from the Wupatki Member of the Moenkopi Formation of Northern Arizona. Univ. Calif. Publs Geol. Sci., 54: 1-148. WELLES, S. P., and Estss, R., 1969.—Hadrokkosaurus bradyi from the Upper Moenkopi Formation of Arizona with a review of the brachyopid labyrinthodonts. Univ. Calif. Publs Geol. Sci., 84: 1-56. Woopwarzp, A. S., 1909.—On a new labyrinthcdont from the oil shale at Airly. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 8: 317-319. Abbreviations er .. conical recess for the basipterygoid Pp .. parietal process of the basisphenoid pa .. palatine dpt .. dorsal process of the pterygoid pf .. postfrontal ect .. ectopterygoid pm .. premaxilla edge .._ true edge on the palatal ramus of po _.. _ postorbital the pterygoid pp .. postparietal eo .. exoccipital prf .. prefrontal ept .. epipterygoid psp .. parasphenoid f .. frontal pt .. pterygoid j jugal q .. quadrate m maxilla qj -.- quadratojugal n nasal sq .. squamosal ot .. otic ossification t .. tabular PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WaAtLgEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 THE DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT OF THE ORGANIC DEPOSITS ON THE FORESHORE AT NORTH DEEWHY, NEW SOUTH WALES A. R. H. MARTIN School of Biological Sciences, University of Sydney, Sydney, N.S.W. [Accepted for publication 21st July 1971] Synopsis Pollen analysis of the coastal site at North Deewhy necessitates qualification of a previously published statement that could be taken to imply that the peat at this site is of brackish or marine origin, and that it is ipso facto evidence of a higher-than-present sea level stand less than 4,000 years ago. The so-called ‘‘ peat ’’, exposed on the foreshore at North Deewhy (southern side of Long Reef, lat. 33° 44’S., long. 151° 19-7’ K.), has attracted attention for many years and was the subject of a radiocarbon dating (Hubbs, Bien and Suess, 1963). I was asked in 1962 to pollen-analyse a sample from this deposit to find whether marine influence was indicated. The position of this sample in the Sequence was apparently at the same level as the C,,-dated sample, i.e. the base of the organic deposits, just above heavy blue clay. The analysis showed high Casuarina values (Casuarina is only dominant at the base of the sequence), rather high Chenopodiaceae values and the presence of Hystrichosphaeridae, which were then generally regarded as brackish and marine indicator organisms. On this basis, it was concluded that the sample did show some evidence of proximity to the sea. The C,, sample was subsequently published (loc. cit., p. 259, sample LJ451), the date being 3980+150 yrs. (2030 B.c.), and bore the comment ‘‘ The peat is possibly indicative of a higher-than-present sea-stand ; pollen analysis indicates that it is probably of brackish or saltwater origin’’. This comment goes further than the data available warranted at the time, since peat of saltwater origin in this latitude would almost necessarily be a mangrove peat, and none of the palynological evidence indicated mangrove presence. Except for the Hystri- chosphaeridae, the aquatic plants and algae identified were freshwater forms, though some were euryhaline. The determination of the depositional environ- ment of this peat is crucial to its use as evidence of sea-level change, since, if the peat is of salt or brackish water origin, its position must indicate a sea-level higher than to-day’s, whereas if it is essentially a freshwater environment (even if influenced by proximity to the sea) it can offer evidence only of a negative kind. A pollen analysis of the entire short vertical sequence is now available. Fig. 1 (a) represents the pollen of woody plants and herbaceous plants of apparently non-local origin. Fig. 1 (b) represents aquatic and swamp plants and other locally produced herbs. By ‘local’ is meant those plants most likely to have been floristic components of the actual area of deposition at the time. These latter are expressed as a percentage of the pollen sum formed by the elements of Fig. 1 (a). The stratigraphic sequence at the point of sampling is depicted on the right-hand side of Fig. 1 (a) and is as follows : 0 cm. upwards .. Dune sand with plant roots (arbitrary datum) Uf Gil Gm, .. Sandy limnic humus, more peaty at base 43cem.-l7cem. .. .. Humified and compressed coarse detritus mud 63 cm.—43 cm... .. Compressed grey-brown fine detritus mud Below 63cm. .. .. Stiff blue-grey clay. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 A. RB. H. MARTIN 279 At an undetermined depth the blue clay appears to be resting on eroded brick earth (laterite), which outcrops seawards and can also be seen dipping under the deposits farther east along the shore. The pollen diagrams, from bottom to top, show: (i) Shallow lacustrine conditions with Chara and Pediastrum, Triglochin (or Potamogeton), Cyperaceae and probably Casuarina fringing woodland. (ii) Casuarina being replaced by Eucalyptoideae: declining Chara, but desmids (Pleurotaenium and Cosmarium) abundant; Dinoflagellates and Hystri- chosphaeres becoming commoner. NORTH DEEWHY (LONG REEF). & ee $ a gf Kae? o SS 08 ios oe ners » 5 OF SOKO LS LO & WRG Re OL PERS EF 2 we of Ronco wy? WS ONG EAM & OG V y 4 oe Qe SR oR MOSS ST SF PE C66 Cf (COne af ! ») Y Cc °F, 4 . ent 20°%o / , 20 ee i 60 Ce te 20 oO 60 YOe G lO ¢ {e) CARPO- IGULIFLORAE Sf BROTUS wr V } ' SI +) ELAEOCARPUS cf BAUERA HIBBERTIA +) ab ob ic ) b OLEACEAE mason ©. LACKAMA BREYNA b | » ) » % > 980 +150 ‘ ry ~~ = ir i= Prana rr ire Pie eerie eee ie rie esese Soe pn Cpa gg () 20°%o Fig. la. Pollen diagram of deposits at North Deewhy: Arboreal and herbaceous pollen other than local and swamp plants. The Angophora — bloodwood eucalypt type is shown (white) as a component of the total Eucalyptus-Angophora pollen percentage. NORTH DEEWHY (LONG REEF) d as . & re Ss o x . 2 © CCC ay ZO Ge ~ =~ - - ---TRIGIES%e = SCIRPUS TYPE ez 72 F=TSi90% 273°%e INOFLAGELLATES + & rb. ierana ee EV ge gs Boose UD at es ers Vpn er oe Uc oad et et Noe en re Ae e O es Ve Th i Vd Kee] ld ivi Up Us Ms 0 sD con corn Be Ber ed ea Vc Lt ae De Tied Cee A Bpeet Ce el SSS TE Gales fo) 20% Fig. 1b. Pollen diagram of deposits at North Deewhy : Local (i.e. presumed components of the peat) flora, expressed as a percentage of pollen sum of Fig. la. Cyathea and trilete spores other than Gleichenia are percentaged with the non-local flora, but are included with other Pteridcphytes for convenience. (iii) The fine detritus mud changing quite sharply to a coarse detritus mud ; much higher values for Leptospermoideae (Leptospermum, Melaleuca and Kunzea not being easily separable) probably indicating nearby ti-tree swamp, but wood fragments occurring neither at the point of sampling or elsewhere along the exposure. The influx of Leptospermoideae is probably responsible for an artificial lowering of the background pollen of Eucalyptus, ete. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH Watss, Von. 96, Part 4 280 DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT OF ORGANIC DEPOSITS, DEEWHY (iv) Peat development, with occasional very compressed Cyperaceae rhizomes, at about the point at which Cyperaceae pollen becomes abundant in the profile. This level also corresponds to a step cut in the deposit which is apparently due to a difference in erodability of the two sediment types. (v) The peat grading into the more limnic sandy-humic layer upwards, itself not sharply demarcated from the overlying sand, but apparently water- logged conditions prevailed to the time of obliteration of the swamp, as indicated by the vast quantities of Triglochin and Cyperaceae pollen and the entry of Philydrum and Nymphoides into the profile. Leptospermoideae, apart from Callistemon, which actually increases slightly, decline towards the top of the profile, resulting in a recovery of the non-local Casuarina, Eucalyptoideae and Callitris. It is now clear that the lower third of the sequence represents a lake or freshwater lagoon with a desmid and Pediastrum phytoplankton. There is no warrant for the belief that the deposit was in a marine or brackish (as that word is usually understood) environment, and the presence of ferrous sulphide (FeS,) erystals, which occur in the basal lake mud, is quite compatible with formation in a freshwater lagoon under slight marine influence (e.g. Degens, 1965). The freshwater tolerance of hystrichosphaeres (in this context, microplanktonic fossils with spherical bodies and radiating processes that are not obvious Dino- flagellates) appears to be higher than formerly supposed (Churchill and Sarjeant, 1962), and in the general context of this deposit they can hardly be said to provide clear evidence of high salinity. The central part of the sequence, which lacks even equivocal indicators of salinity, must have been produced under waterlogged or near-waterlogged conditions if not open water, because of the dominance of swamp-living angio- sperms. A slight rise in water level may be implied by the replacement of a Leptospermoideae swamp by a Cyperaceae-Nymphoides-Triglochin swamp in the upper part of the sequence, but the absence of any wood fragments makes the precise meaning of the high Leptospermoideae values uncertain. The changes in flora indicated by the pollen analysis do not reflect a straightforward plant succession and could have been brought about by minor changes in water level, which itself would be influenced by factors such as the movements of nearby dunes, shoreline recession and migration of the mouth of the nearby Deewhy Lagoon. An opportunity to obtain the true level of the deposit did not occur until this year. Consequently, the precise position from which the samples were taken could no longer be located, though the general position was located within a few metres. The outcrop along the beach is stratigraphically uniform and fairly flat except for a slight rise at the eastern edge. Thus, the level obtained is believed to be representative of the outcrop as a whole. At the new point of measurement the surface of the deposit is 3-0 m. above standard datum (N.S.W. standard datum is 2-93 ft. or 0-89 m. above Indian Springs Low Water at Fort Denison, Sydney). The tidal range at Narrabeen is approximately the same as at Fort Denison, i.e. 0 to +2-0m., and the clay/mud transition is 2-2 m. above standard datum, the deposit being 80 cm. thick. A second measurement a few metres from the first gave a thickness of 75 cm., compared with 64 cm. at the point of sampling in 1965 when the pollen samples were collected. Allowing for the compression which has taken place during the burial of the sediments under dune sand, the deposit appears to have formed within about 2:3m. of local HHWS. The water level in the existing nearby Deewhy Lagoon was 0-9 m. below the peat base at the time of survey and peat forming at the present day round the margin of the lagoon is approximately 0-6 m. below the base of the peat on the foreshore. One can point to a number of still existing freshwater peat swamps, at levels ranging from several metres higher PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 A. R. H. MARTIN 281 to about 0-5 m. lower than the North Deewhy deposits, in similar areas along the central coast of New South Wales (e.g. Kurnell Peninsula). In each case local water-table conditions determine the level at which peat formation occurs. Needless to say, such deposits cast very limited light on existing sea level. An interesting sidelight of the work is the finding of a few pollen grains of several unexpected plants, e.g. Nothofagus, Rhodomyrtus and cf. Ackama. The two latter seem to represent a coastal rainforest or wet sclerophyll element in the flora. Rainforest remnants still grow on the Narrabeen shales of the Palm Beach Peninsula, e.g. at Bilgola, a few miles to the north of Deewhy, though neither of these genera are now present locally. Nothofagus, on the other hand, appears to represent a long-range component. The grain is of the N. moorei type, the nearest source of which, today, would be the Barrington Tops forests, ca. 200 km. distant. The single grain is unlikely to be a contaminant, as it contains small ferrous sulphide crystals, as do other pollen grains at this level. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I am indebted to the Sydney University Research Committee and to the Nuffield Foundation for grants for palynological research. Thanks are due to Dr. M. Williams and to N. P. Thiem for survey data, and to the N.S.W. Department of Lands for information and maps relating to the height and location of benchmarks. References CHURCHILL, D. M., and SarRJEANT, W. A. S8., 1962.—Fossil Dinoflagellates and Hystrichosphaeres in Australian freshwater deposits. Nat. (Lond.), 194: 1094. Decens, E. T., 1965.—Geochemistry of Sediments. Prentice-Hall, N.J. Housss, C. L., Bren, G. S., and Susss, H. E., 1963.—La Jolla Natural Radiocarbon Measurements. Ill. Radiocarbon, 5: 254-272. Tuom, B. G., Hains, J. R., and Martin, A. R. H., 1969.—Radiocarbon evidence against higher postglacial sea levels in Eastern Australia. Marine Geol., 7: 161-168. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vor. 96, Part 4 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE BRAYTON DISTRICT, NEW SOUTH WALES SUZANNE Y. O’ REILLY Department of Geology and Geophysics, University of Sydney (Communicated by Dr. R. E. Wass) [Accepted for publication 23rd June 1971] (Plate Xv1) Synopsis An angular unconformity separating Upper Ordovician beds from (?) Silurian sediments and basic and acid volcanics has been mapped in the Brayton area. It is shown that the fine- grained silicic igneous rocks constitute a series of contemporaneous volcanic flows within the (?) Silurian succession, a conclusion at variance with earlier opinion. These volcanic rocks and the Marulan batholithic rocks are therefore distinct and separate entities. The hybrid zones of previous workers are re-interpreted as zones of increasing metamorphic grade where intrusion of granitic rocks into the silicic voleanics produced a contact aureole. A Tertiary dolerite body and two Tertiary basaltic flows exhibit closely correlative mineralogy, while the dolerite shows limited upward differentiation. INTRODUCTION The Brayton area lies approximately 130 miles south-west of Sydney, 10 miles north of Marulan. About 12 square miles were mapped in detail as shown may 10m, IL Upper Ordovician slates, quartzites and phyllites have undergone much regional deformation, culminating in an isoclinally folded sequence with a macroscopic meridional trend and approximately vertical dips. The (?) Silurian succession, which includes three distinct units, overlies the Ordovician rocks with angular unconformity. At the base, a series of shales, sandstones and calcareous siltstones with a general north-south strike and steep westward dip outcrop. Succeeding these sediments are basic volcanic flows with rare sedimentary lenses and a small limestone pod. Extensive silicic volcanic flows ranging from toseanites to dacites with some tuff bands comprise the youngest unit. Field and petrological evidence indicates that the (?) Silurian sediments, basic voleanies and silicic volcanics constitute a conformable sequence and have shown synchronous response to low-grade metamorphism and _ regional deformation superimposed on the already deformed Ordovician sequence. Granitic rocks forming part of the Marulan batholithic complex have intruded these Palaeozoic strata, producing contact metamorphic effects within an aureole at least one mile wide. An intermediate dyke of unknown age intrudes one of the granitic bodies. The remaining rocks are Tertiary in age. These include the Billyrambija dolerite, two basalt flows, and the associated Tertiary sediments, which are rich in a fossil flora. PREVIOUS WORKERS First geological observations made in the area were those of Clarke (1845). He stated that the Wollondilly River from its source to the junction with Paddy’s River cut through igneous and metamorphic rocks which were laid bare over a considerable area between the Cookbundoon and the Uringalla. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O'REILLY 283 Craft (1928) recorded that the Lower Palaeozoic rocks of the Wollondilly area are mostly Silurian and Devonian and ‘‘... consist of quartzites, slates and claystones together with some shales and intrusive granites. The general strike is about 10° east of north...”’. Woolnough (1909) investigated the general geology of the Marulan-Tallong district, to the south of Brayton. More detailed petrological studies on the Marulan batholithic rocks at South Marulan were carried out by Osborne (1948). Lovering (1950), Svenson (1950) and Osborne and Lovering (1952) studied in detail the ‘“‘ quartz porphyrites’”’ and ‘‘ quartz porphyrite hybrids’ at South Marulan. These rocks are similar to the silicic voleanics at Brayton. LEGEND Tertiary sandstone. | GEOLOGICAL MAP Tertiary Billyrambija dolerite. SSS Tertiary basalt. Lockyersleigh adamellite. Towrang granodiorite. Brayton volcanics, Silurian zeae Limestone pod. cal OF THE HA / BRAYTON WATT N.S: pevonien| Longreach volcanics. EZ Wollondilly beds. eee SS onde cien [LIL] Ordovician metamorphics . “ih oND ILL S, Basic Dyke. w seae Sear Aplite Dykes and Pods. Geological Boundary -Accurate. ‘ / Da x Geological Boundary -Inferred. Strike and Dip Reading-Overturned, = River. Creeks. Roads. Trig. Station Homesteads. Railway Line. In a series of papers, Naylor (1935a, 1935), 1938, 1939 and 1949) outlned the general geology of the Goulburn district. Of these, the first and last papers are particularly pertinent as rocks of the Brayton area are mentioned. Ordovician and Silurian boundaries, the extent of the Marulan Batholith and Tertiary basic igneous rocks were mapped on a scale of four miles to an inch. No differ- entiation into formations was effected, while the silicic voleanics were included as an integral part of the Marulan Batholith. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 284 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. Browne (1933) first mentioned the dolerite outcropping at Billyrambija Trig., near Brayton. This he considered to represent a denuded Tertiary sill. ORDOVICIAN ROCKS The Ordovician strata are typically highly deformed, have a regional meridional trend, are steeply dipping westward, and contain an Upper Ordovician eraptolite fauna. Primary bedding is defined by alternating layers of dark blue-grey carbonaceous slates and quartzites, both ranging typically from five to 12 feet in thickness. Within the quartzite layers are occasional] fine bands of phyllitic siltstones six inches to 12 inches in width. Structure: These beds probably lie on the overturned limb of a macroscopic fold or fold system which also involves the (?) Silurian sequence. Beds are almost vertical and all foliations measured are steeply dipping. Two fold types are evident on a mesoscopic scale. The first comprises similar folds with attenuated limbs and wider hinge areas. Wavelength is about 10 feet, with a comparable amplitude, the strike of the axial plane being approximately east-west. The axis is vertical ; the fold surface is primary bedding. The second comprises small isoclinal folds with average wavelength approximately one foot and amplitude of two to four inches. The axial plane is vertical and strikes east-west, while axes plunge steeply westward. Slates exhibit greater deformation than the more competent quartzites. The degree and style of deformation are not constant throughout the sequence. Two further penetrative structural elements occur. One is a mineral streaking, approximately axial plane for the small isoclinal folds. The other is a layering defined by lenticular pods and isolated small closures. These show somewhat random orientation, but an overall east-west trend is evident. Age and fauna: The dark grey carbonaceous slates yield two graptolite forms, Climacograptus bicornis and Dicellograptus sp. An age of Upper Gisbornian to Bolindian may thus be deduced (Thomas, 1960). Naylor (1949) previously recognized Climacograptus bicornis, Diplograptus quadrimucronatus and Dicello- graptus complanatus in the vicinity of Brayton, but no precise locality was given. Petrography: The quartzites consist of detrital quartz grains with rare felspar laths in a matrix of sericite and chlorite. Characteristic heavy minerals are smoky blue to blue-green pleochroic tourmaline, brownish-yellow to olive-brown pleochroic hornblende and opaque grains. The matrix, forming up to 40% of the rock, has an incipient microscopic layering. Quartz shows evidence of deformation, including undulose extinction, Bohm lamellae and growth of small strain-free grains at sub-grain boundaries. Strings of tiny inclusions as well as apatite and zircon needles indicate a possible igneous origin for at least some of the quartz. The phyllitic siltstones are compositionally equivalent to the quartzites. Macroscopically, the sheen and crenulations on penetrative surfaces are those of true phyllites. The slates contain quartz (50%), sericite (20°%), carbonaceous matter (18%) and opaque granules with rare zircon and tourmaline. Contact metamorphism: The metamorphic grade attained by the pelitic rocks close to the granitic contact appears to be consistent with that of the hornblende hornfels facies. Quartz-muscovite-biotite-cordierite is the characteristic assemblage. The carbonaceous slates show development of andalusite needles up to 4mm. long. Retrogression of the andalusite to sericite aggregates is ubiquitous. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETy oF NEw SoutH WALES, VOL. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O’REILLY 285 (2) SILURIAN SEQUENCE As the age of this sequence cannot be strictly defined, it is referred to as (?) Silurian thus. The (?) Silurian beds are separated from the Ordovician rocks by a distinct angular unconformity which is discussed in detail below. Three units may be distinguished by lithological differences. These are the Wollondilly beds, Longreach volcanics and Brayton volcanics in ascending stratigraphic order. Their conformity is indicated by structural features including close correspondence of dips, strikes and orientation of the two ubiquitous joint sets. All (?) Silurian rocks show comparable mineralogical adjustments to a low-grade metamorphic environment. Thus synchronous deformation may be inferred. WOLLONDILLY BEDS A measured section extending from the unconformity against Ordovician rocks (29387150)* to the top of the Longreach volcanics (29497150) indicates the thickness of this unit is approximately 2,800 feet. Four hundred feet of calcareous siltstones containing a brachiopod fauna succeed a thin conglomerate band (about five feet thick) which defines the base of the sequence. ‘The remainder consists of interbedded sandstones and shales. Two prominent joint sets of consistent orientation dominate these rocks and bedding is often discernible only as a gross lithological layering. A penetrative cleavage is developed in the fine shale bands. The Wollondilly beds and Ordovician rocks are unconformable. Because of overturning, the Ordovician overlies the (?) Silurian in the field. Angular unconformity is based on the following criteria : (1) The two distinctive faunas indicate an hiatus at least from Upper Ordovician to possibly Upper Llandovery. (2) The lithologies and structural complexity of the Ordovician rocks which must have suffered regional deformation before (?) Silurian sedimentation are distinctive. (3) The trend of the boundary is in places transgressive to the strike of the (2?) Silurian strata and suggests a gently undulating depositional surface. (4) A conglomerate bed at the base of the (?) Silurian sequence contains pebbles from the Ordovician succession. Sedimentary structures including current bedding, small-scale minor graded bedding, load casts and trace fossils indicate the sequence has been overturned. That bedding dips more steeply than the dominant cleavage, if this is axial plane cleavage, also supports overturning. Age and fauna: The calcareous siltstones contain a profuse brachiopod fauna : fossils are abundant parallel to original bedding planes. Preservation is extremely poor but three forms were identified. The first is characterized by ornamentation typical of Atrypa. Absence of further distinctive features precludes determination. The second is a delthyrid brachiopod, internal moulds of pedicle valves being preserved. Thus a maximum time span from Lower Silurian to Middle Devonian is indicated. This brachiopod could be Hovwellella sp., which would refine the time interval to from Upper Llandovery to Gedinnian. However, identification is not unequivocal due to the absence of definitive brachial valves. The remaining brachiopod occurs as internal moulds of brachial valves and has features consistent with those of Schuchertella sp., which is a Lower Devonian form (N. M. Savage, pers. comm.). The unconformity between Ordovician and (?) Silurian beds is thus firmly established on faunal grounds. Because generic attribution cannot be positively made, the sediments containing the brachiopod fauna are tentatively called (7) Silurian. * Grid references refer to the Goulburn I : 250,000 sheet SI 55-12. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrEty oF NEw SourtH Watss, Vout. 96, Part 4 2386 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. Naylor (1949) considered these beds to be Lower Silurian, based on the lithological similarity with the Jerrara Beds near Bungonia, which yields a Lower Silurian graptolite fauna. He assigned an Upper Silurian age to the limestone pod in the Longreach volcanics because of the profusion of Upper Silurian limestones in the Goulburn district. Petrography: The calcareous siltstones consist of approximately 30° carbonate, 30°% quartz, 20% plagioclase and 20%, interstitial chloride. Subangular quartz eranules are generally less than 0-:1mm. across, and show serrated edges. Plagioclase laths up to 0-3 mm. long are An)_; where unaltered to chlorite and zeolitic minerals. Carbonate occurs as granular aggregates possibly detrital in origin and as patches up to 0-5mm. across, apparently replacing original matrix. Authigenic chlorite occurs as a cement. Where developed, massive or spherulitic aggregates of chlorite randomly replace plagioclase and original matrix. The chlorite is pale green, non-pleochroic and isotropic. Detritus and matrix of the sandstones and shales are identical, only grain- size being distinct. Quartz, felspar, zircon and hornblende, tourmaline and opaque grains comprise the detritus. Grains are subangular and sorting is fair. Quartz (60° to 70°) is of two types: angular grains with sharp extinction and subangular grains with undulose extinction and sometimes showing sub- grain development. These grains also contain strings of tiny particles and acicular zircon crystals. Marginal serration of all quartz is typical. Felspar ranges from 5% to 20% in mode and is extensively altered to sericite and chlorite. Some show vestiges of multiple twinning but composition cannot be determined due to alteration. Interstitial material includes abundant sericite as fibrous aggregates which often encroach on detrital plagioclase margins. A colourless or pale green isotropic chlorite is subordinate. This cement constitutes up to 20% of the rock. Contact metamorphism: The metamorphic rocks may be divided broadly into lower and higher grade assemblages dependent on distance from the granitic contact. Only original sandstones and shales outcrop within the aureole and observed assemblages are as follows : (1) Lower grade : Quartz-albite-muscovite-biotite Quartz-muscovite-chlorite-opaque minerals (2) Higher grade : Quartz-muscovite-cordierite-biotite K-felspar-biotite-plagioclase-corundum. Different assemblages probably reflect the original composition of the sediment, although no silica-poor rocks were found outside the aureole. Lower grade rocks are consistent with parageneses of the albite-epidote hornfels facies, those of higher grade rocks generally le in the hornblende hornfels facies. However, where potassium felspar is associated with corundum, pyroxene hornfels facies may be indicated. LONGREACH VOLCANICS The Longreach volcanics comprise a series of basaltic flows best exposed at 29567088. Outcrops extend over about half a mile between the Wollondilly beds and the Brayton volcanics. As flows are now vertical, this represents the thickness of the sequence. Small bands of sediment occur rarely between these flows and a small limestone pod outcrops at 29637092. Trend of flows is meridional, while two sets of prominent vertical joints are developed with orientations consistently 290° and 245°, as in the Wollondilly beds. At 29557057 basaltic dykes transect the Wollondilly beds. These intrusions may represent feeder dykes for the flows of the Longreach volcanics as they show PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WaAteEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O’REILLY 287 analogous low-grade alteration. Dykes show no preferred orientation and thus were not controlled by any pre-existing structural elements. Petrography: The basalts are extensively altered and similar to spilitic basalts in fabric, mineralogy, chemistry and geological occurrence—the four criteria discussed by Vallance (1960). Three distinct types of alteration are evident, based on the dominant phases: (a) chlorite-epidote-tremolite, (6) chlorite, and (c) prehnite-calcite. Mutual gradations exist with no systematic distribution of alteration types. The basalts generally show an intersertal texture with glomeroporphyritic aggregates of augite, plagioclase or augite and plagioclase. Flow foliation is evident but often obscured by alteration ; amygdales abound. A subvariolitic texture is common (e.g. 33692*). Quartz xenocrysts are abundant; these generally show no mantling by pyroxene or evidence of reaction. Plagioclase occurs as microlites, laths and glomeroporphyritic aggregates of laths up to 1 mm. long, with composition about An;. Swallow-tail terminations indicate rapid chilling. Relict augite crystals have 2Vx=60°, Z\c=40° and are colourless. Subhedral grains range from 0:5 mm. to 2:0 mm. across; glomero- porphyritic aggregates are common. The original mesostasis has been almost completely obliterated. It was probably glassy to cryptocrystalline ; 33692 Shows glass shards pseudomorphed by chlorite. Felspar microlites, tremolite needles, turbid sphene granules, chlorite and a felted layer silicate now constitute the groundmass. A typical chlorite-tremolite-epidote assemblage is present in 33694. Hpidote occurs aS granular aggregates, prismatic crystals or sheaves of bladed crystals. Colourless granules replace plagioclase, but most epidote lines or fills amygdales. Optical properties are highly variable, often within the one crystal, some being pleochroic from bright to pale yellow with 2Vx—70°, some being colourless with 2V,—15°. Two types of chlorite are present. One is colourless and isotropic, the other pleochroic from pale blue-green to pale yellow-green and shows brilliant anomalous blue interference colours. The chlorite generally replaces augite but may also infill or line amygdales. Tremolite occurs as felted aggregates of acicular needles (ca. 0-2 mm. long) in amygdales, as tiny needles (less than 0-1 mm. long) in the groundmass and as large rods associated with altered augite. It is generally colourless, but larger laths may be faintly pleochroic from colourless to pale blue-green. 2Vx is about 80°, ZAc is about 20°. Rare prehnite occurs as spherulites replacing augite and groundmass or infilling amygdales. Dominant chloritic alteration is shown in 33687 and 33682. Relict augite and original glass shards (e.g. 33692-3) are altered to pale green chlorite showing brilliant purple anomalous interference colours. Amygdales are typically infilled with calcite or quartz, with or without chlorite. Felspar laths are extensively sericitized. Prehnite-calcite alteration is typified by 33690-1. Here felspar shows no clouding. Augite is much altered to radiating sheaves of prehnite closely associated with patches of chlorite. Prehnite is optically positive with 2V ranging from 40° to 60° within a crystal. A pinkish hue in plane polarized light may be due to included haematite. Prehnite occurs as spherulites about 0-3 mm. in diameter, replacing augite and groundmass non-selectively. It also occurs as Massive or sheaf prehnite where it pseudomorphs phenocrysts, appears not to replace the groundmass and is invariably rimmed by opaque grains. Abundant calcite is intimately associated with sheaves of prehnite and also occurs as ragged anhedra up to 3mm. across and as amygdale infillings. Tremolite, sphene and epidote are present in the groundmass. Small orange spherulites are dotted * Five-figure numbers used throughout the text refer to rocks in the Sydney University Geology Department collection. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or NEw SoutrH WaAtsEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 288 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. sparsely throughout the prehnite. Amygdale assemblages include laumontite (?)- prehnite-calcite and quartz-calcite-chlorite-opaque minerals. Contact metamorphics: In the lower grade rocks (e.g. 33701, 33709, 33711) the characteristic assemblage includes tremolite-actinolite, plagioclase, calcite, quartz, minor sphene and opaque grains. Plagioclase-actinolite-calcite assemblages appear to be analogous to patches of prehnite-epidote-chlorite in rocks outside the aureole. Plagioclase (ca. An,,) occurs as granoblastic aggregates of anhedral grains and as tiny laths in the groundmass. Tremolite- actinolite pseudomorphs original glomeroporphyritic pyroxene and occurs as a felt of tiny laths and needles replacing the original mesostasis. It is pleochroic with X=pale yellow-green, Y=colourless, Z=pale blue-green. 2Vx is 80°: ZAc ranges from 15° to 20°. Refractive index @ is 1-620. The higher grade rocks develop two distinctive types of assemblages, one abundant in pyroxene, the other dominated by hornblende and plagioclase. Both types still retain features of the original basaltic fabric. The texture is invariably blastoporphyritic ; original amygdales and quartz xenocrysts are recognizable, although both are recrystallized and the former have mineralogically adjusted. The patchy, variolitic aspect of the flows is also preserved. Hornblende-plagioclase rocks are the more abundant. The mineral assemblage comprises hornblende, plagioclase, quartz, sphene, epidote, opaques, potassium felspar and sphene. Hornblende pseudomorphs original augite glomeroporphs, occurs as discrete rods up to 2 mm. long and forms a groundmass network. Pleochroism with X=yellow, Y=bright yellow-green, Z—blue-green is distinctive. 2Vx is high, ca. 85°, Zc is ca. 20° to 24°. Retrogression to a yellow uralitic product ranges from incipient to extensive. Plagioclase, An,, to An,, occurs as euhedral laths up to 0-5 mm. long. Pyroxene-rich assemblages occur as veins or patches in the normal hornblende-plagioclase rocks. Minerals present are diopside, rare hedenbergite, plagioclase (An;,), calcite, scapolite, hornblende, sphene, garnet, epidote and rare opaque granules. BRAYTON VOLCANICS The youngest unit within the (?) Silurian succession represents a period of silicic voleanic activity. Toscanites, dacites and tuffs, which extend beyond the area mapped, outcrop over about one mile normal to strike. As the sequence is now vertical, this represents a thickness of 5,000 feet. Evidence for vertical tilting is based on (a) marked variation in rocks types on a foot scale strati- graphically, while a few distinctive flow types may be traced for over a mile in a north-south direction and (b) the apparent conformity of all the (?) Silurian rocks. Age and geological relationships: The silicic voleanics were extruded prior to emplacement of the Marulan batholithic rocks. Contact of the Brayton volcanics with the granitic rocks is sharply delineated and intrusion by the Lockyersleigh adamellite is undoubted, as evidenced by the metamorphic effects discussed below. Four factors are most significant : (1) These rocks are extrusive as is first indicated by their conformity with the Wollondilly beds and the Longreach volcanics. The Brayton volcanics form an integral part of the stratigraphy. (2) Recognition of flow units, presence of tuff bands, flow lineation (Plate XVI, fig. 1) and relict glass shards (Plate xvi, fig. 2) indicate a volcanic origin. Evidence for extrusion is observed in several exposures whose brecciated nature indicates explosive activity. Angular toscanite fragments (1 in. to 6 in. across) are separated by a network of essentially epidote-hornblende domains up to1 in. in width. This network probably represents original glass which formed a groundmass for the breccia. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocIETY OF NEW SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O'REILLY 2389 Subsequent low grade alteration effected chemical redistribution involving both glass and breccia fragments. The intrusive nature of the granitic rocks demonstrates the older age of the Brayton volcanics. That considerable time intervenes is a logical result of the conformity of the whole (?) Silurian sequence. A period of structural deformation and low grade rock alteration must have occurred before introduction of the granitic rocks. As discussed above, the Brayton volcanics are tentatively assigned to the Upper Silurian although a Lower Devonian age is not precluded. The age of the Marulan Batholith on present data may be pre-Upper Devonian to Carboniferous (see below). (4) Chemical evidence is inconclusive as the two chemical analyses available (Osborne and Lovering, 1952) demand no genetic relationship between the silicic volcanics and granitic rocks. In summary, the extrusive nature and approximate time of extrusion indicate that the Brayton volcanics and the Marulan batholithic rocks are discrete entities. This departs from the concepts of previous workers, notably Woolnough (1909), Naylor (1935a) and Osborne and Lovering (1952), who considered the silicic volcanics to be shallow intrusions intimately associated in time and possibly comagmatic with rocks of the Marulan Batholith. Petrography: Mesoscopically the silicic volcanics are fine to medium grained and range from dark grey green to greenish blue; flow foliation is sometimes visible. Phenocrysts of euhedral quartz, zoned plagioclase, alkali felspar, hornblende and biotite averaging 1 mm. to 4 mm. in length are set in an aphanitic groundmass. Microscopically, many of these silicic volcanics are tuffaceous with fragmented phenocrysts in a once glassy mesostasis. Primary phenocrysts are quartz, plagioclase, alkali felspar, biotite, hornblende and rare pyroxene. Accessories include opaque oxides, sulphides, zircon and apatite. Quartz phenocrysts up to 4mm. across constitute 10% to 30% of the rock and typically show embayments. EHuhedral outlines suggest an original phase. Strings of tiny particles and inclusions of felspar, zircon and apatite are common. Fracturing of phenocrysts and undulatory extinction are characteristic. Plagioclase (10°% to 30% of the rock) occurs as subhedral laths and angular fragments, both compositionally identical. Hxtensive alteration to carbonate, sericite, epidote, prehnite and zeolites often obscures original compositions. Where determinations are possible cores are andesine and rims albite. Small laths are albitic (An,_,) while larger grains show patchy albitization. Potassic felspar phenocrysts are not abundant but locally may reach 207% in some flows. Usually the potassic felspar is surrounded by a rim about 0-2 mm. wide of albite as indicated by staining. Alteration to sericite and carbonate is widespread. Biotite (0-10°%) occurs as phenocrysts and replacing hornblende. Laths may reach 2mm. long. Most show kinked cleavages and shredding parallel to the basal cleavage. Hornblende phenocrysts are rare and often represented by small relict patches in areas of alteration. Pleochroism from olive green to mid brown is sometimes evident. Rare hypersthene may have been present more abundantly before alteration. The growndmass is typically cryptocrystalline and exhibits excellent flow structures. Staining shows, where grain size is resolvable, a granophyric (or granoblastic, if devitrified) intergrowth of quartz, potassic felspar and albite. Devitrified glass shards, following flow lineations, may constitute 50°% of the mesostasis. Arcuate lenses of minutely crystalline quartz and more rarely alkali felspar appear to result from devitrification (e.g. 33729). Here, lenticular areas consist of parallel rows of tiny zeolite needles. Replacement of shards by chlorite has also taken place. e PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH WatsEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 290 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. The classification of these silicic volcanics as toscanites and dacites with tuffaceous equivalents is based on observed modes now evident in the rocks. Contact metamorphism—Petrography : The Brayton volcanics exhibit the effects of contact metamorphism in four main ways: (1) Grain growth of the mesostasis obliterates all evidence of primary structures. A granoblastic intergrowth of quartz and alkali felspar with minor biotite replaces the original groundmass. Original mafic phenocrysts show progressive changes. Low grade alteration of pre-existing hornblende, pyroxene and biotite produced prehnite, sphene, chlorite, opaque grains and epidote prior to contact metamorphism. Approach to the granitic contact shows development of green “‘ biotite ’’ (interlayered chlorite and mica ?), then hornblende, or brown biotite. Contact metamorphism of minerals in veins previously formed by low grade alteration, produced assemblages such as epidote-diopside-garnet- amphibole-quartz-albite. (4) Annealing recrystallization of large strained embayed quartz grains is evident (see Plate xiv, fig. 3). Three broad zones which represent an increase in metamorphic response are observable progressing towards the adamellite contact. Their recognition is based on the degree of recrystallization of the groundmass and mineralogical changes. 33635 is typical of silicic volcanics on the outer edge of the aureole. The eroundmass shows moderate recrystallization with no remaining flow structures. No zeolite phases persist and tiny flakes of pale green amphibole are scattered throughout. Quartz phenocrysts are unaffected, alkali felspars are extensively altered to sericitic patches, while plagioclase is mostly albitic and clouded with epidote, carbonate, chlorite and _ sericite. Original mafic phenocrysts are completely pseudomorphed by epidote associated with cloudy aggregates of sphene and leucoxene, or interlocking felts or pale green mica with flakes of blue green amphibole and minor epidote. 33648 shows a successive metamorphic response. The groundmass grain size has increased but quartz is still unaffected. Potassic felspar is completely altered to sericite and tiny quartz blebs. Original phenocrysts are all rimmed by a narrow zone, 0-1 mm. wide, of clear albite granules. Green-brown biotite and subordinate green chlorite occur. Outlines of original euhedral phenocrysts are no longer sharply defined. The highest metamorphic grade attained is shown in 33740 and 33755, which exhibit hornblende-rich and biotite-rich assemblages respectively. The ground- mass is granoblastic and the assemblages indicate probable attainment of upper hornblende hornfels facies conditions. Potassic felspar grains are not extensively altered and both felspars show incipient recrystallization. Quartz grains (see Plate xvi, fig. 3) show annealing crystallization where grains were originally Strained. 33740 contains clots and strings of hornblende laths up to 0-1 mm. long. These are pleochroic with X—deep blue green, Y=dark olive green and Z—=pale yellow green. 2V:x is ca. 70°, ZAc is ca. 20°. Associated sphene granules abound. 33755 exhibits decussate aggregates of biotite (Plate XVI, fig. 4) with each lath up to 0-5mm. long. Rare amphibole laths and opaque grains may be associated with biotite, while sphene is absent. Opaque grains, zircon and apatite are constant accessories. Thin sections 33645 to 33652 are representative of the explosive breccia discussed above. This outcrops at 29587139, close to the adamellite contact. Silicic voleanic fragments show zonation with an inner core of normal dacite or toscanite surrounded by a quartzofelspathic outer rim up to 15mm. wide (2 — (3 — PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY oF NEw SoutH WaAtEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O’REILLY 291 comprising a zone leached of mafic constituents. These are set in a “ ground- mass’ of granular intergrowths of diopside, hedenbergite and epidote which may be penetrated by laths of amphibole. Irregular, clear quartz blebs, carbonate patches and garnet grains are evident. Rare porphyroblasts of albite occur, while tiny opaque and sphene granules may be locally abundant. These con- trasted compositions arise from an original chemically homogeneous rock as indicated by the migration of mafic components from fragment peripheries. While the inner core of fragments is compositionally equivalent to the normal silicic volcanics, their leached rims are higher in alkali and silica content, and the inter-fragment area is enriched in iron, calcium and magnesium. It has been suggested above that this breccia formed by explosive volcanic activity. Devitrification at low temperatures and pressures prior to granitic intrusions initiated chemical reorganization mainly involving the ‘‘ groundmass ”’ but also affecting fragment rims. The granite subsequently produced the observed assemblages (cf. Vallance, 1967). Metamorphism and previous concepts: The relationship of the granitic rocks to the silicic volcanics closely parallels that of the granodiorite and ‘‘ porphyrites ”’ south of Marulan. They were studied in detail by Osborne and Lovering (1952) and Svenson (1950), following Woolnough’s (1909) general observations. Osborne and Lovering (1952) considered the ‘‘ porphyrites ”’ were intruded as a high-level sill into Lower Palaeozoic country rocks. With the ‘‘ porphyrites ”’ still at elevated temperatures, intrusion of the granodiorite took place. Through slow cooling hybridization by interaction of magma and porphyrite ensued. Three ‘‘ hybrid zones ”’ were developed exhibiting mutual gradations representing successive degrees of hybridization. This process involved migration of soda from the magma to be deposited as albite rims in the hybrids. Extensive hydrothermai activity supplied ‘‘ vigorous solutions ’’ which effected formation of epidote, sericite and chlorite in hybrid ‘‘ porphyrites”’. Diffusion into hybrids of TiO, and alkalis as well as concentration of CaO and MgO to produce hornblende and biotite was also invoked. Analyses of one porphyrite, two hybrids and the granodiorite were recorded. No evidence of such chemical interaction was detected between rocks of the Brayton volcanics and the Lockyersleigh adamellite. A similar relationship was noted by Gould (1966) and Wass and Gould (1968) between the Tangerang voleanies and Glenrock granodiorite at South Marulan. The silicic voleanics show both extensive alteration and response to contact metamorphism. Observed characters may be attributed to a metamorphic progression towards the granite contact in rocks already altered rather than to development of ‘‘ hybrid zones’. These zones are probably correlative with the three stages of metamorphism discussed above. Compositional variations may be due to redistribution of components during previous low grade alteration and intrinsic chemical differences in individual flows. The sodic rims on alkali felspars do not necessitate addition of sodium. This phenomenon occurs even in rocks removed from the influence of the granitic rocks and may represent complete subsolvus unmixing of sodic and potassic phases. Formation of hornblende and biotite clots near the granitic contact does not require concentration of CaO and MgO as the chlorite and epidote of outer zones could contribute required components. Thus the present study of the Brayton volcanics indicates that a metamorphic progression rather than development of hybrid zones accounts for textures and mineral assemblages observed. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Socrety oF NEw SoutH Watges, Vou. 96, Part 4 292 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. IGNEOUS INTRUSIONS Two components of the Marulan batholithic complex are represented. These are the Lockyersleigh adamellite and Towrang granodiorite. A contact meta- morphic aureole up to one mile in width is developed. Metamorphic assemblages produced in the intruded rocks have been discussed within each rock unit. Lockyersleigh Adamellite The Lockyersleigh adamellite was mapped over approximately three square miles (Fig. 1), but extends considerably southwards. Where exposed, contacts with country rock are sharp. Silicic volcanics of the Brayton volcanics were intruded by this adamellite and are cut by leucocratic veins derived from the intrusion. In places, exposures must be close to the roof of the intrusion as fine-grained phases are evident. Aplitic dykes, representing late-stage crystal- lization of the adamellite, contain miarolitic cavities lined with alkali felspar, smoky quartz and tourmaline crystals. Veins of epidote up to 2mm. wide occur throughout the adamellite. Petrography: The adamellite is holocrystalline, hypidiomorphic granular and shows a porphyritic texture with phenocrysts of alkali felspar, plagioclase, quartz and, rarely, biotite or hornblende. These minerals are duplicated in the ground- mass. Abundant sphene, opaque grains, epidote, zircon, apatite and alteration products including chlorite, carbonate, and sheaves of muscovite and prehnite are present. Quartz generally constitutes 30° to 40% of the rock. Phenocrysts are up to 4mm. across, anhedral and often embayed. Undulose extinction, Bohm striae and development of strain-free grains are common. Potassium felspar constitutes about 30% of the rock. Subhedral phenocrysts range from 4mm. to 10mm. long. The optic axial plane is perpendicular to (010); 2Vx is approximately 50°; extinction on (001) is parallel to (010) cleavage, and on (010) ranges from 7 °” to 9°. Thus the felspar is monoclinic or has very low triclinicity. The latter is doubtful as ‘‘ tartan’ twinning is absent (Laves, 1950). The composition lies in the range Or,, ..Ab+An,; 3, (Tuttle, 1952), and thus the felspar is an orthoclase low-albite perthite. Film and vein perthites are well developed: myrmekitic intergrowths are common. Plagioclase forms about 30°%% of the rock. Phenocrysts (2mm. to 4mm. long) show consistent core/rim compositional ranges of about An;, to about An,, respectively. Hornblende (absent in the Towrang granodiorite) occurs sporadically as euhedra or ragged subhedra; a reaction relationship giving biotite is often observed. It is pleochroic X=pale yellow, Y—grass green, Z—olive green. 2Vx is approxi- mately 70°. Biotite comprises up to 5°%% of the rock. Pleochroism is X =orange brown, Y =pale straw yellow, Z=deep speckled chocolate brown. 2V xis approxi- mately 10°. Alteration to chlorite, muscovite, prehnite, carbonate and granular epidote is common. Modal sphene may reach 5%. It occurs as granular aggregates, but commonly as euhedra 0-5 mm. to 2mm. long. Sphene is more abundant where hornblende is locally in excess of biotite. The intergranular groundmass forms 20% to 40% of the rock and comprises all mineral phases present in the rock. Towrang Granodiorite This granodiorite forms a small stock exposed at 294712. In outcrop it is approximately elliptical with east-west elongation. About one mile west of the area and one mile north of Towrang, a similar granodiorite is evident. These two masses may represent a single intrusion. The relationship with the Lockyersleigh adamellite is obscure because of poor outcrop on the boundary. The grey and white rock is quite uniform in hand specimen although occasional pegmatite patches are noted. These occur PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O’REILLY 293 as veneer-like pods up to one foot in diameter, but never exceeding one inch in thickness. Distinct from the Lockyersleigh adamellite, no tourmaline occurs in the granodiorite but pyrite is common in the pegmatite phases. Petrography : In thin section the rock is holocrystalline, allotriomorphic granular. Minerals present are quartz, plagioclase, potassium felspar, biotite, opaque orains and accessory epidote, sphene, apatite, zircon, carbonate and muscovite. Quartz constitutes 30% to 40% of the mode and is typically anhedral and interstitia] although grains may obtain a maximum diameter of 3 mm. Well-developed Bohm lamellae and mosaic textures are evident. Plagioclase occurs as poorly terminated subhedra from 1mm. to 4mm. long and constitutes up to 40°% of the mode. Compositions range from an average of An,, for the most calcic cores to An, for outermost rims. Broad antiperthitic veins show rare development. Some large plagioclase grains have highly resorbed cores which appear to be accumulophyric. Vance (1962) attributes such textures to “ patchy zoning is arising from an intense phase of uneven resorption and subsequent re-precipitation and infilling by more sodic plagioclase. In rare grains with resorbed cores mosaic domains in optical continuity produce a patchiness on a 0-1 mm. scale and appear to control or be controlled by twin lamellae. Potassium felspar constitutes 20° to 30% of the rock and occurs as anhedra up to 4mm. across. The optic axial plane is perpendicular to (010) and straight extinction of (001) indicates a monoclinic structure. Extinction on (010) of 10° to 12° indicates a composition Or,,Ab-++An,, to Or,,Ab+An,,. Perthitic textures are variably developed: albitic rims and large segregations are rare while no myrmekite was detected. Biotite tends to occur in aggregates and represents no more than 5° of the mode. Laths (0-2 to 1:0mm. long) are pleochroic with X—=straw yellow, Y=red-brown, Z—chocolate brown. Inclusions of zircon and apatite euhedra are common. Emplacement and Age Employing the genetic classification of Tuttle and Bowen (1958), the Lockyersleigh adamellite and the Towrang granodiorite both represent subsolvus or group II granites. All features observed are characteristic of plutons emplaced in epizonal regions (Buddington, 1959). The age of these intrusions can only be determined broadly as post-Brayton volcanics (Upper Silurian to Lower Devonian) and pre-Tertiary. Regarding the Marulan batholithic complex as a whole, Naylor (1939) records Upper Devonian sediments with a typical Lambiai fauna, resting unconformably on granitic rocks near Taralga and Bungonia. At South Marulan quarry, Upper Silurian limestone is metamorphosed by granite. Thus an age of Lower to Middle Devonian may be inferred on stratigraphic evidence. However, Evernden and Richards (1962), using the K/Ar ratio of constituent biotite of a granodiorite from Bungonia, determined an age of 307Xx10°® years (Carboniferous). This apparent anomaly may be due to non-contemporaneity of all phases comprising the Marulan batholithic complex or to loss of original argon. TERTIARY ROCKS Two basaltic flows (see Fig. 1), the Billyrambija dolerite mass and scattered sediments represent Tertiary rocks present. Age of the igneous rocks is inferred from their intimate association with sediments containing Tertiary flora and from their petrological affinity to basaltic rocks in the Moss Vale region which have a Tertiary age as shown by potassium-argon dating (P. Wellman, pers. comm.). PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WaAtEs, Vow. 96, Part 4 294 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. Tertiary Sediments Isolated small outcrops of Tertiary sediment are associated with the Billyrambija dolerite where they occur mainly at the base and the 100 feet contour level, and with the two flows. Lamination of relatively fine and coarse fractions on a centimetre scale is marked, each layer often exhibiting graded bedding. Detritus comprises dominant volcanic, plutonic and reworked quartz grains, together with altered felspar grains and aggregates, while hornblende, epidote and muscovite are accessories. This detritus appears to be derived directly from nearby sources such as the Brayton volcanics, the silicic intrusions and the Ordovician or (?) Silurian sediments. Extreme angularity of grains suggests little transportation. The interstitial material may be partly matrix and partly cement and constitutes from 20° to 30% of the rock. It consists of very fine- grained, heavily iron-stained siliceous material. The flora is poorly preserved, but most specimens are dicotyledonous leaves belonging to the Cinnamomum flora. One well-preserved fragment is similar to Cinnamomum polymorphoides, McCoy, 1874. That the leaves may be placed in the family Lawraceae and compared with species of Cinnamomum is indicated by comparison with similar but well-preserved fossil leaves from Wingello, which are considered to belong to the Cinnamomum flora (D. Selkirk, pers. comm.). This flora is Tertiary or, less probably, late Cretaceous in age. However, such leaves are termed Tertiary as geologists, on topographic and physiographic evidence, have considered closely associated basalts to be Tertiary. The gradual accumulation of potassium- -argon dating of such basalts (e.g. McDougall and Wilkinson, 1967) supports this in general and thus, with available data, it seems reasonable to consider these sediments Tertiary. Billyrambya Dolerite The Billyrambija dolerite has a maximum exposed height of 340+10 feet and outcrops in an approximately circular pattern with a diameter of one mile. Field relations do not provide conclusive evidence on the mode of emplacement. However, it is suggested that it may represent a very high level intrusion, possibly disrupting unconsolidated sediment and reaching the surface in places. This is supported by the presence of chilled phases which form randomly placed knolls and shoulders, and the presence of blocks of Tertiary sediment at the 100 feet contour line which show random bedding orientations. Three components of the dolerite are recognized : chilled phases, dykes and the main dolerite body. The chilled phases occur associated with Tertiary sediment and are mineralogically comparable to the dolerite. Phenocrysts of titanaugite rarely exceed 2 mm. in diameter ; olivines are typically skeletal and clouded with inclusions, are unzoned and have a composition about Fo,, (8=1-680-40-003). Plagioclase (Ang core to An,, margin) is abundant and laths often show swallow-tail terminations. The groundmass is extremely fine-grained but tiny pyroxene and opaque granules are evident. Dyke rocks are distinctive in mineralogy and field occurrence. Dykes apparently intruding the dolerite can usually be traced over a vertical height of 20 feet and vary from five feet to one foot in width. Wider dykes exhibit chilled margins. Euhedral titanaugite, olivine and plagioclase (core An,,, margin An, )) are set in a fine-grained groundmass dominantly composed of aegirine-augite and magnetite. Pyroxene phenocrysts may be mantled by aegirine-augite and are often densely clouded with magnetite granules. Olivine phenocrysts are zoned from Fo,, to Fo,, (core and margin respectively). Amygdales abound in dyke rocks and are filled with thomsonite, chabazite, natrolite, analcite, prehnite or clay minerals. The Billyrambija dolerite comprises pyroxene (35-40%), olivine (13-28%), plagioclase (14-25°%) and opaque grains (3%) set in a mesostasis (14-25°%) of PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 SUZANNE Y. O'REILLY 295 zeolites, tiny opaque granules, laths of K-felspar, flakes of aegirine and (2) kaersutite, analcite and secondary chlorite. Apatite needles up to 0-5 mm long abound. Titanaugite euhedra occur in two generations. Those of the first generation reach 5mm. across, may occur singly or in glomeroporphyritic aggregates, and are commonly sub- “ophitically indented by plagioclase. Inclusions of a cubic iron-titanium oxide, olivine and a colourless (?) pyroxene are common. Pleo- chroism with X =pinkish yellow, Y =pink, Z=mauve-pink is variable in intensity. Well-developed hour-glass structures are present. Zoning is striking and generally limited to the outer few millimetres of the large euhedra. Second generation pyroxenes are prismatic and reach a length of 0-5 mm., lack significant zoning, and are optically identical to the outer margins of large pyroxenes. Olivine also occurs in two distinct generations, as subhedral to anhedral grains up to 0-5 mm. across and as euhedra up to 2mm. long. The latter have compositions from about Fo,, to Fo,. as determined by refractive index and X-ray methods. Plagioclase occurs as euhedral, zoned laths 0-5-2-0 mm. long. Cores exhibit compositional variation with upward progression from An,; to cae rims being up to 15 mol. per cent. richer in Ab. Opaque minerals identified were ilmenite and titanomagnetite. Ilmenite occurs as laths which may be sub-dendritic in habit and represent 10° of opaque minerals present. Titanomagnetite occurs as octahedra up to 0-:2mm. wide. Compositions were estimated by measuring cell edges and using the curve of Basta (1957). Titanomagnetite from the lowest level was approximately 96% Fe,TiO,, that from the highest level 70% Fe,TiO,. Modal analyses indicate that mild differentiation may have taken place within the dolerite body: there is an upward decrease in mode of olivine and plagioclase and increase in volume percentage of mesostasis. This is supported by the limited and preliminary (crop O stun data on the plagioclases and titanomagnetites. Tertiary Basaltic Flows Two tertiary basaltic flows are evident (Fig. 1). The southerly flow is petrographically identical with the chilled phase of the Billyrambija dolerite. Perhaps the original extent of this latter body was greater than now observed, this flow representing a southerly projection of the Billyrambija dolerite. The northerly flow is petrographically distinct, although still a typical alkali basalt. Extensive alteration, mainly due to weathering, has taken place. Pyroxene is rare ; olivine euhedra up to 1-0 mm. long comprise 10°% of the rock and are extensively altered. Plagioclase laths (30°% of the rock) are zoned from An, (core) to An,,; (margin) and define a flow lineation. The groundmass may have been glassy ; felspar microlites abound as well as fine opaque particles. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I wish to thank Associate Professor T. G. Vallance, who supervised the project, and who with Dr. R. H. Vernon critically read the manuscript. Laboratory facilities at the University of Sydney were made available by Professor C. E. Marshall. References Basta, E. Z., 1957.—Accurate determination of the cell dimensions of magnetite. Mzneralog. Mag., 31: 431-442. Browne, W. R., 1933.—An account of post-Paleozoic igneous activity in New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 67: 9-95. Buppineton, A. F., 1959.—Granite emplacement with special reference to North America. Bull. geol. Soc. Amer., 70: 671-747. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 296 PETROLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY, BRAYTON DISTRICT, N.S.W. CLARKE, W. B., 1845.—On dykes of marble and quartz in connection with plutonic rock on the Upper Wollondilly in Argyle County, New South Wales. Q. Jl. geol. Soc. Lond., 1: 342-344. CraFt, F. A., 1928.—Physiography of the Wollondilly River Basin. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 53: 618-650. EVERNDEN, J. F., and Ricuarps, J. R., 1962.—Potassium-Argon ages in eastern Australia. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 9: 1—50. GouLp, I. G., 1966.—The general geology of an area south of Marulan. Unpubl. hons. thesis, University of Sydney. LavEs, F., 1950.—The lattice and twinning of microcline and other potash feldspars. J. geol. | 58: 548-571. Loverinec, J. F., 1950.—Contribution to a study of the Marulan Batholith. Unpubl. hons. thesis, University of Sydney. McDoveatt, I., and Witxrinson, J. F. G., 1967.—Potassium-Argon dates on some Cainozoic voleanic rocks from north-eastern New South Wales. J. geol. Soc. Aust., 14: 225-233. Naytor, G. F. K., 1935a.—Note on the geology of the Goulburn district with special reference to Palaeozoic stratigraphy. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W., 69: 75-85. , 1935b.—The Palaeozoic sediments near Bungonia ; their field relations and graptolite fauna. Tbid., 69: 123-134. , 1938.—Graptolites of the Goulburn district. Jbid., 72: 129-135. , 1939.—The age of the Marulan Batholith. Jbid., 73: 82-85. , 1949. A further contribution to the geology of the Goulburn district. Jbid., 83: 279-287. OsBorRNE, G. D., 1948.—The contaminated granodiorites of South Marulan and Marulan Creek, Part 1. Jbid., 82: 116-128. ; , and LovERING, J. F., 1952.—Contributions to a study of the Marulan Batholith. Ibid. 86: 108-118. Svenson, D., 1950.—Contribution to a study of the Marulan district. Unpubl. hons. thesis, University of Sydney. Tuomas, D. E., 1960.—The zonal distribution of Australian graptolites. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W.., 94: 1-58. TuTTLeE, O. F., 1952.—Optical studies on alkali felspars. Am. J. Sci... Bowen Volume: 553-567. , and Bowen, N. L., 1957.—Origin of granite in the light of experimental studies in the system NaAIS8i03;-KAI8i03-Si0,-H,O0. Mem. geol. Soc. Amer., 74. VALLANCE, T. G., 1960.—Concerning spilites. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 85: 8-52. , 1967.—Mafic rock alteration and isochemical development of some cordierite-antho- phyllite rocks. J. Petrology, 8: 84-96. VANCE, J. A., 1962.—Zoning in igneous Plagioclase-normal and oscillatory zoning. Am. J. Scv., 260: 746-760. Wass, R. E., and Goutp, I. G., 1968.—Permian faunas and sediments from the South Marulan district, New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 93: 212-226. WootnoucH, W. G., 1909.—The general geology of Marulan and Tallong, New South Wales. Ibid., 34: 782-808. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEw SourH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 96, Part 4 PLATE XVI EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI 1. Flow foliation in an altered dacite outside the contact aureole, 33729. x 45. 2. Devitrified glass shards in a dacitie tuff outside the contact aureole, 33734. x 45. 3. Embayed quartz phenocryst showing incipient recrystallization in a dacite within the contact aureole, 33728. x45. 4. Biotite clot and hornfelsic texture in a metamorphosed acid voleanie rock adjacent to the adamellite contact, 33655. 45. SEDIMENTATION IN JERVIS BAY ee Gay AanOR: Department of Geology, Australian National University (Communicated by Dr. K. A. W. Crook) [Accepted for publication 23rd June 1971] Synopsis Jervis Bay is underlain by a lenticular sand body occupying a river valley cut in Permian sandstones and siltstones. The sediment covers an area of 84km.? with an average thickness of 20m. Two zones are evident, a low energy central zone consisting of a sublitharenite containing less than 85% quartz and a marginal high energy zone containing quartz arenites and sub- litharenites containing greater than 85% quartz. SAMPLE LOCALITY | MAP SYDNEY JERVIS BAY 360s 152°E Huskisson “85 "87 +89 “9 “93 Beecratt Vincentia Bay 2206 +74 78 +80 Plantation Pt. Peninsula Vincentia -42 744 746 S Beach “47 5 Tasman Sea Sf +26 -28 0) oil 233 2a : Bi i= Sailors ra 18 6 . Bowen Pe Is: = Darling Road s we Gs % fc 60 = or > ) O 0 1 2 Bherewerre — SS ee Peninsula Kilometres Fig. 1. Map showing local names referred to in the text and sample localities. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF New SoutH WaAtgES, VoL. 96, Part 4 SEDIMENTATION IN JERVIS BAY bo ite) (06) INTRODUCTION The recent marine sediments in Jervis Bay have been investigated (Taylor, 1970) and an attempt made to delineate the character of the sediments, the processes involved in sedimentation, and the history of the embayment. This was carried out by surface sampling (Fig. 1), continuous seismic profiling and a detailed examination of the hydrology, bathymetry and Quarternary geology of the bay. . REGIONAL GEOLOGY Jervis Bay is an embayment in the coastline of New South Wales approxi- mately 84 km.? in area with its entrance 6 km. east of the general line of the coast. Itis situated in a gently folded sequence of Lower Permian sublitharenites and siltstones (Rose, 1966) (Fig. 2). Permian rocks crop out over half of the coastline of the bay; the remainder is bordered by beaches and beach ridges dating back to the Pleistocene (Walker, 1967). Only one stream of any significance, Currambeen Creek, drains into the bay, and most of its sediment load is deposited before reaching the bay. Other streams deposit their load in back-swamps and lagoons around the bay. WS" é a GEOLOGY A Lh Cn —— Kilometres LEGEND [o] ca VOLCANICS? —~—” CATCHMENT BOUNDARY 7 — NSN opeRRY SHALE _®” ANTICLINE Z NOWRA SANDSTONE eS SYNCLINE = Ff ce = WANDRAWAN DIAN r-7 FAULT = SILTSTONE 5 CONJOLA FORMATION — OoDIP NO SURFICIAL GEOLOGY SHOWN Fig. 2. Catchment Geology of Jervis Bay and of streams entering the bay. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOcIETY oF NEW SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. TAYLOR 299 BATHYMETRY R.A.N. Chart AUS. 80 shows that the bottom slopes gently to 26 m. from the north, west and south, the eastern shoreline sloping more steeply (Fig. 3). The entrance to the bay reaches a maximum depth of 41 m. BATHYMETRY 8 cng ee FROM R.A.N. CHART AUS. 80 12 Kilometres CONTOURS IN METRES Fig. 3. Bathymetry of Jervis Bay. HYDROLOGY No full-scale hydrological survey has been conducted in Jervis Bay. 90°% of the total terrigenous fraction in all samples analysed). Other minerals found in minor percentages only include feldspar, kaolinite, chlorite, heavy minerals and muscovite. SEDIMENTARY HISTORY A continuous seismic reflection survey of 10 traverses (Fig. 8) using a low output ‘“ sparker”’ system with a visual display recorder, showed that Jervis Bay is an infilled river valley formed during a Pleistocene low stand of sea level (Fig. 8). The sediments deposited in these valleys have since been reworked and redistributed by at least one marine transgression. Examination of the records shows some patches of relict sediment which have been interpreted as lag-deposits of either the original fluvial sediments or sediments redistributed from an earlier marine transgression. HEAVY MINERAL ZIRCON/ PROVINCES == ES] zircon TOURMALINE EN tourmating Sy. ED epipote Kilometres _———s Kilometres Fig. 7. Heavy mineral provinces and zircon/tourmaline ratios of the surface sediments in Jervis Bay. Another source of sediment is the erosion of the seacliffs during the various interglacial high sea levels. No sediment is entering the bay from the shelf under present conditions ; however, this may not have been so during Pleistocene regressions and transgressions. The contribution of sediment from outside the bay while the bay was open at Hare Bayisunknown. A.D. Albani (pers. comm.), from seismic profiles in the Hare Bay region, confirms that the bay was at one time open to the sea at the north end also. Sediment in the bay is up to 30 m. thick in the deeper central areas, thinning to zero at the margins and over a basement high in the entrance region (Fig. 8). The thickness under the areas of beach-ridge development (e.g. Callala Beach) is unknown. Evidence of sedimentary structures is absent from both the seismic records and from grab samples. This is probably due in part to disturbance of the materials during sampling; however, in the few undisturbed samples taken few structures were apparent, owing to destruction by bioturbation. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or New SoutH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 G. TAYLOR 305 7 /AREATION OF SEISMIC TRAVERSES Kilometres BASEMENT CONTOUR 30 o\ SEDIMENT O}SiSOPACH MAP el Kilometres Veer CONTOURS IN METRES Kilometres eg ISOPACHS IN METRES Tig. 8. Maps showing the location of seismic traverses, the configuration of the solid sub- stratum and an isopach map of the unconsolidated sediments. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SourH Wates, Vou. 96, Part 4 306 SEDIMENTATION IN JERVIS BAY DISCUSSION Sedimentation in Jervis Bay forms two distinct zones, the centre and the margin. These zones of deposition are based on differences between sediments forming in them. The grain size in the marginal zone is finer than that in the centre (2-440 and 2-11 respectively). This results from the more intense reworking by wave activity in the marginal zones and the removal of silt, clay and carbonates to the central zone. The carbonate grains are significantly different in shape from the bulk of the sediment in the marginal zone and are hence unstable in this area. Thus it follows that the central zone is enriched in silt, clay and carbonates with respect to the marginal zone. As a result of the continual reworking in the marginal zone and the rejection of unstable particles, marginal sediments are better sorted (0-490 units compared to 0-69 units) than those in the central zone. The energy difference between the central and marginal zones also controls the mineralogy. Sedimentary rock fragments are broken down into their constituents, the major one being quartz. Hence quartz is more abundant in the marginal zone than in the central zone and rock fragments are more abundant in the central zone. The heavy minerals also reflect the differences in energy distributions ; the heaviest (i.e. zircon) concentrates in the high energy zones, and tourmaline and epidote in the low energy zones. In summary, the sediment distribution is controlled almost entirely by energy regimes in the bay. The only effective variable with respect to this in the bay is wave activity. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was carried out for a Master’s degree at the University of New South Wales in part under a Commonwealth Postgraduate Scholarship. The author wishes to acknowledge help, during all stages of the work, from Dr. A. N. Carter of the University of New South Wales and Dr. K. A. W. Crook of the Australian National University. References Foux, R. L., 1968.—Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks. Hemphills, Austin, Texas. , and Warp, W. C., 1957.—Brazos River: A study in the significance of grain-size parameters. J. sedim. Petrol., 27: 3-36. Rocurorp, D. J., 1951.—Studies in Australian estuaries, Hydrology. Aust. J. Mar. and Fresh- water Res., 2: 1-116. Rosz, G., 1966.—Ulladulla 1-250,000 Geological Map. New South Wales Mines Department. Taytor, G., 1970.—Sedimentation in Jervis Bay. M.Sc. thesis, Univ. N.S.W., unpubl. Watxer, R. G., 1967.—The coastal geomorphology of the Jervis Bay Area. M.Sc. thesis, A.N.U. unpubl. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or NEw SoutH WALEs, VoL. 96, Part 4 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING dlst March 1971 Mr. L. A. 8. Johnson, President, in the chair. Minutes of the last Ordinary General Meeting (25th November 1970) and of the Special General Meeting (25th November 1970) were taken as read and confirmed. Suggestions for 1971 Programme: The Chairman invited comments and suggestions from members for meetings during 1971. After discussion, it was resolved that these would be passed on to the incoming Programme Committee for consideration. It was also resolved to recommend that Council consider abolishing the printed abstract of Proceedings, and that Council investigate the possibility of circulating brief quarterly summaries of Council activities. Council subsequently resolved to abolish printing the Abstract and substitute a roneoed circular instead. Paper read (by title only, with an opportunity for discussion at the next Ordinary General Meeting) : The Trichomes of the Goodeniaceae. By R. C. Carolin. ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 28th April 1971 Held in the Committee Room, Institution of Engineers, Science House. Mr. L. A. 8. Johnson, President, in the chair. Minutes of the last Ordinary Meeting (31st March 1971) were read and confirmed. Announcements : The Secretary announced that the First International Congress of Systematic and Evolutionary Biology would be held at the University of Colorado, Boulder, U.S.A., in August 1973. Details could be obtained from the Secretary on request. The President announced with great regret the death of Professor H. N. Barker on 16th April 1971. Professor Barber had been a Life Member of the Society since 1950. Papers read (by title only) : Australian sea stars of the genus Patiriella (Asteroidea, Astirinidae). By A. J. Dartnall. A sea star of genus Ctenodiscus from Tasmania. By A. J. Dartnall. Late Devonian conodonts from the Luton Formation, northern New South Wales. By G. M. Philip and J. H. Jackson. Paper taken as read at the March Ordinary General Meeting (with an opportunity fer discussion at the April Ordinary General Meeting) : The Trichomes of the Goodeniaceae. By R. C. Carolin. Papers read: 1. The genus Nwunciella Roewer (Opiliones, Laniatores) with description of a new species from Kangaroo Island, South Australia. By G.S. Hunt. 2. The reptiles of Lord Howe Island. By H. G. Cogger. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society or New SoutH WateEs, Vou. 96, Part 4 308 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 30th June 1971 Held in the Committee Rooms, Institution of Engineers, Science House, at 7.30 p.m. Dr. L. A. S. Johnson, President, in the chair. Announcements : The President announced the conditions adopted by the Council of the Royal Society of N.S.W. for the award of the Walter Burfitt Prize. The President read a statement by the Minister for the Department of the Vice-President of the Executive Council regarding the formation of the Scientific and Technological Information Services Enquiry Committee. The following meetings of the Royal Society of N.S.W. were announced : 7th July, at 7.45. (An address on 150 years of scientific associations. The Royal Society is celebrating its 150th anniversary.) 4th August, at 7.45. An address by Colonel Magee, Sydney Cove Re- development Authority. Papers read : A bacterial leaf spot of zinnia in New South Wales. By A. L. Bertus and A. C. Hayward. An undescribed species of Ustilago on Cyperus lucidus R.Br. in Australia with comments on Robert Brown’s type collection of C. lucidus. By J. Walker. Shoot blight of Hucalyptus spp. caused by an undescribed species of Ramularia. By J. Walker and A. L. Bertus. Address : An address was given by Dr. J. 8S. Beard, Director, Royal Botanic Gardens, on ‘‘ New light on some aspects of geomorphology in Western Australia afforded by vegetation mapping’. ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 28th July 1971 Held in the Committee Rooms, Institution of Engineers, Science House, at 7.30 p.m. Dr. L. A. 8S. Johnson, President, in the chair. Announcements : The President announced that there would be a Field Day on 19th September 1971. Members would be notified later of further details. This would replace the ordinary monthly meeting for September. Papers read: The following papers were read by title only: New Species of Lophopetalum (Celastraceae), a genus new for Australia. By N. Byrnes. The food and feeding of winter whiting (Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard) in Moreton Bay. By John L. Maclean. Paper read: The early history and relationship of the New Guinea highland dog (Canis hallstromi). By KE. LeG. Troughton. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SociETY or NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS 309 Address : An address was given by Mr. 8. Jacobs, Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney, entitled ‘‘ New Approaches to Grass Systematics ”’. ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 19th September 1971 A Field Day Excursion to Dharug National Park replaced the Ordinary General Meeting in September. ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 27th October 1971 Held in the Committee Room of the Institution of Engineers, Science House, Sydney, on Wednesday, 27th October 1971, at 7.30 p.m. Dr. L. A. 8. Johnson, President, in the chair. Announcements : The President announced the establishment of the Keith Hindwood Memorial Fund. Although the form of a memorial would depend on the amount of money donated, it was hoped that a Bird Studies Centre might be established. This, if it developed along lines of similar institutes abroad, would be available to the amateur student, a place where he could have access to a scientific library, record material, and which would be a nerve centre to concentrate and stimulate work by amateurs. Should enough money be raised, it might be possible to buy headquarters and pay for modest staffing, with options for future growth, although voluntary staff could be used at the beginning. The Trustees of the Australian Museum had generously consented to set up this Memorial Fund, and this meant all donations would be tax-deductible, cheques to be made payable to the Australian Museum Keith Hindwood Memorial Fund. Papers read: Australasian Ceratopogonidae. Part XV. The genus Alluwaudomyia Kieffer in Australia and New Guinea. By M. L. Debenham. Papers read by title only: The reaction of seedlings of Crtrus spp. and related genera to Phytophthora citrophthora. By P. Broadbent, L. R. Fraser and Y. Waterworth. Systematic position of the genera Triodia R.Br. and Plectrachne Henr. (Gramineae). By 8S. Jacobs. Aphids of Papua and New Guinea: An annotated check list. By K. P. Lamb. The phenology of species common to three semi-arid grasslands. By O. B. Williams. Symposium : A symposium was given by Mr. G. P. Whitley, Mr. G. N. Baur and Dr. F. J. McDonald on ‘“ The Effect of Man on Australian Fauna and Flora”. The President thanked the participating speakers and called for a short discussion period. PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SocrETY oF NEw SoutH WALES, VoL. 96, Part 4 310 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING 24th November 1971 Held at the Australian Museum, Sydney, at 7.30 p.m. Professor N. G. Stephenson, Vice-President, in the chair. Business : Professor Stephenson outlined the developments of the past year and gave reasons for calling a special General Meeting to discuss the need to widen the Society’s Act of Incorporation. He then called on Dr. Vickery, the Honorary Treasurer, to explain the proposed changes in detail. After discussion, the meeting resolved unanimously to endorse the action taken by Council to widen the Society’s powers. The meeting closed at 8.25 p.m. ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING 24th November 1971 Held at the Australian Museum, Sydney, on Wednesday, 24th November 1971, at 3.30 p.m. Professor N. G. Stephenson, Vice-President, in the chair. Announcements : The Chairman welcomed Mr. H. J. deS. Disney and Dr. C. N. Smithers, both new members, to their first General Meeting. Myall Lakes Committee. The Chairman drew the attention of members to a request for help from the Committee to support the report of the State Planning Authority regarding leases in the Myall Lakes area; details were available from the Secretary. A letter from the “Stop Duffy’s Forest Airport’? Committee asking for support in opposing the airport scheme was read to the meeting. Papers read (by title only): 1. Petrology and Stratigraphy of the Brayton District, New South Wales. By Re Y. O'Reilly. . Check List of Northern Territory Plants. By G. M. Chippendale. eI Organic Deposits on Foreshore at North Deewhy. By A. R. H. Martin. 4. A Brachyopid Labyrinthodont from the Lower Trias of Queensland. By A. Howie. 5. Sedimentation in Jervis Bay. By G. Taylor. NOTES AND EXHIBITS Mr. D. J. McGillivray spoke on Grevillea rosmarinifolia re-discovered in Scotland. This species was discovered by Allan Cunningham on the banks of the Cox’s River in 1822. Since that time it has not been recorded trom its native habitat, nor known from cultivation in Australia. Several closely related species are known from New South Wales and Victoria. Within a few years of its discovery Grevillea rosmarinifolia was in cultivation and flowering in England. It was illustrated in Robert Sweet’s ‘* Flora Australasica’’ in 1828, and also in Curtis’s Botanical Magazine in 1872. In 1969 aplant of this species was observed by the speaker growing in the open beside a building in the Edinburgh Botanic Garden. Although it was not in flower and was labelled Grevillea lanata (an error for G. lanigera), it showed a close resem- blance to my recollection of the type specimen seen at the Herbarium, Royal Botanic PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN Society oF NEw SoutH WALES, Vou. 96, Part 4 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS oul Gardens, Kew. Cuttings were sent from Edinburgh to the Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney, and now a number of thriving plants are in cultivation in Sydney. Dr. A. Ritchie and Dr. Joan Beattie exhibited a fossil vertebrate collected from the rock platform on the northern side of Long Reef immediately to the east of the area known as ‘“‘ The Basin” in August this year. The horizon in which the specimen occurred was near the top of the Collaroy Claystone, Narrabeen Group (Triassic). The bones included a femur (about 10 inches long), scapula, rib and other fragments and have been provisionally identified as amphibian (labyrinthodont) ; their size indicates that the individual was some 12 to 14 feet in length. Dr. Anne Howie, who has been working on faunas from the Rewan Formation (of equivalent age) of the Bowen Basin, has recently examined this specimen and it is hoped that she will, on further examination, find the material sufficient for identification. Mr. H. J. de S. Disney, Curator of Birds at the Australian Museum, showed a map and aerial photograph of Lord Howe Island and also study skins of the Flightless Lord Howe Island Woodhen, Tricholimnas sylvestris, with a skin of a New Zealand Weka, Gallirallus australis. Also exhibited was the skeleton of a Woodhen to show the tiny sternum, not much bigger than that of the now extinct Doctor Bird or Vinous-tinted Blackbird, Turdus vinitinctus (also on display). Mr. Disney said he first visited the island and Mt. Gower in November 1969 with Dr. Smithers, and found that the Woodhens appeared to be present only in very small numbers on top of the mountain. As part of a general survey of the flora and fauna of the island a more intense investigation was started in February of this year. Birds were caught and colour-banded ; on subsequent visits their movements were recorded. From these records, as shown on a map of the plateau, there are apparently only 20 birds occupying 10 territories. The birds originally were found everywhere on the island. In 1914 they were still common in Erskine Valley Little Slope and on Mt. Lidgbird. In 1936 some were still present in Erskine Valley, but they are now confined to the top of Mt. Gower. In January 1972 it is hoped that data on breeding success will be obtained ; however, there 1s some indication that the summit does not provide an optimum habitat. The decline in the species may be the result of habitat disturbance by goats and pigs, or by predation by rats (which were introduced in 1918) or cats. The habits of these birds are similar in many respects to those of the Weka of New Zealand. Little is known of their breeding habits, but some have been recorded nesting in petrel burrows. From the archives of the Australian Museum Mr. G. P. Whitley exhibited a photographic portrait of Dr. Haynes Gibbes Alleyne (1815 ?-1882), one of the founders of the Linnean Society of New South Wales. Dr. Cogger exhibited a living pair of Fijian Iguanas (Brachylophus fasciatus) from the island of Kadavu. These lizards are now uncommon in Fiji and are regarded as an endangered species. als} New Guinea Highland Dee (Canis hallstromi), the early history and relationships aes $0 oo) (OB Northern Territory Plants, check list .. 207 Notes and Exhibits: Cogger, H. G.—Fijian Iguanas .. 311 Disney, H. J. de 8.—Flightless Lord Howe Island Woodhen . 311 McGillivray, D. J.—Grevillea ros- marinifolia re-discovered in Scotland : ar .. 310 Ritchie, A., and Beattie, Joan— Fossil vertebrate from Long Reef, Collaroy Claystone do ail INDEX Notes and Exhibits—continued Page Smithers, C. N.—Butterflies from Norfolk Island S43 oc lil Whitley, G. P.—Dr. ee Gibbs Alleyne .. . 311 Notes and instructions for authors .. 331 g. Nunciella Roewer (Opiliones, Lania- tores) with description of a new species from Kangaroo Island, South Australia me ye OS O’Reilly, Suzanne Y., Petrology and stratigraphy of the Brayton District, New South Wales .. 282 g. Patiriella (Asteroidea, aes) Australian sea stars.. 66 do BY) Petrology and stratigraphy of the Brayton District, New South Wales 282 Plates, List of Philip, G. M., and Jackson, J. H., Late Devonian Conodonts Prom the Luton Formation, northern New South Wales .. Be . 66 Phytophthora Fie ie: reaction of seedlings of Citrus SEP: and related genera to so de) Reptiles of Lord Howe Island .. 50 2B Report on the Affairs of the Society 1 Science Centre .. os ee 50 Ah 8 Sea Star of Genus Ctenodiscus from Tasmania — oe op so OW 323 Page Sedimentation in Jervis Bay f Shoot Blight of Hucalyptus spp. caused by an _ undescribed Ponge of Ramularia Tasmania, a Sea Star of genus Cionadiseis Taylor, G., Sedimentation Bay . 5 oe 2% : Triodia R.Br. and Plectrachne Henr. (Gramineae), systematic position of Troughton, Ellis, The early history and relationships of the New Guinea Highland Dog (Canis hallstrom1) Ustilago on Cyperus lucidus R.Br. in Australia, an undescribed species of Walker, J., An undescribed species of Ustilago on Cyperus lucidus R.Br. in Australia. With Robert Brown’s type collection of C. lucidus. . Walker, J., and Bertus, A. L., Shoot Blight of Hucalyptus spp. caused by an undescribed species of Ramularia Waterworth, Y., see Broadbent, P., Fraser, L. R., and Waterworth, Y. Williams, O. B., Phenology of species common to three semi-arid ies lands in Jervis Winter Whiting (Szllago Gan ques and Gaimard) in Moreton Bay, food and feeding oe : Zinnia in New South Wales, a Bacterial Leaf Spot .. ye ee a . 297 108 50 5 YY 175 93 99 99 108 . 193 87 81 ‘ j 2 Ap ! Pe ns 7 a = - @ A ‘ A aie Z LAL ws eee fot a iv Y ay j ! . 2 2 a : P ’ 4 ee fs s ; fet #), C * ; ei 7) ee e *. = ' pa iy a “s "ea i275 HOW ET Ore eno WE) teRG : 2 ; a it egy" : a te MPI Nf ) sy in WH J Carre : fs Le ‘ frp ded servants ; ; i ‘ : : : i ‘ SOR Serem ehh att dob Coe . : ' ‘ 3 ( Set fas shh alone F , 3 i / Lt Oghgh hgh gh Lie) é S } ff ; DP geben po nega i ; ms wet cea it we Bove er ‘ . : : Pde On be et . : ; c a rind atin BP 1 ; ; 5 Johicaus : ans tlah ahh hier yet G : sea Beied anette OAs ‘ ob ae eet h 4 : ! ON pao ees ote 1 ; toed be a1 . ee { 2 Aa toudeds bw FG re ‘ on aa Dalat aN sheets jee eas kt hee 3 HE 5 Ba ye Bee . : Gre a : : : we : ; : / : Payee tary ten df Snes Beak ohana steed : . : ' : ; Ain aAtahs Oa ide tm by wala Whisnant ‘ omnes : 2 eb fist EN'OSS Shep ee en dealt dine aS Sa meliganh 8 3 fieueis Senne , Wis reamare Aiden eating Oe OLE wag AV A teieslb ofr eR ts Asbraie Lea tae Nabire ainiiyy basse ihn Eee ru Wt ' is soevy < ue Pat Beri i oan t au es E . wd ; . : : : a5 : saeae ante mated een sve RT we Bt ; : ‘ rT tes Gactt Mek Op Seshagbr guile dh : : : : 2 nti ae htt mace 4 Gane yentdy : SHE Rai sate ‘ tau ‘ Moet 9 : ony Uae RCRA res i Av aggieyes ae : tice 5 taecerdnus a Cie ye ie ona : iets vi 3 : You teens Be dap vs ha vl : : (Neer ee eae age Ae ei eas “ : ive : J seerlqn thi Wits 3 Pitesne BAG ah eg uh ‘ i : aye rann ey nes ynang buena tone barpes Pty DPR SPN Tt tal Came Sdhdeta s i ‘ 2 a PO Pete hike Sane ed mis at ‘ : SYA EA CC bMeUiee ita tartasny teehing NOT en tay beer ea ed bie vant ; . f Prererceren tbe tut er SN hs Rite ee orig CrP ; : ita) 4 Paro th eas : hav hy hack ‘ eae $ ar) are é tart gah Vad Wied Hy Urtags at \ ay ' : SOEs one ParnsyS ’ ‘ rads ‘ Bw oe : Re ee PCa Aw ana aK fad mead - ct ' ; reeds